THE SYNTAX AND IDIOMS OF
HINDUSTANI
A MANUAL OF THE LANGUAGE
CONSISTING OF
PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR, READING,
AND TRANSLATION, WITH NOTES AND
DIRECTIONS AND VOCABULARIES
M. KEMPSON, M.A.
FORMEHLY SCHOLAR OF GONVILLE AND CAIUS, CAMBRIDGE
DIRECTOR OF ITBI.IC INSTRUCTION, N.W. PROVINCES OF INDIA, 1862-1878
FELIX>W (IF THE CALCUTTA UNIVERSITY
SOMETIME PROFESSOR OF HINDUSTANI AT THK ROYAL STAFF COLLEGE
Scribendi recte sapere est et principium etfons. — Hor.
REPRINT OF THE SECOND (ENLARGED) EDITION OF 1893
LONDON
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON
7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, LTJDOATE HILL, E.C.
1912
(All Rights resei-vea
STEPHEN' AUSTIN AND SONS, LIMITKI),
PRINTERS, HERTFOKD.
PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION.
THIS work is intended to meet the want of an Introduc-
tory Treatise for beginners, in a form suited to the
previous training of educated Englishmen, and, in accord
with the views expressed in a recent Manifesto of the
Imperial Institute, aims at the promotion of a scholarly
and appreciative cultivation of the most important of the
Indian Vernaculars ah initio.
The method adopted is that of the best books of the
kind now used in our Public Schools, and may be shortly
described as a compendious course of Syntax and Idioms,
with Model Exercises in application step by step. Each
Exercise in its turn explains and illustrates some new
point or points of Usage, till the subject is exhausted, and
a fairly complete view of the quality and resources of the
l:in^nago placed before the student. The application of
tin- ordinary principles of clause-an.-ilysis to the diction
of Hindustani, which occupies the Second Part of the
Kxerfises, is indispensable to the formation of a correct
and idiomatic style, whether in speaking or writing.
The Moilel Sentences are taken from the best modern
writers, chiefly from the works of Maulavi Nazir Ahmed,
the author of the Taulat (see note on p. 140 below), and
IV
PREFACE.
from the Letters of the late Mirza Nausha (Galib), both
Dehli men and of undisputed authority in native literary
circles. Use has also been made of the generally excellent
Urdu version of part of the Alf-Laila, which was published
in Lucknow a few years before the Annexation.
Thus, in addition to their more immediate function, the
Hindustani Sentences serve as a Delectus or Introductory
Reader. To give them in lithograph in the written cha-
racter, which alone is of practical value, was unfortunately
an impossible undertaking in this country ; but they may
be published separately in this form hereafter if the
demand arises.
Part III. contains a series of Lessons in Translation,
which are drawn up on the principle that the simplest and
shortest way to teach this kind of work is to show how it
is done ; and as there is no part of his preparatory course
in which the learner needs more and usually receives less
help, no apology is made for the fulness of the instructions.
M. K.
Dley, 1890.
PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION,
As regards Grammar, the change of method which under-
lies the teaching of this work has been well received. At
the suggestion of friends, an Introductory Chapter has
been prefixed to Part I ; and the addition of sundry
details to the grammatical commentary has completed
the equipment of the Volume as an independent and
sufficient aid to the acquisition of an accurate and
idiomatic command of Hindustani, colloquial and literary.
A better type-fount, of similar cast to that used in the
Service Examinations of this country, has been found for
the Reading Exercises, and vowel signs have been more
freely used.
Also, words inadvertently omitted in Vocab. No. 2 have
been supplied.
M. K.
Ulcy, 1803.
ANALYTICAL STATEMENT OF CONTENTS,
IN THE ORDER OF SECTIONS.
INTRODUCTORY.
1. The Alphabet — 2. Variations in the form of letters, as initial,
medial, and final.— 3. The recognition of Hindi, Persian,and Arabic
words used in Hindustani. — 4. Vowel sounds and their repre-
sentation.— 5. Orthographical signs, viz. : Hamza, TasJidid,
Madda, Sukun.
PART I.— THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
EXERCISE I.
I. The Substantive verb. — 2 . Tense nomenclature. — 3. Summary
Rules for the determination of the Gender of Noun*.
EXERCISE II.
0t Order of the words in a simple sentence.— 9. Particles of
Inference and Emphasis.
EXERCISE III.
1 4-. Formation of Plurals. — (5. Persian and Arabic Plural*. —
|5. Plurality of Subjects, how treat i-.l. — 17. Order of tho
1'crsons.
VI 11 CONTENTS.
EXERCISE IV.
22. Nouns and Pronouns in the construct state, before an Affix. —
23~26. Izufat and its signs and uses.
EXERCISE V.
3 1 . Postpositional Verbals and sign of izafat. — 3 2 . Mode of
expressing "have". — 33. Nouns in apposition.
EXERCISE VI.
38. Combination of Substantive verb with nouns, effective as
intransitive Compound verbs. — 39. The base form of the
Substantive verb in combination with the intransitives jdnd.
'hid, rahnd, etc. — 40. K°> the sign of Remote Object. 41.
Another mode of expressing "have."- — 42. -&'o, as marking
;i point of Time. — 43. Usage of the Reflexive Pronoun apnd,
EXERCISE VII.
48. The verbal noun Infinitive or Gerund in nd. — 49. Noun
of Agency. — 50. The Locative affixes men, par, tak. — 52
(15). Note on the use of he, instead of ko, with intransitives.
EXERCISE VIII.
55. The Gerund as a Jussive. — 56. With negative particle as a
strong form of denial or negation. — 57. The Separative affix
ye. — 58. Comparison of Adjectives. — 59. The affix sd of
-imilitude or comparison.
EXERCISE IX.
64. Combination of the transitive karnd with nouns, effective as
transitive Compound verbs. — 65. K°> as a sign of the Near
Object of a transitive verb ; rules for use. — 66. The I'a-t
Conjunctive Pirti-iple, or Past Defective: its usage — 67.
The Aorist.
CONTENTS. ix
EXERCISE X.
72. Causal Verbs and their formation. — 73. Intensive Compound
Verbs. — 74-. Potentials and Completives. — 75. Inceptive,
Acquisitive, and Permissive Verbal Compounds.
EXEKCISE XL
80. He, the sign of the Agent. — 31. Excepted quasi-transitives.
82. The Six Past Tenses in connection with which ne
marks the Agent. — 83. Formation of the Past or Perfect
Participle.
EXERCISE XII.
88. Causal verbals in t combined with dend (Intransitive):
the Compounds sdth cfena, chal-dena, ho-lend (also Intran-
sitive).— 89. Secondary Forms of the Imperative. — 90.
The Verbal chdhi'e.
USAGE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLES.
EXERCISE XIII.
95. The Ism-fd'il and Ism-maf'Al. — 96. Substantival usage.
EXERCISE XIV.
101. Adjectival usage (1), Attributive (2), Predicative.
EXERCISE XV.
106. Adverbial usage: construct form with suppression of Post-
position men. — 107 (!)• Predicative of the Agent of a Transitive
Verb. — (2). Predicative of the Object with *o.--|08. With
an Object of its own.
X CONTENTS.
EXERCISE XVI.
113. "Csage of Participles in connection with Time and its lies sure-
ment. — ||5 (15). The first bit of Hindustani recorded br
an Englishman.
EXERCISE XVII.
| J8. The Imperfect Participle in combination -with the tenses of
junu, or rahnd, with effect as a Progressive : the combination
jdid-ratnid. — ||9. The Perfect Participle in combination
with the Tenses of jdnd, as a "Passive Voice" : comparatively
•infrequent in Hindustani. — (20. The sign of the object, Jco,
occasionally used in this construction : Impersonal Passives. — 1 2 I .
Perfect Participles of intransitive verbs of motion in combination
\\i\\\jdnd and and.
EXERCISE XVIII.
J26. '^he Perfect Participle in combination •with the Tenses of
karnn, with effect as a Continuative Compound Verb infran-
sitire: (27. ^n "(-mbination with chahnd, as a Desiderative.
also intransitive. — 128. The Perfect Participle (construct
state) in combination with jdnd or rahna. with cfTect as a Con-
tinuative : 129 ^u combination with dend or ddlna, z? a
Decisive.
CONTENTS. li
PART II.— THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
I. — SUBORDINATE CLAUSES.
EXERCISE XIX.
134-135 (!)• Relative Clauses, and the Relatives jo, jitna,
jaisd : qualitative ki. 136. Correlatives.
EXERCISE XX.
|4-| (2). Predica4 ive Clauses and connective Particles. — 14-2.
Uniform use of the oratio recta, with illustrations.
EXERCISE XXI.
14-7 (3). Adverbial Clauses, viz. : (48 (<*) Temporal, (6) Local,
(c) Modal clauses, and the Particles which introduce them.
14-9. Alternative phrtses : correlative terms.
EXERCISE XXII. .
1 5 4-. Adrerbial Clauses continued, viz. : 155 (^) Final cl;:
and Particles used. — 156 (e) Causal clauses, and introductory
Particles, etc.
EXERCISE XXII I.
161. Adverbial Clauses continued viz.: (/) Conditional: Protaiis
and Apodosis and Particles introductory. — (62. Conditions
which may be or may have been realised : The Dubious '1\
Historic Tenses employed, if the realisation of the condition
is assumed.— 163. Conversion of Conditional clauses into
Predicative and Optative clauses.
EXERCISE XXIV.
168. Conditions which might have been, but were not, realised:
formation of the Past Conditional Tense : three forms of the
Tense : Footnote as to the proper place of this Tense in the
Verb-scheme. — 169. Retention of Past Imperfect in apodosis.
— 170. Conversion of Conditional clauses into Predicative and
Optative clauses.
EXERCISE XXV.
175. Concessional Clauses a form of the Conditional : The Particles
employed in protasis and apodosis : Turning of the phrase
" No matter how "
II. — CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES.
EXERCISE XXVI.
180 181. Co-oi'dinate clauses and their classification.
(1) Appositive or Collateral clauses characteristic of Hindustani.
EXERCISE XXVII.
186 (2)- Adjunctive Clauses ; the Conjunction aur ; used to denote
simultaneity and contrast : other Connectives.
EXERCISE XXVIII.
191 (3) Alternative clauses, and Particles employed: yd in the
sense of " instead " : alternative Conjunctions : use of kyd.
— 192. Negative alternation: idiomatic omission of first
negative : mode of expressing ' else.'
EXERCISE XXIX.
197 (4)- Adversative clauses, and Disjunctives in use: shmles of
difference in meaning.
COiNTENTS. Xlll
PART III.— SELECTED PASSAGES FUR TRANSLA-
TION INTO HINDUSTANI.
INTE OD UCTOR Y K.EMA EKS.
(. Diiliculty of the subject. — 2. The origin of the Urdu or
Hindustani Language. — 3 • Its simplicity and directness. —
4-. The Semitic aftergrowth. — 5t Occasional ceremoniousness
of phraseology. — fi. Other literary characteristics. Note on
the value of the Taitbat of M. ITazir Ahmed. 7. Suggestions
for guidance in translation from English into Hindustani.
SECTION I.
Fables and Apologues for translation into Hindustani. — Fourteen
pieces, with directions.
SECTION II.
Easy Naratives from Indian History. — Fourteen pieces, with direc-
tions for translation.
SECTION III.
Miscellaneous pieces, eighteen in number, from Lawrence, Elphinstone,
and Malcolm, with directions for translation.
SECTION IV.
H.M.'s Proclamation (1858), with directions for translation.
XIV CONTENTS.
APPENDIX A.
Conspectus of Arabic Verbal Forms current in Hindustani, -with
explanation in detail of those which are derived from "weak"
roots. Persian and Arabic Plurals current in Hindustani, with
classification of the latter .
APPENDIX B.
The Tense System of the Hindustani Verb. (See Part I, para. 2,
and Note on p. 114.)
APPENDIX C.
On the UPS of the RoTnan character in Transliteration. Three chief
difllculties : —
(1). — The representation of vowel sounds.
(2). — The differentiation of certain consonants.
(3). — The representation of the letter 'ain.
.Xote on the pronunciation of the letters 'ain and gain.
APPENDIX D.
Cardinal Numbers from one to a hundred.
VOCABULARY No. |.
Hindustani-English :— Words used in the Reading Lessons of
Parts I, II.
VOCABULARY No. 2.
English-Hindustani : — Words used in the Translation Exercises of
Parts I, II, III.
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
INTRODUCTORY.
1. THE ALPHABET.
No.
Letter.
Name.
Trans-
literation.
No.
Letter.
Name.
Trans-
literation.
1
\
alif
...
19
A
shin
sh
2
C_j
be
b
20
^
sdd
S
3
U_>
pe
P
21
u*
zdd
z
4
^
te
t
22
\)
toe
t
5
cL,
ta
t
23
10
zoe
z
G
i±j
se
S
24
t
'•ain
t
7
C
jim
j
25
^
gain
g
8
(I
che
oh
26
uJ
^
f
9
C
he
h
27
J
qdf
q
10
t
khe
kh
28
hJ
Mf
k
11
j
ddl
d
29
t_f
g&f
g
12
5
da
d
30
J
Idm
i
13
j
z&l
z
31
r
mim
in
14
J
re
r
32
u>
nun
D
15
j
ra
r
33
.
miv
vi or v
1C
j
ze
z
34
i
he
h
17
A
V>
zlie
zh
35
0
ye
y
18
U«
sin
8
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
2. In script and type both, all the above letters are
joinable with a preceding letter ; and, except in the case
of \ . and of letters of the form j , , are joinable with a
following letter also, in most cases by the removal of the
curved stroke in which they terminate in the detached
form.
The following table shows this for type. (Read from
right to left.)
Final.
Medial. I Initial. Detached Form
'ttt
(J"
A A A A A
lik
J J J J J
J
C. tl <L el
It
J
f
1NTRODUCTOEY. 3
Remark. The ' transliteration ' column in the first
table shows what may be called the current literary mode
of 'romanising' the various forms for tbe consonants
t, s, z, etc., which are included in the composition of the
Hindustani Alphabet ; but, so far as pronunciation is
concerned, there is no necessity for this kind of dif-
ferentiation.*
3. In the Hindustani Alphabet twenty-eight of the
letters are pure Arabic. Of the remaining seven, Nos.
3, 8, 17, 29 are adaptations of the form in each case
immediately preceding to denote variations in sound
required for the Persian language, when the Arabic
character was adopted. In much the same way, Nos. 5,
12, 15 transliterate the peculiar Hindi cerebrals for
which it was necessary to find a place in the Hindustani
Alphabet. In script, the delay caused by the four dots
placed over each of these three letters is lessened by
the adoption of a form resembling the letter toe, which
includes the dots in a single stroke of the pen.
As a rule, the ten letters 6, 9, 13, 20-25, and 27, are
not used in the transliteration of Hindi words current in
Hindustani. They occur in Arabic and Persi- Arabic words
only.
* Cliodzko says : — DCS nuances d'articulation qui, en arabe, dis-
tingueut quelques lettres lea unes des autres, di>p:iniissent dans la
bouche des Persans. Ainsi, les lettres d_J et t _ i* t / w ^ __
J • ..a i» — se prouoncent indiflercminent conime le t fni:
lo * francais initial, ot comme le » francais entre deux voyelles, on
i-onnne le z slave. He accordingly transliterates the letters of each
group by one and the same letter. See App. C.
1*
4 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
These pailiculars and the inferences to be drawn from
them are important, for a first step to scholarship in
Hindustani is ability to distinguish between the various
constituents of the language. Certain letters and
combinations of letters are pecular to Hindi, Persian,
and Arabic respectively, so that the words in which they
occur reveal their own origin.
4. VOWEL SOUNDS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION.
Table.
Examp'es.
Sound and Transliteration.
Vowels
(initial).
s > s
,.t^sjJ^ anjuman
w •
a : as a in abroad, or u in w/j
i
(0»3 J ^\ in dinon
?
•J.I urdii
i : as i in iwre
M : as u in «»c/, Germ.
1
^
i
,JO> <_j 1 die hain
d : as d in dwe, Fr.
T = \\
i}A-'l fohwar
£ : as 2 in C/e, Fr. *j
IM^* *•' 1 €l I
f
e : as e in efr-e, r r. J
°'
y j\ Upar
ti : as oii in outre, Fr. "|
/
^j\ 6ld
f
6 : as o in open
^
WJ 1 disd
aii \ as rti in ctisttf
^-i
J$j\ auldd
an : as aw in a?;/, Germ.
y
Tlie first three entries in the table (right hand column)
are short sounds common to the Hindi, Persian and
IXTRODDCTORY. S
Arabic tongues. (As to their occasional modiGcation see
App. C.) They are represented in the Arabic way by
the signs called fatha, kasra, zamma (or zalar, zer, pesh in
Persian), with silent alif as a prop.
The next three entries are the same sounds prolonged
by the addition of the semi-vowels alif, ye, wdv, homo-
geneous respectively \\ithfatha, kasra, zamma.*
The remaining two are diphthongs in which fatha is
followed by ye and icdv.
These five long sounds are also common to Hindi,
Persian and Arabic.
The Hindi language, however, uses two other exten-
sions of i and «, viz., e and 6, which are occasionally
met with in Persian also, and these are represented IK
Hindustani in the same way as i and u. In reading, this
double use of ye and u-dv is the chief difficulty which
meets the beginner.f
When these ten vowel sounds are not initial — in other
words, when they vocalise the consonant which precedes
them, the adventitious alif, being no longer necessary, is
withdrawn. Thus, with the consonant re, we have, read-
ing from the right : —
f ? *
| ro or ru jj | re or ri ^ \ rd \ | ru , | ri j \ ra .
ran )j \ rai ^j
* In archaic forms of Arabic writing, the vowels are represented by
alif, ye, wdo alone, rule or accent determining in each case the length
of tone.
t The use of <=_ instead of t_> for & final is a great convenience.
Native scribes use whichever form best suits their idea of symmetry
in relation to the adjoining letters, or tho linear space at their
command.
In the following pages o and e will be used instead of <J and <;, where
tr.mslitenition is resorted to.
G EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
in the fourth of which it -will be noticed that the hori-
zontal alif has disappeared.
The examples given in the table will be found to
illustrate the whole of the ten vowel sounds, initial or
otherwise.
The student will find that the vowel signs fatlm, kasra,
zamma are seldom or never used in script, as they are
exceedingly troublesome to write, and bat rarely in print.
Observation and the use of the dictionary will soon
enable him to dispense with them.
5. ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIHNS OCCASIONALLY USED IN
HINDUSTANI.
XG ^
(1) 2'^jj) hamza, an Arabic term, which technically
signifies the ' effort' of uttering a vowel sound ai the
beginning of a syllable, and is represented by the
upper part of the letter c , the enunciation of which, in
combination with a vowel sotmd, demands a peculiar effort.
In strict accuracy, therefore, hamza should be written
over each of the initial alifs in the table above ; and often
is so written in Arabic, though not in Hindustani ;
moreover, when these same vowel sounds follow, in the
same word, a syllable which ends with a vowel, the rule
is to retain the hamza and drop the alif, or, when the
vowel indicated is liasra, to change the alif into ye, written
without the subscript dots. Thus the dissyllable jjLs
which fully written would be Jul^S reads dd'ud, and *jlj >
*• | •• I ..
for |*1 w» reads qaim. Were this word written +-\' i with
the subscript dots of ye retained, the reading would be
1X1UODUCTOP.V. /
qdyim. Similarly *V.'<J' is written *V°u • If the first
syllable ends in war, and the vowel of the second is fatha,
both alif and hamza are written, as in .$•*) . These words
are chosen because they, and others like them, arc current
in HiL'dostani.
Now it is in accordance with the principles above
explained that hamza appears in the transliteration of
Hindi words into the Hindustani character, that is to say,
when, in the same word, a sellable which begins with a
vowel follows one which ends with a vowel, hamza is
written, more Arabico, above and between the syllables,
and when the vowel of the second is kasra, has the support
of ye without its subscript dots, e.g.,
ib pd'o, ^Uj bhd'i, ^^ ko'i, .U-j su'ar, jjuJujJ fe'zs,
_\£ ka'i, ^JLa"' barha'i, A^ lie, fj di'e, ^j*\>. cltdhi'e,
— ^i^ */• ^^
words which are in constant use, though often misunder-
stood and miswritten — See note to § 83.
The Persian use of hamza for the sign of izdfat, when
the governing word ends in ^ or o , is occasionally met
with in Hindustani. In this case hamza supports the
unwritten kasra.
The use of hamza in a certain class of Arabic verbals, of
which there are many examples in Hindustani, is ex-
plained with some detail in App. A.
C s
(2) JU.XU tasMiil, an Arabic verbal of which the
technical sense is 'duplication.' When the sign of
tashdid is placed over a consonant, it shows that this letter
is doubled in pronunciation, e.g., J^ sattar, 'sovi-uty.'
8 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
« *
(3) £j^ maddah, 'prolongation' (of sound), is a term
used to describe the horizontal nlif, as used in the pre-
sentation of the long vowel a (see table above, 4th
vowel sound).
f ?
(4) ( Y, sukuii) ' quiescence,' the sign for which is
placed over a consonant, which is not moved by a vowel, or
from which the vowel has been displaced ; as in the word
' <- s
&^c'^- jazma, which is the name for the term in this latter
sense. The use of this sign is mostly confined to words
which for some reason or other it is convenient to
delineate with nicety, such for example as the model
forms given in App. A.
I conclude this introduction by remarking that a
scholarly knowledge of Hindustani implies acquaintance
with the principles of word-building which are the dis-
tinguishing characteristic of the Arabic language. A
very large number of Arabic verbals are current both in
Hindustani and in Persian, and it is not too much to say
that a tabulation of the forms of these with examples,
provides a key, not only to their orthography, but to their
meaning and interconnection, which is invaluable. App.
A to this work explains how this may be effectively
worked out, and it will be found that the examples quoted
in the table are words used in the Exercises, and whose
frequent occurrence in colloquial language is therefore
guaranteed. The student is strongly recommended to
study the details of this tabulation from time to time, as
he proceeds from point to point of the teaching which is
now placed before him.
I.Uir I. EXERCISE
PART J.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
EXERCISE I.
\ t In this and the four succeeding Exercises parts of
the substantive verb ljj& Jiond alone are employed. The
following conspectus of the tenses of which use is made
is added for reference.
Tenses.
KiiRlish
meaning.
1st
pern.
2nd
pers.
3rd
peis.
Kemarks.
Imperative
bo
*.andj>/.
ho
Future
will be -I
\J*
hGngft
honge
hoga
hog a
hoga
honge
Final c changed to i for fern. subj.
Final e changed to lor In fo: fern. subj.
Present
am, art, is/ *•
ctc' \Pl.
hftn
hain
hai
ho
hai
hain
Hold, etc., prefixed to the persons of
tho I'resi-nt gives a fuller form, for
existence or status.
Imperfect
/*
was <
I*
tha
the
tha
the
tha
the
Pronounce the th as Ih in ant-l,ill.
Final rf and e changed as above for
fern, sir j.
1'ast
been. ( ».
was, -,
became (.pi.
hu'a
hft'e
haa
hfi'e
fcu'a
hu'e
Ditto ditto
Pw
sumptixe
will, or f i.
must, •(
have been I. pi.
hfl'fl or hfl'e, prefixed
to persons of the I mure
Ditto ditto
Past Remote
:
'i e (" >.
timr :IKO),<
hud \>fvn (. pi.
hft'ft or hG'e. pu-tlxfil to.
l>iTMiiis cf ttio Impfrivct
Ditto ditto
N. 15. —The letter n is nasal throughout.
10 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
2, The order and nomenclature of the tenses of the
Hindustani verb are given in App. B, to which the careful
attention of the learner is necessary throughout the
course. In the table there printed, the designations of
the tenses adopted by the native grammarians are com-
bined with the order usually followed by English scholars
from Gilchrist upwards, except in one important particular,
viz., the position of the Past Conditional. This point will
be adverted to when the usage of that Tense comes to be
considered.
3» Gender is a real difficulty, which arises in part from
the composite character of the language.
The following two summary Rules for the determination
of the conventional gender, or, as the French call it, the
sexe fictiv, of things inanimate will be found sufficient for
all practical purposes.
Rule I. — Hindi nouns in \ and . are generally mascu-
line; but Persian and Arabic nouns in \ and Persian
nouns in . are generally feminine.
Nouns ending in ±$ are generally feminine, whether
Hindi, Persian or Arabic.
Rule II. — Nouns ending in a consonant are generally
masculine, excepting chiefly —
(1) Arabic verbals in £ or ^--? servile, and Persian
verbals in , £ servile ; e.q.. i" i_i^. .- musibat ' rais-
Cx^
fortune,' ,£,•..> paricarish 'cherishing.'
(2) Arabic verbals of Form II., viz., JjowJ taf'U, in
•which ; and _*. are both servile. (See App. A.)
E-O-i *A!XJ ta'lim 'education.'
t "
PAI:T i. EXERCISE j. 11
(3) Hindi and Persian verbal bases, when used as
nouns; e.g., ,t< mar 'beating,' j^l umad 'advent.'
Exceptions under all these heads should be registered
by the student.
4i Translate the following sentences into English. : —
fJN.B. The Hindustani sentences are a key to the translation of
(he English sentences which follow them; and this plan holds
good throughout Parts I. and II. of this work. Study (1) the
meaning and construction of the words used ; (2) tins way in
which the thought is put in each example.]
The first use of a foreign tongue is to ask questions. This
Exercise is therefore devoted to modes of interrogation, and
practically exhausts them.
*, (3) J> ^ J ^\ (2) ^ ^ ^7 (1)
^ (5) ^ ^<jT ^.< ^ ^ (4) ^ J^ LJ/
J,> (7) U U^ ^ (6) 1<A <-b UT
^j* >U Jy* (11) ^ rb U^ (10)
1JU ». (13) lf^ ,Gi t^ liU (12) ...o
J J J ^ * * ^ Ur"
A.U -C ,j (14) U
5.
(1) Xp 'self,' 3rd p. pi., like the German Sie, is to be translated
here 'you.' This pronoun is nothing more than a courteous mvgni-
tion of respei-tultility, likf our word ' Sir.'
12 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(2) This question may be taken as addressed to a stranger of
doubtful appearance. Are is a Tocative particle, and is often used
to attract the attention of a person at a distance : as are Mohan !
or Mohan re; Abe, another vocative particle, is contemptuous, like
our ' Sirrah ' !
(3) Kaunsd, as compared with Jcaun, expects an answer in detail.
(4) Ye h and wok are plural as well as singular. The grammatical
plurals, ye and we, are discarded in modern Hindustani. The
repetition of kaun is an example of one of the commonest and most
effective idioms of the language.- The sense varies with the con-
text. Here it is distributive, and the questioner asks, not who the
men are as a whole, but individually. With this \inderstanding,
translate ' What men are these ' ?
As regards the transliteration of yeh and icoh, see App. C.
(5) But is a word of many uses, like the Latin res, which has
been called 'a blank cheque, to be filled up from the context to
the requisite amount of meaning.' The question here implies
surprise or indignation, and corresponds to our ' What is the meaning
of this' ? or ' What is this I hear' ? Pronounce kyd. So, too, Jcyiin
and kyunkar in (13), (14).
(6) This question is something of the same nature as the fore-
going— ' What 's the matter ' ? ' What 'a all this ' ? ' What has
happened ' ? etc.
(7) A customary form of greeting, like our ' How do you do ? '
or ' How do ' ? with pronoun suppressed. Ap kaise hain ? ' How
are you ' ? or Ap achchhe hain ? ' Are you well ' ? are often used.
Take care to sound the doubled letter in the last phrase.
(8) Duk-ghar or ddk-khdna ' post-house.' Observe in this sentence
the different ways in which h is printed in £ and _!,,£, according
as a vowel does or does not intervene between it and the consonant
preceding.
(9) Kitnl dur, lit. 'How much distance?' that is, 'How far?'
So, too, bari dur 'very far'; thort dur 'a little distance'; dur
nahin ' not far ' ; chunddn dur nahin ' not so very far.'
(10) Dam, the name of the smallest copper coin (native), used
in the sense of ' price,' and appropriate to small purchases. Mol
indicates the purchasing 'value,' and qimat, tie fixed 'price' of
things in general. Bahd is 'value,' and Ihuo and nirkh the market
' rate of sale.'
1'AUT I. EXERCISE I. 13
(11) Huzir hole hain 'are in attendance,' or 'on duty.' See App.
A, Form I. The participle Jiotu always refers to status (hdl).
(12) Tat/i/ir : the duplication of the middle radical in this Arabic
verbal must be fully enunciated.
(13) Thu 'was,' at some particular time. If fi fid had been used,
the emphasis of the query would have rested on magrd.
(14) Ma'lum hai 'is known'; ma'ldm hotu hai 'is in process of
being known/ hence, ' seems to be." See App. A, Form I. For the
romauization of the letter 'ain, and the effect which this letter
exercises on the adjacent rowel, see App. C.
(15) An idiomatic question which denotes surprise at a person's
presence, like our ' How do you come to be here ? ' ' Who would
have thought of seeing you here ? ' ' You here ! and why ? '
{>, Translate into Hindustani : —
[N.B. The student will probably find it convenient to write out
his version of the following sentences in the Roman character to
begin with; but correct spelling in Hindustani is a matter of
eye, not ear, to the European, and therefore the sooner and the
oftener he uses the native character the better.
The best way to form the hand is to watch a native scribe,
and to copy from a good lithograph. Books used in native
schools are the best for this purpose.]
(1) Where is the telegraph-office ? (2) How far off
is the ferry? (3) What is the toll? (4) How much
money is due ? (5) When will breakfast be ready ?
(G) What book is this? (7) Who is this woman?
(8) How did this mistake occur ? (9) Why were you
absent? (10) Why such delay? (11) Where were
you? (1-2) What river is this? (13) What is the
reason? (14) What port of arrangement is this?
(15) Who is the muster-ot'-the-house ?
14 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
7, Direction*.
(1) ' Telegraph-office ' is neatly expressed in Hindustani by
tdr-ghar ' wire-house.' See 4 . 8.
(2) Ghat 'landing-place,' is the usual term for 'ferry'; utur or
titrd ' the crossing,' is another common term, and these mean
' ferriage ' as well.
(3) 'What' is here Jcifnu, though Tcyu may be used. Mahsul is
the official term for 'toll.' The breathing sound of the Arabic h
must always be fully given. It is one of those letters which modify
the adjacent short vowel. The effect here is a hardening of the
zabar. See App. C.
(4) Rvpaya is ' money ' in general, as well as a 'rupee.'
(5) The word generally used for ' breakfast ' is hdziri, which lit.
means ' attendance,' hence, a ' muster,' or ' gathering.'
(6) Use the interrogative pronoun of 4i 3.
(8) ' Occur,' ' happen,' ' come to pass,' etc., are sufficiently trans-
la'.ed by the substantive verb.
(9) ' Absent ' gair-hdzir, that is, ' not present,' lit. ' other than
present.' Other privatives are Id and ««, used in Persian and
Arabic words ; and the Hindi a or an is occasionally met with.
In -writing the, take care to use the form of the final letter shown
in hote, 4.. II.
(10) ' Such,' itnt, not aisi, agreeing with deri or der. Omit the
verb as in English. Let the interrogative stand last.
(14) The question is depreciatory. The Persian compound
bandoba'st is an every-day word for ' arrangement." Intizdm is
' order,' or ' administration ' ; and tajwtz, tadbir, etc. are used for
' plan,' ' contrivance,' ' expedient,' etc.
EXERCISE II.
3, It Avill be noticed in the examples of the previous
Exercise that the subject stands first, then the interroga-
tive, and then the verb. In the affirmative sentence
adverbs of time, place, and mauner generally precede the
PART I. EXERCISE II. 15
subject. As a rule, Time, in whatever way it is expressed,
tukc'S precedence in the order of ideas in the Hindustani
sentence.
^, The particle to is a colloquial expletive in constant
use. It is inferential and allusive, but often so delicately
as to be untranslateable. Tt adds point to dialogue with-
out burdening the expression.
Shi 'even' or 'too,' when added to an indefinite pronoun,
corresponds to our ' at all.'
Hi italicises, as it were, the word it follows. In com-
bination with, the demonstrative pronouns, yeh and ?«o//,
the h is dropped, and their meaning becomes ' this very,'
' that same,' etc.
i Translate into English. : —
ltU3 Vb .; J* (2) y»^U ^ j* (1)
llj
(9) ^> J^-^B
f s <*s
; <_->! (10)
U- » f j (13) Uj U, (12)
1C KXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
11, Notes.
(1) Kal means 'to-morrow' or 'yesterday,' according to the con-
text. The Persian/arda 'to-morrow' is also current.
(2) The Arabic tamdshd (see App. A, Form VI.), means 'amuse-
ment ' of any kind, and the exact sense is determined by the context.
It may be translated here ' a bit of fun.' Hud iha is the Past
Remote. Translate here ' happened,' or ' came off.'
(3) The substantiye verb in the present tense is inherent in the
strong negative naliln. The sentence is the ' cooch perwanny ' of a
former generation : ' It does not matter.'
(5) The repetition of the indefinite pronoun gives the sense of
deficiency: Tcuchh kuchh 'some little ' ; Tcoi Jcoi ' some few.'
(6) Aur koi or koi aur 'some other,' 'another'; aur kuchJi or
kuchh aur ' some more.'
(7) Dusrt 'second1 is here used in the sense of 'other.' Observe
that the negative is printed in combination with the verb, a common
custom in writing.
(8) Eupaua 'rupees' is constructed as a noun of multitude with
the verb in the singular. Sau derh sau 'a hundred or a hundred
and fifty,' lit. ' a hundred, one and a half hundred." The numbers
mentioned are not really alternative, and Hindustani dispenses with
the alternative conjunction. Derh is one of several fractional numerals
with which the student cannot too soon mate himself familiar. That
he should commit to memory the cardinals from one to a hundred
goes without saying. See App. D for a list.
(10) ' There is very little time indeed left now.' Tang lit. means
<tic-ht.'
(11) Persian adjectives are indeclinable. Hot! or Jtoti Tiai, not
hai, because the idea is that the soil is unsuitable for the growth of
cotton. JTai would mean that it is not grown, though it misht
be.
(13) Koi na kot 'one or another' ; ek na ek is used in the same
sense. Kht'J'i, like luqi (7. 4), is an Arabic noun of quality in the
form of the Agent, and is indeclinable. This word is sometimes
used adverbially in the sense of ' only.' Hoga is here Presumptive,
not Future.
(14) ' Somewhere or otli^r.' Hui hogi, the Past Presumptive.
PART I. EXERCISE II. 17
(15) The Persian .'chak 'dust' is idiomatically used for Jcuchh in
the sense of anything valueless or of small account. Translate,
' To-day not the slightest effect was produced.'
12i Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) Is anyone here ? (2) It was not at all hot here
yesterday. (3) This mare seems to be extremely vicious.
(4) What a nice garden ! (5) Is the Munshi ill to-day ?
(6) This was the very thing. (7) There is not the slightest
cause. (8) Some mistake or other must have been made.
(9) It is of no consequence. (10) Some two hundred and
fifty rupees are wanted now. (11) The fort is a full
J:os distant. (12) Mind you are in attendance to-morro\v.
(13) The Pandit is very ready-with-his-answers. (14) Is
this stream fordablo ? (15) There must be a bazar some-
where or other.
13« Directions.
(2) Turn this: 'There was not heat,' etc. The idiom of the
language is to use nouns instead of adjectives if possible. Dhup
' sun ' is often used for ' heat,' and is feminine.
(3) See 5. 14.
(4) Kaisd not JcyA. The translation of such a variously used
word as 'nice* requires consideration. The over-tasked achMu
is, of course, the easiest resource, and 'ttmda 'excellent' is another
handy adjective ; but it would be strange if the language of Persia,
a country of gardens, had not supplied an equivalent to our idea of
'nice' in this connection. The following Persian compounds are
applicable, viz., khush-numa, khiish-ru, dil-pasand, dil-Jcushii, dil-rulu,
of which the first two denote what pleases the eye, and the others
the mind.
(5) The tone of voice is sufficient to mark a question of this
kind, but it is often well to preface it by l-i/tl. In using appellatives,
take care to add the appropriate term of respect, viz., sahib with
2
18 EXERCISES IN HINDUS I AM.
words of Persian or Arabic origin, and jl xit\\ Hindi. Munsht sahib
is better than Munsht jl, and Pandit jl than Pandit sahib. See the
proverb quoted at (82. r-
(6) ' Thine; ' here means ' thing spoken of,' bat.
(7) See |0. IS-
(8) See |0. 14 for the verb.
(9) Either (0. 3» or use the Arabic muzdyaqa in place of the
Persian parwa.
(10)1 ' Wanted,' darlcdr or matJub, the first for preference in this
connection. ' Just now,' abhi to, with, reference to something said
before.
(11) 'A full Icos? kos bkar, better than ek 7cos Wiar. Ek acts
as an indefinite article when perspicacity requires it. It cannot be
used iu 4 above, and is unnecessary in 15 below.
(12) This is really a compound sentence. Turn, ' Take care ; be
certainly in attendance to-morrow.'
(13) 'Eeady-with-his-answers,' Jidzir-jawdb, an instance of the
terseness which is effected by the use of compound words. ' Very '
is generally bahut, as in |Q. IO, but the adjective bard, in agree-
ment with the noun qualified, is often preferable. Translate, Pandit
ji bare hdzir-jairdb hain. Comp. 4. I.
(14) Hotd hai, rather than hai, the state of the stream, as generally
fordable or not, being intended.
(15) See |0. 13 and 14.
EXERCISE III.
., The form of plural varies with the gender of the
noun. Masculine common nouns have the same form for
both numbers, with the exception of Hindi nouns in d or
an (nasal), which change d to e : as \'--^ gJwrd 'horse'
"^ fjliore 'horses.'*
* The substitution of e for ah or eh in Persian nouns by analogy
ith the Hindi change of d to & is not sanctioned by colloquial usage.
PART I. EXJiUClsE JJI. 19
All feminines, on the other hand, add en (nasal) for the
plural, or an (nasal) for nouns ending in i; as cu*i»i
'aiirat 'woman,' .^j.+c. 'auraten 'women': JLo beti
L*~ s-s ^_5 « •
'daughter,1 ^IxLu betiydn 'daughters.'
When the number of the noun is indicated by a
precedent cardinal, the singular form is retained : as
Uuu^ ,jJ tin mahind, ' three months.' i^*2g£?*
A plural of totality for cardinal numbers is formed
by adding on (nasal) : do(n)on ' both,' dthon ' all eight,'
etc. Saikron has the sense of our ' hundreds.'
The word c^»I log ' folk,' added to a noun or pronoun
supplies a collective plural : as bdbdlog ' children,' tumloy
' you people.' For the plural of J^ Tco'i usage assigns
^^ -^
the Arabic word ,^xj ba'z ; as ba'z ddmi ' some men ',
balz log ' some folk.'
f 5i The use of original Persian and Arabic plurals in
Hindustani is a literary conventionalism rather than a
grammatical necessity. They partake of the character of
borrowed phrases, for occasional use, in formal conversation
and correspondence, and in dealing with the technicalities
of law. The student is advised to note the various forms
us they occur. He will find a notice of the chief forms
met with in Hindustani, at the end of App. A.
IGi (1) Two or more subjects require the predicate
to bo plural. If the subjects, whether singular or plural,
are of one gender, the predicate is of that gender ; if of
ililTcrent genders, the predicate is masculine for choice.
(%2) Allied subjects do not require a conjunction, but
are conveniently summed up by the introduction of a col-
lective term ; and with this term the predicate ngrccs.
20
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(3) Where conjunctions are used and the subjects are
thus mentioned in severalty, the predicate agrees with the
subject nearest to it.
tY, There is a difference of idiom between English
and Hindustani in the order in which the ' persons ' are
mentioned. The first person (mutakallim 'speaker')
takes precedence of the second (rmikhdiab " spoken to'),
and both of the third (gd'ib 'absent'). Hence, 'you and
I ' is main tu or ham turn, a conjunction being considered
unnecessary, as the speaker and the person spoken to are
in proximity ; but ' he and I ' or ' he and you ' are main
nur woJi or tu aur woh, because personal contiguity is not
necessarily implied.
Translate into English : —
(2)
(1)
(4)
_\>- (8)
^ (5)
^yjJ (6)
=-^ J^]\
< (9)
*:;
(10) ,.,
Vi<
x3 (11)
.>j y ^\^j (12)
PART I. EXERCISE III. 21
19. Notes.
(2) The Arabic aksar means ' most ' or ' many/ as in aJcsar auqdt
' many times ' or ' often.' It is also used as an adverb in the sense
of ' mostly ' or ' generally.1 Hotin or hoti hain, not hain, because the
statement is general and not particular.
(3) iLct'i ek or kilne ek ' several,' one more or less being a matter
of no account. This idiom holds good with numerals, as pach'as ek
' about fifty.'
(4) Fal t A 'spare' or 'extra' — an anomalous adjective of Hindi
origin. Asbdb is an example of an Arabic 'broken' plural in every-
day use as a noun singular. The singular is sabab.
(5) Eahar is the appellative of the bearer caste. The word log
' folk ' is added to words of this class to form the plural. Sab is
the Latin omuls; sard is totus. The Arabic tamdm or kull are
frequently used in the sense of sard.
(6) Tinon ' all three,' the plural of totality.
(7) Subajut, not sube (see App. A, sub fin.). Ablar hote honge
1 must be in a ruinous condition.' The Present Presumptive.
(8) See |7.
(9) Donon 'both,' the plural of totality again. Tdza-warid
'recently arrived,' 'new-comers,' a Persi- Arabic compound.
(10) Wa-gaira, et ccetera. See 7t 9- The form of the verbal
nwhayyd shows that it means 'available' by arrangement, or 'pro-
vided,' as compared with the verbal used at |Q. 8. See App. A,
Form II.
(11) The repetition of aisi gives the sense of 'many such.' The
Arabic- dated, being a feminine, takes en in the plural.
(12) An illustration of the rule given in (6. 3-
2Oi Translate iuto Hindustani : —
(1) Several Thngs must have been captured. (2) Pole,
IH'gs, qundts, etc., are all right. (3) The printing and the
paper and the binding are good. (4) Are you fellows
satisfied? (5) Well, you and all of us alike are men.
(6) All the office-people must be distracted and unhappy.
(7) ^Ir. a::d Mrs. Smith and the children started yester-
day. (8) All the Zemindars are dissatisfied. (9) The
22 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
North Western Provinces are extensive. (10) Such
qualities as common sense, manliness, and modesty are
rare. (11) Hundreds of rupees have been squandered
there. (12) All four of you are deserving men.
2 1 s Directions.
(1) ' Several,' as in 1 3 . 3.
(2) Qandt ' the canvas wall of a tent.' ' Eight,' in the sense of
* in good order,' is thiJi or durust or ba-hdl.
(3) On the model of 1 8. 12.
(4) Preface by Tcya. ' You fellows,' turn-log.
(5) Turn this : ' Well, we you alJ alike men are.'
(6) ' All the office-people," sab daf tar-log, or sab daftar-icdle, or
sard daftar, or kull 'omala. The last word is the plural of 'a mil
1 employe,' and is vulgarly pronounced 'omla, and used as singular
or plural. The tense is that of |8. 7-
(7) ' Smith ' is written and sounded Ismit to suit the native ear.
Ismit Sahib aur mem sahib aur ^aba-log. Mem is an abbreviation of
' Madam.'
(9) The N. W. P. : mamdlik magraM o shimdli. Never mind
the Persian izdfat, which theoretically follows mamdlik. It is
rarely pronounced in Hindustani, except after a. For ' extensive '
the Arabic word ^vas^i is sufficiently common to be unpedantic.
The ordinary Hindi bard would be incongruous.
(lu) For ' common sense ' 'aql is perhaps as good as any other
word. Translate on the model of |8. n-
(11) 'Hundreds of rupees,' saikron rupayd' the plural of totality.
' Squandered ' has a gooJ. representative in the Persian bar-bad ' on
the wind.'
(12) Turn this : ' You all four men,' etc. — the plural of totality.
EXERCISE IV.
22 • There arc no declensions of nouns in Hindustani.
The hdlat or construct state of a noun is indicated by post-
positional affixes or 'signs'; and there is, therefore, no
reason why a change or, inflection should take place in the
FAUX I. EXERCISE IY. 23
r.oun itself. No doubt in one particular class of Hindi
nouns in d that vowel becomes e in the construct state,
but this change is euphonic and not grammatical ; euphonic,
because the accent in these words being on the penulti-
mate, as a rule, the effect of the affix is still further to
lighten the sound of the final vowel.
It will be observed, too, that Persian and Arabic nouns
in a are uninflectcd before an affix. This may be due to
the circumstance that they are foreign vocables, and that
the accent generally falls on the final syllable ; but the
fact remains that the affix is a sufficient indication of the
construct state, and that no ambiguity is caused by the
absence of inflection in the noun. These remarks are
equally applicable to Persian and Arabic nouns in ah
(54..), and, as a matter of fact, the best modern writers*
omit the inflection as unnecessary, except ivhen the affix is
dropped, in which case the change from ah to e is a useful
indication that the noun is in the construct state.
Nouns plural take on (nasal) before an aflix.
The 1st and 2nd pers. pronouns, main (nnsal) and tit,
become mujh and tujh before an affix, but the plural forms
Jtam and turn are unchanged.
* Maulavi Nazir Ahmed, the best representative of the Dehli
school of writers, rarely inflects nouns of this class before nn affix.
The MS. of his chief work, the Taubat, was in my hands in 1>7H.
and the ubsenco of inflection duly noted in tliis and in the first
Edition of the work which wi;s lithographed at Agra in tlie same
year. The second Edition was entrusted to a Liu-know publisher,
who thought proper to supply the inflections. ." ee Tatilat, IV.. 1.
In the Lm-know translation of the A<f Laila, which was ti
of a Mir Munshi of tin- Foreign Olliee after his ivtiieim-nt, the same
word is frequently inflected ami uninlKvted in the same page.
•paper writers, who are not always the best of scholars, are
similarly inconsistent.
24 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
The corresponding possessive pronouns are merd, terd,
hamdrd, tumlidrd.
The 3rd pers. yeh and woh become is and us in the
singular, and in and un in the plural, before an affix*.
Emphaticised (see 9) these become isi, usi, inlion, iinhov.
Similarly, the relative pronouns kaun and jo change to
kis and jis in the singular, and to kin and jin OTJinhon in
the plural.
The indefinite pronoun ko'i becomes kisi before an affix,
and the interrogative kyd returns to the older form of
kdhe.
23 1 When the relation between two nouns is such
that one is the complement of the other, the complemen-
tary noun receives the sign of izdfat ' annexure,' viz., one
or other of the affixes kd, ki,*or ke in agreement with the
noun of which it is the complement. For example, in the
Hindustani idiom 'the road to Delhi' is DeJili kdrdsta;
' authority for this statement,' is bat ki sanad ; ' the Raja's
sons.' Sdjd ke bete; 'fear of death,' maut kd khauf;
' wanting in \vit,' aql kd mohtdj ; ' a horse worth a thousand
rupees,' hazdr rupaija kd ghord; 'a gold watch,' sone ki
ghari, etc. Obviously the relation expressed by izdfat is
more comprehensive than that of the Genitive case in
English, and the use of the latter term in connection with
Hindustani is misleading.
* Some authors prefer the form ns and iiii, by way of avoiding
ambiguity in the absence of the vowel mark ; but, as a native scholar
once remarked to me, they who write us for us ought to write is for is.
The chief objection to the longer form is that the introduction of the
wdv is a gi-eat hindrance to rapi'l writing.
PART I. EXERCISE IV. 25
24i The sympathetic changes of the sign of izdfat
show that the complementary relation is adjectival. This
is very clearly seen in such expressions as ranj ki bat ' a
sad affair ' ; laid kil gussa ' violent auger ' ; gazab ki nd-
insdfi ' terrible injustice,' in which the metaphorical use of
the English adjectives can be represented in this way only.
Eanjida ddmi is ' a sad man,' but ranjida bat is inad-
missible. On the other hand, to use bard gussa for ' violent
anger' or bari nd-insdfi for 'terrible injustice,' though
correct enough, would not be to translate the English
epithets.
25i The sign of izdfat is occasionally used to connect
the same nouns or adjectives by way of completing .or
intensifying the idea conveyed by the single word, as
diidh kd diidh, pdui kd pdni ' the real article,' ' unadulte-
rated'; kahdni M kahdni 'a tale and nothing else'; sab
ke sab ' the whole lot ' ; kitmbe kd kumba ' the whole
family.'
26i 1^ is a^so used to connect nouns and pronouns
with postpositions, such postpositions being viewed as
nouns in the construct state, as per ke tale ' under the
tree'; iiske age ' befoi'e him'; unke sdth 'with them,' etc.
When the postpositional noun is feminine, as in shahr ki
tan if ' towards the city,' if the order of the words is
changed, so that taraf stands first, the sign of izdfat loses
its gender, and we have taraf shahr ke.
27i Translate into English :—
t,
t^.jj (2) ^ L*.o ^ ^LJ ij\ j)ju*Jl (1)
^ ,t j •• \s *
cjti ^..\\ (3)
20 . EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
28,
(1) The usual order of the nouns is reversed by way of emphasizing
the word insiddd, for which see App. A, Form VII. Translate
' How was this erceute put down ? '
(2) Teri is bat, not is teri bat on the principle laid down in |7.
(3) Observe that pote ' grandson ' is in rational agreement with
the plural pronoun turn, which is addressed to an individual.
(4) Agrn, instead of Agrd. In either form inflection is out of
place, for the word is a proper noun.
Sarafc, as compared with rclsta, is ' a made road ' ; pakkl sarak is
'a macadamised road ' ; kaehcM sarak, a made road but not IIKHMUU-
misod. Tlie Persian ruh is also current, but is mostly reserved for
the metaphorical use of ' wny,' as in the phrase ruh o rasm 'manners
and customs.'
(5) Here an inferior speaks of himself by the depreciatory term
' slay-.1,' in the 3rd sing., and addresses his superior as ' the Presence.'
the connection between liazh- and huzur.
PART I. EXERCISE IV. 27
(6) The pronominal interrogative is here used substnntively. For
the translation, see 29. 8.
(7) Aj kal ' now-a-days.' B/idri, is an example of a numerous
class of Hindi adjectives of quality, formed by adding t to a noun.
(8) See 24.
(9) Sich kt ungli ' the middle finger' (24.); also called daini
unffli ' witch-finger.' The repetition of the adjective gives the
sense of ' so rough ' (from sewing).
(10) The sign of izafat is dropped after is-qndr as an encum-
brance; is qadr (&/') is equivalent to it n't.
(11) For sab Tee sab see 25.
(12) The meaning of age 'in front of is here metaphorical, viz.,
' in comparison with.' By way of variation, the Arabic conjunction
is used between the second couple of nouns.
(13) The word rel for 'railway' is quite naturalised. Ahanl
sarak (chemin de fer) was the first attempt, but this was soon found
to be too cumbrous. Pas hi ' very near' or ' close by."
(14) Munind mere or inert munind 'like me,' 26.
(15) A proverbial expression, in which s6th, which is generally
used as a postposition, is a noun. Translate, ' What companionship
is possible between a footman and a horseman ? '
2&, Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) What is your father's name and caste ? (2) This
is no laughing matter. (3) In whose chart' e is the
arrangement of supplies? (4) The shape arid colour of
tliis horse are good. (5) There are two miles to a kos.
(6) Where does this road lead to ? (7) Three days' leave
of absence was sanctioned. (8) How much for this pony ?
(9) An order to this effect is current. (10) An eK' pliant,
and also two cami'ls, were with him. (11) My hou-
close to the Court. (12) There was a veiy serious famine
last year. (13) It is the shop of s unr liuniya or other.
(14) What profit accrued this year? (15) Ho\v old are
you?
28 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
3Oi Directions.
(1) Put the sign of isdfat in agreement with the nearest noun, and
let the verb be in the singular.
(2) See 24.
(3) Turn this : ' Of supplies arrangement whose charge (zimma)
is?'
(4) As in (1), the sign of izafat agrees with the nearest noun ;
and by \Q, 3, the predicate agrees with the nearest noun also.
(5) The Hindustani idiom is ' Of two miles one kos consists (hotd).'
Our word ' mile ' is naturalised, but is prounced meel.
(6) Turn ' This road whereof is ? '
(7) Tin din Tel chhutti, or tin din chhutli — never dinon in connec-
tion with a numeral.
(8) Exactly as iu 27. 6.
(9) The word used for 'effect' in |Q. IS is inapplicable here;
mazmun (App. A, Form I) ' contents ' answers the purpose.
(10) The indefinite article must be translated by ek here, to avoid
ambiguity.
(11) KotM best describes the kind of ' house ' intended. A native
would say garib khana ' humble abode.'
(12) For 'very severe' use Ihe idiom described in 24. — &«?«
with the sign of izafat. 'Last year,' l par sal \ 'this year,' imsal or
sul-hal ; ' next year, sul-ayanda,
(13) See |0. 13- Bani i/a, as an appellative, should be indeclinable
in the singular, and take log in the plural.
(14) For kitnd use kis qadr, 27. IO- ' To accrue ' Msil honct;
and note the etymological connection between this verbal and that
used for 'toll' in g. 3.
(15) The Hindustani idiom is ' Your age how much ? ' See 1 3 . 2.
EXERCISE V.
31 1 Some few Arabic verbals, such as qdlil, nndabii).
etc. act as postpositions, and are constructed in the same
way as explained in 26, by the use of the sign of izdfat.
ke ; as e'tibdr ke qdbil ' deserving of confidence.'
PART I. EXEHC1SE V. 29
32, 'Have' is expressed by the substantive verb in
combination with. the postposition pas 'by,' 27. r3 5 but
chiefly when the property is movable, as kwiji kis ke pas
hai ? ' Who has the key ? '
The verb ralihnd means ' having,' in the sense of ' keep-
ing' or ' holding,' and is best reserved for such phrases
as ikhliydr rakhnd ' to have authority,' ' aziz rakhnd ' to
hold dear,' etc.
33 1 Apposition occasionally supersedes the use of
izafat ; e.g. ek shakhs Durgd ndm ' a person of the name of
Durga,' pdnch rupaya mahind ' five rupees a month.' On
the other hand, in some cases where apposition is the
English idiom, Hindustani requires the sign of izafat; as
4 the word river,' daryd ltd lafz.
34i Translate into English : —
LJ (2) ^ ^ u»j* JjlS tUM JJ\ (1)
j>
* (3) i <,*!'-• •
- >llc ,-Cl (8)
^bU J ^JLr (9)
u^U K ^b J/ (10)
(11)
EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
r-.Oy..c K J*i uJ y ^-^ **J ,j£ ^Jkii. (12)
' ?
..Iswcb lisJ la J-o y i^U;1. (18) ^(,JJ>
h^ ybb lf,j ^jT Ujy ujy (U)
35,
(1) 'Circumspection' is the best rendering of this verbal (of
which the gender is exceptional) with reference to its origin. See
App. A, Form VIII. Other current words from the same root are
Mtd ' enclosure," tnuhit ' circumference.' Qdbil belongs to Form I.,
and ta'rif to Form II. See App. A.
(2) Kar raivai 'work-procedure' or 'procedure,' rawa'i being a
derivative from the i'ersian raftan 'to go.' See |8. 3 for another
verbal from the same verb. For mutdbiq see App. A, Form III.
(3) Zabuni, used as a postposition, ' by the tongue of,' or, as we
say> ' by the mouth of.'
(4) Nawwdb sahib Jce yahdn ' at the Nawwab's,' an erery-day use
of the adverb of place. Hdn, for ehdn, is often used in this connec-
tion for yahdn.
(5) Mere yaJidn ' cliez moi'; Sirddari 'brotherhood,' in a con-
crete sense ; Ihd'ibandon Tci might have been used.
(6) Sd'is, Arabic verbal, Form I. ; see App. A. KJtarch or Jcharcha
means 'money for expenses' generally. FuziU-kharchi 'excessive
expenditure,' 'extravagance' occurs in 27. IO- Rdhkharch is
' travelling-money.'
(7) Compare (8. 10. The regular plural chlzen is seldom used.
(8) 'Etdb, see App. A, Form III. Wajh ' ground,' in the sense of
primd facie reason. The word generally means in Arabic ' face ' or
' surface.'
(9) Khildf-qiyds ' inconceivable.' The ignorance of the weaver
is proverbial. Both verbals belong to App. A, Form III.
(10) For mulaqdt see App. A. Form III.; and for mushtdq, App. A,
Form VIII. Edhar Jed 'of outside,' that is, 'not of the family,' 'a
Granger.'
PART I. EXERCISE V. 31
(11) The sign of izdfat here has the sense of 'between.' The
phruse is proverbial, and means ' an enormous difference.'
(12) Khudd kl qasam ' by heaven ! ' lit. ' God's oath.' Murtakib
nahin hun ' I do not venture to commit'; the verbal literally means
' mounting on," 'venturing on.' See App. A, Form VIII.
(13) See 33. Bd-muhdwara 'idiomatic,' opposed to be-muhd-
tcara ' unidiomatic,' App. A, Form III.
(14) See 33.
(15) Tdlib-'ilm, 'a seeker after knowledge,' 'a student.' For
muyarrar see App. A, Form II.
3Oi Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) How much cash have you. ? (2) This is the won-
drous story of the mechanical horse. (3) I have no
vacancy at present. (4) The plaintiff's claim is good,
(o) The Dehli idiom is current here. (6) Daily quarrelling
is never pleasant. (7) An indiscreet person is unworthy
of confidence. (8) The compound wall wants mending.
(9) What is the literal meaning of the word wajh?
(10) This anonymous petition is the work of a rascal.
(11) This box is a specimen of the local talent. (12) Cer-
tainly your nephew deserves promotion (13) A beggar
of the name of Shah 'Ali, blind of one eye, is standing
before the gate. (14) In the opinion of some the Govern-
ment plan is a mistake. (15) This District seems to bj
very lightly assessed.
37i Directions.
(1) See 32.
(2) The kal Jed ghord of the Alf-Laila, teal meaning ' machine.*
Kal kd gh'jrd might mean ' yesterday's horse,' or ' the horse ridden
yesterday.' Both noun and adverb are Ilimii words.
(3) In reply to an ummeJwdr or applicant for employment. Turn
' In my ofliee (mere yahdti) no place is vacant '
(4) ' Good," that is, 'good in law," j'd'i:.
32- EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(5) c Dehli ' must bare the sign of izdfat. ' Current,' murawwaj.
(6) Sozdna, rozhia, and rozmarra all bear the sense of ' daily/ but
the idiom roz roz fed 'of every day" is here intended, and is most
suitable. We shall come across another equally idiomatic phrase in
connection with the participles.
(7) An 'indiscreet' man is a man 'without discretion' — be-taai':,
a form of compound adjective, which is extremely useful in Hindu-
stani. See 35. X3-
'Worthy of confidence' is e'tibdr Jce qdbil (3I.)> but the Hindu-
stani idiom does not admit of e'tibdr Tee nd-qdbil, though n"<-qabii
alone is a good rendering of ' unworthy.' We must say e'tibdr Tee
qdbil nahin.
(8) For ' wants mending,' an impossible expression in Hindustani,
say 'is repair-wanting," marammat-talab hai. Hdtd (for ekdtd) is
an ' enclosure ' of any kind, from a ' compound ' to a ' Presidency.'
(9) Lvgaivt ' literal ' ; asli ' radical.'
(10) Gum-ndm ' lost name ' is the regular word for ' anonymous ' ;
be-ndm ' without a name ' may be used also.
(11) ' Local talent ' may be expressed as ' the workmanship of the
people here,' yahun Jce logon M Tcarigari.
(12) Bhattjd 'the son of one's brother,' bhdnjd 'of one's sister.'
A knowledge of the terms of family relationship is indispensable ;
and it is a good plan to tabulate these in the form of a pedigree from
a man's grandsire to his grandson.
(13) In the Hindustani version ' blind-of-one-cye ' (kdnu) may
stand before 'beggar' as a qualifying adjective.
(14) 'In the opinion of some,' bauson ke nazdik, lit. 'near some."
The Arabic ba'z acts as a plural of the indefinite pronoun Jcoi (14-. )•
(15) Turn this : ' The revenue-settlement (bandobast) of this
District seems to be very soft.'
EXERCISE VI.
38 • The substantive verb is often idiomatically com-
bined with nouns in such a way that noun and verb, taken
together, act as a single intransitive; for instance, 'the
tale began' is ddstdn shuru'-liui, not ddafan kd
PART I. EXERCISE VI. 33
Cliiefly Arabic verbal nouns are utilized in this kiiid of
phrase; and the compound is a valuable addition to the
verb vocabulary of Hindustani.
30i The compound ho-jdnd, in which the base of the
substantive verb is united \\iihjdnd 'to go,' is in constant
use in the sense of ' bei-ome ' ; and it may be observed
that the verb jdnd in composition conveys the idea of
completeness or finality : d-jdnd, for instance, is to ' arrive,'
rah-jdnd ' to stay where one is ' or ' be left behind.' Ho-
and occasionally occurs in the sen^e of 'accompanying';
ho-rahnd is the continuance of a state.
4Oi As we have seen (23.) the sign of izufat marks
the complement of a noun ; the affix lio, on the other
hand, marks the complement or object of a verb, whether
intransitive or transitive, and is therefore called the Sign
of the object. In other words, when the relation between
two nouns is conveyed by a verb, the second noun takes
the affix ko, if necessary for the avoidance of ambiguity ;
for example, in the sentence main Agra (ko~) jdtd him ' I
am going to Agra,' ko marks the object of the journey,
but is not necessary, for the sense is obvious without it.
Under certain circumstances fee is used instead of 7ro to
mark the person affected by the action of an intransitive
verb; but this will be reserved for notice further on (see
52. 15).
41 1 In combination with the substantive verb the
atlix ko is used to denote the possessor, when the thing
possessed is ideal rather than actual ; and thus we have
another means of translating the verb 'have.' For
instance, 'I have leisure' is mujkko fursat hai, not 7/u /•<?
pds fur^at hai, as in 32. Observe that /_.. ^ mujhe
3
34 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
and ^J tujhe mny be used for niujJiko and tujhlco, and
in the plur. hamen and tumlien (na^ai) for hamJeo and
iumleo. Similarly isko, usko, jislco, kisko, may be replaced
by ise, use, jise, kise.
42 1 The same particle is likewise used for marking
time, as an adverbial adjunct of the verb; as, do pahar ko
at noon,' Pir ko 'on Monday,' i> waqt ko ' at this time,' etc.
.^ • i 43 1 The reflexive pronoun apitd refers back either
, to (l) the grammatical subject of a sentence ; (2) the
subject of discourse ; or (3) the speaker.
Apne tain is preferred to apne ko ' oneself ' as the
object of a verb; apne dp ko 'one's own self is a common
variation; apne is also used substantively in the plural
to mean ' one's own people.'
4-4-m Translate into English : —
f >
(2) (jjjs \Jy> 1^,,- j^c (1)
f
^» (M\ i^-Jj ^1 (3) ^
l-r5-3 ^j ^:r:j ^£ ^7 (4)
^ ut/ 4-5- ,-> (5)
^ (7) lf^ b, ..51. ^J.J JL- ^j7 .J^ (6)
i f v V^ • v >- v_» >
*» £}»**» (8)
^ e^i J Jj^ (9)
i^L.i L^V^J ^-fs^ L^-OJ (^wl. (10)
-i (12) JU5 JU J / ^J b (11)
>>
PAET I. EXERCISE VI. 35
<-?,t£Lij : -
(14) uyi> \jT J
rj cAjt (15) Lf * Uj 13
45,
(1) 'I am taking leave,' said by a visitor on rising to end an
interview.
(2) Ilere apnt agrees with the grammatical subject of the verb
ydd-hain, and refers to the speaker also.
(3) In this sentence apnd agrees with the nearest noun, and
the verb ydd-d'e agrees with the nearest noun also. The particle ko
is omitted aftcd usl toaqt.
(4) Aj ke daswen din (ko) ' on the tenth day from this.' Xote
here the difference of idiom. The connection between present and
future time, being unbroken, is denoted by izufat. Thus 'to-night'
is dj ki rut or dj rat. The n in daswdn is nnsal, and the word is
therefore inflected as if it were an adjective in a.
(5) ' Where does this road go ? ' The Hindustani idiom is more
exact than the English. See back to 29 • 6 for another mode of
asking the question.
(6) See 33. -B'ty«'» Arabic noun of quality in form of Agent,
App. A, Form I.
(7) For kull see 21. 6. Kd'indt, an Arabic feminine plui-al,
iiu 'uning ' existences,' used as s singular in Urdu, in the sense of
'effects,' ' property,' etc. Chorl-hojdnd 'to be stolen,' 38.
(8) For ixtc'ddd (the gender of which is exceptional) see App. A,
Form X.
(9) Translate ' The train must have come in some time ago.' The
k-d iii kdb kd, or as it is often written kabhl kit, agrees with the
subject of the verb. The interrogative form of the phrase implies
that the question which led to it was umuvessai-v.
(10) The same thing is observable of this example : ' I have no
leisure now. Why ask ? '
(11) The repetition of apii! is distributive, as in the example ai
^. 4. Chdl-dltdl, a compound of two verbal bases, of which the first
3*
36 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTAN I.
means ' gait,' and the second ' mould,' may be translated ' manner
of life,' 'manners,' 'fashions,' etc. The expression is proverbial,
and means that no two men are alike.
(12) Faramosh-kdri ' obliviousness.' In this sentence the -writer
complains of his correspondent's neglect to answer inquiries.
(13) Main khud ' I myself.' Hamrdh is here used postposi-
tionally ; hence ke, not kd.
(15) Shart-i-insdniyat ' a condition of humanity,' which amounts
to a moral obligation.
i Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) He took leave yesterday evening. (2) His oily
tongue offends rue. (3) The Commissioner wil I return at
noon to-day. (4) I remembered my folly. (5) After some
days all his servants were dismissed. (6) A darbdr will
be held at the Collector's on the 25th of the present
month. (7) All of you go home. (8) Some day or other
you will remember my advice. (9) The style and contents
of your letter pleased me. (10) The result of the fault
will soon become plain to you. (11) How much revenue
was collected ? (12) The examination will begin at- the
same time on Monday. (13) I generally enjoy good
health here. (14) Who resides here ? (15) "When was
this new dodge of yours invented ?
Directions.
(1) ' Yesterday evening,' kal sham ko.
(2) Turn, as in 44 • I2> ' His oiliness-of- tongue does not come
pleasant to me.'
(3) The Commissioner, as the chief civil officer of a Division, is
known as the Sure Sdhib (pi.). Do pahar means 'noon,' because the
second of the four watches into winch the day is divided by native
reckoning ends then.
(4) Use the compound verb given in 44. 3-
PAKT I. EXERCISE VII. 37
(5) ' Servants,' naukar chdkar. The duplication of synonyms is
a favourite method of denoting plurality. ' Were ' should be here
truncated as ' became.'
^6) Turn this: '25th date month present (mdh hdl ko) at tlie
Collector's (Kalektar Sahib ke yahdn),' etc.
(7) Turn tins : ' to your respective home?,' apne apne ghar.
(8) Some day or other,' ek na ek din (ko).
(9) See the hint given at 30. 4-
(11) ' To be collected,' wttsul hand.
(12) Begin with ' on Monday at this very time,' etc., and for the
verb see 4-4-. 4-
(13) For 'generally' see (9, 2, Turn, ' I remain well ' (tatidu-
rust or bhald changd).
(14) Translate ' wlio,' kaun sahib, with verb in plural.
(15) Ironical. For 'dodge' use hikmat, which means 'wisdom,'
' skill,' etc.
EXERCISE VII.
i The verbal ending in nd is called by native
scholars the masdar, or ' source ' from which the other
parts of the verb are derived, and is repi'esented in the
dictionaries by the English prepositional infinitive.
Itahnd, for instance, is 'to remain'; but the truer sig-
nification is that of our verbal in -ing; e.g. merd waluiu
raluiil ntundsib hai 'my remaining there is proper,' not
innjh ko. The verbal approaches most nearly to the
English infinitive when it is inflected after verbs of
motion, the affix Jio being suppressed ; as roti khdne jdtd
hii,i 'lain going away (just now) to eat bread ' (i.e. to
my dinner).
A certain similai'ity is observable with the Latin
gerund, but the Hindustani verbal is more flexible. It
is inflected like other nouns which end in u, and may be
38 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
plural as well as singular. It may be qualified by
an adjective and be itself used adjectively in agreement
with common nouns.
The addition of wold to this verbal personifies,
so to say, the state or action which, is denoted. For
instance, from rahnd ' dwelling ' we have rahne-icdld
* dwelling-person ' or ' dweller,' in which the unaccented
a of the verbal is softened to e, as described in 2 2 . before
the affix.
In verbs of motion or action this compound often
supplies the want of a future participle active ; as, jdne-
wdld Tiaun liai, Quis iturus est ? ' Who is about to go ? '
5Oi (1) The affix men, in -which the long vowel is
softened to e, and the n is nasal, covers most of the meanings
of the English prepositions 'in,' ' into,' ' among '; some-
times it answers to ' between,' and sometimes to ' on ' or
'round.' For example, 'a chain on (round) the foot' is
pdon men zanjir, ' a ring on (round) the finger ' ungli men
anguthi, etc. ; the reason of this difference of idiom being
that the idea of ' on ' in Hindustani is chiefly applicable
to articles which are easily removed.
This affix is frequently dropped, especially in the case
of participial nouns, as will appear hereafter. The noun
remains in the construct state, and serves as a postposi-
tion (see 26. ), or as an adjective; e.g. gusse 'angry,' for
the inflection of which see 22.
(2) Par corresponds to our 'on' or 'at,' and is an
abbreviation of upar 'over.'
It is also used to mark the object of an emotion, and
thus answers to the English prepositions ' with ' or ' to '
in such phrases as 'angry \vith,' 'merciful to.' This
PART I. EXERCISE VII. 39
particular difference of idiom is a great puzzle to our
native friends.
(3) Tak means ' to,' ' up to,' ' even to,' ' as far as,' and
so foitb, according to the context.
The sign of izdfat may follow all these affixes after the
manner of the Erglish idiom ; e.g. is men kd pdni ' water
out of this,' etc.
£>1 , Translate into English : —
(3)
(9) UAJ IAJ£J \jO <X->1 ,-fj^
C -'L^ _^= _Ju\ (10) N
(11) ^,y t .y*
(13)
40 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
52, Notes.
(1) The verbal maslahat has here the adjectival sense of ' ad-
visable' or 'expedient.' See App. A, Eem. 5 (3).
(2) Ki'tui der talc or kabtak or Jcahdn tak ' how long ? ' The verb
parnd, which literally means ' falling ' or ' lying,' is used in a variety
of idioms. Here it gives to rahnd the obligatory sense of the Latin
gerund in -dum ' Shall I have to remain ? ' MvjhJco rahnd Jiogd
means much the same thing. Another idiomatic way of putting the
question is, mujhJco yalian Jcitni der lagegi ?
(4) ' Between this and that.' Compare the example at 34. Il>
where farq follows the sign of izdfat.
(5) The verb milnd is not a transitive like our ' receive ' ; hence
the Hindustani idiom in this example, ' received to me,' the verb
being always in agreement with the thing received. 'Inayat-ndma
corresponds to our word ' favour ' in the sense of letter. Translate,
therefore, 'I was favoured by your letter.'
(6) See 33.
(7) Bhd't means 'mate' or 'friend,' r.s well as 'brother,' and is
often used when the object is to soothe.
(8) Nayd niJcalnd 'a new goir.g-out,' 'a new departure,' or
' novelty.' This example shows clearly the great difference between
the so-called ' Infinitives ' in Hindustani and English or Latin.
(9) This proverbial expression illustrates the adjectival usage of
the verbal in nd. Ant jdnt shai 'a thing that comes and goes,'
otherwise, dne jane Tci shai.
(10) Similarly duliyun ant, where ant agrees with duliydn, and
both with the verb shuru-hu'tn, is equivalent to duliyon Jed and.
(11) A scrap of Euclid, which illustrates the exactness of expres-
sion attained by the use of the double affix. For musallas and
it'urabba' see App. A, Form II. Figures expressed by three and
four (sides) respectively.
(12) Idiomatic sentences of this kind cannot, of course, be trans-
lated literally. The meaning is, 'I mean to go (or work, or read,
etc.) thus far and no farther.' For irdda see App. A, Form IV.
(13) The intransitive lagnd is a word in constant use in many
idioms. The general idea is external attachment, adhesion, appli-
cation, etc., according to the context. Here, hath laynd means ' to
be handled," like hath and 'to come to hand.'
PART I. EXERCISE VII. 41
(14) Proverbial. An assertion interrogatively put, as in 44.
IO. The idiom burd lagnd corresponds to our phrase 'come amiss.'
(15) Translate 'He was fatally wounded,' or 'be received a fatal
wound.'
The propriety of Jce instead of ko in this exam pie is apparent from
the consideration that usJco zaJihm lagd, in accordance with the
usage of the intransitive lagnd, as illustrated in the two preceding
texts, would mean, 'a wound was attached to him,' as if it were
something tangible and removable. A wound after infliction is
part and parcel of the injured member, and thus vske is the logical
resource. Uske su't chubht 'the needle pricked her," in which
c/iubhi is an intransitive, may be quoted as another illustration of
the same refinement.
i Translate into Hindustani: —
(1) Government interference iu religions matters is
inexpedient. (2) He was very angry with me indeed.
(3) I mean to read as far as the eighth chapter and no
farther. (4) Where is this kind of cloth to be got?
(5) It is right you should join in this assembly. (6) I
had to go to Agra the next day. (7) Anonymous peti-
tions began to arrive. (8) You got this place a bargain
in my opinion. (9) No one was hurt. (10) There is a
great difference between theory and practice. (11) Your
son came out first in the half-yearly examination. (12)
Without interest no one obtains employment in this State.
(13) It is forbidden to drink water from this well.
(14) The key does not fit the lock. (15) We aie bound
to obey the canon-law.
(1) ' Religious,' mazhall, used in Upper India without respect to
crood. The form of the Arabic -mizhab is that of a »i/>;i-nted u HIM of
iu-tion, and the literal meaning is 'passing' or 'passage' or 'wa\.'
(3) Exactly on the model of 51. 12, omitting the verb 'read.'
( 1) Turn this : ' Where is cloth of this kind received (miY/ri) ? '
42 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(5) Turn this: 'Your joining in this assembly is right.'
(6) See 5lt 2- 'The next day,' tiske agle din (Jco). Agla,
properly speaking, is 'prior,' age, that which is 'before'; hence the
idea of ' future ' in respect of time. The sign of iscifat marks the
close connection between the present and immediate future.
(6) See 5 1 . 10.
(8) See 36. 14- Mert rde men or mert ddnisf men will do
equally well. ' Bargain ' is IchusJi-lcharii ' pleasant-purchase.'
(9) Translate with attention to 51. IS-
(10) See 51. 4 : one men only i8 required. ' Theory ' is *Lc
and ' practice,' .L^e The contrast is proverbial, and is heightened
in the original by the fact that the same letters are used in botli
words.
(11) ' To come out first," awioal niJcalnd. The Arabic numeral
carries with it a certain amount of dignity as compared with pahld.
'Half-yearly' is 'six-monthly' in the Hindustani idiom.
(12) ' Without interest,' be s'i'i o sifdrish, in which the first
member of the compound phrase means ' effort,' and the second,
' recommendation.' This kind of compound is often useful in the
translation of single terms of complex meaning. Compare cldl
dhdl as explained in 4-5. n- ' In this State' stands first in the
Hindustani sentence.
(13) Use the double affix, as in 50> sub fin. 'Forbidden' (by
the rules of religion or caste), hardm, which is, strictly speaking, a
Mahomedan word. ' Well,' kunwdn or kud by the elision cf the
nasals. Sometimes the first nasal alone is dropped, and sometimes
the second.
(14) Tula, tuli, are the Hindi words for 'lock and key,' and qi'jl
and kunjl (or chiibf) the Urdu.
(15) Turn this: 'Obedience (pd-bandt, lit. 'foot-binding') of the
canon-law-of-Islam (shar't'at) is an obligation (farz) on us.'
,. EXERCISE VIII.
"he^-erbal in nd is constantly used as a jussive:
turn jdnd, for instance, means ' go you ' ; and this usage
is akin to, if not an abbreviation of, the gerundial form
PART I. EXERCISE Vlll. 43
tumJco jdnd hai 'you are to go.' Na jdnd is the corre-
sponding prohibitive ; but the use of mat also is sanctioned
by the best authorities.
5Gi A rare uoage of the verbal is that in which it
takes the sign of izdfat in agreement with the subject
of a negative sentence, and thus acts as a finite verb,
with the force of a strong future, or non-possumus. The
following proverb is an example: YaJidn tumhdri tikki
naliin lagne ki ' Your bit of bread shall not be put here,'
' cannot be baked in this oven,' i.e ' It is of no use your
coming here.'
*>7i The affix se marks the separated object in space
or time, and so far corresponds with the English prepo-
sition ' from ' ; and since ' from ' includes the idea of
origin or cause, the sense of instrumentality denoted by
the English 'by' likewise belongs to se. Again, the
notion of looking from one object to another implies as-
sociation of ideas, intercommunication, coTiiparison, etc. ;
and thus se covers the meanings of the preposition
'with.'
58, In its meaning of comparison ' with,' se corre-
sponds with the English 'than' after an adjective in the
3cmparative degree. Thus, is se tez 'swift in comparison
with this' translates the English 'swifter than this'; and,
similarly, sab se tez is ' swifter than all ' or ' swiftest.'
Other modes of comparison will be illustrated below.
59, The affix $d of similitude or comparison is not ;i
case-affix like those we have been considering, although,
like the sign of izdfat, it is adjectival and agrees in
uviuler and number with the noun which it precedes.
It corresponds generally with the English adjectival
44 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
terminations ' -like ' and ' -isb.' We had an example of
the use of this affix in 4-. 4, where Jcaunsd means 'what-
Hke ? ' and expects a descriptive answer. So, too, thord
sd pdni means ' a smallish quantity of water,' or ' only a
little water,' whereas thord thord pdni would mean ' a
very little water.' Bahut se ddmi means a ' largeish
number of men,' or 'a comparatively large number of
men,' which accounts for the popular usage of the phrase
in the sense of 'a great many men.' As applied to the
personal pronouns, instead of yeli-sa and woh-sa, we have
aisd and waisd, and instead of inain-sd and tu-sd, mujhsd
and tujhsd.
Translate into English : —
Jj (2) Uy> ^ ^ .3U- iLi ^ jj JZ (1)
^ (3) K ^j^ (^ uJlU. d^s^r* ^ V^
?
(j«\ (jMj»jJ\ (4) l^J Njc^-l li 1> ^ ^rAiji
\j^ (5) \ji.
*Ui' (6) A b'U
(8)
(9) c
(11) ,JJ (lAj ^ ^^ ^U ,._r:^ I
-A ,
r
PART I. EXERCISE VIII. 45
(13) ^J ^c^i ^Jg Lurcsj-e ^tJc<
* i
(14) jj
, Notes.
(2) See 56. The example is taken from the Alf Laila, in which
the word amr is constantly used in the general sense of ' thing,'
like Mt. It will be noticed that all three forms of the sign of
izdfat occur in this short sentence. For maizi see App. A, Form 1.
(3) Said Tea sonewuld 'a terrible sleeper.' See 24.
(5) Rishta-ndtd, a Persi-Hindi compound, which includes all the
various degrees of family connection and kinship.
(6) Note, with reference to 3. Rule I., that Hindi diminutives in
iyd are always feminine.
(7) Ap ke yahdn ' in your stable,"
(8) Sa-nisbat aitron Tee ' in relation to others,' a very common
mode of denoting the superlative. Another idiomatic phrase of the
same meaning is auron ki nisbat kar.
(9) From Galib. The Sayyids claim descent from the Prophet.
The other three great classes of Mahommedans are Shekh, Mugal,
and Pathan. Instead of ke we might have had men, without altera-
tion of the meaning.
(10) Pesh-ana 'to come before' usually means 'to treat ' in this
construction. Akhldq se ' courteously ' or ' kindly.' Se, used in this
way with abstract nouns, supplies a large class of adverbs of manner,
otherwise lacking in the language.
(11) See 50. f°r the usage of men here. Pd"on, for pdnon by
elision of the fir^t nasal. Another common form of the word is
jtdnw, in which the second nasal is dropped. Gaon or game ' vil-
lage' is another common word of similar form. Compare 54. 13-
(13) Sd, after the sign of izdfat, is a very convenient turn
for the English ' like that of.' The word taluffuz is understood
after kd, so that the full nnMiiiii2 is 'His pronunciation is like the
pronunciation of rustics.' And ft 'uu- Aryan' or 'ignoble,' u word
46 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
with a history. The radical connection between talaffuz (see App.
A, Form V.) and lafz, 34-. J3> should be observed.
(14) Jaist here replaces Tel si without derangement of the con-
struction.
(15) For musdjir see App. A, Form III.
1 Translate into Hindustani : —
''("0 His disposition is angelic. (2) A considerable
number of these merchants have come from Kabul.
(3) Hazari ^Mal is a banker of a thousand. (4) This
Arab is the quietest horse in my stable. (5) This person's
appearance undoubtedly matches the description given in
the passport. (6) These three letters to your Honour's
address have come from the office. (7) There is no better
rough-rider than Pir Khan in the whole neighbourhood.
(8) I got this pair a bargain at the Hard war fair. (9) I
shall not come at your call. (10) For God's sake do not
enter this quarter of the town. (11) Do not remain idle.
(12) Who is the best writer in the school ? (13) My
friend was not at home yesterday. (14) I like railway
travelling. (15) He had a silver belt round his waist.
^3 1 Directions.
(1) On then.odelof 60. 13-
(2) Turn ' Out of these merchants a largeish number,' etc.
(3) Turn ' Of a thousand bankers H. M. is one banker.'
(4) Gartb ' poor,' stands for ' quiet ' in the native idiom,
whether it refers to men or animals. ' In my stable,' mere yaluln.
(5) Begin with the adverb, and for ' matches' use the intransitive
milnd. The nearest term for 'passport' is chdldn, which menus
'descriptive rol',' 'invoice,' etc., according to the context.
(6) ' To your honour's address,' h u:-Ar-ke ndm kl, the kl being in
agreement with the feminine noun for ' letters.'
(7) On the model of 60. 6.
(8) See 54. 8.
i. KXI:U.;ISK i.\. 47
(9) The idiom explained in 56. is applicable liciv.
(10) 'For God's sake,' Khmla ke waste. See 55.
(10) For 'writer' use the Persian compound khush-nm-ifi. The
best word for ' school ' here is maktab, which means lite ally ' place
of writing'; madrasa is a ' place of reading,' nnd is generally ap-
plied to a higher type of school than maktab. See App. A, Rem. 5. (3).
(14) Turn ' Riding on rail comes pleasant to me,' as in 44. I2-
(15) See 50. I-
EXERCISE IX.
<34-i The verb karnd 'acting,' as opposed to hond
' being,' plays an important part in idiomatic Hindustani.*
It is specially useful in combination with nouns on pre-
cisely the same principle as that described in 38. with
regard to hond. The noun and verb taken together act
as one transitive verb ; in fact, the noun thus used is
verbalized by the addition of Jcarnd. For example, apnd
lull 'arz-kartd hiin ' I represent my condition,' not apne
luH ki larz kortd //
65i There is no Accusative case in Hindustani, for,
as remarked in 22. there is no declension of nouns or
system of case-endings. Hence, after a transitive verb
the direct object is unaltered; e.g. apnd hdl in the example
above ; but, inasmuch as both subject and object precede
the vei'b in the Hindustani idiom, it is sometimes
necessary, in order to avoid possible confusion, to mark
the latter by the sign of the object, ko. When a person is
the object, ko is always necessary. Let the student, then,
* Fallon specifies more than thirty different usages of this verb.
The clue to these is in the context, for, as is often the case in Hindu-
stani, the meaning of the word varies with its surroundings.
48 EXERCISES IS HINDUSTANI.
bear in mind that lie is to use Ito with an object of a
transitive verb (1) when, for one reason or another, it is
necessary to particularise tb e object ; (2) when the object
is a personal pronoun or a proper name or appellative.
£f>i The duplication of the predicate in such expres-
sions as ' he went there and stayed ' is avoided in Hindu-
stani by using the base form of the first verb, thus, u-ahdn
jd rahd; and this base form is called the Past Conjunctive
Participle by English writers. The native term is Past
Defective, that is, a Past which fails to indicate number
or person, except by reference to the context. By way of
greater distinctness the designative suffix liar or /re, or
even karJce, is added to this base form.
The Past Conjunctive Participle is in rational agree-
ment with the grammatical subject of the sentence, as in
the above example, but, as was observed of the reflexive
pronoun apnd in 4-3. it may also refer to the subject of
discourse, or to the speaker. It is occasionally constructed
independently, and in this form corresponds pro tanto
with the Latin Ablative Absolute.
f>Y, The Aorist (see App. B) alone of all the tenses of
the Hindustani verb has personal inflection.
For the substantive verb, the inflection is : —
1st p. 2nd p. 3rd p.
Singular — lion ho ho ~)
i? 7 7 f (n nasal)
Plural — lion no non j
In other verbs, the following items are added to the
base:
1st p. 2nd p. 3rd p.
Singular — fin e e "i
•Di i > (« nasal)
Plural — at o en J
I'AKT T. EXERCISE IX. 49
The Future is formed from the Aorist by the addition
of gd and ge for masc. sing, and plur., and of yi for the
feminine of both numbers.
When the Aorist occurs as a finite verb in a simple sen-
tence, it denotes uncertainty or hesitation in the mind of the
speaker; as kyd karnn? 'What shall I do ? ' or 'what
am I to do ? ' Even in such phrases as Khuddjdne ' God
knows,' the uncertainty still resides with the speaker.
This accounts for the use of the Aorist in proverbial
expressions, \vhich are generally and contingently, not
axiomatically, true.
. Translate into English : —
y jJ u* (2) ^ cJbu ur (i)
Ui ,-> (3) ^J,
s (10) ys 4/
jl _>wlj <Ll.f (13) ' .V' ^_^o—- IS Ai
50 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(15) U£A) "^ ^ ii>W. -^ ^V— JJ (14)
(1) This sentence occurs in the Biig-o-Bahih', and may bs trans-
lated ' What shall I say at all, at all ? ' M. Adalat Khan, who
published a version of this romance some years ago, has the in-
genious rendering, ' What on earth shall I say?'; but TcMTc does
not mean ' earth ' in tbii sense. See j | . 15.
(2) Kyd munh leke, lit. 'having taken what mouth,' or, as we
say, ' with what face.'
(3) Here dekhkar agrees with the subject of discourse and not
with the grammatical subject lean,
(4) Itni larl holcar ' so old ' — in our idiom, ' at your age." The
Past Conjunctive Participle refers to the woman spolien to, that is.
to the subject of discourse.
(5) Ju mill 'falls,' lit. 'went and mixed.' The idiom of the
Past tense here is identical with that of gal in 44. 5-
(6) Mi'Jcar 'combined* or 'summed up/ I he sum of two or
more numbers is jor 'union' in Hindi, anft jama' 'collection' in
Urdu.
(7) Ru-la-Jcur liklikar ' the proceedings having been recorded.'
The Past Conjunctive Participle is here absolute. The text is an
official fornmla which connects the precis of a case with the order
passed on it.
(8) The Past Conjunctive Participle clihor 'having let g»' is a
similar usage. Translate ' Let alone one — two doctors,' etc.
(9) Lund is a contraction for le-dnd, and though it takes an*"'
o'ject by virtue of the first member of the compound, is an intran-
sitive verb.
(10) Talush-karnd ' to search.' See 64.
(11) Note a difference of idiom in the attachment of the negative
to the second instead of the first verb.
(12) Mukhtasar karke, lit. ' having made abridged.' Another way
of putting it is mvkhtasar iaur par 'in an abridged fashion,' or
PART I. EXERCISE IX. 51
more pedantically, mukhtasaran. For the form of the word see
App. A, Form VIII.
(13) From Gnlib. ' The taker down of a reflected picture ' is, of
course, 'a photographer.' Taswir (App. A, Form II.) is the delinea-
tion of a shape (st'trat).
(14) Le-jana, like land, is an instransitive.
(15) See 67. Translate 'Thief knows thief,' which is the
counterpart of a well-known English proverb.
i Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) Nine, nineteen, and twenty-nine make fifty-seven.
(2) Some rascal must have gone and carried off my shoes.
(3) Who brought this letter ? (4) Put all these books
in order on the table. (5) How am I to deal with these
rebels ? (6) The river Indus falls into the Indian Ocean.
(7) I am fond of taking the air in the evening. (8)
Briefly describe all your adventures. (9) Find out the
exact state of the case and write me word. (10) How am
I to ascertain the real cause of thisemeute? (11) Not
one but three snakes came out of this very drain. (12)
With what face shall I encounter my elder brother?
(13) Never aouse a man behind his back. (14) 1 went
home and took fever. (15) I admit the force of the
Maulavi's objection.
71 , Directions.
(1) On the model of 68. 6.
(2) There are plenty of words for ' rascal ' in Hindustani. The
Arabic word makkur, which is a favourite with poets and women,
will answer the purpose here.
(3) Yeh chitthi, not is chltthi ko. The student must learn to do
without the ko with due regard to the rule in 65.
(1) ' In order,' tartlb se. See 61. 10.
4»
52 EXERCISES ix HINDUSTANI.
(5) 'How ? ' kis tarah se may be used as a variation of Jciinn
For the form of the sentence see 60. IO- The word used foi
'rebels' in the Mutiny was bagi or layi-log. Another Arabic verhn1
mufsid, which signifies the doer of fanad, 27. l> ig frequently used.
(fi) See 68. 5- Sin dh, originally Hindi), is the Indus.
(7) Turn this: 'Fondness (sTiauif) of eating air is to me.' In
India one eats air and drinks smoke, or, as we say, ' imbibe?.'
Compare fkefumum bibere of Horace.
(8) For ' briefly ' see 69. I2-
(9) 'The exact state of the case,' haqtqat-hdl. 'To write word,'
likh-lhejnd ; ' to send word,' kahld-bhejnd.
(10) ' Emeute,' either fasad alone or danga-fasad, in which dangu
describes the ' row,' andfasdd the 'mischief.'
(11) On the model of 68. 8.
(12) See 68. 2- Instead of miildqat karnd use m Hud.
(13) 'Behind the back,' ptth-pichhe. See 50. I- 'To abuse'
is idiomatically biird-bhald kahnd ' to speak evil and good,' with se
to mark the person abused.
(14) Turn this: 'To me, having gone home, fever came,' the
Past Conjunctive Participle being in rational agreement with the
person speaking.
(15) Use taslim-karnu for ' admit," which will render the transla-
tion of ' the force of ' unnecessary. Mai'k the object in this sentence
by ko.
EXERCISE X.
72i Causal verbs are a speciality of the language, not
less useful than elegant. Theoretically, every simple
Hindi verb is capable of producing, as it were, two secon-
daries, the first of which is a causal of the simple, and
the second a causal of the causal, or a double causal
of the simple. The characteristic of the formation is the
insertion of a between the base form of the simple verb
and the Geiundial suffix nd, for the first causal, and
PART 1. EXERCISE X. 53
similarly of wd for the second: bnt euphonic modification
of the base itself, especially in the first causal, is often
necessary.
(1) As a rule, no change in the base form is made,
when it is monosyllabic with a short vowel placed between
two consonants: —
e.g., Ujo palcna ' to be cooked ' — '.j'^o pakdnd ' to cook.'
i ^
U~2- charnd ' to graze ' — \jl »>. ' char dud ' to pasture.'
The following, however, ara examples of causals formed
by merely lengthening the short vowel of the simple: —
UvJo katnd ' to be cut ' U.% kdlnd ' to cut.'
Jchulnd ' to be open ' UJ.^i Jcholnd ' to open.'
phatnd 'to be broken' \j«U^ phdrnd ' to break.'
In this last instance the final cerebral of the base
has been changed to a cognate letter.
liknd ' to be sold ' IxJo lecltnd ' to sell.'
Uo>. rahnd ' to remain ' Uu£, rakhnd ' to keep.'
arc somewhat similar.
(l2) If the vowel in the close monosyllabic base is long,
such vowel is shortened in forming the causal, as : —
Uo"l:>- jd'jnd ' to be awake' Ijlxs*- j'tgdnd 'to awaken.'
U.-.Co <l>-l-lin<i ' to see ' \J*J*J <liklidnd ' to show.'
'V.Lv.' luilhnd 'to sit' \jUJv: lithdnd ' to seat.'
\\hen, however, the final consonant of the ba-
ivivbral, the vowel is inoilifu'd in sound but not shm-ti -lu'd,
ami the t is changed to r, as in thu example noticed al) >\ r ,
chhilhtd 'to be let go,' U?»i>- chhornd 'to let
^ J ' "
54 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
go,' and the second causal then takes the form of the
regular first causal, viz., ljt!li>. chhurdnd to 'make let go.'
(3) If the monosyllabic base is open, that is, ends in a
long vowel, such vowel is shortened and the letter lam
inserted between it and the characteristics d and ivd • : e.g.,
Uuo pind 'to drink.' \j\j pildnd ' to make drink.'
\j^> sond ' to sleep.' Vi^Lj suldnd ' to make sleep.'
Jchdnd ' to eat.' UK Jchildnd ' to make eat.'
dend ' to give.' UVj dildnd ' to make give.'
But UuJ lend ' to take.' \j\A liwdnd 'to make take.'
(4) When the base is dissyllabic with two short vowels,
the second of these is either dropped or lengthened in the
formation of the first causal : — e.g.,
s >majhnd ' to understand.' IjU^,^ samjltditd 'to
make understand.'
j nikalnd 'to go out.' IA!\JO nikdlnd 'to make go out.'
No change takes place in the formation of the second
causal in this case.
i (1) The addition of jdnd to the base of verbs,
whether transitive or intransitive, supplies a class of
intransitive compound verbs, known as Intensives, because
the state or action denoted by the single verb receives a
more forcible expression. See 39.
(2) To this class also belong the intransitive compounds,
of which the second member is idltnd 'rising up,' and
parnd 'falling down,' or 'lying.' As might be expected,
the characteristic of the action portrayed by the first set
PART I. EXERCISE X. 55
is siiddenncss. The nature of the sfate or action in the
case of tlie second set may be appropriately characterised
us casual. Baithnd 'sitting down' is occasionally used in
much the same way to denote finality.
(3) Similarly contrasted Intensives are those of \vhicl
the second member is dend ' giving,' and lend ' taking.
Stated generally, the action denoted by the first concerns
others, and that denoted by the second, oneself. Both
forms are very common in causal verbs.
Dend is occasionally replaced by ddlnd ' throwing,' of
which the effect is vehemence or finality.
74i Potentials and Completives are formed by the
addition of the otherwise unused verbs saknd ' to be able,'
and cliultna 'to be finished,' to transitive and intransitive
bases. Obviously, when the base is transitive, these com-
pounds take an object after them, but they are logically
and grammatically intransitive, because action is not pre-
dicated by the second member.
75, Tnceptives, Acquisitives, and Pel-missives are
compound phrases in which the gerund in the construct
state (ko suppressed) is followed by the verbs lagnd
'set'ing to,'j>wH(. 'getting,' and dend 'giving,' respectively.
The first two of these forms are logically and grammati-
cally intransitive, because beginning to act and acquiring
the right to act are not acting. The third form, on the
other hand, is transitive, because verbs of giving h:i\v
two objects, and the permission to act, denoted by the
compound phrase, passes on to the person who receives
it.
X.B. — It may be taken as a principle of the verb system
of Hindustani that the meaning rules the construction.
56
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Translate into Enlish
Z) Sj (3) j
^ ^oUt (4) ITU bra y.
^c jj^*- A. V~ (
j !jc« (6) U <-»j
V ^ "
si
\ {
Li
(9)
\
(.t^j
• ^" *
*j (11) ^o>
J*^\ Jut) ^£^1 (12)
V
\\j U»\ UJ jly/ (13) ^
(10)
(U)
77, Notes.
(1) Zar-Miarid 'purchase-money.' Note that the long rowel of
the simple verb bhejnci becomes the homogeneous short rowel in the
causal. 72. 2.
(2) For yikdlnii, see 72. ^- By the addition of £/ena the verb
becomes Intensive, and means 'drive out.'
(3) Eefer to45. 9-
(4) Baii-parnd ' to be effected' or 'managed.'
PAUT I. EXEUCISE X. 57
(5) For //«;«/• see 27. 5- Sol-uthn>i ' to exclaim.'
(C) A very common idiom — 'my power does not move,' that is to
say, 'I have no power to move,' etc. Mo'umala (sec App. A, Form
III.) is an affair in which two or more persons are mutually inte-
rested.
(7) For chandun see 5.9- ^'ie force of the Intensive may be
expressed by translating ' to make my son understand (what 1
wanted),' etc.
(8) The duplication of the Past Conjunctive Participle denotes
persistence.
(9) Nahln likh-sakd, better than liJch nahln saJcd, 'I could not
write.'
(10) The peculiar phrase hdmi bharnd means ' to assent ' or ' say
jcs to.' See Taubat, V., 55, for note on the origin of the
phrase.
(11) The force of the compound verb may be given by translating
it ' has already gone.'
(12) This idiom cannot be literally translated ; our phrase ' talk
about this and that ' is the nearest approach.
(13) Translate 'Beware! let not this secret be divulged.' For
if slid see App. A, Form IV.
(14) The sahn is the inner court of a native house. Consult the
house-plan given in App. A of the Taubat.
(15) Said se, an expression of impatience, like our 'Bother take
it!' ' Ilang it!' ete. For bas see 51. I2- Translate here 'and
have done with it.'
7Si Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) I cannot answer your question off-hand. (~2) I
could do nothing, and that's all about it. (3) The cat
must have drunk up the milk. (4) Pitch the tent to the
north of that tope. (5) He finished his work before
arrival. (6) The cultivators began to complain of hard
times. (7) There is no harm in admitting him. (8) .
no one be allowed to go outside the compound. ('2) Make
an exact copy of this document. (10) Shall I enter a
report of the insanitary condition of this village in >ny
58 EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
diary? (11) Don't let there be any contention among
you. (12) Have the cricket-ground watered the first
thing in the morning. (13) Hang it; chuck this rubbish
into the waste-paper basket. (14) He will have come
through the bazar. (15) Have all the horses shod
to-morrow.
Directions.
(1) ' To answer a question,' is, in Hindustani, ' to give an answer
of a question.' ' Off-hand,' sar-i-dast, lit. ' tip of Land,' or, as we
say, ' finger-tip.'
(2) See 76. 4 or 6. The second clause may be translated las,
as in 76. 1S-
(3) Place the object first, with Jco. 'To drink up,' pi-juna.
(4) 'To pitch a tent' is 'to rt.ake it stand,' khard kar-dend, or,
simply, lagdnd, 'to fix' 'To the north' in the Hindustani idiom is
' in the north.' In addressing servants or villagers Hindi words are
more likely to be understood than Persian or Arabic ; tit tar is therefore
better here than shimal.
(5) 'Before my arrival," mere dne se pahle, in which se marks the
lapse of an interval.
(6) ' To complain of hard times,' zamuna k"t thikdgat Jcarnd.
(9) ' Exact ' is to be rendered as ' according to the original,'
mulabiq-asl.
(10) ' Insanitary condition,' na-sufi. ' To enter,' darj kardend.
(11) 'Among you,' upas men.
(12) ' A cricket-ground,' gend-khelne kd maiddn — 'an open space
for ball-placing'; gend-gliar or gend-gdh is used for a 'racquet-
court.' There are several expressions for '(he first thing in the
morning,' such as tarke, fajar ko, savere, or munh andhere ' when it
is too dark to distinguish a face.'
(13) See 77. 15- ' Into the waste-paper basket,' radd'i men.
(14) ' Through the bazar,' Idzdr hoke.
(15) Turn this : ' Have the shoeing of all the horses done to-
morrow ' (kanvd-dind).
PART 1. EXERCISE XI.
EXERCISE XL
3Oi The affix ne marks the Agent of a transitive verb
in those six of its tense-forms which are derived from the
Perfect Participle, and which therefore denote a perfected
action. Under all circumstances, no matter what the
gender or number of the agent is, agreement with the
verb is barred by the presence of this affix. The verb
agrees with what in our idiom is its object ; as, ham ne
yeh kitdb parhi tht 'we had read this book.' When, how-
ever, such object has the affix ko, in accordance with the
reservations of 65., concord is again barred, and the
verb becomes independent and absolute; as, ham ne
Gulistdn ko parhd thd 'we had read the Gulistan.'
The first of the above examples illustrates the general
usage ; the second is a particular variation.
31« In the case of the verbs lolnd ' to speak,' baknd
'to chatter,' and bhiilnd 'to forget,' the subject is not
marked by the sign of the Agent, because the meaning of
the first and second is really 'utterance of a sound,'
which may or may not be intelligible ; and, as to the third,
' forgetting ' is distinctly an intransitive idea, for there is
nothing to pass on. The verb samajhnd " to understand '
is both transitive and intransitive, according to the
context ; and by some authors sochiid ' to think ' is vii-wid
in tlie same way.
32 1 The six tense- forms which are derived from the
Perfect Participle are: (1) the Past, Absolute; (2) the
Past Proximate; (3) the Past Remote; (4) the P;i-t
Presumptive ; (5) the Past Dubious ; (6) the Past Con-
ditional Remote. See App. B. The last two will bu
GO EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
illustrated under the head of Subordinate Clauses in
Part II., Exercises XX1IL, XXIV.
33i Rules for the formation of the Perfect Parti-
ciple : (1) When the base of a verb ends in a consonant,
the Past Participle is formed by adding a. There are
two exceptions, viz., kiijd (Jcarnd) and mu'a (marnd), in-
stead of kard and mard, though these latter forms occur.
(2) When the base ends in \ or . the same augment is
used, but y euphonic is interposed ; and Jiamza replaces ij
when the participle is in the construct state, or is plural
Or feminine ; e.g. khdyd, khde, khd'i, Ithain. Gayd from
jdnd and JiiTa from hond are exceptional. (3) When the
base ends in ^ (e or t), the insertion of y between the
base and the augment is unnecessary, because the long
vowels e and * are equivalent to iy ; consequently, lend
has for its Past Participle liyd and lie, and in the femi-
nine, li and lin (contracted) ; and in the same way pind
has plyd, pie, pi, pin, which represent the Hindi forms. *
Translate into English : —
(1)
* Xt'e, Jci'e, etc., are written Zf e, Jci'e etc., in the Bag-o-Bahar and
such like texts. The explanation is that, Mahoniedan translators from
Persian into Hin<lu>t;iiii, ;is Kaja Siva Prasad savs, "knew nothing of
Sanskrit and ignored the Aryan basis of th« vernacular." See Part III.
hitrod. Tlcm.
PART 1. EXEHCISK XI. 01
'^c_j (6) UI^ Uj\ ^i
(15) l^,^ t^^Le <UJJU ^J ^c
85,
(1) Translate ' I was forced to take,1 etc. The Arabic verbal
means one who is under pressure or (orce,jattr. Soi> A pp. A, Form I.
(2) Ap Jce iqMl «e ' by your good fortune ' is the ordinary reply to
a complimentary remark. For iqbal see App. A. Form IV.
(3) The verb is iu agreement with the collective term. See
16.2
(1) Xiillxh karna (par) is tho toclinic:il term for 'putting into
court,' or ' prosecuting.'
(5) Charst'i Ihui- znniin se ' (slarting) tV.nu a hide of land.' \vhii-h
incans in India, as much as a pair of bullocks can irrigate in a day.
^'l' 73.3- f°r t
62 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(6) The objeci is here particularised iu answer to a question ;
hence it stands first with Jco. The full form of mol-lend 'to purchase'
is rarely used. A be-chobd is a tent without a centre-pole. The
name of the town here mentioned is one which it is difficult to
transliterate. Pedantically written it should he Fathgarh, but this
would convey no notion of the pronunciation to an ordinary reader.
A former generation wrote it ' Futtyghur ' ; and perhaps the most
intelligible compromise is ' Fatehgarh.'
(7) Rah-numcfi, shortened from rdh-numiit ' road-showing.'
Ta'indt karnd 'to appoint" or 'tell off for duty' (64.)- The
vowel zabar before ain sounds almost as a.
(8) From Galib. The use of the gerund as an agent is an illustra-
tion of its flexibility (4-8.)-
(9) Galib again. Urdu men liJchd Tiai 'has translated into Urdu' ;
ulatnd ' to turn ' is another expression ; tarjuma karnd is, perhaps,
the commonest. The Bo*tdn-i-Khaydl is a voluminous Persian
romance, and the translation spoken of is well written.
(10) Shd'i bahinon 'brother and sister' — a compound in the
Rational Plural.
(11) Translate ' What led you to,' etc ? '
(12) Agair note the force of the compound kar-lin. For musta'dr
see App. A, Form X.
(13) ' Your letter to the address of B. K. C.' The proper name
and the pronoun (unke) change places in the English version.
(14) Ap Tee intizdr men ' in expectation of your coming.' For
multawt see App. A, Form VIII.
(15) The idea of the verb is the 'taking up a thing,' and not
putting it (?swn until it is done with.' Translate ' He left nothic«!
unsaid.'
Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) I got myself laughed at to no purpose. (2) My
companions made this compact among themselves. (3) A
Baniya of the name of Ram Lai has caused a false com-
plaint to be laid against me. (4) I bought two country-
bred mares at Hardwar for my own use. (5) You have
I'AKT I. EXERCISK XI. 63
written about many subjects in your report. (6) My
mother-in-law gave roe no share at all in the house-keep-
ing. (7) What made you let the gentleman go ? (8)
You undertook a very risky "business. (9) I found it-
hard to make both ends meet on twenty rupees a month.
(10) Old age has made me useless. (11) The sick man
asked after the whole family one by one. (12) Why
did you omit this particular item in the account ? (13)
The agent collected corn, grass, straw, and everything
for the regiment. (14) He shot four tigers in quick
succession. (15) You have treated me with great con-
si deration in this matter.
Directions.
(1) ' To get oneself laughed at,' apni hansi karan.'t.
(2) The phrase used in 79. IJ is equally applicable here.
(3) See 33.; also 84. 4-
(4) ' For my own use (or riding),' apni, or khud apni, or »//' ki
sowuri ke li'e. Desi is generally ' country -bred,' as opposed to
n-il<"iyati ' foreign/ which describes English horses and ' Walers.'
(5) Omit the word ' about,' and translate ' subjects ' by the
Arabic masculine plural of matlab, viz., matulib.
(6) The Hindustani idiom has ' entrance ' (duJchl) instead of
share ; (ftissa).
(7) See 84. II.
(8) 'A rirky business,' jokhim orjokhon. Use the Past Remote.
(9) This idiom cannot be literally translated. Turn ' With diffi-
culty on twenty rupees I made sufficiency."
(in) ' Useless ' is here nikammd ' do-nothing.'
(11) ' One by one,' ek ek karke, that is, 'specifying each in turn.'
Omit the word ' after,' as in (5) above.
(12) ' This (particular) item ' is raqam ko, the position and con-
struction both being particular. 'To omit" ia here qalam-aitddz
karnd ' to throw a.-ido the reed,' as opposed to qalam-Lniul.
(13) For the form of this sentence see 84-. 3-
64 KXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(14) 'In quick succession,' upar tale, lit. ' orer and under,' 'one
on the top of the other.' ' To shoot,' bandiiq nidrnd, in which the se
is elided.
(15) 'To treat with consideration,' qadr-diini farmana.
EXERCISE XII.
, The verb dend, in combination with causal verbals
in t, has the intransitive sense of ' admit of,' as dikhdf
dend, 'to admit, of being shown,' that is, 'to be visible.'
Hence the subject cannot be constructed with ne. This
appears very clearly in the following example from the
Prem Sdgar ; Krisltn dp M bandhd"i diye ' Krishn let him-
self be bound.'
The same intransitive idea attaches to the compounds
sdtJi-dcnd 'to accompany,' lit. 'to give one's company/ and
chal-dend ' to move on,' ' start off,' etc.
Ho-lend ' to accompany ' is another example of an in-
transitive compound, of which the second member is
transitive.
Compare the remarks made in 74-. 75.
8^1 In addition to the regular form of the Impera-
tive, which demands immediate action, Hindi provides
the termination iyo for an action which may be deferred ;
also iye and iyeyd for the intimation of a request or
suggestion. In these latter Hamza replaces the letter ye
in Hindustani when the base of the verb ends in a conso-
nant, as ^11^ chali'e 'pray come.' When the base emls
in \ or ,, hamza separates the base and the termination,
as <==.j^'$ Id'iye 'please bring.' Lastly, when the base ends
PART I. EXERCISE XII. G3
in I or e, the letter jim is inserted between base and ter-
mination, as ^sa! Hjie ' please take.'
The precativo of hond is hujie, from an older l>asp.
The use of these forms in subordinate clauses will be
considered in Part II.
9Oi The verbal cJiulne is in all probability a survival
of the Prakrit passive in ijja, so that the true meaning is
'desired' or 'to be desired,' as an obligation or duty,
which is the sense of the verbal in Hindustani.* Thus
the phrase yiln lii cltdhie means ' that's as it should be,'
etc.; tumko koshish karni cJidhie thi 'you ought to have
tried,' in which chdhie thi agrees in gender and number
with the gerund.
The use of this verbal as the first member of a com-
pound sentence will be noticed in Part II.
9! . Translate into Enlish : —
(2) U_J \giif.J}
rAiL, l.Jc< t-J , ^ «— »T J >. (4)
" ^S" V ^_ ^ V J J
cr? ij^-J j^-
) js ^j ^ juo i .0^ ^. (6)
^•\jj (9) cJ^
Sec Kellogg, § 610, who quot«s taruhiye 'it U praised,' from the
5
6() EXKKCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
ni^ l-r N ; !•<_ .1 nfh
\ 1 JL I t - *>»>•. ^Jo ^J \.£H>- s ? 1 I 1 V/ )
f \ i . \ t t T H /i K\ 1
/ i
92 1 Notes.
(1) Chor-jahdz 'a pirate-ship.' Compare chor-darwaza (5) 'a
secret door' or 'postern.' Synonyms for dikhul dend are nazar
and or nazar parnd, the latter of which conveys the sense of a
sudden or unexpected appearance.
(2) -4w«z, the sound of voices of men or animals ; dhat, the sound
of steps. For mutlaq (abverb) see App. A, Form IV.
(3) Chliufnd ' being loose.' See 72.
(4) Ap M dp 'of his own accord'; merd sdth 'companionship
•xith me.' Merd sdth dend is therefore much the same thing as mere
idth and.
(B) Asl&n, an Arabic nceusative, used adverbially in the sense of
'entirely,' 'radically.' Mutlaq (1) might have been equally mullaqaH.
(7) Merd nctm I eke 'in my name,' like the phrase used at 68. 2-
Mdng-ldnd ' to ask for and bring.'
(8) Musan-wada 'draft of letter,' etc., conveniently pronounced
musauda. This verbal, like muqaddama (84. 14) belongs to
App. A, Form II. In these cases the participle is nominalized by
the addition of ah.
(9) The inferior speaks of his house as a 'poor' house in the
usual self-abusing style ; in tashrif fa i md'iye, tashrif means 'honour-
ing by a visit ' ; and the sentence may be translated,' Please, your
.•M-i'l!ency, do mo the honour of entering my humble abode.'
Similarly, ta.ihrif Idnd means ' to come,' tashrif le-jdnd 'to go ' in
native etiquette.
(11) 'Then, where will you be-pleased-to-go ? ' the position of
the interrogative implying there is nowhere to go.
,4*.' 2 •£+*/'.
tX^ttA*-^
PART 1. EXEU«:iSE Xll. 67
(12) Vote here the form of the Persian iziifut after a word end-
ing in d. Pakarnl ' to grasp,' where we use the milder expression
' take.' For mubtalu see App. A, Form VIII.
(13) Darldri Jcapre, to a native, is ' full-dress."
(14) See the example given in 90.
(15) Ba-har-hal, lit. 'under all circumstances ' or 'in every way.'
In the English idiom the negative is joined to the adverbial phrase.
Compare with this the idiom of 68. !'•
i Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) The sails of a ship were visible ten miles off.
(2) He took leave and departed. (3) He accoirpauied us -
half-way. (4) Please wire me inf< >rmation of his approach.
(5) He ought to have taken warning from his brother's
punishment. (6) Their language was quite unintelligible^
to me. (7) Explain to me the author's meaning. J-' (8)
good enough to write down your instructions in detail.
(9) Kindly honour me with a visit to-morrow or the next
day. (10) the guns were audible at a distance of forty
kos (11) The advance-guard of the enemy came in
sight across the Satlej. (8'2) Pray be not out-of-heart.
(13) In no case ought you to treat the people harshly.
(14) Pray make no ceremony about entering the court-
yard of my house. (15) There should be no parda
between relations.
^4i Directions.
(1) Turn this: ' At a distance (fdaila) of ten miles,' etc.
(-) Use the past Conjunctive Participle for first verb, and see
44. i.
0*) 91. 4- 'Half-way,' in the idiom of Hindustani is 'up to
half -distance.'
(4) Turn 'By means of wire send me,' etc. 'Approach,' tas'irlf-
iiwari, which is the Persian original of the phrase tashrlf land,'
92.9-
5*
68 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(5) On the model of 91. 12 with due regard to tense.
(6) Use the idiom explained in 88.
(7) 'Meaning' has several representatives in Hindustani according
to the context, such as ma'ni, matlab, irdda, mansha, of which the
last is best here. ' To explain' or 'expound,' tashrih-karnd.
(8) Prefix the phrase melirbdni karke. ' To write down,' tahrir
farmdna.
(9) Use the verb of 91. 9. Omit the conjunction 'or.'
(10) See 91.2; but say 'voice of guns.'
(11) The 'vanguard' of an army \spesh-lashkar; the 'rear-guard.'
pas-lashkar. 'Across the Satlej,' Satlaj par. For the verb use
nazar-parna. 92. T-
(13) See 91. I 5- 'To treat harshly,' ziyudati kurnii (par).
(14) Turn ' Honour me by entering without ceremony,' etc.
(15) Turn this interrogatively : ' What parda is wanted (chain e)
among relations ? '
EXERCISE XIII.
The Participles, to use the Latin term, piny an
important part in idiomatic Hindustani: and familiarity
with their usage and construction is a test of scholarship.
Native grammarians treat them as verbal nouns, a term
which includes adjectives, and have adopted the Arabic
terms ism-fd'il (nomen ageatis), and ism-mof'ul (iwmen
patientis) for the Imperfect and Perfect Participles re-
spectively. As compared with other nouns, they convey
the idea of status, more or less lasting and continuous ;
nnd this is heightened by the addition of the auxiliary
hud. See 5. n.
There is no difference in the Participles in the matter
of construction, and they will be treated together in the
following sections in the order of usage, as, (1) Sub-
stantival, Ex. XIII; (2) Adjectival, Ex. XIV; (3)
Adverbial, Ex. XV.
I'AKT 1. EXERCISE XI II. G'J
As verbal nouns, the Participles may stand alone
in a concrete or abstract sense, and are oftenest used in
the construct form before an affix or postposition ; as,
j'l'jte men ' in a waking state ' or ' while awake ' ; sunte Ice
sdth 'concurrently with hearing' or 'immediately on
hearing ' ; kaJie se 'by order,' etc.
The Perfect Participle, in combination with the pre-
po-itions bin, be, bagair, etc., all of which mean ' without'
privative, supplies a specially useful idiom in such forms
as be mere de hue 'without my having come'; be khde
' without having eaten,' etc.
In all these cases the verbal and the postposition or
preposition taken together are adverbial phrases. The
strictly adverbial construction, in which the governing
particles are suppressed, belongs to the third head.
See Exercise XV.
97, Translate into English :—
^ (2) I?/ ^ U£ ^ (1)
f\ S S •• • /Q\ ?^7 f ~S\
^^^> ^>fT jr>^ \6) eL' «=£ ^^ ^r1
L-»T ii (4) ^ 4>
_Cw (»5)
(10)
70 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
_.' ',} c_j »i ,Lv< ,_i j^Aw^c «_<ljf- (12) vx..-.'
98.
(1) A proverbial expression — 'What will not a dying man do ?'
that is, a man will do anything when driven to extremities.
(2) Also proverbial ; descriptive of a coward.
(3) Rah-chaltd, exactly our ' way-farer.' Sir hona, for sir par
honu ' to pester,' ' sit upon,' etc. As regards the gentry spoken of,
it is quite unnecessary to translate the appellatives in detail.
' Religious mendicants ' will answer the purpose.
(4) Literally, ' Slave, having been called of you, is in attendance,'
that is, ' I am present at your summons.'
(5) Jdgte men 'as I lay awake.' Jinn, the 'Genius' of the Alf
Laila.
(6) Sunte Tee sath 'immediately on hearing (of it).'
(7) Proverbial. Kahe se ' by ordev.'
(8) &ote se ' from a state of sleeping ' or ' sleep.' The Past Con-
junctive Participle agrees with the subject of discourse (66.) F°r
the idiom of Tee here see 52. IS<
(9) Samjhae se, ' by having been made to understand,' but the
sentence cannot be translated literally. For rdzt see App. A,
Form I.
(10) Jawdn Tv&e par, lit. ' on having grown up,' that is, ' when he
is grown up.' Surat is 'personal appearance,' generally in t he-
sense of ' good looks.'
(11) Bagair deJche hue marts ke 'without a sight of the
patient.'
(12) Se dpar gde ' without having ascended it.'
Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) My fingers are not under raj control on account of
choir trembling. (2) Grief at my departure is still felt
PA FIT I. EXKIiClSE XIII. 71
by them. (3) Give the cartmen the usual return-hire.
(4) His proficiency will be first-rate when he is growi-
up. (5) How can you know the drift of the petition
without reading it? (6) He departed without taking
leave. (7) On my checking the accounts the treasurer's
dishonesty \\;is exposed. (8) Who can tell the breadth
of the Ganges without crossing it ? (9) Mere disgust
will be caused by such familiarity. (10) He will agree
to take service if he is made to understand its advan-
tages. (11) We have come at your summons only. (12)1
shall have to give the broker his commission.
tOO • Directions.
(1) ' Under my control,' kahe men. Omit the pronoun 'their ' also.
(2) ' Grief at my departure,' mere gae ku qaiaq. 'To be felt,'
dil men lagna.
(H) ' Return-hire,' phirtd.
(4) ' When he is grown up' see 97. IO- Instead of the word for
'proficiency' used at 44. &> which means rather 'preparedness,'
choose here mahdrat ' skill ' or ' expertness.'
(5) On the model of 97. "•
(G) For the verb see 88.
(7) Use the form given in 97. 6, and express the 'my' by
mvjhko placed ufter the adverbial phrase. 'To check account.-.'
hixi'ih xnitiiir. 'To be exposed,' khiilm'i. The student \vill have
noticed by this time the constant use of neuter verbs in Hindustani
where the Passive Voice is the English mode.
(8) ' Without crossing it,' be par lint-.
(9) 'By such familiarity,' is tarah munh-laf/-fe se. The idea of
tlio term here used is something like that of our 'cheek by jowl.'
(10) Use the phrase given in 97. 9- om.tting in translation 'its
advantages.' ' To agree to take,' •/'iftul kar-l-mi.
(11) As in 9 7. 4.
(12) For the form of verb see 51. 2- ' Commission,' dhartA,
which lit. menus 'putting something down.'
72 EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
EXERCISE XIV.
lOli (1) As attributive adjectives the Participles
agree with the nouns they qualify, whether subject or
object; and iu this usage the idioms of English and
Hindustani are very similar, but in the case of the Imper-
fect Participle the English adjectival use of such transi-
tives as 'interesting,' 'amusing,' etc., cannot be imitated
in Hindustani. Recourse is had to Persian or Arabic
verbals, or to the adjectival use of nouns with izdfat, as
explained in 24. Thus, 'an interesting book' may be
translated dilcliasp kitdb ' a heart-clinging book,' or maza
ki Jcitdb a ' book of flavour.'
(2) As predicative adjectives also the Participles may
agree with the nouns to which they refer; as, woh Jianstd
hud phi rt d hai ' he goes about laughing ' ; but when the
Participle thus used has an adverbial sense, as in the
example given, where ' laughing ' might be read ' laugh-
ingly, 'Hindustani, like English, has an alternative method
of construction. This will be explained in the next
Exercise.
1O2. Translate into English : —
j>
^ Uo (-2) .^ ^b liLw ^ ^.bU- (1)
(3)
(5) ^ ^L^' ^ ^ JV (4)
•a ? j>
(6) .'U
PART I. EXERCISE XIV. 73
(9) j> £ ^JUAX. ^ ^yli ^yj Lox (8)
^^ ^^ W •• *O y ^™"I> *"
jS (10) ^ |^
^.' (11)
••
1O3.
(1) Phutd 'broken,' that is, 'boiling.' Note the difference of
idiom in the use of the word 'fill.' In (6), on the other hand, the
idioms of the two languages correspond.
(2) Ankhon (kt) dekhi Mt ' an eye-witnessed affair,' in other
words, ' the report of an eye-witness." Sai se barhkar, an adverbial
use of the Past Conjunctive Participle, 'more than all,' equivalent
to siydda.
(3) Here the adjective bard is used substantivelj in the sense of
' elder.' Khidmat men, lit. ' in the service of,' is a conventional
I ih rase for 'to.' Da\i z ibiin se 'with depressed tongue,' that is,
• quietly ' or ' gently ' or ' with bated breath.'
(4) Chaltt kasr means 'a progressive fraction,' that is, 'a re-
curring decimal.' Ta'rif ' definition,' our word ' tariff.' For pronun-
ciation of the « see 85.7-
(5) Die, the Hindustani form of diye. Sec 83. 3- Formustiiyhn
ree Ajij). A, Form X.
(G) Translate rakhtJiu'l ' standing,' so as to avoid the ambiguity
of ' placed ' in the English sentence.
(7) Gol-kumard ' company-room,' generally used for our term
'drawing-room.' Richhti (hi'di) hni, is spread' or 'laid down,' ready
I'm- use, in contrast with other rooms.
(8) A proverbial expression—' Have you got henna on you tVet
(that you are afraid of moving) ? '
74 tXERCISKS IN HINDUSTANI.
(9) Illustrative of |QI. Pitta-mart Tea kdm ' painstaking work,'
•which requires an effort of the will (pitta). Lit. ' spleen.' KhAsJcnr
'especially,' not a Past Conjunctive Participle, but an adjective «ith
designative particle Icar attached.
1 10) Kothu, the flat roof of Oriental houses.
(12) Ae din Jcu jhagra ' quarrelling every day that comes,' that is,
'daily quarrelling,' See 37. 6.
1O4« Translate into Hindustani :—
(1) Jnst silence that barking dog. (2) I received this
thriving business by inheritance from my forefathers.
(3) He presented me to-day with a talking-bird in a
cage. (4) All men eat the bread given by God. (5) The
cloth is laid. (6) In illustration of this, I remember a
very amusing anecdote. (7) These made-up speeches are
disagreeable to me. (8) Fill the bucket with boiling
porridge. (9) The coward in alarm retraced his steps.
(10) A large number of interesting books are in the
library. (11) The army in retreat reached the frontier
with much difficulty. (12) Proceeding through the
market he receives and returns the salutations of the
people.
tO5i Directions.
(2) Turn 'In inheritance from forefathers to me.' etc. 'A
thriving business,' cltaltd kdrkhdna.
(3) 'In a cage' must be expanded in llindustani to ' placed or
fixed in a cage,' pinjre men lagi ft til.
(4) 'By' must be translated here by the sign of izufat, a- m
94.4
(5) As in |02. 7-
(6) For the verb see 44. 3-
(7) 'Made-up speeches,' banal huln la/en. See also 4-4-. I2>
(8) For ' boiling" use here khaultd hurt.
I'AKT 1. EXERCISE XV. 7.~.
(9) In alarm,' khauf khdkar, i.e. ' luring absorbed fear.' Coin-
pore 71.7- 1° ' retrace steps ' is ulte puon (st) phirn i.
(10) See |0 1.
(11) 'In retreat,' bhagti fiii'i, in agreement with /aw/. 'With
much difficulty,' bari mughkil se, bari bar! mwshkilon set hazdr
mnshkilon se.
(12) 'Proceeding through the market,' bi'iznr hot a hii'i. See
79. *4- Omit 'and returns,' because the word lend includes this.
He who does not return &saldm is supposed not to receive it.
EXERCISE XV.
The Adverbial construction is that in which
tin- Participle is in the construct form with postpositional
affix men suppressed. Thus, to recur to the example
given in 96, instead of jdgte men 'in a waking state,' we
might have jdgte hue or jdgte jdgte ' while awake,' the
latter form having sometimes an intensive and sometimes
a continuative sense.*
Similarly, an alternative phrase for sunfe ke sdth is
smite Id tnen, or, adverbially, sunte hi 'immediately on
hearing' — a form of expression so frequently employed
that some grammarians make it an integral part of tin.'
\ erl> scheme.
Precisely in the same manner, the predicative Parti-
ciple lianstd hiid, in the example given in IOI. (2), may be
adverbially constructed as hanste hue 'laughingly,' or
hanste 'continuously laughing.'
1O7« (1) v.-licn the agent of a transitive
takes the sign ne, concord with a predicating Part ieiple is
* Examples of Participial adverbs in Fns:li:>li :uv 'lovingly,'
4 dovi'ti'dly,' ftc., and in Latin, lileuttr, conc^l, cic.
76 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
disallowed, and the Participle mnst be adverbially con-
structed. In this case the Participle generally stands
before the agent with ne. As chalte hue Begam ne mujhse
kalia, 'as she was going, the Begam said to me.'
(2) Similarly, when the object of a transitive verb
takes ko, concord with a predicating Participle is barred,
and the Participle is either constructed adverbially, or
absolutely, without inflection, as, main ne usko rote (or
rota) pdyd ' 1 found him or her weeping.' Main ne usko
baithe hue (or baitltd hud) deJchd ' I saw him or her
seated.'
In these examples, and generally, the absolute con-
struction is preferable, as being unambiguous
iO8i When the predicating Participle has an object
of its own, the adverbial construction is indispensable.
For example, (1) 'main takrdr karte hue (or karte karte)
thak-yayd ' I was tired with wrangling.'
Alternative, but not equally exact, renderings of the
English expression would be, main takrdr karne se thak-
gayd, main takrdr kar-karke thak-gaya.
(2) Wohbahdna kiehue thd 'he was pretending,' all
along, not at some particular period, which would be
kartd thd.
1O9, Translate into English :—
.7
kj^L-J <-> ^J}\# l==^j\ ^ ^ ^£> «— *f£jJ (1)
JU , jL ^\ JT c=:;^ c-> (2) dU-rf
j>
^ ,jj ,.<^l (3) if! ^;;b ^ ,^
.v.< (4)
PART I. EXERCISE XV. 77
k^ (6) ^j*
by JiU / ^^ o>^ ^ v^r^ d (^ (7)
AJ^ (8) L'JuU ...J^c 1>,J ^l>
"v ^-'^Vv
>tj (10) ifyb UL-j ^Jys
/••J (11) ..tJ^Kj -~i ,Jo! <--Jv& c^ C^ .obi.'.!
(^5> tJ- • _/ — J {^ " " •*
^ ± ^ (12) ^ ^^ ^\4 * u^^ ^ JT
UjJ ^Tf ^:b _:J ^5
11O. Notes.
(1) Dekhte hi ' as soon as he saw it.' Datt-khatt is here used as
a plural.
(2) Hote hole ' gradually.' For the verb see 51. 13-
(3) Translate ' He or she passed the whole day (in) weeping.'
(4) Mere rahte (men) ' while I am here.'
(5) See 87. *• Baithe-bithae (men), 'lit. seated and making
others sit,' for an explanation of which see Taubat, VII. 73. The
general sense of the phrase is ' doing nothing.' The particular
shade of meaning must be determined from the context. Trans-
late hero, ' without an effort to avoid it."
(6) Khatt likhti' likhte 'as he was writing his letters.' ffaiza
knrna, 'to be seized with cholera.' For mo'allim see App. A,
Form II.
(7) Qt'ifd sofa 'sound asleep.' Compare the English phrase
' sleep otforgetfulness? Se-khabar is synonymous with gdjil in this
connection.
(8) Mekh se bundh'i hilt ' tethered to a peg,' in our idiom.
78 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(0) This sentence (from NW.ir Ahmed) illustrates both 1he
adjectival and adverbial usage. Bhdgte hue or bhdgtd liud, |Q7. 2>
' scudding.'
(10) Chiruglie Tine 'lamp in hand' or ' with a lamp.' Lie liue
even corresponds with our 'with' in such a phrase as 'a man with
a lion-like face,' sher kd sd munh lie hue. Comp. 68. 2> a'so 61 . r3-
(11) From the Tatibat. Khdnd is understood after kd. Trans-
late ' the girl has eaten nothing since this time yesterday,' for a
li'eral version is out of the question.
(12) This short sentence illustrates three participial forms.
Dabe pdon (se) ' with subdued or gentle tread,' or, as we put it, ' on
tiptoe.' See |Q2. 3-
1 1 1 1 Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) It is a vexation at my age to be learning the
alphabet. (2) Small and great have eaten nothing since
this time yesterday. (3) Who is that person with the
lion-like countenance ? (4) I found only this shop open
in the market-place. (5) As she was going away the
Begani offered me a gold mohur. (6) The Afghans con-
quered the Panjab by degrees. (7) Unseen by others
tho women were exposing their heads from inside the
zenana. (8) The whole of them were left gazing at each
other's faces. (9) A Maulavi, with prayer-mat spread,
was engaged in his devotions inside the mosque. (10) I
had made np my mind that this valley was my tomb.
(11) As soon as he heard the rumour, he was dismayed.
(12) While I am here, do not speak of bribery even by
mistake.
112i Directions.
(1) See 68. 4. 'To be learning the alphabet,' alif-be parhte
hue.
(2) On the model of (09. JI- Tne adverbial cor struction oi
the Participle is independent of gender and number.
(3) See ||0. 10.
(4) ' Open,' khuld Md.
PAKT I. KXtUClSE XVI. 71)
~ ' 107. U)- 'Offered' may be here idiomatically translated
dene la<;i,i • lic^aii to give,' the verb being PI. Fern.
(6) See IQ9.2.
(7) ' Unseen by others,' Ankh bachd, lit. ' having escaped the eye.'
Use the idiom of 108. (2)f *»'' nikute thin, for the idea is that the
women were continuously peeping out at some unusual sight.
(8) Use the idiom described at 25. f°r l^e subject, and also for
the part icipial phrase ' gazing,' dekhte ke d' khte.
(9) ' With prayer-mat spread,' jde namaz bichhde. The 'devo-
tions'of a Moslem are known as sijda, and masjid is the 'place of
s'jda.' See App. A, Kern. 5. (3)-
(10) ' 1 had made up my mind,' samjhe hue thu, because descrip-
tive of the state ot despair the speaker felt at the time. Alf Laila.
(11) Use the adverbial form of |09. *•
(12) See |09. 4- 'Even by mistake,' bhulkar bht.
EXERCISE XVI.
\ 13. This exercise is reserved for illustration of the
of the Participles in connection with time and its
measurement.
The old method of dividing day and night into eight
paliar and again the pahar into eight ghari is still cur-
rent, especially in the country districts and in native
States.* Rude water-clocks (jal-yantra) still mark the
pahar, which is sounded (bajnd) by the pahrd ' watch-
m;m,' on a gong (ghantd). Modern Hindustani appro-
priates the word ghari for a ' watch ' or ' clock,' and
* The expression ath-pahar or uthon pahar ' the whole eight
\\;\trlu'>,' often occurs in the sense of ' day and night,' 'the twont y-
four hours,' etc. Chausath ghari is used in the same way. At't-
pahri is a watchman employed day and night.
80 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
gJiantd for ' hour.' according to the English reckoning,
and bojd or baje for ' o'clock.' Thus, do pahar ' noon,'
4-7. 3, becomes bdrah ghante baje or bdrah baje 'twelve
o'clock'; and the quarters are saw a bdrah, sdrhe bdrah,
and panne ek (' quarter less than one '), respectively.
Derh bajd is ' half-past one.' The word ' minute ' (Ji^x^c is
used, and occurs first, in literature, in the Urdu version
of the Arabian Nights (1847), Ttai minit ke ba'd l after
several minutes.'
1 1 4i Translate into English : —
kJJ ^ ^ ^/ (1)
xjj li >\ ,-1.0 ,-±.i5 jjJ (2)
.^ u^ (6) \ ^ ^\ ^ (5)
J li . _.i
J (12) b ^3
PART I. EXERCISE XVI. 81
ij.0 (14) ^j^ ,,-sr ^5T
jj (15) LA ill <L
i Notes.
(1) Di» charhnd ' ascending day,' that is, ante meridiem time
from sunrise : the repetition of the Participle marking the gradual
progress of time, ' the course of the morning." Do tin ghart is
' about an hour ' of our time ; and, as literal translation is out of
the question in idiomatic sentences of this kind, we may render
the whole phrase ' about an hour after sunrise.'
(2) Similarly, din dubnd or din dhalnd is ' declining day,' that
is post meridiem time till sunset. 'The Rani's pankha' is the local
name of a breeze which always springs up towards evening in a
gorge near Kanibagh, a well-known halt on the way to Naini Tal.
(3) Note the variation in the Participle as compared witlx (1) :
and translate ' the forenoon was well advanced when he awoke."
By our reckoning the phrase would mean ' between nine and a
quarter to ten."
(4) A very useful and common mode of expressing lapse of time.
The meaning is obvious.
(5) ' Why have you come so late at night ? ' The construction U
ilnl rut gae (se).
(6) Similarly, kuchh rut rahe ' while it was yet night.'
(7) Mutatis mutandis, translate as in (6).
(8) This may be freely translated, ' noon passed as he lay on and
on — he did not even turn in his sleep." Tak is adverbially used in
1 he sense of 'so much as,' or 'even.' Karwat means 'lying on one
side," and Jcarwat badalni, is ' changing to the other side.'
(9) Top dagl is the morning 'gun-fire' in Indian cantonm.
(li'n-l joto 'put the horses to (the carriage),' literally, 'yoke the
carriage.'
(10) Fajar hote hi ' as soon as the daybreaks.' Comp. (09. '•
Bart fajar, like ba/iut savere (6), means ' very early.'
(11) Marte dam tak ' up to the time of his death." For ' after
death," so exact are these usages, the Perfect Participle would be
6
82 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
necessary, as mate pichhe uskl shardrat JcJiuli 'his wickedness \vaa
exposed after his death.'
(12) From Xazir Ahmed's graphic description of the cholera in
the Taulat.
(13) Kaibaje kain 'what o'clock is it?' — lit. 'how many hours
hare sounded ? ' The answer follows.
(14) The Past Conjunctive Participle is here adverbial, and, if
translated at all, corresponds to our ' counting.'
(15) Tzre ghari ghari kibald durrahe 'fortheemay the evil of every
ffhari be remote,' that is, ' May you be hourly blessed ' — a common
benediction. Tare, not iujlie, on the principle explained in 52. 15-
Tlu's sentence is peculiarly interesting as the first bit of Hindustani
recorded by an Englishman, and that so far back as the reign of
Jehangir, in whose son's time Urdu is supposed, on the authority of
Mir Amman, to have originated. Terry writes the sentence tere gree
gree kee bulla doore, as it sounded to him. See Voyage to India,
p. 216. He records two other words only, viz., ca-ca-ta (sic), by
which he meant kyd kahtd ' what does he say ? ' This interesting
woik lias long been out of print.
1 lOi Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) At what o'clock will the train leave ? (2) It is
some twenty days yet to the examination. (3) It must
be a month since he went on tour. (4) Why do you
leave off work so early ? (5) Why did you get up so
late? (6) Office-work goes on from ten till five. (7) Our
regiment reached the camping ground before day-
light. (8) Who can have come to see me so late at
night ? (9) As the morning advanced an island began
to be visible in the distance. (10) As day declined an
adverse wind began to blow. (11) Do not strike the
hour without my giving you the signal first. (12) The
moon rises at eleven ^o-night. (13) Will you not see
him when you start ? (14) After having been ad-
monished he coolly committed another bit of villainy.
(15) I shall not forget your kindnesH as long as I live.
PART ). EXERCISE XVII. 83
\ f 7, Directions.
(1) Rel stands for 'train' as well as 'railway.' The right word
here for 'leave' is chhutnd. See 92.3-
(2) Turn thus : ' As yet of the examination some twenty days
are lying (pare hain).' For the use of the sign of izufat compare
the phrase given at 54. 6. The idea of pare hain is that the
days are lying unspent as yet, as, in our own idiom ' the future Uts
before us.'
(3) As in 1 1 4-. 4- The tense of the verb will be Past Presumptive.
(4) ' So early," itnd din rake se. | f 4 . 7*
(5) ' So lale,' Una din charhe. 1 14, 3.
(6) See ||4. T4- Das ^aje se lekar punch tab. 'To go on,' in
this sense, jdri hond.
(7) See || 4. 6.
(8) See ||4. 5- '^° come to see,' mult'qdt Jco and. Use the
Past Dubioxis tense.
(9) See ||4. i. Also 9|. 6.
(10) See ||4. 2. 'Adverse wind,' ultl hawd, or bdd-i-mukhdlif.
(11) ' Without my,' etc., be mere ishdra d?e hue. See 96.
(12) The rising of the moon may be picturesquely rendered Jchet
karnd, of which the idea is the gradual clearance of the sky and
land from the previous darkness. Otherwise the common verb
nikalnd suffices.
(13) ' When you start,' chalte waqt. Jlfilnd is the proper ex-
pression for ' see ' hero, as in (8) above, where muldqdt is equivalent
lo milnd.
(14) 'After having been admonished,' tambih hde ptchhe. For
'coolly' use the adverbial expression explained at ||0. 5- 'An-
other bit of villainy,' ek aur shardrat.
(lo) 'As long as I \i\f.' jite ji.
KXERCISE XVII.
118i The iidditinn of the tenses of the verbja/ai to
the Imperfect Participle in predicative concord with thb
subject of a scutenco supplies a verbal combination,
which is called by some grammarians a Progressive Com-
pound verb. Thus, wuh kahtd guyd 'ho went on saying.'
fi*
84. EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
The verb rahnd may be used in the same way, and is
perhaps prefei'able when the Participle is intransitive.
but there is little to choose between them, just as in
English, ' to go on sleeping ' or 'to remain sleeping '
are much the same thing.
We may notic3 here the curious combination jdt d rahnd
( to remain going ' till the vanishing point is reached ;
hence, ' to vanish.'
llOi Similarly, the addition of the tenses of jdnd to
the Perfect Participle of transitive verbs supplies the
verbal conjugation known to us as the Passive Voice : as
woh mdre jdenge l they will be struck.' Native gram-
marians have borrowed the Arabic term majhul 'un-
known' for this form of the verb, because the agent is
not specified, in opposition to rna'ruf ' known,' our Active
Voice.
Except in translations from English, which even in
native hands are too apt to follow the English idiom, the
use of the Perfect Participle in this construction is com-
paratively infrequent in Hindustani,* for, in addition to
Hindi intransitives of passive signification, the language
has been enriched by a large store of Persian and Arabic
verbals, which combine with the substantive verb hond in
a passive sense. To take an example, 'to be conquered'
is no doubt capable of being rendered jitd jdnd, from
jitnd ' to conquer ' : but hdrnd, shikast Jchdnd, mas/lub hond,
etc., are best suited to the idiom of the language. f
« As Chodzko remarks of Persian — il ya quelque chose d'autipathiquc
&. 1'emploi de la roix passive.
f To ask the student to commit to memory long parailigms of the
so-called Passive Voice of the Hindustani verb, is to teach him what
he had better leave unlearned.
PART 1. EXERCISE XVII. 85
12O» Again, though the patient in tlie passive con-
si ruction poses as the subject of the verb, it is still the
object of the act ; and in recognition of this the Hindu-
stani idiom admits the use of the sign of the object with
pronouns and proper names (comp. 65.), in which case the
passive becomes impersonal, as, usko dekhdjdegd ' he shall
be looked to.' Hence the use of deTthd jdegd in the
general sense of ' the matter shall be seen to.'
A similarly impersonal usage is observable in negative
expressions which convey the idea of impossibility, such
as, qismat se lard iiaMn jdtd ' there is no fighting against
fate.' Compare with this the construction explained in
56.
1 2 1 1 A, curious but common idiom is the addition of
the verbs jdnd and and to the Perfect Participles of in-
transitive verbs of motion, in a progressive or completive
sense according to the context ; as, sab log chede gae ' all
went away ' ; larki dauri dti hai ' the girl comes racing
along,' etc.
122, Translate into English:—
.j\ (4) LxS' ULc ^ ij;W^J ^IjiS'J ,--j »— ^^ j-^
— X_M ,»j
'
rjb (5)
86 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
b, U^jj <JU- ^T / J_:j ^ ^S\ (6) Uf
LjU- JU \jLs (--a uJL-4 jXJ (jJ (7)
(8)
(10)
123. Notes.
(1) .Bar? 5a/-f se ' eaoh in turn' ; the repetition is distributive.
(2) Tatllm-i-niswan ' female education.' 2lfer« zimma ' my war-
rant for it," or ' I warrant,' is parenthetic.
(3) Paki han pahchdn 'as he recognised them in turn'; Jtar eJc se
depends on gale miltd gai/d, ' lie went on embracing.'
(4) He was to begin at one end of the row of vessels and in-
spect each. From the story of the Forty Thieves.
(5) Hotd gayd 'he grew more and more,' etc. — very different
from ho-gayd ' became.'
(6) Ankh kholke ' with eyes wide opened ' in astonishment.
(7) See ||8. sulfinem.
(8) Multdvi kiyd jdnd ' the being adjourned,' 'adjournment.' The
verbal iltiivd, from the same root, means the same thing. See 84. H-
(9) Mare ffa"e ' were killeJ.' Khel rahe 'were left on the field'
is an alternative expression.^^^^^^^^^^^
(10) ' Let the*ditcr of the paper be searched for ' ; taldtk-Jeamd
being a compound verb. See (20. Cp. Tattbaf, IV, 11, also, X, 2.
(11) Chald dtd hai ' comes regularly in.'
(12) Mitnh andhere, Uf. ' when it was too dark to dislin.L'uish
faces,' that is, before daylight. See the expressions used at ||4. 6.
:ind 79. 12. Daura gayd ' ran off.'
PART I. EXEKCISK XV] II. 87
i Translate into Hindustani: —
(1) At the battle of Assaye (Asdi) some fifteen hundred
men were left upon the field. (2) Let the murderer of this
woman be well searched for. (3) He grows more and
more saucy and unmanageable every day. (4) From
small beginnings such a habit as this grows stronger and
stronger. (5) That shall be seen to when we hare done
with this. (6) The children were disgusted at the
postponement of the story. (7) Keep watch upon him
as he comes and goes. (8) I could not restrain myself.
(9) Owing to your folly my character too will be lost.
(10) One by one the worthless servants were turned off.
(11) A kind of numbness creeps over my hands and
feet. (12) The wine is oozing from the cask.
125i Directions.
(1) For the verb see 123.9-
(2) See |22. 10.
(3) ' Every day,' roz roz, or roz-ba-roz. See 122. 5-
(4) 'From small beginnings, thore se ikuru* hokar.
(5) ' When we have done with this,' is sefdrig hokar, impersonal.
See |20.
(G) On the model of 1 2 2 . S.
(7) See |22. 6.
(8) See 120. f°r the idiom. Mujhse ntttd nahin gayd.
(9) Turn 'my good name will vanish.' 122. 7-
(10) ' One by one,' ek ek karke, impersonal. Coin p. 87. ' '•
(11) 'A kind of numbness,' sansani si. 59. *or tne verb sec
122. ii.
(t2) ' Is oozing,' niklti tit a hai.
EXERCISE XVIII.
Perfect Participle as a verbal noun in
combination with the tenses of knrnd denotes continuance
88 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
of state or action; and, since the state or action described
by the verbal is by the nature of the case incomplete or
unfinished (nd-tamdm), the compound is constructed in-
transitively in those tenses of Ttarnd in which the subject
ordinarily takes the sign of the agent, ne. Thus, woh
(not tisne) likhd ki ' she continued writing.' Likhd lei is,
in fact, just as much a Past Imperfect (mdzi-nd-tamdm)
as likliti thi ' she was writing ' ; and in this we have
another illustration of the principle laid down in 75
that the meaning rules the construction.
127i Similarly, in combination with the transitive
chdhnd ' to wish for,' the Perfect Participle denotes a
state or action, which is wished or willed, and therefore
futuristic ; and the compound, which is called a
Desiderative, is, by the nature of the case, intran-
sitive. Thus, woh likhd chdhi ' she wished, or was about,
to write ' ; not usne likhd chdhd.
128i The Perfect Participle, in the construct state,
with object (see 108), is occasionally combined with
jdud or rahnd in an intermittently continuative sense; as
dawd pilae jao ' continue giving the medicine (at the
proper intervals),' a different thing from either pildte jdo,
or i>ildtjd karo.
Lastly, the verb dend, and sometime ddlnd
(see 73. 3)> i3 used in combination with Perfect Parti-
ciples in the construct form, by way of energizing the
action denoted by the associated Participle. This quasi-
compound is of rare occurrence, and is practically limited
to the first person singular of the present tense ; as,
main tnjhsekahe detd hun, ' I tell you once for all.'
PART I. EXERCISE XVIII. 89
13d Translate into English : —
^ J\# J\# (1)
j»j J* .j** (2) ^ Lx>
,_/ U ^ jL^ JU- ^ VT / ^ ^ (4)
L->~ (6) ^ \j& ^jjb ^ y>J^ ybjl Juo ^^ (5)
Uul /^r (7) ^jJLs^ UU! ^UaJui ^b uJ,-.-
- ^ v
. ,JJ> l!O(U- ^ i^^ii (8) ....A U^U- L)0 .\kJuOLe
*^^ V V • **^> V - ^^ '
^ J>
^jfc/U- ^ ye^c ^5- V1 ^ ^_5-:' ^^V (9)
^^ (11) jJJb, e-d; ^;U ^ Jb c-'ji ^y (10)
-v< (12) U
•• *^
131.
(1) The repetition of Ihui hero signifies plurality. Bare lutf o
(•i/iiik xe ' with much zest and zeal.'
(2) The Arabic verbal mutawutir ' consecutively,' is redundant.
See App. A, Form VI. Jayd is used for ffaya, when part of a com-
pound verb.
(3) Mtri dekhd-dekhl ' in imitation of me.' The union of a
nuiM'uline and feminine verbal in this way generally denotes reoi-
l>n>rity of action, as mtlnl-nuiri 'mutual strife.'
(-t) Translate ' How are we to be kept regularly informed of ? '
etc. See also 57.
(5) Sro 76. !-• JIi't'<i kin ' were kept up.' Jfotl ruhin would be
an altiTiiutive expression.
90 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(6) Translate ' You will be pleased to keep in your own hands
the general superintendence only.' Balai, from the Persian bald
' over."
(7) Mutalannd ' adopted son.' See App. A, Form Y.
(8) Translate ' Something awful is about to happen.' Gazab has
already occurred at 2 7 • 8.
(9) Shahrzad loquitur, ' I shall go on asking you from time to
time,' etc.
(10) Hath raTche rahiyo ' keep your hand plac-ed.'
(11) Sheje detd hurt ' I will send at once,' etc.
(12) From one of Nazir Ahmed's fables. The man boasts that
lie will split the beam in two in a moment as a specimen of his
power.
132i Translate into Hindustani: —
(1) Undoubtedly female infanticide is practised in ibis
district. (2) Tbe marriage rejoicings continued for
several days in succession. (3) It is on tbe stroke of
twelve. (4) Continue giving tbe patient iced water.
(5) I sball wear tbis ring on my tinger in remembrance of
you. (6) She came to and fro to inquire after me every
day for a fortnigbt. (7) I am bringing dinner at once.
(8) Tbis criminal ought to be put to death. (9) I forbid
you once for all. (10) On bearing the sentence the plain-
tiff and defendant stared at each other in astonishment.
(11) While I am here let this custom be kept up. (12) Pray
continue to allow him to come to me as opportunity offers.
133 1 Directions.
(1) ' Female infanticide1,' rasm-i-duJchtar-kusM. ' To be practised.
tiua Tcarna.
(2) ' To continue,' hiia karna again.
(3) Turn this, ' It is about to strike twelve ' : as in (30. 8.
(4) For the form of the verb see 128. 'Iced water' is ' water
of ice ' in the Hindustani idiom.
PAIM I. EXERCISE XVIII. 91
(5) Use the same form of verb as in the lust sentence, with
rahnu instead of janii. ' In remembrance of you, dp kt yddgdrt
(men). See also 50. '•
(6) On the model of (30. 2- 'To inquire after ine" may be
translated by the Arabic gerund ' eyddat, which is tl.c technical
word for visiting the sick.
(7) Put the verb in the form given in 129.
(8) ' Ought to be put to death," qatl-iciyd chdhi'e, in which qatl-
kiyd is the grammatical subject of chdhi'e. The affix ko will be
required for the person affected.
(9) The verb as in (7) above.
(10) ' On hearing,' sunkar, not sunte hi, which would be out of
harmony with the rest of the sentence, the verb being in the Con-
tinuative form. Turn ' the plaintiff and defendant ' by ' plaintiff
- y - y
defendant both,' • N jnA- UA- ,. v^. These common law
».lw t-1— >•*•« *--*^-
terms mean ' the plaintiff and the person against whom the plaint
is laid.' For the verbals see App. A, Form VIII. In both cases
the augment t coalesces under tashdld with the first radical.
(11) See 109.4- ' To be kept up,' hud karnd.
(12) 'As opportunity offers' may be rendered by the idiomatic
waqt pare par ' on occasion be-falling.' For the sense of parnd see
a remark made in 73. 2-
3
END OK PAKT 1.
92
PART II.
THE COMPOUND SENTENCE,
1. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES.
I
EXERCISE XIX.
1 34i When a sentence is enlarged by the insertion
or addition of explanatory clauses, it is said to be a Com-
pound Sentence, and the additional clauses are called
Subordinate.
They may be conveniently classed as (1) Relative,
(2) Predicative, and (3) Adverbial. The first of these is
the subject of this Exercise.
135i Relative clauses are introduced by the pro-
noun jo ' who ' or ' which,' and by the pronominal adjec-
tives of quality and quantity, jaitd and jitnd, for which
English has no exact equivalents, and, as a rule, take
precedence of the principal or correlative clause to which
the noun explained belongs. It is customary, however,
in order to avoid the uncertainty which might arise from
the deferred mention of the subject of discourse, to
transfer the noun to the clause which explains it. Tims :
'The man, who does not know how to read, is ignorant,'
jo ddmi parhnd nahin jdntd (\voJi) nculdn Jidi. Some
authors are fond of adding the explanatory or qualitative
PAKT II. EXERCISE XIX. 93
particle ki to the noun in this position; as, jo ddmi ki
parhnd, etc.
When the relative clause follows the noun which it ex-
plains, as in English, it is a common practice to place this
same particle ki either before or after the relative pixmoun,
or to allow it to stand alone, as the Persian representative
of jo. Thus : woh ddmi kijo (or jo ki) parhnd nahin jdntd
iidddn hai, or woh ddmi ki parhnd, etc., or ddmi ki wuh
parhnd, etc.
13f>i The Hindi correlatives so, taisd, utnd are very
rarely used in Hindustani. For the latter, the contracted
form «s qadr is chiefly used, as also is is qadr for itnd,
and jis qadr for jitnd.
137i Translate into English :—
r e-- ^ (1)
(5)
(7) ^.x^
bo ^ l»T JU-
cJUi _^r ^ ^ Lf«j" W^ ^ (8)
94 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
138,
(1) BakJitd ho, tlie Present Dubious tense — the use of which here
implies that one of the persons addressed has the right of precedence,
but the speaker is uncertain which.
(2) Kt jae, Passive Aorist in agreement with bat. Farq has the
sense here of ' dissension,' nifaq.
(3) Samjhu ho, the Past Dubious tense in agreement \s ith jo kuchh.
See 81.
(4) Indefinite pronouns in a relative clause often take the form
of a relative pronoun, notwithstanding the presence of another
relative. Jisko here stands for Ictsi ko, and should be translated
accordingly.
(5) See 55. The verb in the subordinate clause is assimilated
to the jussive in the principal clause. The construction is^'o rhdhnd
(hai) pahnnd (hai) ' it is for you to wear what you wish to wear,'
that is, ' wear what you please.'
(6) Another instance from the Alf Laila of the same kind of tense
assimilation. FVlfaur, one of a few Arabic phrases in this form
which are current in Hindustani. The sense is ' on the instant ' ;
PAttT II. EXtRCISE XIX. 95
fauran 'instantly* is equally fashionable. The Persian jald is less
forcible. For ittilu1 see App. A, Form VIII., and what is said of
this word in the Remarks attached.
(7) Pesha is the object of the continaafive Jciyd kartd Tiun ' I am
practising.' Kijo might have been -written jo ki, or jo might have
stood alone. Similarly, ki might have stood alone, or we might
have had ki woh. These alternatives exhaust the possibilities of
construction in this form of sentence.
(9) Ki is here equivalent to jis men, and elegantly avoids the
repetition of the locative.
(10) Keverse the order of the clauses in translation, and remember
that^'aj.sM is in concord with khamyazu.
(11) Nulahaza is the ' consideration ' of a thing, as compared
with the sister verbal lihaz (84. 3), which generally means ' con-
sideration 'for. See App. A, Form III.
(12) It was remarked in 1 3 5 . that English has no exact equiva-
lant forjaisd &\\Ajltnd. Jitnu bojh is ' the amount of weight which/
as compared witli jo bojh ' the weight which ' ; but the latter is a
sufficient rendering of the former, so far as English is concerned.
(13) For the verbs see ||8. and translate 'the higher I
ascended,' etc.
(11) See (•!•) above. For mutamnowar see App. A, Form V.
(15) The construction here is analogous to the old English form
' Mr. Peprs l.is diary.' The ordinary phrasing would begarib ddmiyon
ki bah-d-betiyetn ,• but if this had been adopted, the relative clause
could not have been satisfactorily placed. Bahti-betiyun is a col-
lective term for the daughters of the house, among whom, in an
Indian home, the sons' wives are included.
(16) The speaker means: 'What I observed when I came into
your family was, that — ' etc.
139 1 Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) How miserably parses the time of women who do
not know how to read. (2) The girl was some six years
old — in short, just the acre of our Hamida. (3) I am
that very Siudbad who yon suppose is dead. (4) The
voices were quite inaudible owing to the cotton with
which his ears were stuffed. (5) I Lave nothing more to
96 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
say beyond what I have already told you. (6) It is very
unkind to forget the past claims of aged servants who
can no longer work. (7) We are in the same fix that yoa
are. (8) The more I cherished yon, the lazier and idler
you became. (9) The wages which are due to anyone
will be given him. (10) There is no such verse in the
Qoran as you describe. (11) Is there any particular
trouble which causes him annoyance ? (12) What has
happened is the best for my interests. (13) The price
you named was absurd. (14) Send me word immediately
of whatever rumours you hear in the bazaar. (15) I have
no horse in my stable which is fit for you to ride.
(16) What I observed when I came to court was that
bair-splitting was the fashion.
14Oi Directions.
(1) Turn thus : ' "Women who do not know how to road,' as in
1 3 5 : an(i insert un leu in the correlative clause.
(2) 'In short' may here be idiomatically translated by bas,
parenthetic. See 5 1. I2- ' Just the age of,' bi-' ainihi jitni. The
Arabic bi-' ainihi lit. means ' in the eye of it,' i.e. ' exactly.'
(3) Place 'that very Sindbad' first, and 'lam' last, with the
relative clause between.
(4) Place ' owing to the cotton,' ba-sabab rfii ke, first ; see also
(02. I and 9I.2-
(5) Turn ' Except this which I have,' etc. See 77. II-
(6) The construction may be imitated from |37. 1S — &ged
servants from whom work is not possible,' etc. ' Very unkind '
may be translated ' great unkindness.' See 1 3 . 2-
(7) On the model of 1 3 7. 9.
(8) On the model of |37. 13.
(0) On the model of (37. 4> Dut nsejitni instead of jo, in agree-
ment with tanklnvtih.
(10) Place 'in the Qoran' first, followed by the relative clause.
'Describe,' bat and.
PART II. EXERCISE XX. 07
(11) Follow the order of the clauses in the original, and begin
with khdsskar, instead of using the adjective khdss ' particular.' The
tense in the relative clause is the Present Dubious.
(12) ' To happen,' zuhur men and ; ' for my interests,' mere haqq
men.
(13) Repeat the verb, as in J37t 3 ; thus, ' The price you named
(kahnu) you named absurd.'
(14) On the model of 1 37. 6. ' Whatever ' is here best translated
by jo jo.
(15) See 63. 4, aud 87. 4-
(16) On the model of 137. 16.
EXERCISE XX.
14ti Predicative clauses, that is, clauses which
are part of the predicate, and without which it would be
incomplete, follow the predicating verb, and are linked
to it by the connectives ki or jo.
The statement, question, order, or whatever it is, by
\\ Inch the predicate is thus completed, is uniformly worded
in direct terms (pralio recta), whereas in English oblique
or indirect forms of expression are preferred, or the addi-
tion of a clause is avoided by the use of the infinitive or
u participle.
142i This difference of idiom is specially puzzling
to native students of English. The following examples
contrast the variety of oblique expression peculiar to
English with the uniformity of the Hindustani mode : —
(1) ' He sent word that he would come to-morrow,'
ktihld-bht-jd fii kal ittniyd ; lit. ' He sent word that " I will
come to-morrow." '
7
98 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(2) 'I am glad that you have come,' kltiixh hun jo turn
ae ho. Hereto, as compared with ki, has the force of ' in
that ' without being distinctly causal.
(3) 'I regret that I came,' or ' I regret having come,'
pachhtdtd huh lei main kyun ay a ; lit. 'I regret that "Why
did I come ? " ' as if the speaker was soliloquising.
(4) 'I fear that he will come to- day,' dartd hun aisd
na ho ki woh dj d-jae ; lit. ' I fear — " let it be not that ho
come to-day,"' in which the fear is expressed in woi-ds.
(5) ' He asked me who I was,' mujhse puc.hhd ki turn
kaun ho ; lit. ' he asked me that " Who are you ? "
(6) 'Ask if anyone is here,' puchho ki yahdn koi hai •
lit. 'Ask that "Is anyone here?"' To an Englishman
the temptation to use agar instead of ki in this form of
inquiry is almost irresistible.
(7) ' Tell him to go home,' us se kahdo ki turn ghar j do ;
lit. ' tell him that " you go home." '
(8) 'You ought to go home,' dp ko chdhie ki ghar jaiye.
Here ghar jaiye ' pray go home,' is the thought in the
speaker's mind.
(9) ' My custom is to read the paper daily,' merd yeh
ma'miil hai ki roz roz akhbdr parhtd hun. Here the speaker
states his custom in the predicative clause.
(10) 'I thought of going to Agra to-morrow,' khaydl
dyd ki kal Agra jaun ; lit. 'the thought came to me that
"I go to Agra to-morrow,"' the aorist merely indicating
tlie uncertainty of the speaker's mind.
(11) 'I saw a gorilla advancing from the opposite
direction,' dekhd ki udhar se ek ban-maiius chald dtd hai,
or more dramatically still, kyddekhtd hun ki udhar se, etc ,
' what do I see ? that, etc.'
PART II. EXERCISE XX. 09
!43i Translate into English : —
v fr ^ ^r^ c=rS?
f
*}' (3) y> Kj *j ^ ^j ^^< ^ *^ <jj (2)
. (4) ^^ ^L- ^ lw U5 ^U- ^j^ ^ c=j
—
Li" ^^ djyj i_ ^ol ,-Jc* _§j'ljs c±~i\ (5)
r\3 ^ c_;T (13)
.Ly, (1-i)
(I5)
(7) ^yu
(8) U* ^ICi ^ ^j^, ^r Jjui ^
j> j>
^* P (-O «XJ' .«^»- <-i .v'«^
» N_- ^ " ^V ^"TV
^ ^iUi (9)
(10)
l (11)
7*
100 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
144, Notes.
(1) £ee (42. (2). The \vords are addressed to a lady visitor
Nasib ' fortune ' or ' destiny ' is treated as a plural in Hindustani.
(2) In reply to a suggestion ; Lence the Past Dubious tense.
(3) For be gine see 96.
(4) See (42. (n)- -An allusion to the firing of the thatchers"
ricks at Allahabad, some years ago, as a cure for incendiarism.
(5) In this example translate the subordinate clause in the oratlo
recta, reserving the oblique form of expression for the clause intro-
duced by the second ki. See (42. (6).
(6) See (42. (IO)- Lahar is rather a favourite word of Galib's
in the sense of ' idea.'
(7) For jo see 142. (2). See also 87. 8.
(8) The subordinate clause here conveys the exact words of the
request.
(9) Ehtimdl ' presumption,' in correspondence with the tense of
the subordinate clause. See App. A, Form VIII.
(10) For munsarim ' maniger ' see App. A, Form VII.
(11) The subordinate clause explains the predicative participle
likhd in the exact words of the newspaper. For tdrikh see App. A ,
Form II., and see the Remarks for explanation of the a.
(12) Compare (42. (3)- Sir pit n° Jci bat' a matter of head-beat-
ing' (in token of sorrow), 'a sad job.' See 24. On the form of
the word ijdzat, see App. A. Hem. F. IV.
(13) Translate ' He said that he was expecting you,' the phrase
up kd ndm leke being redundant in the English idiom. Where a
third party is mentioned, an adjustment of this kind is necessary
for the proper understanding of the Predicative clause.
(14) See (42. (6)- The sarddr is the chief house-servant, gene-
rally a ' bearer.'
(15) See 142. (4)- The Persian mabddd, preceded by ki, is
often used for aisd na ho.
145i Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) I saw it stated in the Oudh Akhbar that a meet-
ing of Taluqdars would be held at the Pavilion of the
Kaisar Bag at two o'clock on Saturday. ("2) It behoves
PART II. EXERCISE XX. lUl
you to bo cautious in the adjustment of this dispute.
(3) Ask the witness if he speaks English. (4) Tell the
syce to go and wait half-way. (5) You did a very pru-
dent thing in setting him free without security. (6) I
am at a loss how to refute this calumny. (7) He boasted
that he would mate him without his queen. (8) You did
a great service to the Government in putting down the
rebels at the very first. (9) I have a strong suspicion
that he, too, was concerned with you in this dacoity.
(10) I do not approve of your habit of flattering me at
every turn. (11) It was his custom to take a stroll in the
early morning. (12) The four agreed among themselves
to hunt in company. (13) Knock at the door and ask if
the master is at home. (14) He told my son he was
coming to my house to-morrow. (15) I entreat yon to
overlook this my first offence.
14-Gi Directors.
(1) On the model of (43. ll- 'Stated* Itkhd, because native
papers are lithographed.
(2) AS in 14-2. (8). 'To be cautious' may be picturesquely
rendered duen bden deJchnu 'looking to the right and left.'
(3) ' Do you speak English ? ' tumse angrezl all ? better than turn
angrezt bolte.
(4) Turn the subordinote clause ' having gone half-way, pit.'
(5) Turn ' You did great prudence in that, without having taken
«eeurity, you gave him release (chhutktirti).' See 96. f°r *•!"•' I""'-
tii-ipial phrase. The sentence is ironical.
(6) On the model of (4-3. IO-
(7) 'Without his queen,' in the Hindustani idiom, 'having
removed the queen,' farzln ulh<"ike.
(8) 'Service to the Government ' is here sufficiently translated by
khair-khicnhi ' well-wishing.' 'At the very first,' pahle pahal men.
(9) ' A strong suspicion/ gumtin-i-giitib. ' Concerned with you,1
ttrd shdmil-Ml, lit. ' included in your condition.'
102 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(10) Turn ' I am not approving (ravdddr) of this custom in that
you flatter me at every turn (har phirkar).'
(11) See (4-2. (9)' 2%« mav be omitted in the subordinate
clause. ' To take a stroll,' cMhal qadami Jcarnd) with which com-
pare our phrase ' forty winks ' for ' a nap.'
(12) Turn 'They made compact ('ahd) among themselves that,
come, we all four together (milTcar) will hunt.' See 681 6.
(13) See (42. (6)- Use the Past Conjunctive Participle in the
first clause.
(14) Here the orntio recta of the subordinate clause is, ' I am
going to your father's to-morrow.'
(15) On the model of (43 . 8 — ' I entreat,' multamis liun or merd
iltiiiias hai. ' To overlook ' or ' pass over,' darguzar karnd (se).
EXERCISE XXI.
Adverbial clauses are those which refer to the
(a) time (fc) place, or (c) manner, and to the (d} ends,
(e) reasons, or (/) conditions of the action of the
principal verb. This Exercise deals with the relations
of time, place, and manner.
« The construction of clauses of this kind is
similar to that of the Relative clauses explained aud
illustrated in Exercise XX — that is to say, the adverbial
clause, withjafe, jahdn, jidhar, jyun, or jaun, stands first
as a rule, and is followed by the chief clause with or
without the respective correlatives. In short, the normal
shape and order of the clauses are those of the line
Where the bee sucks there suck I.
The particle lei may be combined with jal, etc., in the
same manner asitis with^'o, jaisd, &ndjitnd (135.). The
PART II. EXERCISE XXI. 103
particle also, in cases where tho adverbial clause is
not initial, may take the place of jab or jabse ' when ' or
' since.'
Jabtak ' as long as,' with a negative verb corresponds to
our ' until.'
i The relative phrases jis waqt, jis jagah, jis
taraf, jis tarah, or jaise, constantly replace the adverbs
named in the preceding section. Jyun, jaun, jon, are
very rarely used, but the phrases jaun taun ' somehow,'
jon kd ton ' as before,' and jonhin ' precisely as,' or ' pre-
cisely when,' are common enough in colloquial Hin-
dustani.
The correlatives in general use are us waqt, waldn,
U'lliar, us tarah, aise, etc.
The adverbial combinations, ' before that,' priusquam
or antequam, ' after that,' postquam, etc., are represented
in Hindustani by qabl iske ki, ba'd uskc /a., etc.
15Oi Translate into English: —
>- (1)
^.« u-^Lv^- (3) ^jb ub
^ (5)
r (0) Uf jf
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
;>.liJv.« LU- ^j ^Vr J£AU:>- (7)
<_»UJ \^\ ^L ^—ty j* (8)
( — 9j&u+s>- (9) blj
.£ ^ y ^c. (10)
s (11)
(U)
^ ^l^r (15)
151.
(1) Yud-parna, as compared with ydd-hond, is ' cliance recollec-
tion.' Compai-e 73. 2- Be-iTchtiydr, lit. 'without power,' like
inajbur, 84-. I- Translate ' I cannot help laughing,' etc.
(3) See (48. sub Jin. Barandd (Hindi) or bardmcia (Persian).
(4) The collocation is elegant. Qazd is the 'sors suprema.' Comp.
the expression haiza Jcarnd, | |Q. (6).
(5) The action denoted by the gerund with thd is immediately
antecedent to the event described in the succeeding clause. Trans-
late ' He had no sooner . . . than,' etc.
(6) See J38. 5- Ba-iaur gumbaz he 'in the manner of a dome,'
a pedantic paraphrase of gumbaz-ddr 'dome.l.'
(7) See |38. 4-
(8) Si-jinsihi ' intact,' lit. ' in the nature of it.' Compare the
similar Arabic phrase given at 140. 2-
PART II. EXERCISE XXI. 105
(10) Tasawwur karnu in the modal clause is 'to imagine.' For
this verbal see App. A, Form V. ; see 68. '3- and 137. *4 for
verbals from the some root.
(11) See ||7. I.
(12) This sentence is very neatly worded. Translate ' The only
plan I could think of was,' etc.
(13) Qarib hni, impersonal, equivalent to ' nearly.' Jdwen, an
alternative form of jd'en. Comp. dwen, 14-3 (15)-
(14) In this example the correlative adverb only is expressed.
Saht is one of those idiomatic terms which it is often easier to under-
stand than translate. The original sense of the word is ' endured '
or ' allowed ' (sahnd), and the clause may be rendered here ' Then
you will allow I am right.' See Taulat, VII, 69, also (82. 10.
below.
(15) Translate ' One more blemish may be put up with where
there are a thousand already.' From Galib.
152, Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) You have no resource left but to take service.
(2) I will not leave you till you grant my petition.
(3) So far as it is possible to prevent it, do not let this
secret get abroad. (4) It must be more than fifty years
since the Queen ascended the throne. (5) Sit where my
voice may easily be heard. (6) When you have -wasted
so many years already, a few more days won't signify.
(7) When it was his own turn to suffer, he roared out.
(8) The stars were still shining when he rose as usual
for morning prayer. (9) His eyes were no sooner closed
than he was in another world. (10) Wherever you find
any curiosit)', bring it me just as it is. (11) He could
not have gone five or six steps when suddenly he heard a
man's voice close by. (12) Go and wait at the place
where I first met you. (13) Why should I begin to ill-
treat you now, after having treated you so well before r*
(14) I saw what was in his mind before he could make
any complaint. (15) He went out shooting u week ago.
106 EXERCISES IN MINDOSTAX1.
153 1 Directions
(1) See 150. I2- 'Resource,' surat, something like the Latin
modus vlvendi.. The word has many meanings, and is a noun of
unity from the same root as the verbals noticed in 1 5 1 . 10.
(2) See 150. 3- 'I wiH not leave you' may be turned by the
phrase pind na chhorungd.
(3) Omit ' to prevent it.' Turn ' Let not a disclosure of this
secret take place,' See 76. I3-
(4) On the model of 150. 4-
(5) Turn ' Sit (in) such a place that wherefrom my voice may
be well heard ' (Jean parnd).
(6) For the second clause I50.r5' — chand din aur said.
(7) Turn 'When (misfortune) lighted on (an-banniii) his own
head he squeaked ' — chin bolnd ' the cry of a trapped animal.'
(8) For ' when ' use kl. ' As usual,' apne nia'mul par.
(9) On the model of 1 5 Q . 5-
(10) Eemember the hint of 138. 4- 'Just as it is' may be
translated by the phrase noticed at 1 5 1 . 8, or by the word
amdnat.
(11) The tense of the first verb is the Past Presumptive.
' When,' ki. ' Close by,' nazdik se.
(12) 'To meet,' do char hand (se). The idiom of two becoming
four refers of course to the eyes.
(13) On the model of |500 I(- Use nekl karnii ;uid burd'i
karnd for the verbs.
(14) Contruct as in the last sentence. ' What was in his mind,1
ma ft zamir — an Arabic phrase.
(15) Turn ' To him a week was (hud) that he had gone,' etc.
EXERCISE XXII.
Resuming from 147. the present Exercise
shows the construction of those adverbial clauses which
express the ends or the reasons of the state or action
denoted by the principal verb, and are therefore culled
Final and Causal.
II. EXERCISE XXII. 107
Final clauses are constructed like Predicative-
clauses (141. ), that is to say, they follow the principal
vt-rb and are linked to it by ki ' that,' ' so that,' ' in order
that,' or by id ki or ki td, or by td alone, which is the
Persian mode.
Negatively final clauses, which, in English, are prefaced
by the conjunction ' lest,' are introduced by the phrase
aisd naho ki, which has been already noticed, 14-2. (4), in
connection with verbs of fearing.
156i Causal clauses, on the other hand, generally
precede the principal clause, after the manner of the tem-
poral, local and modal clauses which were the subject of
the last Exercise, and are introduced by jo ki or chunk!,
meaning ' since ' or ' because,' or by az-bas-ki, a Persian
compound which signifies ' inasmuch as.'
They may, however, follow the principal clause, and,
in this case, are linked to it by the conjunction kyunki, or
the phrases kis lie ki, kis waste ki, etc , or by ki alone,
with an anticipative phrase, such as is sabab se, in the
leading clause.
157i Translate into English :—
108 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
^'U (5)
158.
(1) The compound par-jdnd here means 'to be exercised,' or
' brought to bear.'
(2) From the Alf Laila, where Sindbad and his companions fall
into the hands of a man-eating Polyphemus. Aise bare marne se
•from such a cruel death," or ' way of dying.' See 48. stl^ fin-
(3) The Final clause in this example is easily converted into a
Predicative by the omission of id, and the adoption of the oratio
recta.
(5) See |06. f°r *ne duplication of the Participle, and also
130. IO- f°r tue leading clause.
(6) From a native Grammar, to the effect that the sign of the
agent is not used when the verb is intransitive. Note use of Per-
sian izdfat.
(7) Meri khattr ' obliging me.1 Khatir is here equivalent to
khutlr-duri.
(8) Translate ' You had better post a sentry,' etc. See 91.5-
PART II. EXEKCISE XXII. 10(J
(9) Khod khodke ' digging and digging,' the reduplication of the
Past Conjunctive Participle denoting persistence. Close question-
ing is the sense here. Take is sabub se and ki together, ' because."
For mutawaffa see App. A, Form V- The word is of the same form
as mittabanna, (30. 7-
159 • Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) I should not wonder if he has deceived you, in
order to win your good will. (2) Inasmuch as nothing
was found against me in the informers' statements, I was
not summoned. (3) Write me word of his departure
thence, in order that I may set on foot the preparations
for his reception. (4) Grease his palm a little lest he
put a spoke in our wheel, (b) As this verb is transitive,
the sign of the agent is used in the past tenses. (6) You
ought to confess your fault, for reconciliation is impos-
sible without it. (7) Chastisement ought to be inflicted,
to the intent that people may see it and take warning.
(8) Be careful what yon say, for the abuse of others will
not advance your own cause. (9) He shook the pot to
find oat what it was filled with. (10) As he learned
English in his childhood, he must be more or less a
proficient in the language.
tf>O« Directions.
(1) Turn ' What wonder that he may have given deceit that (fa)
he may make you satisfied (rdzi) with himself.'
(2) Az Las ki followed by lihazd 'therefore' in the correlative
clause. 'Against me,' meri taraf. 'I was not summoned,' talabi
nahln hii'i, lit. 'A summons was not (seat me).' The Pa
should be avoided when the sense can be expressed without it.
(3) 'To set on foot,' bar-pd kar-dend. 'Reception,' tW/<y/,«7, the
technical term for meeting a visitor and escorting him to hit
destination.
110 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(4) Literal translation is impossible in expressions of this kind,
and the idea of 'greasing' the palm would disgust a high-caste
Hindu. The nearest equivalent phrase must be sought for, and
among other expressions for bribery, munh mithd karnd ' the
sweetening of the mouth,' will serve the turn here. ' To put a
spoke in our wheel ' may be rendered ' cast an impediment in our
business.' There is, however, a somewhat similar idea in the
phrase paliie men ot aru-dend ' to put a catch in the wheel.'
(5) On the model of 1 5 7. 6.
(6) ' Without it ' should be fully rendered barjair iqrur Tc?e.
(7) Turn ' With this intent (murad) chastisement ought to be
given, that people, seeing it (Past Conjunctive Participle) should
grasp warning.' See 91. I2-
(8) Turn ' Having controlled (your) tongue, speak, because (fo>
lie k'i) abuse of others will not answer (pesh-jdnd) in your
interests.' See (4-0. J2-
(9) ' To find out,' td dari/dft ho.
(10) ' As,' jo lei. Turn the correlative clause ' He will be holding
rakhtu hogd) little (or) much proficiency,' omitting 'in the lan-
guage ' as unnecessary.
EXERCISE XXIII.
161 1 A Conditional clause conveys the conditioner
limitation under which the state or action denoted bj
the principal clause holds good.
It stands or is put forward first (hence the term pro-
tasis), and is introduced by the conjunctions agar or jo
' if,' and is followed by the apodosis, or consequent propo-
sition, prefaced by the illative particle to.
The introductory particles of both protasis and apo-
dosis are often omitted, when the sense is obvious with-
out them.
PART II. EXERCISE XXIII. Ill
Tbere are two classes of conditions, viz.
(1) those which may be or may have been realised;
(2) those which might have been, but were not, realised.
The present Exercise deals with the first only. By the
nature of the case, the tenses generally used in the
expression of conditions of this character are tho
Dubious tenses, viz. the Aorist and the Present and Past
Dubious ; but the historic tenses are also employed
when the speaker, so to say, begs the question of the
realisation of the condition. Thus, for example, (cigar)
hukm lio (to) jd'un 'If the order is (given), I go';
but, if the realisation of the condition is assumed, as in
'If he gives you the money (which he will do), bring it
to me,' we shall have jo usne riipaya diyd mere pds li-do.
And the same construction is lawful, if the clause is
temporal, that is to say, if instead of jo 'if,' we read jab
' wlien.'
163i Conditional clauses are on occasion convertible
into Predicative by inverting the order of the clauses
and using ki in place of agar; e.g., kyd kJmb hai Id ijazat
ho ' how nice if leave is allowed ! ' And hence arises the
optative form of the Conditional clause, where kdsh takes
the place of the leading clause, with or without ki or jo;
a.s, kdsh ij'/zat ho ' would that leave be allowed ! ' or, 'if
only leave be allowed ! '
1 Translate into English :—
112
J y ,-Jj (4) ^ ^Lu
*;
(10)
165, Notes.
(1) From the Akhldqi Ndsiri. Compare the English proverb,
' One swallow does not make a summer.' Awe for d'e often occurs in
the Aorist, and is usefully unambiguous. So uwegi in (2).
(2) For merd zimma, see 1 2 2 . 2- See 136.6 for the form of
the tense in the protasis.
(3) See 1 2 7.
(4) (Agar) bane ' if the thing can be done,' equivalent to (agar)
hosake, (agar) merd bos chale. See 76. 6.
(5) Hai, not ho, because the love of life is taken for granted.
(6) An astrological forecast, in which the result is stated as cer-
tain to follow the fulfilment of the condition. Our idiom requires
a present tense in the protasis and a future in the apodosis.
(7) Warq is the ' leaf of a MS. The sentence is from Galib.
(8) Auqut, the Arabic plural of icaqt. The sense of the word
here is 'condition.' Comp. our phrase 'hard times.' Auqut also
means ' wages' (means of living or passing time). Galib, in using
PART II. EXERCISE XXUI. 113
the future in the apodosis, evidently looks forward to a visit from
his friend.
(9) Sahcan, Arabic accusative of sahv ' inadvertence,' used ad
verbially ' inadvertently.'
(10) From the Alf Laila. See (63.
i Translate into Hindustani: —
(1) If you ask me the truth, I should say he was a
fool. (2) I will get him shod somewhere, if possible.
(3) If you are not angry, why speak crossly ? (4) I
shall certainly kill you, if you scream out. (5) Which-
ever of the three I many you to, the remaining two will
be displeased. (6) Leave off talking nonsense, if you
wish to be respected. (7) If an opportunity occurs, I
will make good the deficiency to-morro\v. (8) How nice
if the rains have begun ! (9) Oh ! that I may get
privilege leave ! (10) The prevention of bribery shall be
contrived, if I can manage it.
ICTi Directions.
(1) Omit agar in the protasis, and remember that the Predica-
tive clause after ' say ' must be in the oratio recta.
(2) The protasis, as in I64-. 4- The form of verb in the apo-
dosis will be causal. See 79. IS-
(3) Let jo introduce the protasis, and turn the apodosis ' of cross
(ukhrl ukhr't) words what is the intention (garz) ?'
(4) Put the verb of the protasis in the Past tense, as the more
forcible way of making the person realise the threat.
(5) The protasis should be arranged thus : ' If your marriage
with whom of these three (t'» tinon men se jiske suth) I shall make,'
etc., with attention to the principle laid down in (38. 4-
(G) Turn the protasis ' If your honour is dear (manzAr) to you,'
translating 'your' by the reflexive pronoun.
(7) Omit agar. ' To make good a deficiency ' may be idiomatically
mull-mi by Jca.tr nik(il-lendtlit. 'to cause the fraction to come out,'
•make up the balance, ' i-tc.
(8) See (63.
8
114 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(9) See (63. Turn 'Would that to me privilege leave be
received (mil-jdnd) ! ' RuJchsat ri'dyati is the technical term.
(10) The Ihird of the phrases mentioned at 165. 4- ma7 he
adopted for the protasis. ' To be contrived,' tajwtz-hond.
EXERCISE XXIV.
We now come to the second of the two classes
of conditions named in |62> v^z-» those conditions which
might have been, but were not, realised ; in other words,
the time for the realisation of which has passed by.
Hence the propriety of the native term Past Conditional
for those tense-forms of the Hindustani verb which are
reserved for use in this connection, either in the protasis
or apodosis of the compound sentence.
The Past Conditional is formed from the Past Imper-
fect by dropping the auxiliary thd, or by using hotd
instead of thd. A third form is obtained by using hotd
instead of thd in the Past Remote; and the tense thus
formed may be distinguished as the Past Conditional
Remote.*
1{>*^« But while one or other of these three forms is
indispensable in the protasis of conditional sentences of
this class, the Past Imperfect is frequently retained in
* Mir Insha Ullah, the learned author of the Daryde Lattifat — ;i
compendium of Urdu Grammar in the Persian language — speaking of
the P. Imp. Tense, says — " without thd it is used conditionally and
optatively." His words are, in mdzi bagair thd barde shart o tamannl
dyad (Murshidabad Edition (1850), p. 189). The usage is sim lar in
Persian and Arabic, and Greek scholars will at once recognise the
idiom. The proper place for the Past Conditional in the verb scheme
is immediately after the P. Imperfect. (See App. B.)
PART II. EXERCISE XXIV. 115
the apodosis, when the substantive verb is used in com-
bination with nouns or adjectives. For example, in such
a sentence as ' It would have been well if he had under-
stood the order,' the protasis is either agar (or jo) woh
hukin samajhtd (or samjhd hold, if the period spoken of is
comparatively remote), but the apodosis may be to
achchhd thd, as well as to achchhd hotd.
17Oi The alternative construction explained in |53
is equally available in the case of the unrealised condi-
tion. Thus we have kyd khub hotd (or thd) ki woh hukm
samajhtd ' how well it would have been had he understood
the order.' And similarly for the Past Optative (to
quote the example given by Mir Insha Ullah), kd*h yeh
shakhs njiwwab Ice pas gayd hotd ' Would this person had
gone to the Nawwab! '
1 71 • Translate into English. :—
(5>
^"
(7)
116 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(10)
Ul
172.
(1) The apodosis means 'he would not have left me alive' (to
tell the tale). A common exaggeration. Yorjita, see |Q7. (2)-
(2) Hdjat Tiott ' had there been any need.' MoTitdj ' needy,' a
verbal from the same root as Mjat, will be found below (7). Hdjah
is an everyday word in modern Arabic for 'anything,' as turid
hdjah ' do you want anything ? ' For be kahe tumhare see 96.
(3) Junta hotd, the second form of the Past Conditional, in which
Tiotd takes the place of iha in the Past Imperfect. The shade of
meaning which this rave tense implies cannot always be rendered
in English. Translate ' had he been familiar with ' rather than
1 had he known.'
(4) A larly is here addressing a female relation. For Tcubhi &i,
see 45. 9- The remoter sense of the third form of the Past
Conditional is obvious in this example.
(5) A proverbial form of expression, which denotes an intense
feeling of shame.
(6) For the construction of the apodosis see (69. -^lir *& the
protasis means ' more.'
(7) See 170. The tense in the subordinate clause is the Past
Conditional Passive. For mohtdj see App. A, Form VIII.
(8) Translate ' You ought to have inspected,' etc.
(9) Translate 'Would that all possessed the discretion,' etc.
(10) A wife here remonstrates with her husband for inviting a
friend to dinner without giving her notice. From the Miratu-l-arfts
of Nazii- Ahmed.
173 1 Translate into Hindustani: —
(1) If we had lived in accordance "with our means, we
should never have experienced this want of money.
(2) He kept on complaining, ' Would tliat 1 had not
PART II. EXERCISE XXIV. 117
born ! ' (3) I should have pat dowii gambling, if I had
had the power. (4) It was beyond his sagacity to under-
stand this hint. (5) I should have half killed him, if
the people had not rescued him. (fi) You ought to have
sympathised with me at this critical period. (7) Had we
been on the alert, yonder intrigues would have been
detected. (8) Had I followed the doctor's instructions,
I should have given up drink long ago. (9) Would I
had not been entangled in this mess. (10) If re-
conciliation had been effected then, I should have been
pleased.
174i Directions.
(1) ' In accordance with our means,' haisiyat te, at the beginning
of the sentence. Turn the apodosis ' this emply-handedness (tihi-
dasti) would never hare been.'
(2) Use here the Fast Conditional Bemote in the optative
clause.
(3) Compare this with (66. 10.
(4) Turn thus: 'To him so much sagacity where was that he
should have understood this hint?' An assertion in the interroga-
tive form.
(5) Turn the apodosis ' I should have already made him half
cK'ad,' udh-mua kar-chukd thd.
(6) On the model of 171.8. 'To sympathise with me,' mert
hamdardi karnd.
(7) Turn thus : 'From hither (if) alertness had been, the intrigue
of thither would have been exposed (khul-parnA).'
(8) ' Instructions,' kafni. 96.
(9) Use the 2nd form of the Past Conditional (Optativ.O.
(10) Turn thus : ' I should then indeed (tabM) have been pleased
Unit when reconciliation had become' (Past Conditional Kernou-).
118 EXEKCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
EXERCISE XXV.
173i The Concessional is a form of the Conditional
clause, of which, the construction is illustrated in Exer-
cise XXIII., the difference being that, instead of being
introduced by agar ' if,' the protasis begins with agarclii
' although.' The conjunctions harcliand, go, go ki mean
the same thing, and are convenient alternatives. Hdldnld
'albeit,' bd-wujudeki 'notwithstanding that,' mdnd l;i
' granted that,' etc. are additional forms ; and the collo-
quial saM, 151. T4> is sometimes used at the end of a
concessional clause, just as mdnd Jci is at the beginning.
Our phrase ' no matter how ..." is idiomatically repre-
sented in Hindustani by kaisd hi . . . Jcyun na . . . or
Tcitnd M . . . kyun na . . ., with or without agarclii.
The correlative conjunctions used in the apodosis are
•magar or lekin ' but,' and to bhi, pliir bhi, tdham, etc.
'yet' or 'still.'
Translate into English :—
(2) ^ ^
• t ^
W_VJI*
UU (5) ^ U
PART II. EXERCISE XXV. 119
177. ^o^«.
(1) Ba-zaMn-i-hal, lit. ' in the present language,' that is, ' in
such means of communication as they possess.' The speaker uses
the Present Presumptive, as he lin«rs the monkeys chattering.
(3) The concessional clause is here parenthetic. For muyassar
see App. A, Form II.
(4) For rahu see (7. (3). Mahalbat (root c-^>-) a mimated noun
of action. See App. A, Remarks 5. (3).
(5) Tinnhcn tii.ie ' like yourself.'
(6) For salti see 151. !4- Translate here 'no doubt,' or 'if you
choose to say so.' From a scene in the Taubat, where Kali in
nr^iu's witli his mother against what he considers unwarranted
interference with his mode of life. For tu'urru:, App. A, Form V.
120 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(7) Translate ' No matter in what circumstances," etc.
(8) Peshl men ' in presentation,' that is, ready to be brought
up.' Faisala-hona ' to be decided.' (38)
(9) Here the concessional clause stands at the end of the sen-
tence as an afterthought : ' though it may he four kos distant.'
(10) JaMn, as in (50. 1S' Sdlhd sal (Persian plural and
singular combined) ' year after year.' Cornp. tanhd tan, or tan
tanha ' quite alone.' Eahi, Past Absolute, instead of rahe, Aorist,
because the speaker assumes tho case to have occurred. Khwdh ma-
khwdh ' will he nill he ' : but translate freely, as in (51. J-
17Si Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) Though the debtor kept excusing himself on the
ground that the bond was forged, yet when pressed he
could not deny his own signature. (2) Though you do
not know me, I know you well. (3) However easy a
thing is, it always seems difficult to a beginner. (4) Not-
withstanding that you have disguised yourself in man's
attire, I know from your voice that you are a woman.
(5) Granted that men's natures are different, yet this is
no reason why there should not be concord in a family.
(6) Though the education and correction of children are
indispensable matters, yet a good example is a sine qua
non. (7) I shall not sell it, no matter how much you
offer. (8) Though the story is very long, it is very in-
teresting indeed. (9) Though so enduring and gallanf,
the army was not victorious. (10) You are addicted to
drink, albeit the practice is altogether contrary to the
law of Islam.
179 1 Directions.
(1) Turn thus: 'The debtor, although he kept making (||8)
excuse that "this bond is forged," yet (/dham),' etc. 'Being
pressed ' may be rendered hdrkar.
(2) ' Though,' go ki, less formal than Ti
PART II. EXERCISE XXVI. 121
(3) The concessional clause ia kaiad M d*dn Mm ho, without a
following correlative. Instead of literally translating ' always,'
use the Continuative Ma karnd (|26)-
(4) Turn ' Notwithstanding (bd-wujUdeki) you have macle your-
self in the disguise of men,' etc.
(5) Put the assertion of the correlative clause interrogatively,
yeh fcyd sabab hai, etc.
(6) ' Q-ood example is a sine qua non' namuna short hai. Comp.
44. is
(7) Place the chief clause first and used the idiom described in
5 6 followed by agarchi.
(8) Instead of translating ' very long ' literally, use the com-
pound phrase hU-tatoil.
(9) 'To be enduring and gallant,' mehnat ojdn-fishdni karnd.
(10) Follow the English order of the clauses. A strong expres-
sion for 'being addicted to "is marnd (par). The law of Islam is
the shar' c -i .
2. CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES.
X.
EXERCISE XXVI.
18Oi Another form of the Compound sentence ia
that in which a simple sentence is extended by the
annexure of Co-ordinate clauses. These differ from
Subordinate in being accessory, or even antithetic, to the
leading sentence rather than explanatory of its parts
They may indeed be connected with it by conjunctions
argumentatively appropriate to the meaning they convey,
but are constructively independent, and this too though
they may have common terms.
Thus, in the proverb kisi kd Idth chair, kisi ki znlxin
clialo ' one acts, another talks,' chale is a common term,
122 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
and may be omitted in the co-ordinate clause, as in
English, if we translate 'of one the hand moves, of
another the tongue.'
Co-ordinate clauses may be conveniently classed
as (1) Appositive, (2) Adjunctive, (3) Alternative, (4) Ad-
versative.
The Appositive or Collateral relation is that in which
no intermediary conjunction unites the clauses, as in the
proverb above quoted. This form of the Compound sen-
tence is common in Hindustani, a graphic and fluent
language which dispenses as far as possible with punctua-
tion either by signs or particles.
182 1 Translate into English : —
i (*) V f
jj &j (4)
JJLs (j^
(6)
PART II. EXERCISE XXVI. 123
(10)
183. Notes.
(1) A well-known proverb, which literally means ' Call others jt
and be called ji yourself.' Kahldnd is a unique example of a verb
which is causal in form and passive in sense.
(2) The co-ordinate clause is here contracted into na 'did I
not?'
(3) See 37. 14,
(4) The pronoun usne is understood in the co-ordinate clause.
The Persian hast o nist ' it is and it is not ' has here the meaning of
{ yes or no.' Preserve in translation the etymological connection
between the verbals suul and sd'i'l.
(5) Muru phirnd is an idiomatic expression which applies to a
person wandering about in distress. Our phrase 'knocking about'
is something analogous. The speaker alludes to ' the unemployed.'
Comp. J76. 5- The co-ordinate clause means 'no one notices
(lit. questions) them.'
(6) DekhnA 'to look for.' Mild is often used fir 1h'( in this
kind of phrase. See |Q. 12.
(7) The co-ordinate clause in this example is a common idiom.
Literally, ' What mention of seeing it ? ' that is, ' Let alone having
seen it.' Another mode of expressing the idea is us jagah kd
dekhnd dar kinur main ne ndm bht nahln sund ' Setting aside seeing
the place, I have not even heard its name.'
(8) A remark of Galib's on receiving a friend's photograph. See
60.4-
(9) Apne sarf-i-:aK se ' at my own expense ' ; apnt likH to ' for
his own selling,' that is, for recovery of outlay by the proceeds of
the publication.
(10) This, from the Biiwfu-ydsh of Nazir Ahmed, is a useful
illustration of the concessional sense of sahi, |76. 6. The l;i-t
tlnvc clauses arc a rejoinder to the first.
124 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
184i Translate into Hindustani: —
(1) Some are devoted to philosophy, others have a
greater liking for mathematics. (2) I dared not speak
even, let alone laugh. (3) I asked for leave, and received
a flat refusal. (4) You have seen the Taj, haven't you ?
(5) Some wretch is peeping in by chinks in the door ;
scare him away. (6) We have beaten the whole jungle
\vithoutfindingatraceofgameanywhere. (7) Why should
I object ? I am at the service of my friends. (8) I too
was a tremendous sleeper ; I could have backed myself
against the dead. (9) A new paper is being started here ;
I send two prospectuses with this letter. (10) 1282 A.H.
has begun ; I was born in 1212 ; my seventieth year will
begin next Hajab.
, Directions.
(1) 'Devoted,' fee (76. 4- F°r co-ordinate clause, see 71. 7-
(2) On the model of |82. 7- Turn the first clause, ' To me of
speaking (bat karnd) even daring (yard) was not."
(3) Omit the conjunction. ' Flat refusal,' sdfjawdb.
(4) In the form of (82. 2- 'The Taj,' Taj mahall.
(5) ' Scare away," hushkdrnd, & rustic word for scaring away
birds from the crops.
(6) 'To beat,' jhdrnd. The word was used at (50. n« in t^6
usual sense of 'sweeping.' See (82. 6 for the form of the co-
ordinate clause. ' Finding a trace,' surdg milnd.
(7) Turn ' In this what is my objection ? I am the servant
(khudim) of friends.'
(8) See 60. 3' The co-ordinate clause is murdon se shart bdndh-
kar soil (thi), the speaker being a woman. Shart bdndhni ' to
wager.'
(9) ' To be started," jdri hand ; use the gerund with affix wild.
(10) Turn as follows: 'The jear 12S2 hijri have begun (pU ;
PAET II. EXERCISE XXVII. 125
my birth is of the year 1212 : from month of next Kajab seventieth
year (s&V) will begin.' ' Next ' may be elegantly translated by ab Tee.
See the remark made at 45. 4 en the use of izdfat in this con-
nection. The sentence is taken from Galib's Letters.
EXERCISE XXVII.
In the Adjunctive relation the chief connective
is aur.
This conjunction sometimes denotes simultaneity of
event or action, especially with the gerund. It is also
employed to mark contrast or antithesis, like ' and ' in
English.
In cases where the adjoined clause implies a logical
sequence of thought, aur may be replaced by phir ' then,'
phir bin ' moreover,' pas ' so,' chundncM ' accordingly.'
What are apparently adjunctive clauses, introduced by
is lie ' therefore,' or other similar phrases, are de facto
principal clauses, which are preceded by causal clauses in
which the conjunctions chiinki, etc., have been omitted.
See 156.
187. Translate into English :—
ViU-T K ^Ui ^ ^ U^llc ^ ^ (-2) ^
3\ (4) jj ^ J^ \^ ^ (3)
^ -
126 EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
l^.« (9) c
Jl>- U^
^ ^-i» (io)
c~-
->- _
v
188.
(1) 5aZ«A properly means ' what is right,' and may be so ren
dered here, in which case dil M fchwdhisk may he translated ' what
one wishes.' Note the distinction between hai and Aoti hai. Note
the double meaning of aur.
(2) From Nazir Ahmed's powerful description of cholera in the
first chapter of the Taubat, Ji Tea matldnd expresses the feeling of
uausea, which is one of the first symptoms. The point is that a
man was no sooner taken ill than he died. Compare the alternative
construction at 1 5 0 . 5-
(3) A well-known proverb. Translate ' "\\ hat comparison is there
bti..veeu?' etc. Raja Bhoj is one of the dominantia nomina ot
Hind A Literature.
(4) The aur of contrast in this example may be literally trans-
lated.
PART II. EXERCISE XXVII. 127
(5) We have nothing like this in English. Translate ' Look to
your own insignificance before, etc. Compare the idea of the pro-
verb chhotd munh barl bat ' Small mouth, big words.'
(6) For lol-dthna, see 73. (2)- -B«< kdlnd ' to cut the speech (of
another),' that is, to interrupt or contradict.
(7) For gazab Tea, see 24-. Ba-zdt-i-khtid 'in his own person.'
(8) Ydd farmdnd ' to call for, used of a superior — something like
our ' condescend to remember."
(9) This and the next example are specimens of Gilib's style,
of which several have been given already. Gilib wrote as he
spoke ; and to hear him speak Hindustani was a lesson in itself.
Jazira, of course, means the Andamans. Maulavi Fazl Haqq was a
ringleader in the Mutiny of Fifty-seven.
(10) For sochd Jciyd see 126. Rakh-U, see 74. (3)-
, Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) What comparison is there between you a man and
me a -woman ? (2) First that man came ; then this one ;
more yet will be coming. (3) My son, and capable of
theft ! (4) This amount of labour, and you gasp for
breath ! (5) The autumn harvest was got in, then began
cultivation for the spring harvest. (6) You have stuffed
in so much wood that there is no passage for the air, and
yet you ask why the fire does not burn. (7) It is not ad-
visable to leave him to live alone, accordingly let you and
him continue together. (8) The Sahib won the first game
and I got the second and third : he was vexed at losing
two games (9) It is the property of the loadstone to
attract iron, and the nearer the iron is placed to it, the
greater is the attracting force. (10) This companionship
has altogether spoiled you ; and I regret now that I gave
you permission to go to his house.
128 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Directions.
(1) On the model of 187. 3- Mard, not acfwii, in opposition to
' aurat.
(2) The Past Remote in the first clause, the Past Absolute in tae
second, and the Present Presumptive in the third.
(3) ' Capable of theft,' chori karne (Jce) qdbil.
(4) Use the gerund in the co-ordinate clause : ' gasping for
breath,' which in the Hindustani idiom is ' breath coming into the
nose,' dam nak men and, an expression which is often used to
denote worry or alarm.
(5) ' To be got in ' may be picturesquely rendered by bird par
hand ' crossing of the raft,' metaphorically applied to a successful
result. Khetiydn pi., better than kheti, for ' cultivation, ' to denote
the various kinds of cultivation for the spring crop8.
(6) Lakriydn, not laJcri. Use the Past Absolute for both verbs
in the leading clause.
(7) Omit 'to live' in the first clause, and turn the second
'your his companionship (sdth) let remain (rahd kare).' 126.
(8) Turn the first clause, 'to the Sahib from losing two games
(do bdzi hurne se) vexation was '"
(9) Turn the first clause, ' In the loadstone this property is tlat
it attracts iron.' ' The nearer,' jis qadr nazdtk.
(10) 'Altogether' may be idiomatically rendered pet barhkar
' belly-full.' For ' and ' use pas. For the co-ordinate clause see
142. (3).
EXERCISE XXVIII.
When the relation between the clauses is
Alternative, the Persian conjunction yd ' or,' is used.
' Either . . . or,' is yd io . . . yd ; but when the sentence
is interrogative, the Persian interrogative dyd takes the
place of the first yd.
PART II. EXEKCISk. XXVIII. 1'2'J
The conjunction yd occasionally serves to denote a
marked difference of conduct or condition, in which case
it represents our ' instead of this,' or ' whereas now.'
Other alternative conjunctions are the Hindi verbal
forms chdhe or chdho. and the corresponding Persiar
khwdh, the exact counterparts of the Latin vel, sive, seu.
The interrogative Jtyd also acts the part of an alterna-
tive conjunction, when things or persons are contrasted.
\t Negative alternation is expressed by na . . .
aur na ' neither . . . nor,' the Latin nee . . . neque.
Na . . . na is also used, and occasionally the first na is
dropped, especially in set phrases, such as sdn na gumdn
' nor sign nor suspicion,' that is, 'unexpectedly,' ' without
warning ' ; ziijdda na ham ' neither more nor less.'
The English alternative particle 'else' is represented
in Hindustani by the compounds naMn to or tvarna (wa
tigar na 'and if not '), which are in reality conditional
clauses in a contracted form.
193. Translate into English:—
> f
,.,JoJ \J -5> e^«v^rs- ,-f^J ,-~i L>wi i)i ,.-.8 *J (1)
O" » •• — ; ' v \
\j\ (3) Jii \j.^j Ul>- b ^ *K \JJ\ y {.-
(—J\t£- \J ..>J!
;.- \^. J^H^j i'»>- jJ^ i'y>- ^ ^L***^.* ^.i *jl
^i'ysj (5) ^ Ho' ^.'l^j \jj\ j:\ ^ U^,
130 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
>\ tj rJ (6) £j». Jj^ U<
^_
u,x<> ^ ^£ ^..^jT JL> (7)
^ (8) ^r;^ jy ^.
194,
(1) Compare 60. 5- -^l ««*'*'* maJ be used for ^« »aA(« whei
the clause is subordinate.
(2) The alternative clause is a proverbial expression, which
means literally ' appear moving about,' and may be rendered ' move
on ' or ' be off."
(4) The sentiment is Gulib's. Nasrdn (pi. nasdru), ' Nazarene,'
is the term used in the Qoran to describe Christians. Krishtdn is
the term in ordinary use.
(5) The construction is peculiar. Literally translated, we should
have, ' Searching will not find,' etc. The sense is, ' Search as you
may, you will not find,' etc. Ahl-i-hirfa 'persons engaged in Iradc,'
' tradesmen.'
PART II. EXERCISE XXVIII. 131
(7) Proverbial. Men are supposed to be squatting round a fire,
and the superstition is that if a person pushes in between two of
them to procure a light, there will be a quarrel.
(8) Hawdla dend ' to refer to.' The co-ordinate clause is a com-
pound conditional sentence interrogatively stated : ' It was impos-
sible hut that I should have answered it,' or ' I should of course
have answered it.'
(9) This distich is from a poem by Munsif on the Mutiny, and
expresses his idea of the cause. Rum and Russ always stand for
the Turkish and Russian empires in Persian literature. Observe
that the first na is dropped, (92. ^as> parenthetic, may be trans-
lated here ' and nothing else.'
(10) This graphic bit of description is from the Taubat, Ch. II.
Observe the aur of simultaneity, and translate ' He no sooner set
foot inside,' etc.
Sahm charhu ' a panic mounted on,' where the English idiom is
' fell upon.' Yd ab ' whereas now.'
The idiom of the Aorist bajafo corresponds exactly with our own.
195i Translate into Hindustani : —
(1) I have committed no offence either against God or
against man. (2) Either accompany me or go about
your business. (3) Put the lota in the shade or the milk
will turn. (4) The whole city, Hindus and Mahomedans
alike, are praying for his recovery. (5) Have the M;m-
lavis decreed that India is a 'habitation of war' or not ?
(6) If it will answer your purpose to mortgage the
house, well ; if not, sell it. (7) A week ago I despaired
of life, whereas to-day I was able to get up and join the
company. (8) I am perplexed whether to go home or
spend the hot weather on the hills. (9) Did you confess
of your own accord, or did someone prompt you to do
so ? (10) My paper is used up, or I would have written
on for your amusement.
9*
132 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
1^6i Directions.
(1) In the Hindustani idiom ' any offence neither,' etc. ' Against'
may be translated here by the sign of isafat — the objective geni-
tive.
(2) For the first clause, see 91. 4; f°r the second clause, 193. -•
(3) Either literally, sdya men rakho or dhup se Itachuo ' protect
from the sun,' followed by nahin to.
(4) ' H. and M. alike,' chuho Hindu chuho Musalmdn.
(5) 'To decree,' in the Islamic sense, fatiod dend. 'Habitation
of war,' ddru-l-harb, the technical term for a country in which a
jehad or ' cresoentade ' is lawful, if it is feasible.
(6) Omit ' if ' and ' your.' ' To answer one's purpose,' fed m ni-
Jcalnd (se).
(7) 'A week ago,' elc haft a hud. 'To despair of life,' jan se hath
dhond.
(8) ' To go home,' wildyat jdnd. Turn the second clause, ' in the
heats (garmCon men) to reside on the hill.'
(9) ' Of your own accord,' dp se dp or apne <'p se. ' Omit ' to do
so ' in the co-ordinate clause.
(10) Omit all the pronouns. The rerb in the co-ordinate clause
will be in t,he Past Conditional tense.
EXERCISE XXIX.
When a co-ordinate clause restricts or qualifies
the first, the relation is Adversative, and the conjunctions
in use are par, leltin, magar, or balki, all of which have
the general sense of 'but.' Of these magar is preferen-
tially used for the introduction of an exception or after-
thought ; and balki generally has the enhanoive sense of
' nay more,' or ' nay rather.' To bhi ' nevertheless ' and
tdham 'yet still' are also used as adversative conjunc-
tions.
I'ART II. EXERCISE XXIX. 133
Compound sentences of this class are often little more
than a rhetorical variation of those which form the
subject of Exercises XXITT. and XXV.
i Translate into English: —
J 0)
(2) y
(3) ^
Ijl ^^j
(4)
,. t-
J>
', (5)
(9)
134 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
199 « Notes.
(1) For JaZa se see 77 • J5- For «"<?#£ see (65. 8. Observe
the structure of the adver.-ative clause in this example and in (3).
Comp. the phrasing of 137. I5-
(3) Magar Mn (the French mals oui), in English generally 'yes,'
introductory of an afterthought. Merd Jchatir-lchwah ' suited to niv
ideas.' Comp. (57. 7-
(4) The interrogative Jcyd strengthens the adversative batki, ' nay
more," by deprecating, as it were, the previous remark. Balki may
even be omitted, as in (6), (9). Lend means ' taking ' something
which is given. ' Ain tumJidrd rupdya, literally, ' exactly your
money.' See |4-0. 2> and compare the phrases ' ain waqt par 'in
the nick of time,' ' ain sarak men ' right in the road.' The clause
may be rendered, ' his money is really yours.'
(5) Khali Hasan Jcarke, literally, ' specifying him as Hasan only.'
Compare the phrase elc ek JcarJce 'one by one.' 125. IO- For the
position of the negative see 6 Q , 1 1 .
(6) 'Black indeed! Why, he is, so to say, an upturned griddle.'
Our way of putting it would be, ' Dark indeed ! Why, he is as bluck
as my hat."
(7) Ap Ice dushman (or dashmandn-i-Tiuzur) ' your enemies,'
meaning 'yourself.' Oriental politeness, or servility, avoids the
association of illness with the person of a superior, and prefers to
ascribe it to an enemy. G-cfi guzrl bat ' a thing of the past.'
(8) Translate the adversative clause, ' but no one was kicked.'
Kisi Tee, not kisl ko. See 51. 15, where it was explained that Tee.
not ko, marks the person affected, when the verb used is not transi-
tive.
PART II. EXERCISE XXIX. 135
(9) Translate ' This is not a dog you fcecp, but a money-changer.'
From the story in the Alf Laila, where a dog is described as able
to detect counterfeit coin. For sarruf see A pp. A, Bern. 5 (5).
(10) Ba-muqabali-i-yalcdifjar ' in comparison with one another.'
For mutawassit see App. A, Form V.
2OOi Translate into Hindustani: —
(1) Your comfort, nay more, your safety depends on
your withdrawing from their society. (2) He and I bad
a long consultation in the matter of this outbreak, but
no remedy was arranged. (3) No such book is obtain-
able ; but stay, there are several works on grammar ic
the Government Library : if you wish it, 1 will send for
them. (4) I tried very hard : the cotton kept coming
into the eye of the needle, but never got threaded.
(5) You. have performed a cure ; nay, a miracle. (6) What
do you mean by misapprehension of orders F The plain
fact is you have been guilty of wilful disobedience.
(7) Neither you nor I will read, but he whose turn it is.
(8) You may well call him intelligent — he has au old
head on young shoulders. (9) Not we alone — the whole
city, I may say, long for his advent. (10) Talk as much as
you please, a man's life is the dearest of his possessions.
20 1 1 Directions.
(1) Turn ' Depends on (men) this that you withdraw,' etc.
(2) Turn ' For a long time (der talc) in the matter (bara) of this
outbreak my his together (btiham) consultation was,' etc. 'To be
arranged,' ban-parnti.
(3) On the model of (98. 3- 'Grammar,' sarf-nahr, lit. ' in-
flirt ion and syntax.' 'If you wish it,' ir shad ho.
(4) 'Cotton-thread,' dhittjii. The 'eye' of a needle U i!u'
' mouth ' in Hindustani. ' Never got threaded.' piroyu nahiu y,;_
(5) On the model of 198. 9-
136 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(6) Turn 'misapprehension what meaning? Rather (kalJci) the
plain (suf) word is this that you have knowingly done disobe-
dience-of-orders.'
(7) Turn ' neither I will read noi you will read, but (balJci) whose
turn (it) will be.'
(8) Turn ' Intelligent — what ! thus say, that a beard is on (men)
his belly ' — meaning that he has a long beard. The phrase is pro-
Terbial, and is perhaps the nearest equivalent to the English of the
text.
(9) Turn ' We folk indeed — well — the whole city is desirous
(mushtaq) of his advrnt (amad).'
(10) Turn ' One may say a lakh (lakh Tcoi Jcahe), but more than
all his own life (apiujdn) is dear to everyone.'
PART if.
137
PART III.
SELECTED PASSAGES FOR
TRANSLATION INTO HINDUSTANI.
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.
1, The illustrations of Grammar and Syntax and oi
the more important differences of idiom between Hindu-
stani and English, which are contained in the foregoing
Exercises, are by the nature of the case fragmentary and
unconnected ; and, though they are sufficient for their
immediate purpose of teaching colloquial Hindustani,
something more is wanted before the student can attempt
with confidence the task of translating continuous
English narrative, even of the simplest kind, into good
Hindustani prose. In a word, the diction of the lan-
guage must be studied and an insight gained into the
formation of periods and paragraphs and their linkature
— tantum series juncturaque pallet — before satisfactory
progress can be made in this direction. Under ordinary
circumstances this kind of knowledge is best acquired
l»y an observant study of the best authors, but the short
time usually at the disposal of the learner in this country
is absorbed, so far as the text-books are concerned, in
138 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
spelling out and committing to memory the words, and
in grappling, among other novelties, with the want of
punctuation ; and the consequence is that translation
from English into Hindustani is the bugbear of the
Examination room and — ever afterwards.
It may, therefore, be useful at this point to summarise
in brief the more obvious features of the literary lan-
guage, as a help to appreciation of style, and as a basis
of a few suggestions for the encouragement and guidance
of scholars in their first attempts at imitation.
2, Urdu was, in its beginnings, a modus vivendi
between the Hindu tribes of Northern India and their
Moslem conquerors, which owed its origin to the neces-
sities of the times, and is now their most valuable relic,
It has become by gradual refinement and adaptation the
mother tongue of Hindus and Hahomedans alike, and
lends itself to their respective needs and prejudices with
equal facility. Both parties in the compromise have held
their own ; for, though the Persian character and vocabu-
lary have been naturalised without essential change,
much in the same way as the Mahomedans themselves
have become part and parcel of the population, the core
and structure of the language are Hindi and Hindi
alone. The student will do well, therefore, to bear in
mind from the very first that a due recognition of the
Aryan basis of Hindustani is essential to a right under-
standing of the genius of the language.*
* See, when opportunity occurs, the remarks made on this sub-
ject by Raja Siva Prasad in the English preface to the first edition
of his Grammar of the Vernacular. The prose of Mania vi Xazir
Ahmed and MirzA Nau.'m (Galib), both of Dehli, and the verse
PART III. 1HO
3, Simplicity and directness, for example, are among
the most valuable qualities of Hindustani, which it owes
to its base-form. This may be discerned in various par-
ticulars, to which the attention of the student has been
already drawn ; such, for example, as the use of words of
which the meaning varies with the context, the device of
doubling words to denote energy or distribution, the
absence of case-endings, the avoidance of epithets, the
large use of the Substantive Verb and of elementary
verbs of action and movement, the terseness effected by
the use of the Past Conjunctive Participle and of Causal
and Compound Verbs, the exactitude of the tense-
system, the preference for realistic description which is
manifested in the use of the oratto recta and in the
avoidance of impersonal statements, and lastly, a certain
old world mannerism which proceeds from the love of
what is familiar and conventional.
4, The Semitic aftergrowth has supplemented the
expressiveness of Hindustani, without obscuring the
native simplicity of the srround-form, for the exercise
of a choice in words has tended to the survival of the
fittest, irrespectively of their origin. The best writer is
he who uses these ' fittest ' words, and the best scholar
he who knows why they are the ' fittest,' either per se, or
with reference to the circumstances under which they are
employed.
£>, Another characteristic of the Vernacular is the
of Nazir of Agra, owe their excellence to the fact that these
writers, albeit Mahomedan by birth and education, have accepted
the circumstances under which Urdu becume a language and
L:ivi> used it accordingly.
140 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI
occasional cereinoniousuess of the phraseology. The art
of putting things vernaliter, i.e. with attention to etiquette
and custom, is a feature of orientalism which adds dignity
to the affairs of common life ; and though, in the case of
Hindustani, the forms used are mostly Persian, they are
sufficiently in accord with Hindu sentiment to be very
generally appropriate.
{>, More distinctly rhetorical characteristics of the
language are the regard paid to euphony and rhythm,
not only in words and clauses, but throughout whole
periods, and the management of the linkature rather
by subtle changes in the form and setting of the diction
than by the use of connective particles.*
7 1 Suggestions for Guidance.
(1) Alteration in the normal order of the words in a
trauspositive language like Hindustani is a natural
* Part II. deals with the principles of clause formation rather in
a syntactical point of view than as an element of style, which, as
said above, is best studied at first-hand from books. Students are
now exceptionally fortunate in the possession of an admirable text-
book, the Taubat of Nazir Ahmed. This is a story of everyday
life among a class of natives who speak Hindustani in its perfec-
tion, by one of themselves. It abounds in dialogue, is didactic
and rhetorical in parts, and supplies incidentally a large number of
words used in public as well ac private life, and is the best; avail-
able resource (no better could be desired) for obtaining a mastery
of the language, for whatever purposes it may be required. It is
most earnestly hoped that Probationers for the Indian Civil Service,
or officers who desire to cultivate the ' great Indian Vernacular ' for
practical purposes, will not rest content with a hasty perusal of
the first few chapters only which the Examiners demand, but that
they will complete the study of the entire work after they havo
become domiciled in India, and make it their vade mecum, for such,
in more ways than one, it deserves to be.
PART III. J41
means of emphasis, which the translator should make
the most of, so long as he is careful to avoid ambiguity
or dissonance.
(2) It has been already pointed out that expressions
connected with the use of Time take the precedence.
Time also is the chief function of the verb, and closes
the utterance. Of all tenses none require more care in
translation than the English present. Thus, in such a
sentence as ' Send him to me when he comes,' the tem-
poral clause means 'Avhen he has come,' and the verb
must be rendered in Hindustani by a Past tense. Com-
pare the sentences given at 4-4- • 5 and 68. 5- See
also 162.
(3) Where there is a choice of terms or phrases, the
most familiar is likely to be the fittest, but it is good
style to vary the rendering, if the term recurs. In
examinations, the student should remember that the
knowledge of a word includes ability to spell it correctly
(see 6. 4). If he is at a loss for the representative
of a word, of which the meaning is important to the
general sense of the passage before him for translation,
he should use a paraphrase rather than leave a gap or
resort to transliteration.
(4) Exactitude in the use of pronouns, whether as a
matter of grammar or etiquette, is essential. They are
omitted only when the sense is unmistakeable without
them. The usage of the Reflexive apnd (see Exercise VI.)
is specially important.
(5) The realism of Hindustani bars the easy transfer
of personal qualities to things inanimate and vice r>
which is characteristic of English. (See 24-.) It is better
to omit an epithet than translate it unidiomuticallr.
142 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(6) Personal and individual expression leing charac-
teristic of Hindustani, the English Passive should not be
literally reproduced in translation, except when the
agency is necessarily or intentionally vague. For
example, such a sentence as ' The throne was occupied by
a tyrant ' can only be rendered ' A tyrant sat upon the
throne,' whereas ' Many men were killed in the battle '
may be translated literally.
Hindi neuter verbs and Arabic and Persian verbals in
combination with Tiona are often convenient representa-
tives of the English Passive. (See 119.)
(7) The English prepositions ' of,' ' to,' ' for,' ' by,' and
' with ' after adjectives and verbs require careful atten-
tion, or breaches of idiom will be inevitable. In this
matter, the earlier sections of this work are very im-
portant.
(8) Clause for clause translation is equally ineffective
with word for word translation, whether from English
into Hindustani or from Hindustani into English, for
the English arrangement of sentences and their pa'ts,
pauses, and parentheses is no guide to the formation of
a Hindustani period, and must often be broken up by
inversion or detachment to suit the methods of the latter.
The translator should realise the general sense and argu-
ment of the passage he is engaged upon, and think how
best he could explain it in outline to a native ignorant of
English.
(9} In particular, the initial sentence should always
be clearly and concisely worded, by the detachment of
accessories, which may either form a separate sentence or
be pieced in with what follows.
(10) The adjustment of relative clauses is often a key
PART III. 143
to the cast of a period or paragraph. These clauses, and
indeed all clauses which, in the idiom of Hindustani,
precede the main statement, are especially useful in the
passage from point to point of a description, without the
more formal liukature of conjunctions, and at the same
time without sacrifice of coherence. As in Latin, a great
point is to let the verbs have room.
Punctuation is, or ought to be, inherent in the dic-
tion.*
(11) A good prose style includes attention to sound as
well as to sense ; in other words, to the choice of harmo-
nious worae, tuwt phrases, and to concinnity and congruity
in their combination, and to the symmetrical and rhythmic
balancement of clauses. f
(12) Finally, the student will find it an invaluable
assistance in translation to have stored his memory with
specimen passages from the text-book, or with any well-
told tale or description he may meet with.
* Native publications are never punctuated, but a good reader,
though he makes no pauses except in the momentary action of
taking breath, is always intelligible to the practised listener. I
have among my papers a tract lithographed for private circulation
in 1863, in which tho writer instructs his compatriots in the art of
humouring the foibles of the ' Sahib-log.' One suggestion, under
the head of Office-work, is that when a Munshi has to read papers
to tho Sahib, he should make pauses in the English fashion BO aa to
enable him (tho Sahib) to understand.
t Carried to excess, this is the rangtnt 'eb&rat (or ' florid style ')
of the Lucknow schoi-1. The plausibility of native 'petitions ' and
the skill with which half-truths and the inferences therefrom are
disguised by a caressing smoothness of diction, have often been
noticed. This is the charb-zabCml, or ' oiliness of speech,' of tv*»
professional scribe, and is a very different thing from the shtrm-
wib'int of the accomplished author.
144 EXKRC1SES IN HINDUSTANI.
3, The Selected Passages which follow are divided
into four sections of gradually increasing difficulty,
though it is necessary to remember that the simplest
English is not always the easiest to translate.
(1) Fables and Apologues. — Many of these are ancient
friends in a slightly altered guise. They are adapted,
for the purposes of this work, from the original Hindu-
stani of Nazir Ahmed.
(2) Easy Narratives from Modern Indian History. —
These extracts are translated from a History of India
written in the Hindi language for the use of country
schools by Raja Siva Prasad, C.S.I., whose name 1 a<
been already mentioned.
(3) Miscellaneous Pieces, relating to Indian subjects. —
The first nine of these form a single narrative from the
pen of the late Lord Lawrence, which is quoted in Vol. 1.
of Mr. Bosworth Smith's admirable Life, and are chosen
partly for their continuity and partly for the interest
and suitability of the subject-matter. The remaining
Pieces of this Section are selected for exercise in trans-
lating from a style of English which is not easily handled
in Hindustani. They are borrowed from Dowson's Exer-
cises, a work which contains no sufficient hints for the
guidance of the student, and is, therefore, little used.
The notes refer to a translation of my own, which was
made for the benefit of Officers under my instruction at
the Staff College in 1882.
(4) Her Majesty's Proclamation on assuming the
Empire of India at the Close of the Mutiny. — This was
read aloud in the first instance at a Darbar held at
Allahabad on November 1st, 1858. The authorised ver-
sion of this document, which was recited upon the same
PART III. SECTION I. 145
occasion, was the work of the Mir Munshi of the Foreign
Office at that time, and is referred to in the notes
attached. The stateliness of the English original is
fairly represented in translation, and the terms are well
chosen.*
SECTION I.
FABLES AND APOLOGUES.
1.
*A starving fowl was scratching at a dung-hill in
search of a grain of corn, when after a long time it
suddenly 2 came upon a costly pearl. 3 ' Alas ! for my
* Further practice for the advanced student may be found in the
study of the Urdu versions of the Indian Peual and Civil Proce-
dure Codes, which illustrate the efficacy of the language aa a legal
instrument. They who wish to proceed farther may consult the
translation of Mill's Political Economy, which was published by the
Aligarh Society some years ago, or a recently finished version of
the First Part of Butler's Analogy, by Mr. Williams of Shahjehan-
yur. Both these works are fairly successful illustrations of the
adaptability of Hindustani for the purposes of sustained argument
and philosophical disquisition. For Logic, the best available
treatise in the Vernacular is M. Nazir Ahmed's Mab'idt ul Ilikmat
(1st Edit. 1871), which is based on Persian and Arabic works in
use among the Moliamedans. A work in English and Urdti, by
llev. T. J. Scott, of the American Mission in Oudh ami Rohilkhand,
culled Quw&'iful Mantiq (1873), should be an equally valuable aid
to Missionaries and others who are interested in the inner life of
the Indian Moslems.
146 EXERCISES TN HINDUSTANI.
ill-luck ! ' sighed the unhappy fowl. J After all this toil
* I have got only a pearl, 5 which can neither soothe my
feelings nor appease my hunger. 6 If some jeweller
jr rich man had found it, he would have prized and
loved it ; 7 but I am hungry enough to prefer a single
grain of barley to any number of such pearls as this.'
Directions.
(1) Omit 'when' before the second clause, so as to make the
clauses co-ordinate. Note that of the five indefinite articles in the
first sentence the first and last are to be represented by ek. Omit
' of corn,' as the term is general, but retain ' of barley ' in the last
sentence. ' Starving ' would be insufficiently rendered by IhukhA
' hungry.' The better way is to avoid the epithet and say ' being
distressed by hunger,' bh&k se be-t*ib hokar, to follow the noun.
For the verb use kurid-rahna, and omit ' at,' which is really a part
of the verb. Use ko with the object.
(2) The independence of the second clause will be increased by
changing the subject of the verb. Say, therefore, ' a pearl turned
up' (nikalnti). See 198. 4-
(3) This sentence requires consideration. To begin with, the
parenthetical use of the verb is impossible in Hindustani. Then
again, our peculiar use of the verb ' sigh ' cannot be reproduced,
and 'unhappy' is best avoided as an epithet of 'fowl.' Turn,
therefore, ' Seeing the pearl, the fowl sighed dolefully and said,
Uas ! ' etc. (to end of piece).
"4) The contemptuous turn of the expression may be given by
Inserting the order of the words and introducing the emphatic
particles bhi and to, as mujhko mil& bhi to mott.
(5) Avoid the idea of agency, which the English idiom easily
•it tributes to inanimate things, by turning thus: ' from which neither
solace can be to my heart nor quieting to my hunger.'
(6) Begin with yeh mott instead of the pronoun ' it,' and see
Exercise XXIV. for the tense of the verbs.
(7) The adversative clause should be constructed in harmony
with the preceding, as follows : ' but in my behalf in such hunger
PART III. SECTION I. 14?
one grain of barley would have been (thfc) much better than a lakh
(see 20 1 • 1O) of such pearls as this." To express 'such . . . aa
this,' double the pronominal adjective.
2.
1 Someone taxed a lazy fellow with lying long in bed
after he was awake, and asked him how he occupied him-
self. He replied that 2 he occupied himself in deciding
a very intricate case. 3'When I wake up,' said he,
'two fellows, 4 called Activity and Sloth, come to me.
5 Activity tells me to get up at once and engage in uiy
worldly duties. Sloth replies that there is no need to
get up yet — the whole day 6 is left for worldly duties ;
7 one should take one's ease in the cool of the morning.
8 And so they go on, each trying to convince his oppo-
nent, while I arbitrate between them. 9 Surely you will
allow that such a difficult case cannot be decided in a
hurry 'i '
Directions.
(1) This piece consists of two parts, a question and the reply. Tho
first sentence contains the question, and may be turned as follows :
' Someone asked a lazy fellow — that — your eye indeed opens early
in the morning, but what do you keep doing lying on and on in bed
till so late?' See ||4. 3,8.
(2) Begin the reply here with the oratio recta, omitting ' said he '
in the next clause.
(3) Ecpeat the phrase used by the questioner.
(4) Express this parenthetically : ' the name of one is A. and the
of the other S.'
(5) To briiiL? out the personality, instead of 'Activity,' say 'that
person whose name is Astivity ' j and so for 'Sloth' in the next
sentence.
(U) 'is loft,' parti hai. Seo ||7. 2.
148 EXEECISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(7) Omit the conjunction and tuin ' This time of coolness is fcr
ease.'
(8) Turn ' In short, the two opponents go on convincing one
another, and I,' etc. Use the Progressive form of verb (118) in
the first clause, and the Continuative (126) in the other.
(9) This form of appeal to justice is more directly expressed in
Hindustani, as follows: 'Do you do justice (imp.), that, how can
such a difficult case be decided quickly ?' Comp. \TQ. 8.
3.
1 An old man and his son were on a journey. They
had a pony with them for carrying their traps, and went
on foot themselves. The people said, 2 ' What idiots
these two are ! 3 They keep the pony for show and do
the hard work themselves.' 40n this the old man
mounted the pony, and then they said, ' What a cruel
father ! He rides 5 at ease himself, and the son 6 plods
wearily along behind.' Then the old man got off and
made his son ride ; 7 and the cry was, ' What a grace-
less son ! The aged sire walks, and 8 the sturdy youth
is not ashamed to ride.' Then the old man rode in
front himself and mounted his son behind. Again the
people said, 9 ' Apparently it is a borrowed pony, and
carries the men and the baggage too ! 10 Have the
fellows no pity ? '
Directions.
(1) The form of this piece needs little alteration. The difficulty
is the choice of natural and congruous terms suited to the simple
humour of the piece. The second sentence may be introduced by
aur, and more pointedly expressed as follows: ' A pony was with
(them) — (they) loaded on the pony (their) clothes and bedding,
and both father and son went on foot.' Ption pffon chalnd, better
PART III. SECTION I. 119
here than paidal chalnti (143. 7)- r/nl being the verb of tho first
clause, omit t,ho auxiliaries of tho two Past Imperfects which follow.
(2) Introduce this, and the corresponding clauses which begin
with ' What,' by dekho ' See ! '
(3) The idiomatic phrase total rakhnb closely corresponds to tho
idea of ' keeping for show ' in this connection. The next clause
may be turned ' themselves (kh&d} take up trouble.'
(4) ' On this ' is best given by yeh sunkj,r ' hearing this.'
(5) ' At ease,' maza men, or maze men, as the translator chooses
lit. ' in taste,' ' nicely.'
(6) The purposed dragging of this clause may bo represented in
Hindustani by a similar lengthening of the phrase, p&on pd'on
ptchhe ghasitta hu*i chal<l dtd hai. See 121.
(7) The English phrase may be replaced by ' Then too the people-
saiil,' to correspond with the terms already used.
(8) Turn thus: ' Himself (Ar/idd) the shameless sturdy youth i*
riding.'
(9) 'Apparently,' ma'ldm hotA hai. See 5. '4- Turn the
next clause, ' besides the baggage two men are loaded (on it),' lad-
ICe hain.
(10) Turn ' To them even does no pity como ? ' Comp. 68.4-
4.
1 A Lion, a Bear, a Leopard, and a Wolf, in search
of prey, settled to go to the river marshes and hunt in
company, 2ou the understanding that they were to
share and share alike in what was captured. 3 As it
happened, they killed a nylghau, and this they divided
into four equal shares in accordance with their agree-
ment. 4 Each was about to take his share, when the
Lion said, ' Listen, my friends ; one of these shares is
mine by right of treaty; I claim the second 5 because
I am king of the forest 6 and receive a fourth of what-
ever is killed there by way of tribute ; I shall take the
third share 5 because it includes the heart and livei,
which you are aware is my 7 favourite food ; 8 and as
150 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
for the fourth share, to avoid the difficulty of dividing
it between you three, 9 1 may as well consume it
myself.' 10 With this, the Lion devoured ail four
shares, while his friends looked blankly on.
Directions.
(1) The first sentence is the most difficult hero, and may bo
broken up as follows to suit the Hindustani idiom. Begin with a
si. ort sentence in these terms : ' A Lion and a Bear and a Leopard
and a Wolf, the four (cli&ron) were in search of prey," omitting the
indefinite articles in translation. The next sentence will be, ' Thev
all agreed that,' followed by the oratio recta. See (46. I2-
(2) The juncture, here may be effected by the use of a relati ve
clause, ' What prey will be found, we will all four together divide
into equal shares.'
(3) All the pronouns may be omitted in this sentence. ' As it
happened' is best translated by the Arabic adverb ittlf'iqan.
(4) Turn 'It was near that,' etc. (150. J3)> and take care to
.fouble the reflexive pronoun. Begin a fresh clause at ' when,'
itwe men.
(5) For ' because,' see 156 sub fin.
(6) Here again the junctura is best effected by a relative clause,
jo kahin shikar ho. For ' by way of,' see |5 1 . 6.
(7) The Arabic glz& may serve for adjective and noun together.
(8) The best way of turning this is ' There remained the fourth
share,' rah& chauthd hissa, followed by the correlative so, and the
sentence then proceeds ' I do not know how to divide,' etc.
(9) A fresh clause, ' than this it is better that,' etc.
(10) ' With this ' should be translated yeh kahkar ' so saying.'
Compare Note (4) to last Piece. ' To look blankly on,' or ' gaze
stupidly,' munh-dekht&rah-jana, and see ||2. 8 for a suitable turn
of the expression.
5,
1 A Cock, perched on the bough of a tree, was
:rowing away to his heart's content, when a Cat observed
PART III. SECTION" I. 151
him, and 2 being desirous of tempting him into her
clutches, saluted him in a free and easy manner, and
said : 3 ' Well, Mr. Cock, have you heard the proclama-
tion? ' • What proclamation ? ' said tho Cock. * ' Ha !
ha! 'laughed the Cat, ' then you don't yet know? 5A
Committee of all the animals, beasts and birds, has been
sitting these ten days since, and they have solemnly
agreed that for the future no animal shall oppress or ill-
use another, but that all shall pass their lives in peace
and harmony. 6A declaration to this effect has been
signed by all the animals, and read aloud in the King's,
that is to say, the Lion's, Darbar.' ' Praised be God ! '
cried the Cock. ' I am rejoiced to hear it. A. great
7 cause of anxiety is removed.* 8 He had no sooner said
this than he stretched out his neck and 9 clucked in an
ominous fashion, just as if something alarming had
come in view. 10 ' Bless me ! What are you frightened
at? 'asked the Cat. 'Oh! nothing,' said the Cock; 'a
couple of hounds n are racing in this direction.' li!0n
this the Cat tucked in her tail and prepared to move
on. The Cock said : 13 ' How now ? Madam Puss, where
is your ladyship off to? I thought this was the era
of peace and harmony.' l True ! ' said the Cat, ' but
how can one tell whether these dogs have heard tin.-
proclamation or not? Perhaps, like you, they don't yet
know.'
Dit actions.
(1) Begin, as in the last piece, with a simple sentence, and omit
tho 'when* of the succeeding clause. The dea of 'was crowing
away" may be conveyed in the Hindustani iliom by 'was giviii-;
crow on crow'; and a certaia piquancy may be communicated to
tho expression by using, in place of the ordinary word bang ' crow,'
152 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
the term azdn ' call of the Muezzin,' which is permissible by asso-
ciation of ideas. The expression jUj <— Njl> for ^\4\ occurs in
Gulistan iv., 13. See ib., ii, 19. Such & phrase as 'to Ins heart's
content' cannot be literally translated ; khushl ki Ml at men 'in a
state of happiness,' conveys the idea.
(-) This may be conveniently broken up as follows : ' Desired
that having brought him down by some stratagem (dhoti) she mny
finish his job. The Cat in a free and easy manner,' etc.
(3) ' Well ' may be omitted, though bhala, is common enough.
' Mr. Cock,' miyiln murghe (vocative).
(4) In Hindustani ' The Cat said aha,' etc.
(5) Put the temporal expression first, and instead of saying 'a
committee of all the animals,' etc., turn thus, ' a Committee has
been going on : the animals of the whole worlJ, beasts and birds,
were collected,' etc.
(6) Turn : ' A declaration of this agreement having been made
(bankar), the signatures of all the animals were attached (hue) —
that declaration was read out,' etc.
(7) ' Cause of anxiety,' in one word, khadsha.
(8) Either turn this in the way shown in |50. 8, or use the
expression ' in this interval,' ist darmiy&n men, or simpler, itne
men.
(9) Turn thus : ' clucked in such a manner that, as it were, some
alarming thing came suddenly in sight.' See 92. *•
(10) The corresponding interjection is kJiair to hai ? followed by
' having seen what are you afraid ? '
(11) For this idiom see (21.
(12) Turn thus : ' Hearing this the Cat having depressed her
tail began-to-move ' (Inceptive compound).
(13) Turn thus : ' Why, lady, Madam Cat, where are you taking
yourself off to ? ' Ky&n bt gurba khdnam kahdn tashrif le-j'ite ho,
or Ife might be used for le. See 108. (2)-
6,
A poor countryman collected honey from the combs
and l carried a jar full to the town for sale. - He
was alone, and imagined to himself as he went along
what arrangements he would make. ' I shall sell the
PART III. SECTION I. 153
honey,' be soliloquised, 'and buy a pair of fowls. As
soon as tbey lay a good score of eggs I sball hatch the
chickens ; and when the chickens grow up and begin to
lay, I shall set tbeni on the eggs ; 3 and when I hive
a hundred fowls, I shall sell them and rear a flock
of goats ; 4 and after them in due course cows and
buffaloes. Thus I shall become a great man, marry into
a noble family, have an heir, ° employ a tutor for my
son, and as I go in and out shall see him 6 reading,
and in my delight shall take him up in my arms and
kiss him.' 7 Suiting the action to the word, he stooped:
the jar of honey fell to the ground and was broken ;
8 and eggs, chickens, goats, cows, buffaloes, wife, son,
tutor, the whole family, floated away with the spilled
honey,
Directions.
(1) Turn 'having filled a jar with (it) (|Q2. 1) carrier! (it) away
towards the town to sell '
(2) 'Iho word 'soliloquised' should be brought into this sentonco
from below, and the whole turned thus: '(He) was alone in the
way — (he) went on talking in (his) mind (dil ht dil men) — he
formed this imaginary plan, that,' followed by the oraiio recta, tho
verbs in which should be in the Aorist tense, not the Future as in
English.
(3) Thojunctura may be varied here by turning the sentence
thus : ' In this way having collected a hundred fowls,' etc.
(4) Turn ' then increasing from goats,' etc., phir bakrfon se bar-
Mte bar/Kite, etc. 106.
(5) Translate bete ke wlste darw&za par u*M<i nankar rakh&ii.
The insertion of darw&za par 'at the door,' that is, in the rooms in
the entrance portico, is useful with reference to the expression
' going in and ouc ' in tho next clause.
(6) 'Reading' means 'reading aloud, ' piikAr puktir pa^htA h«l«l,
154 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
but ' see ' may be literally translated, because it was the sight of
his boy thus occupied which pleased the father.
(7) Turn thus : ' In tho idea of taking up the boy his head (on
which Le was caivying the honey) stooped.'
(8) Precisely as in English; but see 'for the whole family,' 25
and for the last clause omit the word ' spilled,' and say ' floated
away iu that very honey ' (bah-jdn1!).
7.
1 A poor man suddenly became great. 2 Whatever
he put his hand to prospered and all his commercial
ventures turned out well. 3 He was in the habit of
lauding his own wise management as the chief agent in
the creation of his wealth. ' In a certain year,' he used
to say, 'I bought up cotton 4in the expectation that
war would break out in America and that the price
would rise. 5 My anticipations were realised. 6 A certain
village which I purchased was a losing concern at the
time, but now, in consequence of my administration,
there is a surplus revenue of thousands of rupees. I
bought ten calves at the Batesur fair, and people thought
them dear at the price, but I sold them in Eajwura
7 for four times what I gave.' 8 And thus he would
go on quoting instances by the thousand. 9 After a
time fortune turned and he became the victim of bad
luck. In two years he was again a pauper. His houses
began to tumble down ; his tenants paid no rent ; no
raiu fell in the village, and no corn was grown ;
10 cows, buffaloes, horses, camels died of a murrain ;
his mansion caught fire and his furniture was destroyed ;
11 and his money was all stolen. Then he abused
Fate; 12 but Fate said: ' Unur-iteful \victch, 13 you
PART III. SECTION" I. I",
referred all your prosperity to your own wise manage-
ment, and now you blame me for your adversity.'
Directions.
(1) ' Suddenly ' cannot be translated here by the ordinary
Hindustani adverbs yak-A-yak, or n&g&h, or b'it kt b&t men, for it
iMf.-ms ' comparatively soon ' with reference to the circumstances
told below. Thore dinon men, placed in the middle of the sentence
is best. For 'great,' the somewhat exaggerated phrase am'tr-kdbtr
is better than plain bar& in this connection ; and it is good style to
balance this double term by a slight extension of the subject. NVe
shall have, therefore, ek gartb aur muftis fidmt thore dinon men
•-kablr bcnigay/l. Compared with hogaya, bangayd implies a
power behind, in accordance with the teaching of the Apologue.
(2) Turn this by collateral clauses, each beginning with the
Relative, as — ' in what work (he) was putting (his) hand, profit was
— what commerce (he) was doing, (to him) advantage was being
received.' Omit the auxiliary of the Past Imperfect in all these
verbs, it being obvious from the opening sentence that past time
is spoken of. Comp. Piece 3. ^)"-- *•
(3) Again omit the auxiliary thd. Avoid the translation of ' wise '
by the use of two nouns, ' wisdom and management,' and begin the
oi'atio recta with the clause ' as the chief agent,' ki main ne, etc.
omitting ' he used to say ' in the next sentence. Comp. (45 • 7-
(1) Turn thus, by way of adding force to the egotism, ' and I
understood that,' etc. (samajh-lend). Use the future tense in the
subordinate clauses.
(5) Turn ' Accordingly as I thought (Past Remote), so indeed it
cr,me to pass.' J«ia'd waisA. See 135.
(6) Turn ' When I bought a certain village there was a loss
(.V/iasi^ra) in it every year. I so managed that now,' etc.
(7) Chauguve d&manpar.
(8) Turn 'and ho continued-describing thousands of examples of
tliis tenour (tarah) before the people.'
(9) This may be put as follows: 'After some days the turning
of fortune and bad-luck surrounded lain.'
(10) Turn ' sndi a nun-rain camo that all his cows, etc., po:
but place the subjects of the subordinate clause first, after the
manner of | 50. 4-
.i56 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(11) Effect the junctura here by a relative clause, jo kuchh naqd
thA . . .
(12) Omit 'but,' and with reference to the bur& kahna, of the
preceding clause say ' Fate hearing himself abused ' (apni burdfi
sunkar). Com p. 87 • *•
(13) This will be most idiomatically turned by the use of two
relative compound sentences, jitni behtari, etc.,jis qadr biircti, etc
being the respective commencements.
8.
1 A traveller in the desert was sorely pressed by
hunger, and 2 seeing a date-palm with ripe dates upon
it 3 put a rope round his feet and climbed the tree.
When he arrived at the top, the rope became detached
from his feet and fell to the ground. 4 In this plight,
his limbs refused their office and the man forgot to pluck:
his dates. He shouted and shouted ; 5 not a soul was
visible. He felt convinced that his end was come ;
6 there was no rope to descend by ; nobody was in sight
to help him ; 7 he could not cling to the tree for ever ;
in another moment he must fall and be dashed in pieces.
in his despair he vowed 8 that if he reached the ground
alive he would sacrifice a she-camel when he got home.
On this he began cautiously to slide down the stem.
9 When he was nicely half-way down, he changed his
mind. It occurred to him that the camel was pregnant,
and that it would be wrong to sacrifice her ; he would
kill a cow-buffalo instead. 10 Sliding down a little
farther, he reflected that the cow was in milk; her too
it would be a waste to sacrifice — a goat would do as
well. n He was now close to the ground, and gave up
12 the idea of the goat. 13 The goat, he remembered,
PiKT III. SECTION I. 157
gave two sers of milk and threw three kids twice in
the year — it would be hard to find such another goat ;
the object was to sacrifice a life of some kind, uand
a fowl would answer the purpose. 13 When he reached
the ground, he begrudged the fowl, though he told him-
self that it was wicked to break his vow, and that, having
promised a life, he was bound to give one. l6 Just
then Satan suggested to him that he might catch a louse
in his breeches and pay his vow with that. 17So he
quickly found and cracked his louse : and thus what was
a camel at the top of the tree became first a buffalo, then
a goat, then a fowl, and then a louse; and in this last
shape was sacrificed to God.
Directions.
(1) As in former examples, begin with a simple sentence, and
omit the conjunction ' and.' Avoid the Passive, and say ' to a
traveller . . . violent huncrer was known.' For the adjective see
25.
(2) Turn thus : ' (He) looked and (fo) red ripe (IAI W) dates are
hanging on a date-tree.'
(3) Begin fresh sentence -with ' this person," etc. For ' rope ' say
skein or ring of rope, rasst kt Antt, descriptive of the mode in
which natives ascend a branchless tree. See also 50. '•
(4) 'In this plight,' yeh h&l dekhkar, and see also 58. 3- ID
place of 'refused their office' use the idiomatic pMJ-jdnd 'to
swell,' and thus become incapable of motion; and lhA,l-j&n& in the
D«xt clause, as an echo of the first verb.
(5) Our phrase here is impossible in Hindustani. Turn ' up to
the ran^c of vision there was no trace of a human beiner,' 'ulam-zAd.
(6) Begir here with the oratio recta, connecting it with the pre-
vious clause by lei.
(7) Put this interrogatively, ' How long shall I remain clinging
to the date ? ' Proceed thus : ' some short time (rfam) passes,
when (Ai) I have fallen and been dasluul in pieces.' For this
realisation of the Future, see 162. 'And' is here the aur of
Rinultaneitv £«»«>. |86.
158 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(8) Turn : ' in this state of despair he vowed that,' followed by the
oratio recta. 'On this' in the next clause will, therefore, be yeh
kalikar.
(9) Turn thus : ' he descended half-way nicely ' (Piece 3 . Dir. 5
above) ; then his intention (ntyat) changed, and he thought that,'
followed by the oratio recta.
(10) Turn ' then ( phir) he slid a little farther and thought,' etc.
(11) Effect the junct ura here by yah&n tak ki.
(12) The Hindustani idiom is bakrt fcd irdda ' his intention as to
the goat.'
(13) Continue the sentence with ' and thought that ' with the
oratio recta down to ' purpose,' as follows : ' The goat is of two sers
milk, every sixth month i she) gives three young ones,' eto.
(14) Simply ' a fowl is enough.'
(15) Turn thus : ' having reached the ground, desire of the fowl
came, and he began to say,' etc.
(Ifi) ' Just then,' itne men ; but the interruption is unnecessary.
The suggestion may be put in the Imperative 2nd pers. sing.
(17) Turn ' he having quickly (jha£) got out (nikdl) a louse
cracked (it) ' (chat mdr-dend), the jingle of jhat and chat giving
point to the expression. The last clause is ' and that she-camel,
which was at the top of the tree, becoming first a buffalo, then,
etc., was killed in the way of God ' (khud& ki rdh men).
9.
1 Once on a time all the Members of the body — hand,
foot, mouth, tongue, teeth, throat, etc. — mutinied against
their king, the Belly. 2 They made out that they were
over-tasked, and that he had no right to keep them in
subjection. The hand said he was 3 tired of working
for the Belly, 4 now splitting wood, now carrying loads.
The foot said he was fatigued with running errands.
The mouth said the Belly had turned him into a mill.
In short, every member had a complaint to make; and
all agreed that they would serve the Belly no longer.
PART III. SECTION t. 1-Vj
5 The army having thus swerved from its allegiance,
King Belly began to suffer all kinds of inconvenience.
c The hand would not reaca for water when the Belly
was thirsty, nor the foot stir to fetch it. When he was
hungry, the hand would not break the bread nor the
mouth receive it. 7 He then stopped the army's pay
and allowances, and suspended the issue of the blood
ration. 8 The Mutineers began to starve and lose their
vigour; 9and at last in despair presented themselves
before His Majesty, wei-e pardoned, and resumed service
on the old terms.
Direction*.
(1) For the method of dealing with a plurality of subjects seo
16. (2).
(2) This may bo expanded as follows : ' And all agreed among
themselves that — See ! wo are all engaged in his service night and
day, and the belly keeps us in his slavery without reason.'
(3) See 1 08.
(4) Turn ' Sometimes I have to split wood, sometimes,' etc., and
see 51.2.
(5) Turn as follows : ' When all this army,' etc.
(6) Bo<nn with the temporal clause, as in the next sentence.
' The hand would not reach for water ' is ' the band was not moving
(hilnd) to take water'; and similarly, ' the foot was not moving
(cnaind) to the water-stand.' The auxiliary thil may be omitted
hero, and in the next sentence, as in former examples.
(7) The noun is here preferable to the pronoun in Hindustani.
Translate ' allowances ' by jdgtr, an estate given in consideration of
inilitary service. 'Suspend issue," band-kani'i.
(8) Turn thus : ' the army of mutineers began to die of hunger
and every soldier became weak."
(9) Turn thus : ' at last in despair (majbur hokar) all the
members being present in the belly's presence (hazir and TiwiiJr)
got (their) fault pardoned,' etc. ' On the old terms,' ba-dastur-i-
160 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
to,
1 A tortoise who was bound on a jourcej was on the look
out for a companion of his travels. A hare chanced to be
going in the same direction, and the tortoise proposed
2 that they should travel together, 3 The hare coulcf
not help laughing. ' You idiot,' said he, 4 ' what com-
parison is there between you, a sluggish unwieldy crawler
at the rate of a span for hours, and me, who rush like
lightning and fly like the wind ! 5 J should like to
know how we can keep company.' ' True,' replied the
tortoise ; ' but, please God, I shall reach the end of the
stage before you do. If you do not think so, 6I am
open to a bet.' So they agreed that whichever lost
should have his ears cut off. 7 The tortoise started at
his own deliberate pace, and the hare was out of sight in
a couple of bounds. 8 When he had gone a short way,
the latter reflected that he had already travelled a dis-
tance which the other could hardly make up by the
evening. Why should he hurry ? It would be well to
have a sleep ; and to sleep he went. Hours after, the
tortoise dragged himself slowly up, and, seeing his rival
asleep, quietly went on. 9 Late at night the hare woke
up, and, seeing nothing of the tortoise, said to himself
10 that Mr. Slow-pace had not yet arrived ; he would,
therefore, go on and put up in the serai : n no doubt
friend Tortoise would arrive on the morrow. 12 He
had no sooner entered the serai than lo! there was the
tortoise. 13 ' Now for your ears, my fine fellow ! ' cried
the tortoise, as soon as he saw him ; u but the hare
tucked ill his tail and tore off at such a pace that he is
tearing about to the present day in dread for his ears.
PART III. SECTION 1. 101
Directions.
(1) Hindustani, like Latin, avoids the parenthetical relative
clause, which is so convenient in English, because it is apt to bring
the subordinate and principal verbs together. Hence, it is best to
turn the initial sentence thus : ' To a tortoise a journey was on-the-
t.-ipis (darpesK) ; search of this was that (if I) get a companion
then (J) may travel.'
(2) Oratio recta, and see (8.8 for the form of expression.
(3) See (SO. I-
(4) See (87. 3) f°r the general idiom. 'Crawler at the rate of
a span for hours ' may be turned by the aid of the Past Conjunctive
Participle repeated. ' Crawling and crawling in pahars a span
(of) land.' Omit ' who ' in the next clause. ' Fly ' may be literally
translated by urna, or better still by the phrase farrate lend.
(5) See 27. 1S- ' I should like to know' may be translated b/
bhala.
(6) Turn ' pray make a bet,' and proceed ' accordingly this was
the bet, that who loses (Tidrnd) his ears be cut off."
(7) Avoid the adjective by using the adverb ahista (bis).
(8) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle, and put the reflections
of the hare in the oratio recta down to ' sleep.' There is nothing in
Hindustani to correspond to the ' latter ' and the ' former.' Either
repeat the noun, or use the demonstrative pronouns, taking care to
be consistent in the application of yeh or woh. The verbs will be
in the Aorist throughout. Begin the reflections with jitna, and
the rest is easy. For ' already ' see 77. * '•
(9) See 1 1 14. 5.
(10) Oratio recta. ' Goodness ! (allah re) Slow-paced Mr. Tor-
toise (pi.) has not yet arrived ! ' For the verb use the ceremonious
term which occurs in |98. 2-
(11) ' No doubt would arrive,' d M j'lenge.
(12) Begin with jaun. See (49.
(13) Turn thus : ' on seeing the hare the tortoise said, " Please
bring (your) ears, my fine fellow," ' l&iye haarat kan, the order
of the words being purposely pointed and emphatic.
(14) The Hindustani junct ura dispenses with ' but.' ' In dread
for his oars,' A- nwn fre dar ke mare.
162 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
11.
1 The Sun and the Wind once fell to arguing which
was the strongest. The Wind said 2 she could tear up
and toss away mighty trees and grand buildings, and
even mountains ; she could create tempests on the ocean
and sink ships, 3 turn day to night, 4 and with a mere
shudder stop the business of the world. The Sun
said nothing could withstand his heat ; mountains took
fire, 5 tons of ice were melted, the very ocean boiled j 6 and
if any man dared confront him he simply scorched his
face. At last they agreed to try their strength upon
some special object. 7 The victim was a p^or traveller
wearing a cloak; and the test was, which could make
him take it off. The Wind set to rage, and, filling the
cloak, 8 lifted the traveller off his feet ; but he only
wrapped it the more closely round him. Then the Sun
gently 9 put forth his warmth, and by-and-by the
traveller doffed his cloak, 10 and the Sun was master of
the field.
Directions.
(1) The initial sentence may be rendered conveniently here by
two collateral clauses ; as, ' Once between the Sun and the Wind an
argument befel (Ao-parnd) : each was calling himself strong.'
(2) Oratto recta, ' I am tearing up,' etc.
(3) Expand here ' becoming a storm I am making d;iy night.'
(4) The junctura is here best effected by a temporal clause; thus,
' When I shudder n little, I stop the whole work of the world.'
(5) 'Tons of ice (I'uklion man barf) melting become wator"
(verb in sing.).
(6) Effect the junctura as above (4) by way of rhetorical corre-
sponlence.
PART III. SECTJON I. 1G3
(7) Torn thus : ' A poor traveller's misfortune (sh&mat) came-
lio was going alone: dressed in a cloak : this was the condition that,
Lot us see who can make him take off his cloak.' Potential com-
pound of double Causal verb.
(8) Use the compound le-urnA.
(9) ' Put forth his warmth,' d/idp nikdlt. See (3. 2.
(10) Turn thus : ' and the field remained (in) the Sun's hand.'
12,
1 A Wolf, a Pox, and an Ass were conversing
together on the instability of the present world. 2 They
came to the conclusion that it would be the right thing
to confess their sins at the shrine of some holy man and
repent of their misdeeds. There was a saint's tomb iu
the forest, and, arrived here, each began to declare his
sins.
The Wolf said : ' Alas ! 3 how can I hope for pardon ?
* My hair stands on end when I recall one particular
piece of cruelty. There was a confounded goat which had
four kids, 5 and she used to leave these and wander
about to people's houses in search of food. 6I dis-
approved of the goat's unkiudness in thus neglecting her
young ones, and I killed her. 7 Then I reflected that
the kids would certainly die without their mother. Why
should they suffer such a misfortune ? And God knows
this was my sole reason for eating them up as well/
8 With this the Wolf began to weep.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) As in the last piece, the first sentence may be rendered in
iwo clauses. Insert in the first ' all three seated,' by way of sum-
11*
164 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
mation. The second clause may ran, ' there was mention of the
world's instability.'
(2) The idea of ' conclusion ' may be conveyed by turning the
phrase thus : ' At length they agreed (saldh kama.) that,' followed
by the oratio recta, but omitting the clause ' it would be the right
thing,' because the verb chosen is sufficiently expressive.
(3) Turn ' How will my pardon be ? '
(4) Turn thus : ' I have committed one such tyranny, that, when
I remember it, my hair,' etc.
(5) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle, with Continuative form
1 2 6 f°r the second verb. ' In search of food ' may be rendered
here apn& pet bharne Ice Ife.
(6) Turn thus : ' This unkindness of the goat in that (fci) she
was not taking care, etc. . . . was displeasing to me.'
(7) As always, put the reflections in the oratio recta, the first
verb in the Future, and the second in i^e Aorist.
(8) See Piece 4-. IO above.
13,
{Continued.')
The Fox said : l ' Do not grieve, my good tender-
hearted friend. Though you did kill the goat and her
kids, God looks to the motive, and 2 your motive was
righteous on both occasions. The goat deserved death
for neglecting her young ;»nes ; and in killing them too I
feel sure 3 you had no thought of self. You saved
them from orphanage and the sad fate of being mother-
less, and may certainly hope for a reward in Heaven.
* My sad case, on the other hand, is really difficult.
What is to become of me on the Day of Judgment, or
how I can expect to be pardoned, I do not know. 5 Hell
itself would be scared at something which I did. Some-
body had reared a lot of fowls, and the wretches were
always quarrelling and screeching and making a noise ;
6 the neighbours were worried to death ; the fowls
PART III. SECTION I. 165
dirtied not only 7 their own place but the whole
quarter ; 8 their filth and stench were everywhere ;
9 and they had the impertinence to drink water out of
the citizens' plates and dishes. 10 It was the daily
complaint. ll My soul was vexed at hearing of these
annoyances, and one day when I could bear it no longer
I went to the fowl-house and 12 made a clean sweep of
all the fowls.' With this the Fox began 13 to shed
floods of tears. ' My good lady,' said the Wolf, ' why
weep so bitterly ? You have done nothing wrong. The
fowls one and all deserved their punishment; and ir
putting them to death 14 you have won the guerdon
of a safe entrance into Paradise.'
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) Place the vocative first with ae initiatory, and expand the
verb to balance the double epithets by turning ' do not weep and
do not lament ' (2nd pers. sing.).
(2) Turn ' in your motive was goodness.'
(3) Turn ' there was no object of your own,' terA kuchh opnd
matlab na thd.
(4) The point of this clause may be given in Hindustani by
turning ' the difficulty indeed is of unfortunate me,' in which the
particle to serves for ' on the other hand.' In the next sentence,
the final ' I do not know ' may be idiomatically given by placing
dckhfe at the beginning.
(5) Turn as follows : ' I have done such a deed that oven Hell
will seek refuge from me.'
(6) Use here the phrase given in 1 9 0 . 4-
(7) 'Their own place,' that is, the fowl-house, and translate
accordingly.
(8) The proper way to turn this is, ' Wherever yon look, dunj? ;
wherever you go, stench.' For the use of the Aorist, see 193. ia
166 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(9) Turn ' and these fowls were so ill-mannered that they were
drinking water in the crockery of the people of the quarter.'
(10) The Continuative form MA karnfi should be used here.
(11) This kind of phrase can only be met by the use of some
corresponding idiom, such as Jcalejfi pak-uthnd ; and for ' hearing '
recollect the idiom noticed at 1 0 6 .
(12) Similarly for this phrase, the meaning may be expressed by
' tearing them in pieces I swept the platter clean,' sofa chat har-
ddZd.
(13) Here, too, either use the phrase &th dth &nsH rona or be-
tahdshii ron& ' to weep unrestrainedly.'
(14) Turn as follows : ' you have won such a reward (sawdl) that
you will go (chcM jdn&) into Paradise without account.'
14,
(Concluded.)
Then the Wolf and the Fox told the Ass to declare his
misdeeds. The Ass said : ' I have neither claws * to
rend with nor teeth to bite with. In my whole life 2 I
have only twice done wrong. Once, when I was very
hungry and carrying a load of grass, I took a little of it
without my master's leave. Another day, as I was going
along, the boys began to torment me, and I lashed out at
one of them, but 3 no one was kicked. Nevertheless,
I admit that I was wrong.'
The Wolf said: ' You villain ! 4T\vo such enormities,
and yet you hope for pardon ! You embezzled your
master's property, and ate grass 5 for want of which
there is no knowing how many animals died of hunger.
6 You lashed out, as you say, at a poor boy. If the
boy had been killed, 7 a life would have been lost, and
his parents and relations, a whole family, in fact, would
have perished of grief.'
PART III. SECTION I. 107
The Fox said: 'Verily, such sins as these are unpar-
donable. I never heard such a tale before. This Ass is
not merely a sinner, 8 but an ingrate, a thief, and an
assassin, and as such is worthy of death.'
On this, the Wolf and the Fox seized upon the Ass and
tore hitn in pieces.
Directions.
(1) It is necessary to insert 'anyone' after each of the two
verbs, ' with ' being omitted.
(2) Turn ' by me two faults were done (hua) ' ; and in corre-
spondence with this translate ' once ' by ek to yeh ki ek din, etc.
and ' another day ' by dusre, ek roz, etc.
(3) For the idiom here see 52. '5> v'z- be for ku.
(4) An illustration of this mode of expression occurs at 187. 4-
In order to express 'enormities' and emphasise the two, translate
aise bare bare ikhatte do do gunah.
(5) Turn ' from which (it is) not known how many,' etc.
(6) Repeat the ass's words with alteration of Pronoun, and omit
' as you say.'
(7) Avoid the Passive by saying ' there would have been loss of
a life ' (TilU f/id). Comp. Piece |. Dir. 7.
(8) Turn thus: 'but (balkt) on account of being a sinner, etc.
is worthy of death.'
K'^ EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
SECTION II.
EASY NARRATIVES FROM INDIAN HISTORY.
1.
1 European nations were for long ages unacquainte 1
with a maritime route to India. 2 Commerce in India
itself was carried on with the neighbouring countries of
Persia (Iran), Arabia ('Arab), Egypt (3f«sr), and China
(Chin) only, 3 navigation being confined to the Arabian
Sea and the Bay of Bengal. The mariners never ven-
tured out into the open sea, 4 and were not likely to
pass round Africa to the Atlantic. 5 But the treasures
of India, conveyed by sea to Egypt and Bussorah (Basra),
and thence overland to Europe, were a source of so much
prodt, that ° the discovery of a direct route became a
passion with Europeans. 7 Some, believing that tne
earth was round, sailed westwards and found themselves
brought up by the American coast. Others, under the
impression that the land was surrounded by water on all
sides, coasted northwards, and came to a standstill in the
frozen waters of the Arctic Ocean. Others again, be-
thinking themselves that India was to the east of Africa,
attempted to sail round that continent, 8 but were
driven back by tempests, and named the point of their
retreat the Cape of Storms. 9 At length, in 1497 A.D.,
Emmanuel, King of Portugal, sent out an expedition of
three vessels under Vasco da Garua, 10 who made light
of the dangerous Cape, and, after a voyage of eleven
months, cast anchor off Calicut (Kallikot) on the Malabai
(Malebdr) coast.
P.VET HI. ACTION II. 1C9
Directions.
(1) The initial sentence may take the form suggested at 8 (0
in the preceding section.
(2) Give greater personality to this by saying 'people' rather
than ' neighbouring countries,' and express ' people ' by the affix
wild, in the plural, attached to the country last named in the list.
(3) Begin a fresh clause here and arrange the clauses in the
following manner : — ' People (£"<;) were sailing their ships as far as
the gulfs of A. and B.— thinking the sea (to be) a shoreless ocean
they were not stepping outside those gulfs,' omitting the auxiliaries
of the Past Imperfect, because tht will have been mentioned in the
preceding sentence.
(4) This terse sentence may be most effectively turned by
placing it in the interrogative form, and using the Past Conditional ;
as, ' When could they have had the spirit ? ' etc. See 1 74. 4-
(5) Magar immediately followed by a relative clause.
(6) Turn ' Europeans were remaining very enthusiastic in find-
in^,' etc.
(7) Express this and the similar beginnings of the next two sen-
tences by kot yeh samajhkar ki, varying samajhkar by sochkar, or it
khaydl se. The auxiliaries of the Past Imperfects may be omitted
throughout.
(8) Turn ' And having gone half-way on account of storms were
turning (mur-dnd) back, and were calling the name of that place
Rds-tiifdn.'
(9) The juncture, mny here bo effected by yak&n tak ki. See last
Sect. 8. ii-
(10) Conclude with a fresh sentence in the foil* w rig form : —
'Accordingly he thought nothing either < f the storms or the Cape
of Storms, going on and on (106) rounding Africa in a period of
eleven months,' etc.
2,
1 Following the example of the Portuguese (Portuydl-
ivdle), the Dutch (Dach) and the French (Fardsis) bfiran
to voyage hitherwards ; 2 and it was hardly possible
that the English (Angrez) should remain inactive. 3Au
170
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
association of merchants was formed in London in
1599 A.D., with a capital of thirty lakhs, and a charter
was granted them by Queen Elizabeth, which secure 1 a
fifteen years' monopoly of the eastern trade. 4 Such
an association is caUed a ' company ' in English: hence
the name ' East India Company.' 5 The shareholders
held quarterly meetings known as the ' Court of Pro-
prietors,' 6 and those of them who held shares of five
thousand rupees or more were entitled to vote, pass laws
and regulations, and declare dividends. 7 The general
superintendence was vested in a body of twenty-four pro-
prietors, who held shares to the amount of not less than
twenty thousand each. These were called the ' Court of
Directors,' and were presided over by a ' Chairman.'
8 The Company's Indian possessions were gradually
known as the Presidencies of Calcutta, Bombay, and
Madras, and each of these was ruled by a ' President ' in
< Council.'
9 At that time the Company's servants were divided
into four grades, viz., Writers, up to five years' residence
in India ; Factors, from five to eight years ; Junior Mer-
chants, from eight to eleven years ; and Senior Merchants,
from eleven years upwards ; and from these latter the
' Members of Council ' were selected.
Direction.
(1) See for i -Is idiom 130. 3-
(2) Put this clause interrogatively, much in the same manner as
was suggested in Note (4) to last Piece.
(3) The best way to reproduce this sentence will be gathered
from the following skeleton form : — Some London merchants matle
an association and collected a capital, and received a charter to the
IART III. SECTION II. 17]
••ffect that for fifteen years no fellow-countryman be allowed, etc.
1 he student will observe that the Passives are avoided, and that
' monopoly,' for which there is no corresponding term in the lan-
guage, is paraphrased.
(4) The words in guillemots are to be transliterated
(5) Boyin with relative clause as follows : — ' The assembly of
shareholders which,' etc. After the transliteration of f-cnrt of
Proprietors add the literal meaning in Hindustani.
(6) The junctura is here-: ' In this assembly the person who,'
etc.
(7) Considerable alteration will bo found necessary to avoid the
English Passives. In skeleton form : ' For general superintendence
(130. ^)- • • the twenty-four men whom they were appointing,
etc. . . . their title was . . . ; and the shareholder who had less
than . . . could not be chosen for the " Directory "; and they called
the president of this " Court " " Chairman." '
(8) Turn thus : ' In India gradually three Presidencies became
which are known by the name of, etc., and in the three three
" President" with their respective " Council" began to dwell.' For
'respective' see 44. "•
(9) For ' Company ' say sirkdr kampant. Omit ' viz.* aud use ek,
d&sre, ttsre, chauthe for the several descriptive clauses.
3.
In 1715 A.T). the President of Calcutta sent two
Factors with presents l on an embassy to the Court of
Farrukhsiyar. His 2 Majesty was then labouring
under a severe illness, and, as luck would have it, was
cured by a Dr. Hamilton who accompanied the envoys.
For this service be was desired to name his own reward .
He asked nothing for himself, but s on tbe Company's
behalf besought the imperial permission to purchase
thirty-seven townships in Bengal, with the privilege of
introducing and conveying merchandise free of search
and duty. 4 We admire Dr. Hamilton's magnanimity
172 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
in preferring his country's interest to his own. 5 India
in those days exported chintz and cotton cloth to Eng-
land, 6 and the object of the Company's servants in
purchasing territory in the neighbourhood of Calcutta
was to settle there a sufficient number of weavers to save
them the trouble of bringing in cloth and chintz from
remote villages. 7 Marvellous are God's ways ! 8 The
Indian weavers have remained stationary, and English
enterprise has won possession of the export trade to
India. 9 The expected acquisition of territory was
frustrated for the time by the Subahdar of Bengal,
10 who prohibited the owners from selling their landed
property. n But the permission of free trade materially
affected his interests, for the President conveyed not only
the Company's goods under his seal and signature free of
search and duty, but also his own and his friends' mer-
chandise.
Directions.
(1) ' On an embassy ' should bo personally expressed ' in the way
of ambassadors,' ba-taur elchton Ice. See 1 5 0 . 6.
(2) The next two sentences may be combined as follows : — ' At
that time the Emperor was very ill, but when, as luck would have
it, the Emperor recovered under the treatment of Dr. H., who ac-
companied the envoys, he commanded that — Ask your reward,
what you ask you shall have for the asking.' Our phrase ' as luck
would have it ' may be turned by husn-ittifdq se. The use of the
oratio recta in the final clause adds much to the force of the narra-
tive.
(3) The oratio recta again : ' If Your Highness appi'oves, then lot
leave, etc. be received by the Company, and whatever goods of the
C. are despatched let them remain exempt from search on account
of duty.' The Passives here are avoided by the use of the verba
PAKT III. SEC110N II. 173
milnd and raw&na hond, the latter r>f which should be in the Con-
tinuative form.
(4) The idiomatic rendering is, ' (If) you ask the truth, Dr. n.
did a work of great magnanimity in that he,' etc. See 166. '•
(5) Turn thus : ' In those days from India chintz, etc. was much
going ' (Continuative).
(6) Effect the juncture, here by chun&nchi. The final clause of
this sentence may be turned ' that they may not again have to go
about from village to village (g&on gfcon phirnd'), in search of
cloths.'
(7) A common phrase is ky& sh>in 'izadi hai, followed by fct.
(8) Turn thus : ' The weavers here remained the same weavers,
and Englishmen becoming experts in this art instead (ulte) them-
selves began to bring,' etc.
(9) Avoid the passive construction by making the subahd&r the
subject of the verb, and express ' expected ' by placing ' territory '
(zamtnd&rt to) at the beginning of the sentence.
(10) The relative clause here is not in accordance with the
idiom of the language. An appositive clause introduced by ya'nt,
1 i.e.,' is the best resource. Translate ' owners ' by zamtnd&r, and
then ' landed property ' may be omitted.
(11) Turn thus : ' but from the C.'s goods becoming exempt from
duty he had much loss, for the P., besides the C.'s goods, was
making signature of exemption of,' etc.
4.
SirujudJaula then sent * a verbal message to the
English prohibiting the strengthening of the Fort;
2 and, being wild at their contemptuous disregard of
his order, commenced hostilities by seizing the Factory
at K&simbfeftr. He next laid siege to the Fort of Cal-
cutta, s which was held at that time by less than a
hundred men. As there seemed no hope of saving the
Fort, many of the English community followed Governor
Drake's example and took refuge on board ship ; and
[74 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
those who remained were taken prisoners next day by the
Nawwab's ti-oops. 4 Mr. Holwell, who was the officer
in command, was brought handcuffed into the Nawwab's
presence, but was at once released from this indignity
and assured by Sirajuddaula that he and his men should
be unharmed. At night, however, 5 in default of other
accommodation, the Nawwab's men confined their priso-
ners, one hundred and forty-six in number, in a chamber,
6 henceforth known in English as the ' Black Hole,'
which was only eighteen feet long by fourteen broad.
7 Of that night the prisoners alone could tell the
horrors. Many of them were wounded, many were in-
toxicated, 8 the heat and thirst were intolerable ; and
when the door was opened in the morning only twenty-
three came out alive, 9 and they more like dead than
living men.
Directions.
(1) Torn this by saying ' Sent word by the mouth of a messen-
ger' (34. 3)) followed by the prohibition directly expressed.
(2) The description is best carried on in Hindustani thus : ' The
E. paid no attention to this order (bat) ; then S.'s blood boiled, and
being angry, he first, etc. . . . and after that,' etc. (down to ; Cal-
cutta ').
(3) See last Piece, Note ( i o). In this instance, begin the new
clause with ittifdqan.
(•!-) Avoid the passives throughout this sentence by the following
arrangement : — 'When they brought their (unke) officer H. sahib
handcuffed before S., then he immediately had the handcuffs opened
and said that, " All of you be of good cheer ; there shall no harm
be yours." '
(5) Turn ' When they found (mt2nd) no other place for the prisoners
to remain in.' See 52. 5-
f6"> Here are two relative clauses, of which the first should bo
PART 111. SECTION II. 175
detached in the form of a fresh sentence, as an additional particular,
as follows : — ' They call this chamber in English the " Black Hole,"
that iSj kAlil bit.'
(7) The native idiom here is more realistic. ' \Vlritover passed
on the lives of those prisoners, they indeed (iro/u) will be know-
ing.' Use the Pres. Fre»ump.
(S) Use a double clause, ' There was violence of heat ; thirst was
incalculable.'
(9) Turn thus : ' But their persons (surai) were worse than even
dead men.'
5,
Olive marched from Calcutta with three thousand men
and nine guns. Sirajuddaula, * on the other hand,
reached Plassy (Paldsfy with a force of fifty thousand
horse and foot, including forty or fifty Frenchmen, and
over forty guns. The battle was fought on the 23rd of
May 1757 A.D. 3 Before the commencement of the
action Sirajuddaula placed his turban at Mir Ja'far's feet
and asked his forgiveness. In reply, he advised him
3 to defer the engagement till the next day and to fall
back in the meanwhile ; and the Diwan Rai Dallabh also
expressed himself in favour of retirement on Murshid-
abad. 4 The army had no sooner begun this movement
than the English sprang upon it like leopards on a herd
of deer. 5 The Nawwab's men fled, and the pursuit
was continued for six miles. 6 Such was the victory of
Plassy, \vhich may well be called the foundation of the
English empire in India. 7 Sirfijuddaula was unable
to stay his flight even at Murshidabad. 8 He could
trust no one ; indeed, How could he? for he had wronged
all. 9 He fled towards Eajmahal with one of his
and a eunuch, but was recognised near that
176 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
place by a Fuqir whose nose and ears he had ordered to
be cut off on some previous occasion, and who now at
once reported his discovery to the Governor of the
District. This man, a brother of Mir Ja'far, sent the
Nawwab back a prisoner to Murshidabad. 10 Mir
Ja'far -was disposed to clemency, but his son, the hard-
hearted Miran, had the captive put to death n without
his father's knowledge
Directions.
(1) Express this by ddhar se at the beginning of the sentence, in
correspondence with the foregoing Kalkatta se.
(2) Pahle to will suffice for the first six words.
(3) Use the oratio recta here, and in the next clause.
(4) Turn this sentence in the fashion of (87. 2-
(5) Use fauj for 'men,' and insert Itampani Jet fauj in the next
clause as the agents in the pursuit. Turn the second verb ' making
pursnit came along.' See 1 2 1 .
(6) Turn thus : ' By this same victory of Plassy, one mar say
($royd), the foundation of the English rule was established.'
(7) Turn thus : ' Even then S.'s feet were not planted in M.'
(8) This sentence is difficult, and requires the use of the Past
Conditional in the second clause, as follows : — ' Trust indeed of
anyone was not to him (th& ht naMn), and trust could have been
(ho-saktA) then to him, had he done good (bhaltft M hoft) with
anyone.' (See (170) Insert jab after ki in last clause.
(9) Introduce this sentence by n&char. In the second clause
avoid the passive by making facfir the subject of the verb, imme-
diately followed by the first relative clause in parenthesis. The
second relative clause should be detache.l as a new sentence.
(10) This may be turned in imitation of the idiom exemplified
at 201. 9 Kv inserting to khair after M. J.
(11) Turn ' without informing his father.' See 96.
I'AET III. SECTION II. 177
6.
1 Mysore (Maisur) was ruled at this period by
Haider 'Ali. 2 This man, whose father had risen from
a common soldier to a high rank in the service of the
Nawwab of Sira, became conspicuous for his daring
valour in the army of the Mysore Diwan ; and eventually
pensioned off the ruling Kaja and himself became sove-
reign of the country. The discovery of a hidden treasure
at Bidnaur further increased his resources, and he began
to extend his dominions on all sides. In the year
1767 A.D. Nizam Ali, accompanied by an English contin-
gent, according to an existing treaty, made an attack
upon Mysore ; and Haider, being defeated by the English,
formed a junction with 3 the former. 4 The confede-
rates, with an army of seventy thousand against twelve
thousand English, were defeated with a loss of sixty-four
guns. Hereupon, the Nizam made terms with the Eng-
lish ; but Haider Ali still maintained hostilities, 5 some-
times losing and sometimes gaining ground, till at last
he too made peace with the Company and c concluded
an offensive and defensive alliance on the basis of mutual
restorations.
Directions.
(1) See ubove, Introductory Remarks, par. 7. (10).
(2) If the English order of clauses were copied here, the subject
would be too far removed from the principal verb ' became,' which
in Hindustani must be placed at the end of the sentence. The
best plan is to break up the sentence into two collateral clauses,
thus: — ' This man's father had risen,' etc., followed by • lie himself
tvm:iiiiing (106) >» the army of D. of M., and doing work of
12
178 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
bravery and manliness, increased so much that he,' etc. Observe
in this the way in which the epithet 'daring' (see |QI. (0> is
got rid of, and the adverb ' eventually ' expressed. ' Ruling Eaja '
may be simply translated wdh&n k<% raj&, and ' became ' in the last
clause may be forcibly expressed by the compound ian-baithnA.
(3) Nizam AH was Subahdar of the Deccan, hence instead of the
'former 'use the term subahddr.
(4) This sentence is not easy to dispose of, though the terms are
simple. Turn as follows : ' Then these two, acting in concert
(muttafiq hokar), encountered the English with an army of seventy
thousand, but the E. with an army of twelve thousand beat them
all and took sixty-four guns.'
(5) Turn thus : ' In these hostilities sometimes his loss was
taking place (7io/d«d), sometimes (the loss) of the English,' and
connect this with the next sentence by yahdn tak ki. Comp. last
Sect. 8. (")•
(6) Expand this difficult clause as follows : — ' Both sides (tdra-
fain), who the provinces of which had taken, those they restored,
and both together for their respective protection made a treaty of
•mutual assistance.' 'Assistance' is here mo'&wanat, this form of
T*»rbal being expressive of reciprocity. See App. A, Form III.
7.
Tippoo (Tipu) had made peace with the Company
1 under the pressure of necessity, and 2 it was not
strange that he still cherished feelings of hostility. The
Governor- General had proof that he was corresponding
with the French, with the object of obtaining their assis-
tance in his designs ; 3 and, being a man of great
determination, he at once issued orders for the assembling
of an array at Madras, and 4 gave Tippoo the choice of
two alternatives, viz., either the cossion of his territory
on the Malabar coast to meet the expenses of the con
centration of the troops, an undertaking to give up all
communication with the French and to expel all French-
PART III. SECTION II. 170
men from his dominions, the admission of a British
Resident at the Court of Mysore, 5 or, on the other
hand, war. 6 Tippoo having vouchsafed no reply to
these demands, the Company's forces crossed the frontier
on the Madras and Bombay sides. 7 The Nawwab of
Haiderabad sent an auxiliary force, but 8the Peshwa
was induced by Scindhia (Sendhia) to hold aloof.
Tippoo encountered the English at a distance of forty
miles from his capital, and was defeated and fell back.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1 ) This phrase may be turned by majbdr hokar placed at the
beginning of the sentence.
(2) Put this interrogatively, ' What wonder that the fire of hatred
remained burning in his bosom ?' Comp. 159. *•
(3) Begin fresh sentence ' He was,' etc.
(4) Turn thus : 'Wrote word to T.' following this by a statement
of the terms offered in the oratio recta, the alternatives being
either the payment of the expenses, a treaty adverse to the French,
the admission of a Resident, or war.
(5) Turn thus : ' or, consider the Company your enemy.'
(6) The form of continuation best suited to the Hindustani
idiom is 'When no answer to this came from the side of Tippoo.'
(7) Get rid of the adjective here by saying ' The army of the
N. of H. too was companion of the Government in this expedi-
tion.'
(8) Turn thus: 'by the tempting of Mahoraj Scndhia the P.
was not a sharer in help.'
8.
(Continued.)
1 He assumed that the English army would advance
by the same route it came before, and therefore stripped
180 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
that part of the country of foi'age and supplies ; but
when he found that 2 another line of march was taken,
he was utterly disheartened, and told his followers that
3 his days were numbered. They said they would die with
him. The English at once laid siege to S^ringapatam
(Shrirangapatan), 4 while the allies looked on. The
Governor-General in person directed the operations ; and
on the 4th of May 1799 A.D. the English flag was planted
on the wails. Tippoo's corpse was found amongst the
slain, and his sons 5 surrendered themselves. 6 The spoils
amounted to nine hundred and twenty-nine cannon and
a hundred thousand stand of arms, with ammunition,
and more than ten millions in cash and jewel". " By
rights the territory of Tippoo ought to have been parti-
tioned among the victors, but the Governor- General
deeming it impolitic to enlarge the Nizam's dominions,
divided a portion only between the Company and the
Nizam, and assigned the remainder to 8 the representa-
tive of the Hindu regime who had been dispossessed by
Haider AH, 9 on condition that he should maintain a
contingent of the Government troops for the safety of
the kingdom, at a cost of seven lakhs, and that if the
necessity arose, the civil administration of the country
should be placed in the hands of English officials.
Directions.
(1) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle in the first clause fol-
lowed by ki with the oratio recta, and omit ' and therefore ' in the
next. 'Stripped,' etc. may be rendered by 'went along destroy-
ing.' 121
(2) Turn thus ; ' the English have not come by this road, (and)
have chosen another road."
PAUT III. SECTION II. I - 1
(3) The corresponding idiom is ' My days are arrived.' The
answer of the soldiers may be idiomatically paraphrased ' Where
your sweat will fall, our blood will fall,' which occurs in the Hind'
original.
(4) A collateral clause in this form : ' The Nawwab's army re-
mained looking at the spectacle.' See ||8.
(5) The simple expression hdzir hUe ' were in attendance' (in the
Governor- General's camp) is sufficiently significant.
(6) Begin by the enumeration of the details, and add 'camo into
the hands of the English.' See 51. '3-
(7) Form a concessional sentence, and translate ' ought to have
been,' etc. by ch&hfe th& fci, followed by the Past Conditional.
(8) Turn : ' to the heir of the old Raja of M.,' the title of Raja
being a sufficient indication of ' Hindu,' and serving as antecedent
to the relative clause ' whom H. A. had turned out thence.'
(9) Turn as follows : ' and had this stipulation made (kar<l-lend)
that in future for protection a Government army remain (ra/id
fcarnd), and seven lakhs of rupees yearly expenditure be paid (ad\
Tid'i tarnd), and when necessity falls (purnd) the Government
carry on the administration of the country in its own method.'
9,
Scindhia sought to annex the district of Gohad to his
territories, but J the Rana was an ally of the Company
and asked for their assistance ; and in consequence Cap-
tain Popham, who was marching with a small force to join
the main army under General Goddard, received orders
to drive the Marhattas out of Gohad. Having effected
this, Pophaui seized the Fort of Lahur and then Kid
siege to Gwalior, 2 one of the most formidable forts in
India, perched on the summit of an almost perpendicular
rock. The people of those parts believed that, if only
toil men were present to roll down stones on the attick-
ing party, 3 no force, however large, could take it by
assault ; 4 and, as the Fort was then held by a thou-
182 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
sand picked men of Scindhia's army, well supplied with
the materials of war, 5 Pophatn was at a loss liow to
proceed. Chance befriended him. He got hold of a
thief who was in the habit of entering the Fort by a
secret foot-path ; and by this route, before the morrow's
dawn, Popham first and his men close behind, 6by means
of ropes and ladders, by driving pegs into the crevices of
the rock, and grasping shrubs and roots, 7 more in the
fashion of monkeys than men, scaled the heights and
defences and 8 suddenly burst into the stronghold.
9 The Marhatta garrison had scarcely risen from their
slumbers, when, seeing the enemy like grim death upon
them, they lost their wits and abandoned the Fort.
Directions.
(1) It will be convenient to carry down this sentence to
' Gwalior,' so as to detach the descriptive sentence which follows
for amalgamation with the next period, as more suitable to the
Hindustani idiom. The sentence, then, takes the following form,
and this shall be given in full as a good illustration of the Hindu-
stani period : ' But as a treaty of the Eana had been made with
(se) the Company, therefore he begged aid from the Company, and
Captain Popham, who with a small army was going to unite with
General Goddard's camp, he immediately on the order of Govern-
ment arriving drove the Marhattas out of Gohad, and then having
conquered their fort Lahar,' went and laid siege to the fort of
Gwalior.'
(2) Turn thns: ' This fort on a standing rock was built with such
strength and firmness that,' etc.
(3) See |75.
(4) Begin this sentence with aur ab to, and end it at ' war.'
(5) Continue, 'Popham was at a loss by what device he may
mount the hill, whe-n (fci) by good luck he net with a tlncf,' etc.
See Piece 3 . (2) above.
(6) The junctura of this period is formed by the use of the Past
Conjunctive Participle with each item of the description.
PAIII 111. SECTION 11. 1-.°.
(7) Treat as a parenthesis : ' There was no knowing at the frl.ue
whether they are men or monkeys.' See last Sect. (4. (5)-
(8) The expressive phrases sub he sab, b&t ki bat, will servo the
purpose.
(9) Turn as follows : ' The Marhattas, who suddenly rising from
their pallets saw the enemies like death (ajal) mounted on ^their)
heads, at that moment, losing their wits, abandoned (hha.lt tordend)
the fort.'
to.
1 Jeswnnt Rao Holkar, Raja of Indore, was now the
only chief who declined to acknowledge the authority of
the Company. He refused to send a vakeel and did not
scruple to plunder their dominions. Reprisals were de-
termined upon, and a small force under the command of
Colonel Mouson was sent to engage him ; - but this
officer, after having blown up the gates of Tonk, allowed
himself to be entangled in the Mukandara Pass and to
be hemmed in there by Holkar's army. 3 The force
extricated itself with the greatest difficulty, and, after
much suffering and loss, fought its way to Agra in a
shuttered condition. 4 Holkar's elation was unbounded.
He at once proceeded to lay siege to Dehli with a force of
twenty thousand men and thirty guns. The garrison at
that time consisted of only eight hundred men with
eleven guns ; but Ochterlony, the Resident, 6 completely
baffled the Marhattas, and they decamped, on the news of
Lord Lake's approach, 6 after a fruitless struggle of
i ine days' duration.
Directions.
(1) Turn thas : 'Now only one, Jeswant Rao Holkar, l\aju of
I n<loro, remained, who neither Lowed his head before the Company
nor sent in his vakeel, nay more, unscrupulously kept plundering
the Government province*. '
184 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(2) ' But ' is not required for the junctura here. Begin ' The
said sahib blew up, etc. . . . but having been misled (P. C. I'.),
being entangled (P. C. P.), . . . was surrounded by,' etc.
(3) Turn as follows: 'At last the force escaping (P.O. P.) thenca
with very great difficulties, fighting, struggling (Imp. P.), under-
going (Imp. P.) hundreds of troubles of heat and rains, and suffer-
ing (Imp. P.) loss, being shattered (P. C. P.) reached Agra.'
(4) Turn ' What limit was there to Holkar's elation ? '
(5) This phrase is best expressed by a proverbial turn, as ' quito
set the Marhattas' teeth on edge.'
(6) Turn this similarly : ' having beaten and beaten their heads
for nine days ' — a sign of despair.
11.
General Lake invested Bkartpur on the 3rd of January
1805. l The first assault was made on the 9th, but the
English, on arriving at the edge of the moat found the
water 2 too deep to be forded, and 3 many men were
lost in the attempt. On the 21st the attack was renewed
from another side, 4 but here the moat proved too
broad for the bridge which the attacking force had
brought with them, and on their attempting to lengthen
it with ladders the whole thing fell into the water, and
many perished. A third attack was made next day on
another part of the defences, and though 5 the Sepoys
crossed the moat and mounted the walla, the English
soldiers declined to accompany them, and they had to
retire. Eight hundred and ninety-four men were killed
on this occasion. Next day Lake bitterly upbraided the
English soldiers for their disobedience of orders, and
these, 6 ashamed of their conduct, led a fourth assault ;
but the defenders had repaired the bastion and wall in
the meantime, 7 and the attack was foiled with a loss
of a thousand men. 8 The army was now worn out ;:n 1
PART 111. StCTlOX II. 1 -"•
beaten with fatigue, their ammunition was expended
and the supplies exhausted, ana Lake was forced to with-
draw.
Directions.
(1) Contracted collateral clause with the same subject. ' On the
9th (he) attacked.'
(2) Instead of this, say ' chest full deep,' chh&tt bhar gahrA.
(3) Turn ' in this many men were lost (kdm dncl).
(4) Turn as follows : ' But there the moat was so broad that the
bridge which they had made and brought (bana-Zdnd) fell short
(chhota parnd), and when joining on ladders they desired to lengthen
it, that bridge fell into the water.'
(5) For 'Sepoys' use Hindustani sip&ht, and for ' English sol-
diers,' gore or gore log ' white-folk.'
(6) Turn ' having come into a sense-of-shame.'
(7) Turn ' For the attackers no way was found, and more than a
thousand men were killed.'
(8) Turn ' People became tired out and disheartened,' etc., and
instead of ' and ' in the final clause begin with n&chdr ' helpless ' ;
the form of verb is that used at 5 1 . 2- Further, as the word
' army ' is not reproduced in the first clause, treat the gerund as o
transitive (causal) in agreement with fauj ; thus, fauj hat'lnt part.
12.
At this period Shah ShupV, grandson of Ahmed Shah
Durrani, * was driven from the throne of Kabul by his
brother Mali mud, 2 and became for a time the prisoner
nf Ranjit Singh in the Pan jab. Here he was deprived of
the famous diamond called the Koh-i-nur, and after much
ill-treament eventually sought shelter in British territory.
' Mahmud, on the other hand, was expelled from Kabul
by Host, Mahomed, the son of the Vazir Fat eh Khan
1'aruk/ai, whom the usurper had blinded and put to
death. Under theso circumstances Count Simonich, the
186 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Russian Ambassador at the Persian Court, 4 by way of
extending the influence of Russia, urged the Shah to lay
claim to Afghanistan, and on his despatching an army to
lay siege to Herat, paid him a subsidy on the Czar's be-
half. 5 The result was the discomfiture and retreat of
the Persians ; and when England asked for an explana-
tion, the Russian Government disclaimed all knowledge
of the Ambassador's proceedings. 6 The suspicion enter-
tained by the authorities in India that Russia had designs
on India, and would, if opportunity offered, advance in
this direction, was confirmed, by the statement of Captain
Burnes, who had been sent on a political mission to Kabul
in 1837, that Dost Mahomed was in confidential corre-
spondence with the Russians, and that the latter had
even promised to recover Peshawar for him from Ranjit
Singh.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) An attempt to reproduce the passive construction of the
English in this sentence would end in confusion. Turn as follows :
' In this time A. S. D.'s grandson S. S., who -was Amir of A., his
brother M. had expelled from thence.' There is no obscurity in
the Hindustani, for Shuja' will be marked by ko and M. by ne.
(2) Begin this sentence with Shah Shujd1 to, pointing to a corre-
spondence with Mahmtid at the beginning of the next.
(3) Construct this sentence on the model of (1) above.
(4) Turn thus : 'Thinking this a fine opportunity of extending
the power of the Czar in this direction,' and omit ' under those cir-
cumstances ' at the beginning of the sentence.
(5) Turn in the following manner : ' But that army being worsted
returned from Hirat, and when England,' etc.
(6) This period must be broken up as follows to suit the idiom of
Hindustani: ' However, the Company had a strong suspicion that
in. SECTION it. 187
certainly Russia's tooth is on India, wnen (she) gets opportunity,
(she) will advance foot in this direction, and in confirmation of this
Capt. B.' etc.
13,
(Continued.)
1 The Indian Government never seriously contemplated
the question of a Russian invasion. 2 Should it be argued
that Russia might incite the peoples of Persia, Tartary,
and Afghanistan, to invade India by stimulating their
hopes of spoil, it must be borne in mind 3 that the times
of Mahmud of Gbazni and Changez Khan are passed
away, when bare-headed and bare-footed Gakkars cut
to pieces the cavalry of Mahmud ; 4 when a Raja liko
Anandpal lost a battle by the flight of an elephant ;
when the followers of Jelaluddin of Khwurazm, 5 with
clubs cut from the forest, and mounted on bullocks, did
battle with the army of Changez Khan in the Sindh
SA^ar Doab; cand when powerful kings depended for
success on the prowess of archers. 7 We have seen all
along how small bodies of English troops have put to
flight the armies of Shahs, Sultans, Nawwabs, Marhattas,
Naipalis, and Burmese, 8no matter how numerous th< \
were ; and that even men trained by Dupleix and
Bussy were unable to face the English artillery. Surely
the half-civilized invaders above spoken of are of no
account.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) To use Hindustani for 'Indian' is of course impracticable,
nor can our use of the word ' Russian ' he imitated. The sentence
i :;iy bo turned ns follows : — 'The Government paid no attention at
Lb8 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
all to this point (bat), that, well! bow can the Kussians come
hither ? '
(2) Turn, in accordance with the principle so often laid down :
If anyone say that, what ! cannot the Kussians,' etc.
(3) This clause should be turned as follows : ' that now the
period of .... has not remained, when (ki jab),' etc.
(4) In correspondence with the above construction, 'when'
here, and in the two next clauses, should be translated aur na
icoh zamana hai ki, varied by waqt for zamana.
(5) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle, ' having cut,' in the in-
tensive form of k&t-k&t-kar.
(6) Turn ' were placing their centre of battle on archers.'
(7) The junctura required here is balki, and the verb dekhtd
chal& And, and the subordinate clause may be thus put : ' that
from very small armies of the English Government what numerous
hosts (kaise kaise dal-bddal lashkar) of Shahs, etc. fled defeated.'
(8) Form a detached sentence from this point to the end of the
piece, as follows : — ' The thing is this, that when an army, etc. flew
away (wr-jdnd) like nocks of cotton before the English artillery,
then (to pliir) what count (haqiqat) is there of Iiuu, Turan ?' etc.
14.
(Concluded.)
Should it be argued that * there is nothing to pre-
vent a Russian army approaching the Panjab, we reply
that 2 it is possible to suppose anything, 3 but
at least let us remember the distance between Russia
and the Panjab, and the deserts and mountains that
block the way. 4 Again, the resources of Russia are un-
equal to the transport of fifty thousand disciplined troops
with the proper complement of artillery by this route.
6 Then, too, the time occupied by the Russians in
crossing the Hindu Kush 6 alone would enable our
Government to convey twice as many men by steamboat or
railway to the banks of the Indus. 7Add to this, that
PART 111. SECTION II. 189
the Russians would arrive upon the scene tired and
wearied with their long march, 8 famished for want of
supplies in Afghanistan, and enfeebled by the change of
climate, 9 while the English array, posted on its own
frontier, would be fresh and ready for the fray, 10 with
a fertile country in its rear and abundance of supplies.
11 Moreover, a single English battalion in the Khaibar
Pass would be enough to destroy the fifty thousand
Russians.
Directions.
(1) Use the oratio recta in the form of an interrogation, viz.
1 What ! cannot the Russians bring their armies to the Panjab ? '
(2) The corresponding phrase is bar taqdtr farz mumkin hai.
(3) ' Magar Akhir one ought to reflect that, What deserts, etc. lie
between Bussia and the Panjab, the passage of which how dif-
ficult it is.'
(4) Turn thus : ' Again, where has Russia so much money as
that (she) can give the cost of bringing,' etc.
(5) After the conjunction begin with relative clause.
(6) Express by ek, placed before Hindu Kush. Comp. Piece 10 (i).
(7) Either iske 'aldwa, or qat'-nazar in sab bdton ke.
(8) Turn : ' Hungry thirsty on account of scantiness of supplies
from Afghanistan.'
(9) For ' while ' translate ' and here.'
(10) Turn thus: 'And from the P., of which the fertility is
famous, how easy will be the collection of supplies ! '
(11) Turn thus : 'Besides this (siiuOe iske), one white battalion
(paltan) is enough for,' etc.
190 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI
SECTION III.
MISCELLANEOUS.
1,
In the Spring of 1838, when the famine l which had
for some time afflicted the North-western provinces of
India was still raging, it happened that I was encamped
not far from the town of Eewari. 2 The perguunah
was just surveyed, and I had come down to that part of
the country to settle the land revenue fora term of thirty
years. While I was there, a feud arose between the
Mussulman and Hindu inhabitants of the town, 3 which,
but for the interference of the authorities on the spot,
would most unquestionably have ended in bloodshed, if
not in a partial insurrection. 4 The point in dispute
arose from a well-known prejudice of the Hindus against
the slaughter of the ox, which they hold to be a sacred
animal. The Mussulmans, on the other hand, wished to eat
beef, as it was cheaper than either mutton or goat ; 5 and
though they formed only a small minority of the popula-
tion, they seemed determined now at length to get their
way. 6 Year after year they had begged for permis-
sion to kill the forbidden animal within the walls, or even
at any reasonable distance outside. 7 But it had been
all in vain, for the Hindus vowed that 8they would
have recourse to force if their religious scruples were dis-
regarded, and so the Mussulmans remained dissatisfied
and oppressed.
(To be continued.)
PAHT 111. SECTION' lU. 191
Direction ».
(1) Put the relative clause after 'raging,' so as to avoid the
clashing of tho verbs. See Int. Eem. f . (10).
(2) Turn thus : ' A new survey in this pargana had been, and I
had gone there to make a thirty-year settlement of the revenue.'
(3) With ais'l in the preceding clause, proceed as follows : ' that,
if the authorities arriving on the spot had not interfered, there
would have been an emeute (baZtcd), or if there had not been an
emeute, there would certainly have been bloodshed.' In this, the
adjective ' partial ' of the text is avoided by tlio use of a word
which rather falls short of our term ' insurrection."
(4) Begin thus : ' The foundation of the disturbance was,1 etc.
(5) Turn as follows : ' and though (go") in comparison of the
whole population the number of the Mussulmans was very small
(fccrni), but at last they had already determined to obtain their
desire.' For ' already ' see 76. J '•
(6) Turn thus : ' Every year they were begging ' (Continnative).
(7) Turn thus : ' but their requests were in vain (rVeghn j'lnd,').'
(8) The oratio recta : ' if in this matter our religious rules wre
set aside, we shall be ready to do violence.' For the tense of tho
first clause see Introductory Remarks 7. (2).
2,
(Continued.)
At last the leading members of the Mussulman popu-
lation brought me one day, when I was in camp, a fresh
entreaty * worded in somewhat the following manner :
2 Hail, cherisher of the poor ! Be it known unto your
enlightened Excellency, that for mauy years the Hindus
of this town have, 3by their lying and deceitful repre-
sentations to the highest authorities, prevented the Mus-
sulmans from killing cattle, 4 under the plea that those
animals are sacred. Our lords, the Englisn, have
nitherto made it their rule to prevent one class of their
192 EITJRCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
subjects from tyrannising over another, 5 and ha.ve
dealt out impartial justice to all, making no distinction
between caste, creed, colour, or race. 6 Indeed, such
is the protection which all enjoy, that it may be said that
the wolf and the lamb drink from the same ghaut.
7 What, then, have we oppressed creatures done, that
we are denied the benefits which all others enjoy ?
8 Trusting that you will take our grievous case into
speedy consideration, and issue an order enabling us to
eat beef, we pray that on you the sun of prosperity may
ever shine glorioasly. £uch was the petition that was
read out on that day in open court before several hun-
dreds of Hindus and Mussalmans. Everyone around
could see and hear all that was going on, as the canvas
walls of the tent were taken down on three sides.
(To lie continued.)
Directions.
(1) That is, ' nearly (qartb qartb) to this effect.' See 30.9-
(2) This is a. capital specimen of a native petition. The intro-
duction and conclusion should be given in the stereotyped form,
viz. — garib-parwar sal&mat, and il&hi aft&b-i-dzulat o iqb'd hamesha
tciban rahe,faqat.
(3) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle — ' having represented
falsehood and deceit in the service of the superior officers.' See
103.3
(4) Fresh clause : 'and have made this pretext,' etc.
(5) Express this as part of the ' rule ' ; thus, ' and that with
every person without distinction of etc. justice be done in one
manner.'
(6) Express the junctura here by chuminchi.
(7) Turn as follows : ' then fpan) what fault have we oppressed
ones done that we do not receive,' etc.
(8) The correct form here is — ' it is the hope that your Excellency,
giving speedy consideration to our earnest-plea (ittig&sa\ will,'
eic.
PART II'. SECTION HI. 103
3.
(Continued.)
While the petition was being read, the audience l pre-
served a respectful silence; the Mussulmans stood
anxiously expecting my decision, and I observed the
Hindus furtively glancing at my countenance to read, if
possible, the order about to be issued. 2 1 may here
remark that no people in the world are more observant
of character, or more quick or able judges of it, than those
of Hindustan. 3They seem by a kind of intuition to
understand every movement and every gesture. Nor is
this surprising. Subject for so many centuries to rulers
whose will is law, the ability to comprehend the character
and anticipate the thoughts of their masters has become
a necessary part of their education. I felt that both law
and equity were on the side of the Mussulmans, but
4 seeing how strong was the feeling of opposition
among the Hindus, and what an infringement of a long-
standing custom it would be, 1 advised them to make a
formal application to the Commissioner, as superinten-
dent of police, 5 who forthwith sent an order permitting
the slaughter of cattle. I fixed upon a spot for this
operation about three-quarters of a mile from the town,
6 hoping thus to soften the blow to the Hindus. But
their rage and indignation knew no bounds, and I was
continually beset wherever I moved with petitioners.
Finding me inexorable, they returned to their homes to
deliberate with their friends. 7 They waited in ominous
peace until the festival of the Mohurram, six weeks
later, came round, theu suddenly rose and attacked
13
194 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
8 the Mussulman procession with all manner of weapons,
bricks, stones, and even dead pigs and dogs, animals to
which ' the faithful ' have the greatest abhorrence.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) Turn thus : ' remained respectfully standing silent,' so as to
relieve the next clause of the word ' stood,' which is not intended
to apply to the Hahomedans alone, and proceed — ' The Mussul-
mans were aaxious in expectation of my decision, and the Hindus
furtively looking (dekh-dekhkar) at my face, were wishing that, if
possible, they may discover from my physiognomy (gtyd/a) that, in
this business what order will be issued.'
(2) See Sect. II. 3 . 4- f°r tne best method of beginning this
sentence, and proceed — 'There are no such men in the whole
world anywhere who in the art of physiognomy- knowing are
more quick and intelligent than Hindustanis.'
(3) This, too, is a difficult sentence. Turn : ' It seems that they
have a kind of intuition (tafarrus) in discovering from every
movement and sign the interior state.'
(-1) Turn as follows : ' Seeing this, that the Hindus have a heart-
felt desire of preserving this ancient custom, nay more, are ready
for opposition/ etc.
(5) As shown in former examples, the relative clause in this posi-
tion must be detached : ' accordingly, the said Sahib issued an
order,' etc.
(6) Turn : ' with this hope that the grief of the Hindus may be
less.'
(7) This may be expressed : ' they chose a superficial (Apart)
silence, but when,' etc.
(8) Say : ' the ta'zias of the Mnsalmans,' which are the chief
feature of the processions on these occasions.
4.
(Continued.)
1 The confusion and tumult which ensued were tre-
mendous, and a desperate affray and loss of life would
PART III. SECTION III. 195
have been the result had not the Tahsildar, a native of
much force of character and self-won influence in the
place, hastily summoned the police to the spot, and put
himself, though a Hindu and a Brahmin, at the head of
the Mussulman procession, and conducted it iu safety
through the town. The parties separated, mutually
breathing vengeance against each other ; 2 the Muslims
swearing by their fathers' graves that they would wash
out the insult in the blood of every Hindu in the town,
3 even if they died to a man the martyr's death.
The Tahsildar was thankful for his success so far, but
felt that the presence of the magistrate alone could arrest
further mischief, and accordingly sent special messengers
5 for me to the place where business had called me. I
was in camp forty miles off, in a straight line, but with a
range of steep and pathless hills between, 6 necessita-
ting a circuitous route some twenty miles longer, so the
information did not reach me till about noon the follow-
ing day. 7Here was a pleasant communication for
me ; the hot wind was blowing a perfect simoon, and it
required no small spirit of adventure at such a season to
face the heat and sand over that wild country. I sum-
moned some of the neighbouring villagers, and asked
if they knew the direct paths over the hills, and whether
they would engage to conduct me across. They replied
that they knew the way well enough, but that it was
quite impracticable for any but men on foot or for goats.
' Never mind,' I replied, ' I can go, and you can show me
the way '; and 8 a guide was started at once to wait at
the base of the hill till the heat of the day had suffi-
ciently subsided for me to \vnture across the plain.
(To be continued.)
196 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Directions.
(1) To attempt to follow the English form of the period here
would lead to confusion. It may be broken up as follows (in skele-
ton) : ' From this tremendous confusion, etc. was created, and
there was suspicion that a desperate, etc. will be, but the Tahsil-
dar, who was a very, etc., summoned the police, and though he
himself was a Hindu, etc. but leading the Muslims he caused,' etc.
For the epithet 'tremendous' see 24. The idea of 'self-won
influence ' is fairly conveyed by ro'b, which means the c respect '
enjoyed by a man for personal or other merits. The adjectival
form is ro'bd&r.
(2) Turn: ' and the Muslims, taking oaths of, etc., were saying
that.'
(3) For the mode of expressing this clause see J76. 9-
(4) Turn as follows : ' from this idea that without the magistrate's
having come (96) there will be no arrest of this disturbance,'
and omit ' and accordingly.'
(5) It is quite sufficient to turn this clause by mere p&s.
(6) Turn ' in coming and going a circuit (pher) of twenty miles
lay (par-j&n&).' Comp. the use of this verb at 157. I-
(7) Tack this clause to the preceding in the form aur Ichalar
kaisi !
(8) Turn thus : ' A guide at that very time was started that he
may remain waiting below the hills till (t& &n 'ki), when the heat
became rather less, I, too, may be able to make intention of passing
over (se) the plain.'
5,
(Continued.}
At 3 P.M. I mounted my best Arab, and, with, one
mounted orderly, started for the hill, * at tlie foot of
which I found the guide waiting. We dismounted, and
led our horses up the steep ascent. Before we had gone
far the orderly's horse fell ; we left him to his fate, as
there was no time for delay. 2 The path now became
PART III. SECTION III 197
more and more precipitous. In places it seemed all but
impassable, and had there been room to turn my horse,
I felt almost inclined 3 to give it up and go back.
4 Yet we pushed on and on till we reached the top.
5 If it was a labour for my poor horse to scramble
up, the difficulty and danger of descending the other
side was much greater; 6 any slip would hurl him
headlong down ; 7 but by dint of care, what with
sliding and slipping on his haunches, 8we at last
reached the bottom without serious damage. It was six
o'clock by the time the descent was accomplished, 9 so
that there was little more than an hour of daylight re»
maining, with more than thirty miles of sandy trackless
plain intersected by ravines to traverse, 10 and nothing
but a western star and information from an occasional
village to guide me. But, trusting to the speed and en-
durance of my gallant steed, well tried in many a hard
dav's run before, I dismissed the guide, a-.d n set off at
a hand gallop.
(To be continued.')
Directions.
(1) Begin fresh sentence, and turn as follows : ' Then (pht'r)
when wo arrived there where we found, etc., we, dismounting and
taking (le le) the hor>os hv leading-rein, began to ascend the hill.'
(2) Turn this clause in the manner indicated at (37. '3-
(3) An expression used in Sect. I. Pieco 9 (faskh i'amd) will
answer here.
(4) Turn this as a simple sentence, and see ||2. 8. for Parti-
cipial phrase.
(5) This may be expressed as follows : ' On my poor horse what
misfortune of ascent was (nn-bannd), than that a hundredfold mor»>
ilirticultics in descent- liet'ell.'
198 EXEECISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(6) Turn ' if his foot had made the slightest slip he would have
been overturned below.'
(7) All this is extremely difficult. Turn ' when he was beginning
to slip or slide we were carefully propping him.'
(8) Begin fresh sentence, and combine it with the next clause as
follows : ' so far that (yah&n tak Tci) at evening at the time of six
o'clock we arrived sound and safe below the hill.'
(9) Fresh sentence : ' For the rest of the journey, of daylight
some one hour remained, and I had to traverse (tai karna}, etc., in
which there were,' etc.
(10) Again begin fresh sentence : ' Except a western star, or the
information which there may be a chance of obtaining from vil-
lagers, seeing no other means of guidance, and trusting,' etc.
(11) Turn ' raised the horse's rein,' which is a mode of expression
closely corresponding to the idea of the English phrase.
6.
(Continued.)
Towards ten o'clock at night I discerned the thousand
little twinkling lamps which light an eastern city, ] and
riding into the town, found the people all on the alert,
and was soon recognised, my horse and myself being well
known there. 'Larens Sahib is come,' was repeated from
mouth to mouth with much surprise. My sudden appear-
ance scared them, and they slunk away to their houses.
2 After parading the streets for a short time till they
were quiet, I went to the Tahsildar and heard from him
of the commotion having increased throughout that day.
I sent messengers to collect all the police from the neigh-
bourhood, and then repaired to the somewhat rough
quarters of a hostelry outside the walls. Here I luckily
found 3 an officer belonging to the political department,
Captain E , who, being in ill-health, was glad to
recruit in rather more comfort than in tents ; for I had
repaired and slightly furnished two or three rooms in tiie
TART III. SECTION III. 199
serai, 4 in case of an emergency like the present. After
seeing my horse well rubbed down and fed 1 retired to
rest. In the morning I stationed police at the gates, at
the market-place, and at other 5 central spots, so that
they might be ready in case the Hindus should have
recourse to arms, and there they remained for three
weekr.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) Form the junctura here by a change in the form of the
description, thus : ' (1) entered into the town, and (to) found the
people alert and awake. Recognising me (they were knowing me
and my horse well), they were astonished that how the Sahib came,
and immediately (b&t ki b&t men) this news was spread (zab&nzad
Tiond) that,' etc.
( 2) Turn as follows : ' I paraded the streets for a short time, and
when I saw that now there remained no fear of outbreak, I went to
the Tahsiklar and heard (his) report of the increasing of the dis-
turbance.'
(3) Political maJikama k& ek kapt&n s&hib.
(4) Turn ' that if a necessity like to-day (3J joist) happened,
there may bo no trouble."
(5)- This may bo expressed by sadr maqAm.
7,
(Continued.)
Thus the danger passed by, for l the Mussulmans,
with their more active warlike habits, backed by the
European forces, were too strong for their opponents
2 so, after receiving a decided rebuff to a fresh petition
from me, the Hindus tried a wholly new method. By a
preconcerted and simultaneous movement they shut up
all the shops, suspended trade and business of every
200 EXERCI3E3 IN HINDUSTANI.
description, and declared that, until the obnoxious order
-was rescinded, they would neither buy nor sell, nor,
indeed, hold any communication with the opposite party.
3 This plan of passive resistance was by far the most
effectual they could have adopted. It completely para-
lysed their enemies, and 4 alarmed the magistrate more
than lie would have liked to own ; for they had complete
control over the supplies, being the wholesale, as well as
retail, dealers of the town. The next morning, 5 when
not only the Mussulmans but the lower orders of Hindus
came as usual to purchase the day's provisions, they
found all the shops closed. 6 Living from hand to
mouth as they do, they were in blank despair, and,
adjourning to my house, they implored my leave to break
open the granaries and 7 help themselves, if I could not
compel the traders to open their shops. I replied that
the traders had done nothing contrary to law, and that I
had no power to compel them in any way.
(To be continued.}
Directions.
(1) A difficult sentence to reproduce. The meaning may be
given as follows : ' In the first place the Mussulmans were active
and quarrelsome, in the second place we were at their back, then
(pns) their being victorious over their opponents was not
difficult.'
(2) Begin a fresh sentence, thus : ' A new petition which the
Hindus presented me, of it they received a flat refusal (see (85. 3) >
therefore they sought to bring into operation a rare method, viz.
this, that by mutual agreement they shut up,' etc.
(3) The expression ' passive resistance ' cannot easily be imitatcJ
in Hindustani. Perhaps the best way to treat the sentence is this :
' In reality the method of patient encounter (fogdbuZ) which they
adopted, this was very eff'?^i~~c» '
FART III. SECTION III. 201
V/»; The writer's avoidance of egotism here need not bo preserved
in Hindustani. Turn thus : ' and, if you ask the truth (sack ptichho
to) to me also was anxiety.'
(o) Use here the form of expression indicated at 2 0 1 . 9-
(6) Effect the junctura here by introducing the clause -with
chnnki as follows : ' As these people, whatever they were earning all
day, mi it were living,' etc.
(7) Apnd k&m nibilnd.
8.
(Continued.)
A plan occurred to me l which would give me time to
reason with the Hindus, and possibly bring them to a better
state of mind. I collected many waggon-loads of grain
from the country round at my own risk, trusting that the
Government would refund me when the peril was made
known to them. This grain I stored, and 2 gave out
by letters of credit to retail dealers whom I chose myself
and placed in the streets. In this way all the slight
wants of an Asiatic were supplied, and so careful was the
organization of the whole thing, that there was no ulti-
mate loss to the Government. Meanwhile I published
proclamations 3 warning the Hindus against blind alle-
giance to their priests, and telling them that any act
of violence would meet with prompt retribution. This
I was frequently able to do in isolated cases, as combina-
tion was now impossible for them. They first sent peti-
tions to the Commissioner, and 4then to the seat of
Government itself in the hills, complaining both of me,
their magistrate, and the Tahsildar. These were in due
time returned to mo for explanation. I did not think it
iitvessarv to answer their charges against myself, but
successfully vindicated the T;ihsililar.
(To be continued.)
202 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Directions.
(1) Turn as follows : ' that from it I shall obtain opportunity of
arguing with the Hindus, and if by it they come into the straight
way, it is no wonder.'
(2) Turn thus : ' entrusted for retail sale,' etc., with the verbs
' chose ' and ' placed ' in form of Past Conjunctive Participle.
(3) Oratio recta, ' that let not the Hindus foolishly engage in un-
lawful matters at the bidding of their Pandits, else, if any sort of
violence is shown, simultaneously (ma? an) punishment will be
inflicted.' Observe here the avoidance of the adjectives 'blind'
and ' prompt."
(4) Turn : ' and after that to Government on the hill.'
9.
(Concluded.)
For twenty-two days the Hindu traders 1 held out,
till I was much worn and harassed with the constant
work of inspection, repression, and writing answers to
complaints. At last the poorer Hindus found that they
were injuring themselves as well as the Mussulmans ;
2 gradually a shop was opened here and there, and on the
evening of the twenty-second day a crowd of Hindus came
to me in a humble frame of mind, 3 owning that they had
been led away by their priests, begging for pardon, and
solemnly promising never to repeat the offence, and offer-
ing to open their shops at once. I agreed to this, and thus
a combination which had threatened to produce a genera]
uproar was quietly and peaceably put down. 4 I was able
to satisfy the inquiries of Government into my somewhat
independent action in the matter, and so to establish the
conduct of the Tahsildar that he received special thanks
tor all he had done. 5 He did not, however, long survive
PANT III. SECTIOX I If. 203
to enjoy bis recovered credit. A few months afterwards
he died from a sudden attack of cholera.
LAWRENCE.
Directions.
(1) Turn thus: 'In that same way went on being contrary '
(sidd karnti), 'and I continuously doing (karte karte) watching and
punishing (sar-kobf) and answer-giving was wearied ('d/tz d-j'una).'
(2) Begin with chundnchi, and proceed ' place by place gradually
the shops went on being opened' (||8)-
(3) ' And declared ' followed by oratio recta. In the final clause
the form of verb illustrated at 129 ma7 be introduced, though
the usage is rare.
(4) Turn as follows : ' In this affair the inquiry which the
Government made on my somewhat free proceeding, of it I was
able to give a sufficient answer, and also so proved the good sei vices
of,' etc.
(5) Turn ' after this ho did not remain alive many days, that (ti)
the approbation (trd/i tcAh") which he had obtained, from it he could
have derived (Past Cond.) profit.'
to.
The Rajputs were l born soldiers : each division bad its
bereditary leader, and each formed a separate community,
like clans in ot'r ».r countries, - the members of which
were bound by many ties to their chiefs and to each
other. The rules of caste still subsisted, and tended to
render more powerful the connection just described. As
the chiefs of those clans stood in the same relation to the
I'aja as their ov.n retainers did to them, the king,
nobility aiu soldiery, all made one body, united by the
strongest feelings of kindred and military devotion. 8Thc
sort of feudal system which prevailed among the R-ij:
gave additional stability to this attachment, and all to-
gether produced the pride of birth, the high spirit, and
romantic notions 4 so striking in the military class of that
204 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
period. Their enthusiasm was kept up by the songs of
their bards, and inflamed by frequent contests 5 for glory
or for love. They treated women with a respect unusual
in the East ; and 6 were guided even towards their
enemies by rules of honour, which it was disgraceful to
violate.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) The Persian mddar-zdd suits the meaning exactly.
(2) Turn thus : ' and to the members with their chiefs ami
among themselves was a connection (wd-bastagi) of many sorts
(tarah tarah fci), and the fashion of caste observance (jdt-dharm)
too, which remained regularly in force, was more a causo of
strengthening of this connection.'
(3) This, too, is by no means easy. It may be paraphrased ' and
from the fashion of giving (and) taking jdgtr and service, such as
was current (riwdj) among the Eajputs, still more confirmation
(isteJikdni) came into this body.'
(4) Turn ' which at that period was a conspicuous mark of tho
military class.'
(5) This must be expanded : ' which sometimes for the sake of
(barde) glory and sometimes for the sake of love took place.'
(6) Avoid the change to the passive here, which spoils the sen-
tence from a Hindustani point of view. The last clause may bo
easily turned by ' to do the contrary of which was considered a dis-
grace.'
11,
(Concluded.)
1 If to these qualities we add a very strong disposition
to indolence, and make allowances for the effects of a long
period of depression, we have the character of the Eaj-
puts of the present day, 3 who bear much the same re-
semblance to their ancestors as those did to the warriors
of the Mahabharat. With all the noble qualities of \\\c
PART 1U. SECTION III. 205
early Rajputs was mixed a simplicity, 3 derived from
their want of intercourse with other nations, 4 which
rendered them inferior in practical ability, and even in
military efficiency, to men actuated by much less elevated
sentiments than theirs. Among the effects of their divi-
sion into clans, one was that 5 although the Rajputs are
anything but a migratory people, yet when they have
been compelled by external force to leave their seats, they
have often moved in a body like a Tartar horde ; and
when they occupied new lands, 6 they distributed them in
the same proportions as their former ones, and remained
without any alteration but that of place.
ELPHINSTONE.
Directions.
(1) The agency here being a matter of indifference, the passive
construction may be conveniently adopted, thus: 'together with
these qualities, if their being immoderately addicted to sloth be
described.' The next clause may be given more literally.
(2) Begin fresh sentence, thus : ' And this character is like that
of their (apne) ancestors (see Q\, 13.). in the proportion in which
jis nisbat se~) theirs (unki) is like that of the heroes of the Maha-
bharat.'
(3) Turn thus : ' which was created by their remaining apart
from other (jatr) nations.'
(4) The above introduction of the relative bars its adoption here.
Turn, therefore, ' and for this very reason they remained inferior in
practical wisdom, nay more (balki) in war-making (jang-Aicart), to
those peoole who in comparison with them were not ao mag-
nanimous.'
(5) Turn thus : ' though (30) migration is never agreeable to
Rajputs.'
(6) Turn thus : ' Tie way in which land-division \vaa effected
(hti& karnt) in their native country, in the same arrangement the
land of here too is divided.' The last clause should be a collateral
sentence: 'Except change of place no other difference waa
comim*-'
206 EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
12,
1The plain uninstructed Mahratta (Marliata), Suclra,
or Khatri, enters upon his career as a soldier 2 with the
same dress and with the same habits with which he tills
his fields or attends his flocks ; 3 and he has, generally
speaking, preserved, throughout revolutions that have at
one time raised him to the highest consideration and
power and again cast him back to his former occupa-
tions, the same simplicity of character. 4 This may be
referred to the nature of Hindu institutions, to the
example of Sivaji and his leaders, and to the advantage
derived from habits that gave facility to conquest 5 by
placing him in strong contrast with the proud and formal
Muhammadan ; by associating him with the Hindu
population of the countries he invaded ; and by prevent-
ing his progress ever being impeded by that pomp,
luxury, or pride, which forms so often an 6 incumbrance,
if not an obstacle, to the most successful conquerors.
That the Mahratta soldier was more distinguished by art
than by valour ; that he gloried as much in rapid flight
as in daring attack, 7 is not denied by the warmest
panegyrist of his tribe ; but though these facts are
admitted, and, further, that he was often mean and
sordid, 8it is contended, and with truth, that he Lad
many excellent qualities. 9 Few could claim superiority
to him in patience under fatigue, hunger, and thirst, and
in that plain manliness of character which remained un-
changed by success or adversity ; 10 nor can we deny to
the Mahrattas in the early part of their history, and
before their extensive conquests had made their vast and
PAFT III. SECTION III. 207
mixed armies cease to be national, the merit of conduct-
ing their Cossack inroads into other countries with a
consideration to the inhabitants which had been deemed
incompatible with that terrible and destructive species of
warfare.
(To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) ' Marhata ' and the pronouns which refer to it throughout tho
passage become plural in Hindustani.
(2) By way of simplification use one word waza' for ' dress ' and
' habits,' as it describes both.
(3) Turn as follows : ' and in general in those vicissitudes in
which at one time they reached exalted rank and again came to
their original status, that same simplicity of theirs remained (band-
) as usual.'
(4) Arrange thus : ' The cause of this perhaps in the institutions
of Hinduism, and in the examples of Sivaji and his chiefs, and also
(aur 7uz) in such (aist aist) habits, is found, from which (ki jin se)
in victory easiness is obtained.'
(5) This clause and the corresponding sequent clauses may now
be introduced by jab ki.
(6) Translate thus : muzdhini balki mdni'ul mohimm.
(7) This clause should be placed first in the Hindustani sentence :
' To the special panegyrists even of this tribe there is no denial
that,' etc.
(8) Turn thus : ' b"t yet in truth it is not remote from justice to
admit their praiseworthy qualities.'
(9) Turn thus : ' In tho matter of patience, etc. very few were
taking precedence of (sc) the Marhattas.'
(10) The junctura here is best effected by tis parbht, after which
proceed thus : ' This fact (amr) is worthy of praise, that in former
time and before that (qabl iske ki) their army so increased in ex-
tensive conquests and in mixture with strange races that it did not
remain the army of one nation, this people used to conduct their
Cossack warfare (qazzdqdna favj-kasht) with such humanity which
(jo ki~) was being considered,' etc.
tiOS EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
13.
(Concluded.}
The character and actions of this people were in all
respects singular; * they had indeed few, if. any, similar
features in common with other nations. 2 Those means
which the pride of conquerors has often rejected seem
always to have been used in preference by this extra-
ordinary race : not merely the discontented were invited
to their standard, but robbers and plunderers were courted
as auxiliaries, and allowed to act for a period in their own
mode and for their own advantage. 3 To insinuate them-
selves by wiles into a share of the government of a dis-
trict or country, and to make a party amongst its inhabi-
tants, were deemed better than using force, even when the
latter was in their power; 4and in effecting these objects
their patience and humility were great aids. They were
contented at first to divide the 5 government, as well as
revenues, with the Hindu chiefs of the military class they
found established, 6 trusting to time and intrigue for
their gradual reduction.
MALCOLM.
Directions.
(1) The meaning of this sentence may be given as ' In reality,
ways (<rwzd') like theirs (see above, 1 1 . Note 2) if (they) may have
been in any other nation, then (they) have been fewer.'
(2) Turn ' which means great conquerors will have often despised,'
etc.
(3) This difficult sentence may be expressed in the following-
way : ' When any strange province or country came into their
power, in this case also, in comparison with force, by deceit to
obtain entrance there and to do plottings with the inhabitants, this
people thought their advantage.' It will be observed that the finai
I ART III. SKCTION III. 209
clan so of the English sentence is not left untranslated, but is worked
into the initial clause.
(4) Turn ' and in this affair (amr) their patience and humility
were coming in very useful (k&tn dnu).'
(5) Use the pbrase employed at (09. 2- 'Chief of the military
class ' may be rendered by the titlo ' Baja."
(6) Begin fresh sentence : ' And they trusted that after some
time and by means of plottings the time of reduction (taskhir) will
gradually arrive.'
14,
The Bbcels that live in villages are reputed faithful
and honest ; they are usually the watchmen, and have a
portion of land or dues assigned them. 1 These village
Bheels have little intercourse with their more numerous
and independent brethren who dwell among the hills.
The cultivating classes of Bheels, who live in districts and
hamlets under their Tarwls or heads, 2 though indus-
trious, have neither given up the habits nor arms of the
tribes in a ruder state, and, like them, indulge in strong
liquors to excess. They excite the horror of the higher
classes of Hindoos by eating not only the flesh of buff a-
Iocs but of cows. From this abomination, for such it is
considered, they only rank above the chamdrs or shoe-
makers, who feast on dead carcases, and are deemed so
unclean that they are not allowed to dwell within the
1'ivcincts of the village. The plundering, or wild, Bheels
who reside amorig the hills are a diminutive and wretched-
looking race, 3 whose appearance shows the poverty of
their food ; but they are nevertheless active and capable
of great fatigue. They are professed robbers and thi.
4 Armed with bows and arrows, they lie in wait for the
and unprotected, while they fly from the strong
14
210 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
5 Ignorant and superstitious to a degree, they art devote!
to their Tanvls, whose command is a law wtich thoy
implicitly obey.
(To be continued )
Directions.
(1) Turn as follows: 'Of these Bhils with their mountain
brethren, who are numerous and more free (kasir-ut-tz'dad aur
ziyada <izdd), little intercourse is kept up (raTwid).'
(2, Arrange matters so as to begin a trctsh sertence here : ' And
though they are industrious, but they have the same mode of life
and the same arms, which are customary in those rude (jangali)
tribes, and also (n$z) like them are very reckless in liquor-drinking.'
(3) This clause may be expressed by making it a third epithet
before ' race,' in the idiomatic term Ic&l lea mar&, ' famine-stricken.'
(4) Detach this clause from what follows, as an independent
sentence, viz. ' Their arms (are) bows and arrows.' For ' strong ' use
a pair of adjectives to balance the preceding pair, and omit ' while.'
(5) Turn ' They are so ignorant and superstitious that they are
devoted to their Ta^rwis, whose command is of the rank of a law,
and is earned out without when or why ' (be-chdn o chir&)
15.
(Continued.)
1 The men, and still more the women, have their intel-
lect formed by their condition ; they are quick, have a
kind of instinctive sense of danger, and are full of art
and cvasioa. To kill one another, when their Tarwi
desires, or to suffer death themselves, appears to them
eaually a matter of indifference. The whole race are
illiterate, and they are, without exception, fond of
tobacco and liquor to excess. Their quarrels begin and
end in drunken bouts ; no feud can be stauncnea. no
crime forgiven, but at a general feast, 2 and here the
FAR I III. SECTION 111. 211
common and popular fine for every offence is more liquor
to protract their riotous enjoyment, which sometimes con-
tinues for days. 3The Bheel women have much influence
in the society ; but it is a curious fact, that their manners
and disposition are in general quite opposed to those of
the Pinduris. 4 They never accompany the men in their
expeditions; and when prisoners are taken, their prin-
cipal hope of life is in the known humanity of the
women. The latter are usually the first sufferers from
the crimes of their fathers and husbands, the women and
children (when the men are suspected) being always
seized when Government can lay hold on them. They
show, in such circumstances, great patience and fortitude,
5 as they well know the men will never abandon them, and
that the guilty will surrender themselves to any punish-
ment, even death, rather than allow them and their
children to continue in confinement.
• (To be continued.)
Directions.
(1) Turn as follows : 'The men-folk and especially the women-
folk, in the condition in which they live, have intellect in accord-
ance with that same (condition), that is, they are quick, and their
natural temperament is danger-knowing and deceiful and artful.'
(2) Effect the junctuta hero by ydhan tak Art, and proceed : ' the
customary and common fine is liquor, which is taken in compensation
of every crime, and from which their riotous-living remains lasting
(for) periods (muddaton).'
(3) See (09. -4 for tne U8e of dakhl.
(1) Join on by the use of kyunki.
(5) Turn thus : ' because it is certain to them that our men wii
not abandon us (use the idiom of 56j> but rather thoy who are
guilty will deliver themselves up for punishment (s<ud-ydbf), though
it may be the punishment of death (seo |76. 8.), and will not liko
((jau.-<ira karnti.) that their) families roiuain in confinement.'
14*
zU EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
16.
(Concluded).
1 In the recent reform of a great proportion of the
Bheels of Central India, the women have acted a very
prominent part, and one worthy of the character of their
sex. 2They have invariably been the advocates of the
cause of good order ; but the fact is, they have been
accustomed to industry and labour, and must be happy
to see their partners, who have hitherto passed their time
between crime and debauchery, compelled to more re-
gular courses. The Bheels, though in distinct classes,
are still one people. 3 They all eat the same diet ; they
intermarry ; 4 and they unite in the mode as well as the
substance of their worship. The latter, in essentials, is
similar to that of other Hindoos; but the forms are
different. The religious ceremonies of this rude race
5 are much limited to propitiatory offerings and sacrifices
to some of the Hindoo minor infernal deities, but par-
ticularly to the Goddess of the Small Pox, whom they
invoke under various names, 6 in the hope of averting the
dreadful ravages this disorder at times makes among
them. They also pay great reverence to Mahadeo, from
whom they boast descent.
MALCOLM.
Directions.
(1) This is by no means an easy sentence. It may be fumed as
follows : ' In the reform of a large class of Bhils, which is recently
being carried out in Central India, their women have done great
service (pesh-dastf), and certainly have done work worthy of their
sex.' Observe that the choice of pesh-dusti. is suggested by the
fact that pesh gives the notion of 'prominent.'
TART 111. SECTION III. '213
(2) Begin with ' the fact is,' taken from the following clause, and
replace that phrase by ' and.' The clause ' compelled," etc., may
he managed by ' began to leave off their irregularities ' (be-lag&mt).
(3) Turn : ' their eating drinking is one.'
(4) Simply : ' (their) religious ceremonies (dharm-rlC) are one
and the same (i/afcsdn).' ' The latter,' in the next clause, may bo
translated by p&jA.
(5) Turn : 'are ended in this, that (fci) they do so and so.'
(6) Turn : ' in order that in the days of small-pox they may
remain safe from this dreadful plague.'
17.
The Thugs are composed of all castes ; Mahoinedans
even are admitted ; but the great majority are Hindoos ;
and among these the Brahmans, chiefly of the Bundel-
khand tribes, are in the greatest numbers, and generally
direct the operations of the different bands. They have
fixed rules, particularly as to the division of booty.
1 Auxiliaries to their enterprises are sought for in all
ranks, but the most abandoned of the officers of govern-
ment of the countries to which, they proceed are those
they chiefly desire; and after having ascertained, by
letter or verbal report, that circumstances are favourable,
2 they usually send as precursors, for the purpose of
minute local information, spies disguised as religious
iiK-ndicants, as tradesmen, or as soldiers looking for ser-
vice, who connect themselves with the loose characters of
the country, and all is prepared for the principal part v,
which otten consists of three or four hundred; 3 but
these are never seen together, though the different bauds
travel in perfect communication with each other. Som--
of them have horses, camels, and tents, and are e<juii>i>( a
like merchants; others are dressed like soldiers goin^
214 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
under a leader to take service ; some affect to be Maho-
medan beggars and Hindoo Bairdgis or holy mendi-
cants : they assume, in short, every disguise. 4 Parties
of the boldest and most active are always detached from
the main band ; these sometimes seek protection from
travellers ; at others afford it: 5 in either case the fate of
them who join them is the same.
(To be continued.')
Directions.
(1) Turn this sentence as follows : ' In their enterprises they
recruit for assistance low and high people of every sort, and are
specially desirous of the wicked (sharir sharir) officers of those
states where it is their intention to go.'
(2) Turn thus : ' It is their custom that they send precursors,
etc. j these spies are in the disguise sometimes of faqirs, sometimes
of merchants, and sometimes of soldiers, etc., and connect them-
selves with, etc., and make preparation for the advent of the
principal party,' etc.
(3) The junctura is here : 'but not this that they are ever seen
together, else, all the bands,' etc.
(4) Turn thus : ' one or more (ek na elc) party of the brave and
active always remains apart from the main band : their business is
this, that either,' etc.
(5) For the method of idiomatically representing this clause, see
above Sect. I. 1 1 . (7) : 'in every case misfortune (shamaf) came on
the poor people.'
18,
(Concluded.)
The Thugs have, concealed, a long silken cord with a
noose, l which they throw round the necks of their heed-
less companions, who are strangled and plundered.
2 Their victims, who are always selected for having pro-
PART III. SECTION III. 210
perty, are, when numerous, or at all on their guard*
lulled by every art into confidence. 3 They are invited to
feasts, where their victuals and drink are mixed with
soporific or poisonous drugs, through the effects of which
they 4fall au easy prey to these robbers and murderers,
6 the extraordinary success of whose atrocities can only be
recounted for by the condition of the countries in which
they take place. 6 They attained great strength in Central
India, and many gangs of this class passed annually
through the country, on their way to the dominions of
the Kizam and the Peshwa. In 1819 the manager of
Mandisur surrounded a body of Thugs, who professed
themselves, and appeared to be, 7 a party of horse and
foot soldiers that were escorting their baggage on camels
and bullocks from the Deccan. 8He had, however,
gained information who they were, and commanded them
to submit; they refused, and an action took place, in
which the Thugs were routed, some of them killed, and
others made prisoners. The whole of their booty was
captured, amounting in value to more thau a lac of
rupees, and comprising every variety of personal clothes
and ornaments, 9rich and poor, for they plunder all
classes indiscriminately. Among other articles, a great
number of their strangling cords were taken and exhi-
bited.
MALCOLM.
Directions.
(1) In order to avoid the second llelativo anJ the Passives, turn
' by whieh, having thrown (it) round the nocks, etc., they stran;_'lo
Mid plunder (them).' Also see 50. (0-
(2) Turn this ns follows : ' The object of the Thugs id with rich
travellers only, and if these are numerous, etc. they bring them
216 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
into the net of deceit with a thousand artifices and entangle them.'
In this latter clause the first verb may bo constructed as a Past
Conjunctive Participle.
(3) Introduce this sentence by chvnanchi, and construct actively
in connection with preceding sentence.
(4) Turn ' come easily into power (gabil) of."
(5) Begin a fresh sentence here.
(6) Turn ' The Thugs especially increased in Central India (ivasat
Hind"), and every year several gangs of them passing-through (hoke)
this country were in the habit of going towards,' etc. See 1 26.
(7) In the oratio recta. The word ' loaded ' must be placed before
the preposition ' on.'
(8) Turn thus : ' but to the h&Jcim their actual reality had been
discoverer! .'
(9) Turn this more accurately than the English expression by
lya amiron fc4 aur kyd garibon M. ' Indiscriminately ' may be
rendered by be taskhis-i-ashkh&s ' without specification of persons.'
This kind of association of fellow-derivatives is considered to be
good style. Comp. Sect. I. 9. (9)»
PAR: in. SECTION iv. 217
SECTION IV.
1 PEOCLAMATION
BY THE QUEEN IN COUNCIL TO THE PRINCES, CHIEFS,
AND PEOPLE OF INDIA.
2 VICTORIA,
By the Grace of God, of the United Kingdom of
Great Britain and Ireland, and of the Colonies
and Dependencies Thereof in Europe, Asia, Africa,
America, and Australasia, Queen, Defender of the
Faith.
8 Whereas, for divers weighty reasons, We have re-
solved, by and with the advice and consent of the Lords
Spiritual and Temporal and Commons in Parliament
assembled, to take upon Ourselves the Government of the
Territories in India, heretofore administered in trust for
Us by the Honourable East India Company.
4 Now, therefore, We do by these presents notify and
declare that, by the advice and consent aforesaid, \V>-
have taken upon Ourselves the said Government; and W^
hereby call upon all Our subjects within the suid territo-
218 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
ries to be faithful, and to bear true allegiance to Us, Our
Heirs, and Successors, and to submit themselves to the
authority of those whom We may hereafter, from time tc
time, see n't to appoint to administer the Government
of Our said Territories, in Our name and on Oar
behalf.
5 And We, reposing especial trust and confidence in
the loyalty, ability, and judgment of Our trusty and well-
beloved Cousin and Councillor, Charles John, Viscount
Canning, do hereby constitute and appoint him, the said
Viscount Canning, to be Our first Viceroy and Governor-
General in and over Our said Territories, to admini-
ster the Government thereof, in Our name, and generally
to act in Our name and on Our behalf, subject to such
Orders and Regulations as he shall, from time to time,
receive from Us through one of Our Principal Secretaries
of State.
6 And We do hereby confirm in their several Offices,
Civil and Military, all persons now employed in the ser-
vice of the Honourable East India Company, subject to
Our future pleasure, and to such laws and regulations as
may hereafter be enacted.
7 We hereby announce to the Native Princes of India
that all Treaties and Engagements made with them by or
under the authority of the Honourable East India Com-
pany, are by us accepted, and will be scrupulously main-
tained; and We look for the like observance on their
part.
8 We desire no extension of Our present territorial pos-
sessions, and while we will permit no aggression upon
Our dominions or Our rights to be attempted with im-
punity, We shall sanction no encroachment on those of
PART III. SECTION IV. 219
others. We shall respect the rights, dignity, and honour
of Native Princes as Our own ; and We desire that they,
as well as Our own subjects, should enjoy that prosperity
and that social advancement which can only be secured by
internal peace and good government.
9 We hold Ourselves bound to the Natives of Our
Indian Territories by the same obligations of duty which
bind Us to all Our other subjects ; and those obligations,
by the blessing of Almighty God, We shall faithfully and
conscientiously fulfil.
10 Firmly relying Ourselves on the truth of Christianity,
and acknowledging with gralitude the solace of religion,
We disclaim alike the right and the desire to impose Our
convictions on any of Our subjects. We declare it to be
our Eoyal will and pleasure that none be in any wise
favoured, none molested <»r disquieted, by reason of
their religious faith or observances; but that all shall
alike enjoy the equal and impartial protection of the
Law: and We do strictly charge and enjoin all those
who may be in authority under Us, that they abstain
from all interference with the religious belief or worship
of any of Our subjects, on pain of our highest dis-
pleasure.
11 And it is Our further will that, so far as may be,
Our subjocts, of whatever race or creed, be freely and
impartially admitted to offices in Our service, the duties
of which they may be qualified by their education,
ability, and integrity, duly to discharge.
12 We know, and respect, the feelings of attachment
with which the Natives of India regard the lands
inherited by them from their ancestors ; and We desire
to protect them in all rights connected therewith, subject
EXEECI3ES IX HIXDCSTANT.
to the equitable demands of the State ; and We will
that, generally, in framing and administering the Law,
doe regard be paid to the ancient rights, usages, and
customs of India.
13 We deeply lament the evils and misery which have
been brought upon India by the acts of ambitious men,
who have deceived their countrymen bv false reports, and
led them into open rebellion. Our power has been shewn
by the suppression of that rebellion in the field ; Wo
desire to shew Our mercy, by pardoning the offences of
those who have been thus misled, but who desire to
return to the path of duty.
14 Already, in one Province, with a view to stop the
further effusion of blood and to hasten the pacification
of Our Indian dominions, Our Viceroy and Governor-
General has held out the expectation of pardon on cer-
tain terms, to the great majority of those who in the late
unhappy disturbances have been guilty of offences against
Our Government ; and has declared the punishment which
will be inflicted on those whose crimes place them beyond
*Jie reach of forgiveness.
15 We approve and confirm the said act of Our Viceroy
and Governor-General, and do further announce and pro-
claim as follows : —
16 Our clemency will be extended to all offenders save
and except those who have been, or shall be, convicted of
having directly taken part in the murder of British
subjects : with regard to such the demands of justice
forbid the exercise of mercy.
17 To those who have willingly given asylum to mur-
derers, knowing them to be such, or who may have acted
as leaders or instigators in revolt, their lives can alone be
PACT III. SECTH)* IT. 221
guaranteed; bat in apportioning the penalty due to such
persons, full consideration will be given to the (dream-
stances under which they have been induced to throw off
their allegiance ; and large indulgence will be shown to
those whose crimes may appear to have originated in too
credulous acceptance of the false reports circulated by
designing men.
18 To all others in arms against the Government, We
hereby promise unconditional pardon, amnesty, and
oblivion of all offence against Ourselves, Our Crown and
dignity, on their return to their homes and peaceful pur-
suits.
19 It is Our Royal pleasure that these terms of grace
and amnesty should be extended to all those who comply
with their conditions before the 1st day of January
next.
20 When, by the blessing of Providence, internal tran-
quillity shall be restored, it is Our earnest desire to stimu-
late the peaceful industry of India, to promote worts of
public utility and improvement, and to administer its
Government for the benefit of all Our subjects resident
therein. In their prosperity will be Our strength; in
their contentment Our security ; and in their gratitude
Our best reward. And may the God of all power grant
to Us, and to those in authority under Us, strength
to carry out these Our wishes for the good of Our
people.
222 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Directions.
(1) Persian, in some of its idioms, is a better conveyancer of
official English than Hindustani, partly on account of its prestige
as the former language of the Courts, and partly because it in-
volves less inversion of the English order of the words. Thus, in
translating the heading of this Proclamation, the Persianised form
Ishtehdr-i-maliqa-mo'azzama ba-ijlds-i-kaunsil ba-ndm-i-iudliydn o
sarddrdn o bdshindagdn-i-Hind, involving, as it does, nothing which
is strange or unintelligible to an educated native, is statelier both
in form and sound than Ishtehdr malika-mo'azzama Jed, kaunsil Ice
ijlds men Hindustan Jcera'ison aur sarddron aur bdshindon Ice n\m,
which is the Hindustani equivalent.
(2) In this paragraph, native etiquette requires the word
* Queen ' to be in the forefront of the sentence. Begin, therefore,
jandb maliqa-mo'azzama Victoria, and instead of 'of say ' Eegent
of the kingdoms of,' omitting ' united,' as unnecessary ; thus,
khadiv-i-mamdlik-i-, etc. And, as the paragraph is not a heading,
it should be completed in the Hindustani version; thus, 'on the
part of (ki taraf se) it is published for public information in the
following terms,' khdss o 'dmm M ittild' ke Ife hasb-i-tafsU-i-zail
mushtahar kiyd jdtd hai.
(3) Begin with the formal wdzeh ho ki ' Be informed that.' See
Vocabulary for the remaining terms. For ' resolve ' the term most
congruous to the occasion is irdda kar-lend, because ' irddd ' is the
official term under Mahomedan Governments for a public decree.
The last clause must be turned as a relative clause parenthetically
adjusted, viz. ' of which the management till to-day was com-
mitted in trust to the Honourable East India Company,' and the
last four words are to be transliterated.
(4) ' By these presents,' is qirtds ke rd se, lit. ' By the face or
appearance of this document.' 'Call upon,' tdkidan farm&nd ki.
(5) To be turned in this form : 'And as (jo) there is to us full
trust, etc. in the loyalty, etc. of,' etc. The conventional terms
1 trusty and well-beloved,' etc. may be rendered by the correspond-
ing official Persian Farzand-i-arjmand mo'azzaz o mo'tamad 'alaiht
FART III. SECTION IV. 22.'J
mushir-i-kh&ss placed at the beginning of the clause. 'Through
one of our principal,' etc., ma'rifat ham&re vaztr-i-a'zam ke.
(6) Begin with relative clause : ' And those people who,' etc.
'Hereby,' i.e. 'by these presents,' which may be repeated from (4).
The clause ' subject to,' etc. should be introduced by lekin : 'but
let them be subject,' etc.
(7) To be turned as follows : ' And information is given to the
Princes of India that we shall,' etc., the relative clause, however,
standing first with doubled relative. ' Native ' is unnecessary.
The final clause is emphasized by the preface aur chashm-d&sht hai
lei, etc. ' and there is expectation that.'
(8) Begin, ' The country which is at present in our possession,
we do not wish to extend,' etc. ' And while,' etc., aur jab yeh
hamko gawdra nahin hai lei, followed by to ham bht in the apoclosis.
' As our own,' that is, ' like our own rights.' ' Internal ' need not
be translated in the final clause.
(9) Begin with relative clause : ' The obligations which are in-
cumbent on us with respect to our other subjects, those same obli-
gations we shall consider our necessary charge with respect to our
subjects in India, and by God's grace we shall continue to regard
the said obligations with faithfulness and sincerity." The student
should bear in mind the use of the Progressive and Continuative
forms of the verb in this and other paragraphs. The masculine
and not the feminine plural should be used throughout.
(10) Construct with concessive clause, followed by to bht in the
apodosis, and proceed, ' it is neither our design nor desire that we
cause to adopt (taslim karanA'),' etc. After this, carry on the
junctura with balki. The final clause maybe turned 'and if not
(wa iitd), our extreme wrath will be.'
(11) ' Of whatever,' etc., Go kist gaum yd mazhab lit ho. ' Freely
and impartially,' bild, ta'arruz o taraf-ddrt ke.
(12) The translation of the verb ' respect ' in this connection is
difficult, for the ordinary verbs in use are applicable to persons only.
Approval of the sentiment referred to is intended : begin, there-
fore, with iskd hamko ba-khtibt 'ilm hai ki, followed by ' the people
of India love the lands (ardzf) which,' etc. The clause ' subject
to," etc. may bo rendered here adverbially, ba-shart add knrrw
mutdlaba sarkdrt ke, the word mutdlaba being technically used
224 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
as a legal demand. The last part of the paragraph may run:
' And it is our order that at the time of the framing and effecting
(nifaz) of the law, full consideration continue (hotd rahnd) for (par)
ancient rights and the habits and customs of India.'
(13) ' Evils,' etc. cannot be the direct object of ' lament ' in the
Hindustani idiom. Turn, therefore : ' On the hearing of this state
of things (ba-istimd' is hdl fce) that some intriguers, by spreading
(Past Conjunctive Participle) false reports and seducing their
fellow-countrymen, caused them to make open mutiny and made a
calamity descend on India, extreme sorrow was to us.' The implied
' path of duty ' being submission, the phrase may be translated
accordingly ; but the idea may also be expressed by the Persian
rti-ba-r&h.
(14) This paragraph is exceptionally difficult. Paraphrase as
follows : ' With this intention that in future more bloodshed be not
allowed (hone pdnti), and (that) peace and tranquillity take place
quickly in our countries of India, our Viceroy, etc., in one province
where (ki jah\n) the people in the days of foul mutiny did offence
against the Government, made most of them expectant of pardon
for their faults on special conditions ; and the faults of those
which made them outside the enclosure (pale) of mercy, of those
also has explained the punishments.'
(15) Begin with chun&nchi.
(16) This also is extremely difficult. Turn as follows : 'Except
those people with respect to -whom it has been proved or may
be proved that they have personally shared in the murder of a
subject of the English Government, a declaration of mercy with
respect to all the rest will be made ; but -with respect to the
sharers in murder justice demands this, that no mercy be shown
them.'
(17) ' Knowing them to be such,' jdn-bUjh-ke. ' But in appor-
tioning,' etc., lekin aise logon kt tajwtz-i-saz& men. ' And large
indulgence,' etc. Turn as follows : ' And in respect of those people
who, without thinking (be soche*), having come into the false state-
ments of the intriguers, became criminal, great clemency will bo
done.'
(18) This may be constructed as follows : ' With (se) all the rest
who are, etc. . . by these presents the promise is, that, if they go
FART III. SECTION IV. 225
home and engage in their occupations peacefully, then their
funks, which were committed (sarzad) in respect of us and in
respect of our sovereignty and dignity, -without condition will be
pardoned and forgiven and forgotten.'
(19) ' Terms ' and ' conditions ' may be translated by the same
word, shar&'it (pi. of shart). ' Extended,' muta'alliq (se).
(20) The first sentence of this paragraph is thus constructed:
' It is our earnest desire that, when in India by God's grace again
tranquillity may be restored (ho-j&nd), then (to) there improve-
ment of the arts of peace be effected, and for the benefiting (t/dda)
of the people works like the making (tayy<lr£) of roads and canals,
etc. be established, and such an administration of the country made
that from which advantage may be to all our subjects of the said
country.' Join to this the following sentence by kyunki ' Their
prosperity is for us a cause of power,' and so forth. The last sen-
tense is thus turned : ' And may the God of all power (khud&e
q'ulir) to us and our subordinates grant such grace that these our
wishes (mur&d) for the advantage of the people may reach a happy
ending ' (husn iJchtitAm ko pahtinchnA).
S.\D OF PAST 111
15
APPENDICES.
228
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
APPENDIX A.
^
•j
•»>
S5
,3
^ o
K ^ 1
9
4ii
"•* ^
J *"*
L9 3
3 "°
J a
i
^
SJ i <« <
J*l -2 • ~e
\ *
*J "s
' '*! "on
4
"J ^
s S
J £
i
tH
i
[industar
3
^^
'£
"w? J
•^
—
=
•e
0
T^» *JJ
00
ill!
:^!j
"* 4 -IS
3 |
1 *1 -2 8 ^
:,] I
S
-J
O
C
z
ill > ^ ?•» £
*^> ?S
^^
^J ^
^j^ v "S ^
ju «5
a
J S s I"
J s ^
J 2
J 1
"J S S S
-2k* 5
a
^1 %
4-1
s*
1
i
^\
i
>— i
x
—
CH
X
• — » a*r
"8 ^ r^
~~0~
'- "C "S ^
^
•'•3 •§
•a M H ~>
*^5\ -s
3"b
J* ^
1 ^
J^
-~-^ _^. -~ '-
5-i
_-5 •*»
p Forma IX., XI.,
*^H S 5 '£
""?> "^
-«o ^ ""' '«•»
* vS -"3
.J -g—
.5
a
y ~3 3 ?
i'l
~
Hi
3
Jjf "•«) "«*J
j
'3
^3 y
2! "*
-9
2
u
g-J OJ
i.gSd
S «
00
LOO
B E 41
<D H
5
_
•" .2 ^3 •"•<
O b i
%~P *
o *S
"d 2 o
— eg
o ^ V1
* °
T
C 0 . J
O to S B
8|M.|
§ w •
" -£ ^
.— CO • —
." t Jg
i
B5
-3 .0 ° 5
« nn1 f)
||B«
i§9
I"5 §
"c 2 °
c "5
— c «
S5
IV.
The augment t
effort, arid the
d effectivent'.s:
effect in counei
its cause.
V.
The augment <a dciii
quence with n fcr<
idea conveyed by 1
duplication of th<
cal is intensive.
VI.
Tho augment <t
consequence w
renco to Form
TIT.
Tr.e au^iTi'
the passive 01
realisation ol r
vm.
The augment i a
eertcd ti indica
personal or
realisation.
1
X.
The augment inti
the attributin
pectation of rr
230 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
REMAEKS.
1. In the model Measures, which are given in large
type in the Conspectus, Fd, 'Ain, and Ldm are radical
letters, and the rest, whether vowels or consonants, are said
to ' fatten ' the root, on the principle that extension of
form means extension of meaning (see Col. 1).
This process of word-building is regular and symmetri-
cal, bat is subject to certain euphonic adjustments when
one or other of the radicals is a ' weak ' letter, that is to
say, is either \ . . These letters are severally homo-
geneous with the vowels FatJia, Zamma, and Kasra ; and,
when 'quiescent' by position, combine with them to
form the long sounds d, u, and i. Only two other com-
binations are admissible, viz., the diphthongs au and ai,
in which fatha precedes wdv and yd (see Table V, p. 4).
Consequently, in the structure of derivatives, when a
weak radical (quiescent) succeeds a vowel augment in any
other order than is indicated by the above five legitimate
combinations, such radical gives way, and is either
changed or dropped, as the circumstances of the case
require. Thus, Alif-hamza may be changed to Wdv or Yd,
Wdv to Yd, or Yd to Wdv.
2. An examination of the examples which are given in
the Conspectus, with their roots, for this special purpose,
will explain the principle of these permutations.
FORM I. (1) In -*0U rdzi, normally rdziw, the 3rd
radical has been changed to yd, with which the charac-
teristic Kasra of the second syllable is combined. In
APPENDIX A. 23\
classical Arabic the radical wdv is dropped, and the Knsra
preserved in the form of tan win, so that rdzin, not rdzi, is
the mode.
(2) In +j\j qaim the 2nd radical has been changed to
yd to avoid the double alif. Hamza records, as it were,
the nature of the change, and the suppression of the
subscript dots in the substituted letter indicates that the
sound of the syllable is 'im, not yim. The common word
sd'is, vulgarly ' syce ' is another example (see p. G).
(3) In /ujij^Lj mdnus, thefatla of the augment combines
with the quiocent alif-hamza, and the same thing takes
place in J«^-»^ maujud. In ^Juc< ma'ni, the characteristic
augment u of the second syllable in the normal form has
been changed to I, and the 3rd radical is dropped in
writing, though the sign of tashdid is added by the gram-
marians.
FORM II. (1) In -Jolj tdsir, the fatha of the augment
combines with the quiescent alif-hamza ; and the same
thin? takes place in the final syllable of moliaiyd.
(2) In <Lio J or L^OO .j tarbiyat, the wdv has been changed
to yd, and the lightening of the characteristic i, of the
second syllable compensated by the affix at.
(3) In the Participial forms (.Ov* mu'azzin, and c— >jl^
muaddab, the 1st radical has been changed to teat', with
which the zamma of the augment is homogeneous. Hamza
records the nature of the change and reminds the reader
that the pronunciation is unaltered.
FORM III. (1) In iJ^^L* imidkhaza, the change is the
same as that above described. The wdv unites in writing
with the mini in both cases, but has no sound of its own.
232 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
(2) In culS-U: middqdti normally muldqayat, the radical
yd is dropped, and the characteristic fatlias unite to form
the d of the final syllable.
(3) In (JJ\^o muwdftq, no change was necessary in the
writing, but the radical wdv is unsounded.
FORM IV. (1) In (^Uj! imdn, and U.-1 imd, the 1st
radical has been changed to yd in symphony with the
chai'acteristic kasra of the augment, and though the
radicals are different, the crasis thus formed is the same
in sound.
(2) In y^\.\ irdda, normally irwdd, the loss of the wdv
is compensated for by the affix ah or at. In the Parti-
cipial forms tnurid and tnurdd, from the same root, com-
pensation is made by lengthening the characteristic vowels
of the second syllable in each case.
(3) In ^j^o munsM, the 3rd radical has been changed
LJ
to yd in sympathy with the characteristic kasra of the
second syllable.
FORM Y. (1) In l^'u ta'ammuJ,t}\efatha of the augment
forms a crasis in writing, but not in reading, with the
homogeneous 1st radical. (Comp. F. II. (3) above.)
(2) In ClJ^c mutashakkt, the 3rd radical has been
v^5"
changed to yd in symphony with the characteristic kasra
of the final syllable.
(3) In \ jJL* mtvtabannd, both servile and radical are
uy
retained in the form J^ which is usually written and
read as d in Persian and Hindustani.
FORM VI. (1) In ^LtJ tamdshi,tlie characteristic zamma
of the final syllable has been changed to kasra in symphony
APPENDIX A. 233
with the 3rd radical. This word, and a few others of the
same form, are written and read in Hindustani with a
instead of i final.
FORM VIII. (1) IntUl^l ehtii/dt, the 2nd radical which
follows the medial augment ti, has been changed for the
homogeneous yd. In multawi, on the other hand, the
augment is ta not ti, and the wdv is retained.
(2) In -JJUs-* inohtdj, normally mohtawaj, the wdv has
been dropped, and (as in F. III. (2) above) the two fathas
form a crasis in d.
(3) In -Ajj\ ittifdq, normally itvtijdq, the loss of the
icdo has been compensated by the duplication of the
servile t.
(4) In r^U\ ittild', r.^ mudda'i, ^j^ mud-la'd, the
v^ ^
euphonic change consists in the absorption, under teukdid,
of the medial augment t with the -1st radical. It may be
added here that, when the 1st radical is j the t of the
augment become -^ ; and when the 1st radical is ^ O1> ^
the t is written ^ •
FORM X. (1) In *jJLL*..« mustaqim, the 2nd radical has
been dropped, and compensation been made, as in muri<1,
P. IV., by lengthening the characteristic kasra of the
tinul syllable.
(2) In .\jtxv^« musta'dr, the same explanation holds
good. Compare murdd, F. IV.
3. The chief proportion of Arabic verbals current in
Hindustani belongs to Form I., under the head ' Nouns
of Action,' which arc used as Abstract nouns, and, with
at or ah added, as 'Nouns of Unity.' Of the Derived
234 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Forms, the most fully represented are those which belong
to Forms II., IV., VIII., bat it rarely happens that more
than four or five Derivatives from the same root are in
use. An example of four Forms from the same root
occurs in the Conspectus, viz., lihn ' knowledge,' and
•ma'liim 'known'; ta'lim 'education,' and mo'allim 'teacher.'
In addition to these 'dlim 'knowing,' and lalim 'all-
knowing,' an epithet of the Deity, and one or two rarer
forms, are current in literature.
4. The Gender of Nouns of F. 1. is conventional. For
instance, 'ilm is masculine and 'aql feminine; filer ' thought •'
is either Masculine or Feminine. Nouns of this class,
however, which end in d are generally Feminine. (See
Part I. 3.) The Gender of nouns which belong to the
other Forms is almost invariably Masculine, except in the
case of Form II., where the reverse is the case. Out of
some 230 regular examples of this Form, which occur
in Hindustani, only one, viz., ta'wiz 'amulet,' is Mascu-
line.
5. In addition to the three leading verbal measures of
Form I., which are given in the Conspectus, the following
are in every-day use : —
(1) A form denoting intensive agency in the noun, or
superlativeness in the adjective; as, faqir ' a professional
beggar ' ; hakim ' one who gives orders in a special branch
of science,' 'a physician,' or 'sage '; amir 'one who gives
commands,' ' a ruler ' ; rais ' one whe exercises headship ' ;
sJiarir ' villainous ' ; rahirii ' compassionate ' ; 'alim ' all-
knowing,' omniscient,' mentioned above.
(2) Jllim-ated Nouns of Place and Instrument, so called
because they receive the prefix ma or mi; such as,
APPENDIX A. 235
masjid 'place of worship'; malla? 'place of printing';
miftdh 'instrument for opening,' 'key ' ; mizdn (root, wazn)
'instrument for weighing,' 'balance,' etc. etc.
(3) Him-ateA Nouns of Action ; such ns, mahabbat
' affection ' ; maslahat ' counsel,' etc.
(4) Nouns formed by the addition of at, often softened to
ah in passing through the Persian, to the Participial forms ;
as, musibat ' misfortune ' ; muqaddama ' law-suit,' etc.
(5) Nouns or adjectives, of which the characteristic is
a duplication of the 2nd radical, which denotes intensive-
ness (see F. II.) ; such as, nawwdb (Anglice, Nabob) ' a
vi ce- regent '; sarrdf Anglice, shroff) 'a moner-changer' ;
iayydr ' alert,' etc. etc.
PERSIAN AND ARABIC PLURAL FORMS CURRENT IN
HINDUSTANI.
Persian Forms.
The regular Persian pi. in dn (for things animate) is
exemplified in ^Ij^L? sdhibnn as the pi. of sdliib, and
JjjJu bandagdu, of bandu ' slave,' in constant use. The
pi. in lid is occasionally met with in such phrases a«
..J'lfJG' tanhd tan 'alone,' JL^ yLs s-Uhd sal 'year after
year.' The Persianised c^?lxjj*-0 siilajdt appears as the
plur. of <o 4*? subah ' province,' at-i ti^l^jo. ruq'ajdt of
<Lo , ruq'ah 'letter,' as .in alternative of the regular
C^'U, ruqldt.
23G EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
Arabic Forms.
1. The regular masculine pi. in in, the daal in ain, ami
the feminine in at, are to be met with in books and news-
papers and legal phraseology.
e.g., .„' .-iW Jidzirin 'persons present' as the pi. of
^.•_>
^f[~». lidzir.
>
>t.*Jl? tarafain ('both sides') dual of < _ ;.U taraf
O " -X -^
cul ,lj^>-^ ikktiydrdt 'powers' as the pi. of ,L\l>-\
^ •• .> •*
UMiydr.
This last is the usual mode in the " derived forms "
infinitive II. — X. of the Conspectus.
2. The " broken " plurals, used in Hindustani, may be
classified as follows : —
CLASS 1. Plurals of triliteral verbal nouns infinitive of
Form I.
These chiefly occur in the form of Jbol afdl and J^j
fu'ul. The first of these is very common, and in some
instances the pi. thus formed is used as a singular noun in
Hindustani : —
e.g., sing., i_^ou^ sabab ' cause,' pi. c-jljuJ asbdb.
„ c-?J^ ada<b 'respect,' „ c__^jl dddb.
,, i^-J • waqt ' time,' „ ^j\j»\ auqdt.
» J^~ ^or J ^" hdl 'state,' pi. JL^-1 ahvidl
,, ,»j nur ' light,' pi. .\*j\ anwdr.
/
,, _x! amr 'order,' pi. ,»,c! umur.
'ilm ' science/ pi. ^Jj; 'ulum.
Al'PEXDIX A. 237
CLASS 2. Plurals of the " nomen aa^itis ' and the
" intensive agent," and of similarly constructed verbals
(dissyllabic).
- f *
Model forms arc Jlo /«"aJ lo fn'ald
e.g., sing., Xb. hakim 'governor,' pi. J&^ hukkdm.
„ , __ ] II, tdlib 'student,' „ \jjj- tulaba.
„ ,•-*£>• fcafciw 'sage,' „ U£~» hukamd.
„ -)^c\ amir ' chief ,' „ 1-^ umaid.
„ ^.jj^ ra'ts ' headman,' „ Uj; runsu.
Other modes of forming the plural of this class of verbal
may seen in
sin.
ng., i^os-Lr sahib, pi. t—jlo^l aslidb ~| as jn
-, o»JsUj shdhid 'witness,' pi. jy^i shuhud j d. 1.
„ jj waZt ' saint,' pi. \jjj\ auliyd.
{\j "•] aqribd.
£\ aqdtir.
CLASS 3. Plurals of verbals of the same form as the
above, with £ or 4 added (trisyllabic).
Model forms J^^y /ai/;a't7, JJUi fa'd'il.
e.g., sing., ajJ\j/ri't(Za 'advantage,' pi. jjlj fined* Id.
t^zd qd-^ida 'rule,' pi. 0^1*5 qau-d'id
„ «->.>- jo-zira ' island,' pi. jJ^>- jazair.
v^--JL>J^ haqiqat 'reality,' pi. ^{ji
similarly, also sing., <JL.-. rifdla ' treatise,'pl. jJJLs, rasa' i I.
„ I^^-AJ: . ra'iyat 'subject, 'pi. L>U , rn'dyd.
" ••
238 EXKKClsiJiS 13 HINDUSTANI.
(The difference in the final syllable is here due to the
fact that the hrd radical of the root is o-)
CLASS -1. Plnralfl of quadri literal verbals or triliterals,
in which the prefixed augments count as radical.
Model form JjUj
e.g., eiog.,jb^>- jaukar ' jewel,' pi. jj>^->- jawdlrir.
., j£\ aklar, ' great,' pi. j^\ akdbir.
M **£-<; martaba 'rank,' pi. ^_^."\ ^ mardtib.
j> J^syuu.^ masjid 'mosque,' J^L^.^ mnsaji<i.
CLASS 5. Plurals of quinqueliterals, or triliterals in
which the prefixed augments count as radical, and of which
the final is preceded by a long vowel.
Model form JuJbj fa'dlil.
e.g., sing., ^*jlji qdnun 'law,' pi. .^JulJ qav:dnin.
suUdn ' sultan,' pi. .jJ^^Lj saldtin.
tadbir 'plan,' pi. juljC- taddbir.
L J- •
iqlMn 'climate,' pi. ^jjlji aqdlim.
\ r^
CLASS 6. Plurals of miscellaneous form.
e g., sing., < _ >l_v£ kitdb ' book,' pi. t__^Jj> kutub.
madina 'town,' pi. ^J^ mudun.
mehnat 'toil,' pi. ..^j^c m&uvn.
i2J
Other examples, under this class, may be added by the
student in course of his reading.
APPENDIX A. 'J3'.»
Occasionally Doable plurals are met with, which is an
indication that the original plural is sometimes uaed as a
singular noun in Hindustani.
e.g., ^, rasm 'custom,' pi. .»«-*. rusum d. pi. o^L<»—-,
rustimat.
jj^ jauhar 'jewel' pi. Ji!»r>- jawdhir d. pi.
>- jawdhir v t.
APPEiNTDIX B.
THE TENSE SYSTEM OF THE HINDUSTANI VERB.
Ex. mama ' striking' or ' to strike.'
Native Nomenclature.
Corresponding English
Nomenclature.
3rd Pers.
Sin?.
English Meaning.
Th
ree Tenses formed
from the Ba
tse
(Which may itself be used as an Abstract Noun).
1. Amr
Imperative .
mar 2 p.s.
Strike thou.
:nariyo.
Strike (not neces-
sarily at once).
(Precative) .
IURT"! 6T lil^,-
Pray strike (when or ;
ri ega.
as you please).
2. MuzAri' . . j
Aorist or Dubious )
or Optative . )
mare .
f He strikes (perhaps)
< or may strike.
(. Would he may strike
3. Nustaqbil
Future or Presump-
marega
He will strike or must
EhtimiiU.
tive.
strike.
Six Tenses formed from the Imperfect Participle (Ism-ffriT).
4. Hal
Present .
marta hai .
He is striking.
5. Hal-mashlctik .
Present Dubious .
marta ho .
He is striking (per-
haps), or may be
striking.
6. H&l-ehtim&li .
Present Presump- marta hoga
He will be striking
tive.
(perhaps), or must
be striking.
7. M&zi-n&tam&m
Past Imperfect
marta tha .
He was striking.
a TII- <• f sharti ")
p , (Conditional^ marta
C Had he struck.
!t {.tosMMMid*! 3
s 1 Optative. )
| Would he had struck.
C Had he been striking.
9. Aizan .
Do. do. (2nd Form)
marta hota
< Would he had been
(. striking.
Six Tenses formed from the Perfect Participle (Ism-maf'iil).
10. Ifilzt-mwiZaq .
Past Absolute
mara .
He struck.
11. M&zt-qartb .
Past Proximate
mara hai .
He has struck (re-
cently).
12. Ifdzi-masJiftU
Past Dubious .
mara ho
He struck (perhaps),
or may have struck.
13. M&zt-ehtim'di
Past Presumptive .
mara hoga .
He will have struck.
ormusthave struck.
14. JMzS-ba'td .
I'ast Remote .
mara tha .
He struck (some time
ago), or had struck.
{"Conditional") ;
i' Had he struck (
15. Jfdrf- (shart* ,,.1
( camannat-)
Pa?tL(RemoteH
} Optative ^
mftra hcta .
1 time ago).
; Would he had struck
C (3rd Form). J
1 C. (some time ago).
APPENDIX B. SIT
REMARKS.
(1) For completion of conjugation in the matter of
person, number, gender, see Ex. I. 1 for the verb h&iid,
and for Aorist and Future Ex. IX. 67.
(2) In respect of time, the first three Tenses are
Future, the next three Present, and the last nine Past.
Native grammarians place the Past Tenses first, in imita-
tion of the Arabic manner, then the Present, then the
Future. No. 3 is formed from No. 2 by adding gd for the
sing, and ge pi.
(3) In respect of Meaning, Nos. 5 and 12 serve as
Auxiliary extensions of No. 2.
(4) Similarly Nos. 9 and 15 serve as Auxiliary exten-
sions of No. 8.
(5) No 8 is formed from No. 7 by dropping the
Auxiliary thd, and No. 15 is formed from No. 14 by drop-
ping the Auxiliary thd, and using Jiotd in its place.
(6) As regards the nomenclature, Muzdri1 (No. 2) is a
misnomer, and out of harmony with the rest of the di
nations. It means ' resembling,' and is borrowed from
Arabic grammar, in the tense-system of which what we
call the Aorist has noun-like inflections. Some native
scholars have suggested the term g air -mo'' ay y an to corre-
spond with our term Aorist.
(7) As regards the order of the Tenses, English gramma-
rians place the Tense No. 8 where No. 4 stands in th«-
arrangement here adopted. In so doing they ignore tK
16
242
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
fact that No. 8 is a Past Tense, formed, as said above (168),
by dropping the Auxiliary in No. 7.
(8) When the verb is transitive, the affix ne must be
used with the agent in the six last Tenses of the Scheme,
as explained in Ex. XI. 82.
Al'l'ENDIX C. 243
APPENDIX C.
ON THE USE OF THE ROMAN CHARACTEK I.\
TRANSLITERATION.
There are three difficulties in practice, viz. —
(I) The due representation of the short vowels, vi/., of
Zabar, Zer, PcsJi, or Fatha, Kasra, Zamma. Sir "W. Jones's
adoption of a, i, n, is undoubtedly the most convenient for
Englishmen, and the word insular, which might be written
* &
J^j^ is a compendious exhibit of the sounds intended to
be conveyed, the only objection being that, in English, a
rarely has the sound which is here assigned to it. But,
as a matter of fact, each of the vowels Zabar, Zer, Pesh,
is liable to considerable modification of tone in connection
with certain consonants, notably, so far as Hindustani is
concerned, when the syllables in which they occur are
closed by or j or a . A hard and fast rule is, therefore,
misleading. Thus, the vowel Zabar has the sound of e
rather thau a before and $ . For example, Jj^-^v is
better written tehsil than tahsil ; and this variation in
sound is due to the necessity of clearly aspirating the
consonant. In several common words, such as \j^£ kuhnd,
Vj pahld, the Zabar approaches the sound of ei, and can be
acquired by the ear only. Zabar before c hardens to
'!, as was noticed at 85. 7, an effect due to the peculiar
phonation of that consonant, for which see below.
Again, the vowel Zer has the sound of e rather than t
before $ and r when these letters close the syllable.
Thus, ^^A^-f is tnchnat, not mihnai, and .l^^c mehmdn,
1C*
244 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
not •milimdn. In the same way iJ-*- is rightly writ leu
Deldi, not Dihli. (Delhi is doubly wrong.) On the other
hand, the native fashion of spelling J j is correctly given
in DilU. Hence, too, <V. is belter rendered yeh than yih.
Similarly, jl jotJLsl is more exactly pronounced iste'ddd than
isti'dad, and \jj^} is e'tibdr, not i'tibdr, <J.*J fe'l, not /z'Z.
The vowel Pesli before these same consonants is o rather
_p
than u, under the same circumstances. Thus ^U^^. is
j> t-
moJtidj,not muhtdj, and jj^,^ is rather 'ohda than 'uMa
j> ^\
The pronoun ig is better rendered woh than with. Simi-
» J
larly, A*^ is mo'allim, not mu'alhm, aj^bt^ mo'dmalo, not
nmfdmala,
It may be added here that, in such words as JLs or L^
C^ *
which, exactly transliterated, would be fath and sulk, the
necessity of clearly enunciating the aspirated final, pro-
duces the di-syllabic utterances fateh and suleh. For a
case in point see 85. u.
(2) The representation of different consonants which
have approximately the same sound to the European ear;
such as, J is ^a : _ (JM .f cU , etc. The ordinary practice
is to use one Roman letter, and to differentiate the Oriental
letters by placing a dot or dots below this roman letter.
The only other alternative is to invent separate symbols,
such as those used by Prof. Newman in his Handbook of
Modern Arabic ; but one might as well use the originals
themselves.* The objection to the dot system is that it is
* In the transliteration of Arabic words in the Nagri character,
Hindu scholars make no attempt at differentiation. See Kellogg, p 27.
APi'ENDIX C. 2i5
not. sufficiently distinctive, and fails to catch the eye and
impress the memory, so that when an exercise is written
in the native character, misspelling is unavoidable by
students who lean too much upon the romanization of the
words. Tlie hints given in the first Exercise, if studiously
attended to, will help to minimise the evil. The subscript
dots are omitted in this work by way of compelling the
student to refer to the original words.
(3) The representation of the letter £ 'Ain. The real
vocal affinity between this letter and Jlamza is indicated
in the symbol adopted by the Arabs to denote the latter,
which symbol is the upper portion of the 'Ain. Con-
sequently, if the comma is accepted as a representative of
][<imza, it is consistent pro tanto to take the inverted
comma, inconvenient as it is, as the sign for 'Ain.
Note. As regards the pronunciation of the 'Ain, the
author above referred to says : — " The letter Ain is not
merely a hiatus like Ilamze, but a muscular upward jerk
of the chest and stomach, accompanied with an elevation
of musical note to the vowel." Whatever may be the case
in the Desert, the Indian Mahomedan is content with a
less spasmodic phonation. Without apparent effort he
emits the sound directly from the larynx.
The letter Gain, which represents the Gimel of Hebrew
and the Gamma of the Greeks, is produced in much the
same way, but has a harsher and coarser sound than
''Ain. The Arabs themselves describe it as J: garr, j.Li
or >'»£.£ gargarat 'gargling.'
246
EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
1 4
-I I
e •;
<s -s *a TS
^ § b §
v> cc C S
s -« g '- ^
1 <S -S •» g
§ -< e b S
•I « 4 -i . i.
V s> 4S <S «*<
g
^
1,
L 'J
APPENDIX D.
247
» V> V
'£ "«s .- v S *i * * S i i
o
2
•f 3 1 5 'i i 1 1 1 1 "i il 1 J TI s
£
S
1, ts £ e * $ ?§ S '£ T! a,"S§c S §
%
~
J;
j=
p
0
JA> r> A* -,
J$ ^ ^ & ^•l^Jtfyj'J ''3-3
o
o
o
3 ^-\ ^-» •> ^> •> ^> •> ^> •> «>
S S b lj b ,i J J J J J J J J J'l,
1
J
< ? * $ <--^^±±2Z><^J
^
",l
cc
g a g •< , "5
H
MJ
00
|si||ll^ 5 "3 "§ 1 1 ^
8
3
15
^a
J}
J ^1^^^^ l^l 1 g 1 '* •<
P
V
* '« « 8, ^ §e ST§«-O^^ 8, ^
^
B
ri
»
c-
o
o
k r fy
^ :-s A> * t.J "3- } J^l 1" f 1
O «>»l •> i> I l> •> •> r-\ ::-• ::< ::t t:« ::J xM ::l
VV TV Tk .^ ^ TV TV *P rP 'P 'P T 'P 'P T
H
O
«a
H
fe
is
-u
c
0
8
8
j j j jjjji c i i i ret
O
—
«1
^
3
^>
ooo o^o o o^r^r^T^^^^J1
O
O
\\
a
^J ei
2 I
VOCABULARY No. 1.
OF WORDS CONTAINED IN THE HINDUSTANI
SENTENCES OF PARTS I. AND II.
(The numbers refer to the Exercises in which the wo;ds occur.)
\
i^f\ ab now; ab to just now,
for the present ; altak up
to the present time, till
now, as yet, 51.
JuoM abdbil swallow, 1(34. a.
JL'l abtar ruined, impove-
rished, disorganized, 18. a.
tj\ dbril honour; dbrii bar-
hand to increase the ho-
nour paid to a person,
to honour, do honour to,
84. p.
<__•! dp self or selves, what-
ever the person: you, Sir,
Your Honour; 3rd p. pi.
(in addressing friends,
equals, or superiors); dp
hi, tip or dp se dp of one's
own accord, 91.
Uo! apndovtn; applicable to
all persons and numbers
(see 43); apne pi. one's
own folk (44) ; apne dp
ye of one's own accord.
\jt\S\ utdrnd to take or bring
down, 1st caus. of utarnd,
68.
^wuuOl at is aconite, 18.
d did flour, 18.
^\ dth eight.
i ilf.'^ athdra eighteen, 68.
ntJidnd to raise, take
up, etc., 1st caus. of
irltiid; uthd na ntkhiui to
take a thing up and not
put it down (till done
with), 84.
Jl CWT effect, 10. a.
250
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
_\ oj to-day ; dj-kal now-
a-days, 10.
»^j.l5»-\ ijdzat leave, 143,
150. a.
gjj^s*-} ajnabi foreign, 60. a.
achchhd good, etc.
ehtimdl presump-
tion, assumption, 143. a.
lrljJU-1 eldiydt care, caution,
circumspection, 34. a.
,U^1 akhbdr (pi. of (khabar)
newspaper, 122, 143. a.
AjJ^s-l ikhtiydr authority,
power, control, 150. a.
.&.] dkhir at last; dkhir ko
ditto, 187. a.
•i\~*-\ akhldq morals; akhldq
se courteously, kindly, 60.
a.
( )j\ aiJab etiquette, good
manners, 76. a.
sc£\ ddmi man, human
being, 4. a.
idhar hither : idhar
udhar Id bdten small talk,
76.
,j*o! ddh half, 44.
)\ .\ irdda intenti
ruination, 51, 157. a.
tt}\.\ irdda intention, doter-
+\ \ dram ease, rest ; dram-
talab lazy, ease-loving,
indolent, 91. p.
*£ ,' urdu name by which
the Hindustani language
was first known at Dehli,
camp- language, 84. t.
aristii Aristotle, 164. a.
.l are vocative particle,
like English 0! hallo!
you there ! etc.
.« :\ azliaslii inasmuch as,
157. p.
Ljl dsdn easy, 182.
lx-^ asbdb (pi. of sabab),
things, baggage, furni-
ture, etc., 18, 150. a.
JkAJL:! iste'd dd proficiency,
44. a.
t£*~:\ etc. iskd, isko or
uskd usko inflected forms
of yeh, icoli.
i^j\*~i\ dsmdn sky, heaven,
34. p.
l^il dshkdr known, evident,
34. p.
I *\ ,*f\ ?.<»•«/ extravagance,
12i'. a.
#
"^f\ aslan totally, quite, 91. a.
cilis^ ittild' information,
^ 137. a.
VOCAIHT.AKV NO. 1.
251
.
e'tibdr reliance, 102. a.
t__>'JLs^ dffdb sun, 182. p.
w«---v,*^ of sos alas ! 60. p.
ULJ^ ifshd disclosure, 70. a.
Jl*j\ ofaZ (pi. of /e'Z) acts,
deeds, proceedings, 176. a.
J'j^ rg&uZ prosperity, good
fortune, 84. a.
,\ji\ iqrdr confession, agree-
ment ; iqrdr k to con-
fess, 91. a.
UJol orUjil ikathdorikhntfa
assembled, gathered to-
gether in ewe place, 18.
til aksar most, many, the
greater number ; gene-
I'ally, 18. a.
&\z\ dgdh informed ; dgdhh.
to be informed, 157; dgdh
k. to inform, p.
£\ agar if; ayarclii al-
though, 176. p.
*£\ or \£\ a^ra 27, proper
name.
<S_\ age in front of, before,
in comparison with, 27,97.
albntta certainly, a.
ultd up-turned, 198;
ulti liaicd adverse wind.
c\ amr thing, matter, pro-
ceeding, affair, etc., 60,
137. u.
awnr (from same root as
above), prince, ruler, 193.
a.
dmclani income, 137.
imkdn possibility, IPS.
ummedirdr hoping.
143; applicant for eni-
ployment, 198. p.
\j\ and to come; d-jdnd to
arrive, 187 ; due-do let
him come, 76.
^*\j\ atidri rustic, 60.
J'
.Uixjl ititizdr expectation,
waiting, 84. a.
*UiJu\ intizdm administra-
tion, 109. a.
iu\ andar inside, within,
109.
U*J\ insdn human beincr,
176; insdniyat humanitv,
44. a.
Ju*Jl insiddd prevention,
putting down, 27. a.
j\ dnkh eye, 102. 114.
angrez English (ap-
plied to person?), 84.
.J&1 wigli finger, 27.
-,y died; voice, sound, 1»1. ;>.
j «\ upar over, above, 97.
EXKUCISES IX UIXUUSTAXI.
^!M ov Uf>\ iithnd to rise,
get up.
£~:J .£~:J uskd, iisko infl.
s j j
forms of ?£o/i.
i^'Js.', awgdi (pi. of tt-agi)
limes, 164; wage, means,
198. a.
jjjfc. JjsA alili-hirfa trades-
men, 193. a.
aisd such, so, like this.
(P- 2/a^) one, a or an.
l a'tna mirror, 143. />.
»ju &c6i* Hindu title of re-
spect, corresponding w'th
our ' Master,' 8^b.
( _ }\j bap father.
C^'b &ai word, thing, matter
(ace. to context), 4; gai
guzri bat thing of the
past, bygones, 198.
jb MeWkdA»royal|l8.j».
- &a,7aZ cloud, 109.
* A.' Z»a»'W^ rainfall. 10. p.
5>,lj fcar/m (Persian pi.)
-^ ' . .
many times, again and
agdn, 198. p.
^j\j bdri turn; bdri bdri
(se) in turn, turn-about,
1-22.
•Aj bdz back; litz-rah.id to
leave off, 1£T; bd:-dnd
do., 114, 176. p.
twJ\\j bdz-purs inquiring,
questioning, !;•/. p.
c\j bag garden, 111. p
C_ •
^b bdqi mutineer, rebel,
° 84. a.
^{j bdqi d le, left, 44. a.
A\j bdl child, 130; bdl-
bachche children.
ty\j bdldi over ; extra,
L3
general (as applied to a
charge, or duty), 130. p.
iJb bilfe'l at present, 198.
bdndhnd to bind,
fasten, 109 ; zin lag dm b.
to put on saddle and
bridle, 68.
39-.ij bd-wujiid notwith-
standing, 122. a.
j bdkar ontside; 76; bd-
liar Jed sdhib a stranger
or visitor, 34.
bd'en construct form
of bdydn left, 130.
-lL' bat and to say, declare,
state, tell, etc., 122, 137.
esT bajnd to strike (of tin)
hour) ; bajd, baje corre-
spond to our 'o'clock,'
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
253
114; b.ijdnd to strike,
beat, 193, 1st caus. of
above.
^j^^'bi-jinsihi intact,150. a.
LA^~ or \j LSAJ^ bachnd or bach •
v • 7*-« •
jdnd to escape, 164.
Uu^. bichl/nd to be spread,
Y()2.
lj t;^° bichJwnd bedding, 130.
t^£ bachcha babe, child,
V176. p.
\.x£^ bakhshnd to give,
bestow on, pardon, 84.
t\^£jj bad-karddr ill-doer,
) >
157. p.
<.s>^l<Jo bad:mizdji bad-
temper, 193. p.
.,v\JJy bad-ndmi disgrace,
w'27. f).
.»r^ c^J^jo ba-zdt-i-khiid in
person, 187. a.
' j 6v?-a ill, bad, etc.; burd-
vidnnd, to take a thing
ill, 187. p.
j\j bardbar like, equal to,
' 137, 51. p.
^ , _^ • birddari brotherhood,
caste-fellows, 34. p.
,^ I Saras year, 164.
•j
', Ju .-• barandd verandah, 150.
\*b bard great (in most of
the English senses), 10,
51 ; is also used in the
sense of ' very ' ; bard
old or elder (as noun),
68,102,187.
[jjt'lj barlwd to increase,
^row, be extended, 122 ;
barhkar more, 102.
t^f.jj buzurg venerated, 60. p.
bas enough, hold !
'that's all,' 'and nothing
else,' 51, 193. p.
bas power, 76.
bashra countenance,
198. a.
j ba'd after (post.), 44,
137. a.
u balz some (used ns pi.
of koi), 182. a.
Joc bagicha garden, 76. p,
tj bagair without, 97. a
^o bakri she-goat, 76.
jo bikri selling, 1 82.
bald misfortune, 114;
b<ild kd awful or terrible,
60; bald se bother it!
76, 198. a.
balki but, nay more,
rafher, 11>7. p.
254
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
,jJu bandar monkey, 176;
bandri she-monkey, 130.
...xJvj banduq gun, 68. p.
(j ^ Joj band-hcnd to be
'shut, 114.
i^oo^Ju ba-nisbat in com-
parison with 60. p.
( JlGj bengdli (of Bengal),
60.
bangld bungalow, 10.
bannd to be made,
managed, etc. 164 ; ban-
ana to make, 1st cans, of
above, 102 ; band-lend to
build or make for one-
self, 84; ban-pari'd to be
managed (somehow), 76.
AJ\ ,-AJ beni-ddam man-
kind, i 93. a.
->-.j boih weigh, 137.
T . y •'
Ijy;*.' bnrhd old, old man, 34.
'JO*-1 bolud to speak, utter
sounds, 68; bol-uthud to
speak suddenly, ejacu-
late, 76, 187; buldnd 1st
cans., to call, 97.
•-?,l£-' bhdri heavy, .'7.
bhdgnd to flee, to scud
(of clouds), 109 ; bhdijtd
runaway, i'7.
jl^j bhui brother, mate, 51.
.^j
>.hdr spring, 164. p.
bahut very, much, 10.
bhatijd nephew, 84.
-Lj behtar better, p.
Jl>. ^j ba-har-hdl in every
case, on the whole, 91.
\j .^.t bharnd to fill; bhar-
dend int., 10?.
bhusd chaff (fodder),
102.
\ well ! 76, 187.
sister, 84.
».« baliu - betiydn
(younger women of a
family), 137.
.*> bhoj name of an an-
cient Hindu monarch, 187.
b£»^.« bhiikhd hungry, fani-
' ished, 18.
^ bhi also, even, too
Jctichh bhi anything at
all ; 7coV bhi anyone at all.
j 67i,e/natosend,84, 130;
bhijwdnd or bhijwd-dend
to cause to be sent, 76.
-> tAer sheep; 67(67- ia.tri
sheep and goats, 76.
j be without, 97 ; bc-tamiz
silly, indiscreet, 176; be-
VOCAL ULAICY XO. 1.
255
dil out of heart, dis-
heartened, 198. p.
. iLvj bay an description, 157;
b. karnd to describe, 68,
84, 16 1. a.
_, _, b!bi lady, wife, 109. p
liiuo bttd son, 70 ; beti
daughter.
^Juo baithnd to sit;
it nd to seat, 102;
rahnd to remain seated,
150; baithe-bithde at ease,
coolly, without effort,
etc., 109.
bich middle : bich kd
^-middle, 27 ; bich men in
the middle (of what is
going on), 187.
bechobd kind of tent
(poleless), 84. p.
uo beddr awake, 143. p.
" '
biii twenty, 34.
j begum fern, of beg,
1 198. t.
,L«u,y bimdr sick, a sick
person, 97, 164; bimdri
sickness, 114, 193. p.
MJ'J |?«>' by, near to, in pos-
session of ; j>os Ai close
by, '27.
a to find, obtain, ac-
quire, 109, 150.
i-iJb or .u*b or .j\j pdnon or
***J -t "*' / / S f
paon or pdrnv foot, 60.
Jb j3ci«t water, rain, 10,
51 ; paru Ara jjant really
water, the real thing.
• 'li pd'o quarter, 114.
\Jj paid trace, address (of a
"letter), 10, 182.
Uu pittd spleen, or will ;
pitta - marl kd kdm
painstaking work, 102.
y par on. See 50 (2).
j par but.
^*
\.j parwd care, anxiety,
^0. p.
lj*>t*r> parwarith cherishing,
taking care of, 44. p.
\j!j parnd to fall, befal,
happen, lie, 51; par-jit "<t
to be brought to bear, 157.
lo-p parhnd to read, l»i 1-.
, o*j pa* so, 187.
pasand pleasant ; p.
and to be agreeable, 44;
pasamlida, agreeable, 176.
P-
-vi.J punht generation
(past), ancestry, 137. p.
256
EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
pakarnd to seize, take,
catch, etc., 91, 150; palc-
rdi dend to be caught or
catchable, 91.
Jo pul bridge, 164.
palang bed, 102.
pandrawdn fif-
teenth, 143.
UGu pankhd fan, 114.
b'»j potd grandson, 27.
Lxi=>--) pucMind to ask. make
inquiry, 143 ; puchh-
puchhke asking and ask-
ing, 76.
\ ,»j purd full, complete, 44.
J»j paune a quarter less,
^_^ j .*
114.
.IX^J phitkdr curse, 102.
Lvlii phatnd to be broken
or burst, to open (as the
earth in an earthquake)
109, 171.
Ujl^iJ pahchdnnd to know,
recognise, 68, 109.
^j phir then, 91, 187.
.„) pahar eighth part of a
day, equal to three hours,
a watch, 114; do paliar
noon, 60.
\^,j pahrd sentry, 157; p.
lag and to post a sentry.
U-w pliirnd to wander about.
traverse, 176.
vi,.,j pallid first; pahle before
(se), 193.
UL\J^ pahnnd wear (clothes),
etc., 91, 137.
IAJ«^J pliutnd to be broken ;
pMtd pdni boiling watei-,
102.
IJLxryj pahunchnd to an-ive;
pahunch-jdi'.d int., 76.
\j _vz.' pJiernd to return ; £>7ier-
(?e//a to give back, 187.
Ulxy phailnd to spread,
129'.
,Lu pydr love, affection, 176.
/jwljo pyds thirst, 97.
L\iLw pitnd to beat ; sir
pitnd to beat the head in
token of grief, 143.
f^j^j piclihe behind, 97.
" v " *
L\.u paidd ^produced, ci-eated,
born, 10, 18. p.
Jjuo paidal footmai), oc
foot, 27, 143. p.
i_£« ^.xj painnci pursuit, prose-
cution, 157. jo.
esfe before; pesh-dnd
to treat, 60; pesha pro-
fession, occupation, 137 ;
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
257
peshgi advance of mo-
ney), 51 ; pesJn present-
ment, 176. p.
pmd to drink ; pildnd
y
to make drink, 130.
\J
(See
.
in order that, etc.
155.) p.
£?..\j tar ikh date, 143, 176. a.
il« x,\j tdza-wdrid newly
arrived, 18. a. p.
tdham yet, still, 197, p.
tapdk zeal, warmth,
130. p.
c_£sr tujhJfo or tujhe
objective form of tu.
jjusrxr tehsiltldr collector
(native official), 187. a.
;jl5\jL>Jiy tahqiqdt investiga-
tion, 187. a.
i/JJ tazkira mention, 137. a.
V_^AJ^ V tarqib temptation ; i.
dend to induce, 157. a.
^jc< v tarmim emendation ;
t. karnd to correct,
emend, etc., 01. a.
^-j^yjj tashkhis diagnosis,
97. a.
^_g_t asjvhonouring (by
a visit), 91; t. farmdnil,
t. land to visit, 198; t
lejdnd to depart, a.
,»^aj' tasamcur imagination;
t. karnd to imagine, sup-
pose, 150. a.
y 4fcaJ' taswir picture, 68. a.
^fljti ta'arruz interference,
176. a.
v_gj «L» ^a'?-{/ praise, defini-
tion, 34, 102. a.
Joda*3' fa'^Z holiday, vaca-
tion, 44. a.
fa'lim education, 122;
ta'lim - i - niswdn female
education, a.
lJUotJ' ta'mdt Ar. pi., lit.
appointments ; ta'indt k.
to tell off (for duty), to
appoint, 84. a.
takalluf ceremony,
trouble, 171. a.
Z&i taldsh search ; t. karnd
to search for, 68. p.
liijj talaffuz pronunciation,
60. a.
+j turn you, pi.; tumJun-il
your; tnmhen you.
Li)L«J' tamdshd (taking
amusement or recreation),
a bit of fun, spectacle,
10. a.
17
258
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
LxtJ tamiz discretion, dis-
cernment, 171. a.
Ju tambdku tobacco, 18.
^...AJJ tandurust in good
health, 150. p.
tanlchwdh'p&y, 193. p.
tang tight, short
(time), 10. p.
»j' tu thou.
tj to illative particle, 9; to-
bM yet, nevertheless, not-
withstanding.
Li' tawd griddle, 198.
s_>" top gun; fop-da</vgun-
"fire, 114.
\K.*ii tJiord small, little, 51,
^198.
\ _xi' terd thy, thine.
,\lj .jjJ tez-raftdr swift, fleet,
iy
rick, 143.
piece, 130.
thdnd police-station;
thane - tfaW policeman,
143.
jU^Luj tfiekeddr contractor,
51."
60. p.
teli oilman, 187.
**
^m three; ^«o?i all three
' U>- jdgnd to be awake, 97,
114, 193.
^<^~ jdmi1 masjid
congregational mosque,
the Chief Mosque (in
Dehli), 97. a.
\^- jdn life, 1 64. p.
jdnd to go; jd-cTitdcnd
to have already gone, 76.
cJtXjl^9- jdnkani, death-
agony, the being at the
point of death, 114.
Uuls»- jdnnd to know, 171;
jdn-lend do., 143.
Ijj^p- jitnd as many as, the
amount which, 135.
jbjo- jidhar whither.
SJ^'jS" jazira island, 187. a
*&- . i^_^_^s>-just oju search,
'l76. p.
.jJI (>j*>- fis qadr equiv. to
jitnd.
^f-9- jagah place, 60, 1^:!.
\jj)iL-^ jnJdhd weaver, 34.
A]^- jild volume (lit. parch-
ment), 182. a.
Lx-*j>- jamund orjamnd, 68.
t •>- jinn genius, demon, 97
a.
4^_ jo who, which, etc. 135 ,
jiskdjinkd, etc. inflect.
VOCABCLARY NO. 1.
25?
L_I\ ^y- jawdb answer, 76 ;
j. ihnd to reply, 171. a.
^ *5>- jnwdn young, vigorous,
97.
JU».P- jotnd to yoke, 114.
+£*>- jokhim risk, 143.
£*>- jogi religious mendi-
cant, ascetic, etc., 97.
il^ .^»;>- jauldn-gdh riding-
school, 171. p.
• o*jf jun °r jaun as ; jonhin
precisely as ; jon kd ton
as before ; jaun taun
somehow. (See 149.)
_*»:>- jauhar jewel, excel-
lence, faculty, 176. a.
li!;Ujf- jlidrnd to sweep, 150.
•L,r>- j'fhdz ship, 91. a.
s \ '
i^L^ jehdn world, 60. p.
-L^sfc. jehdn \vhere ; jelidn-
l>ar where to ; jehdn se
whence.
\'l^s" jhagrd quarrelling,
sedition, mutiny, 102, 193.
>- jhalnd to swing, 114.
jhuth lie, falsehood,
182.
ji soul, spirit, life,
energy, 97 ; ji lacjdnd to
apply the mind, 164.
^ ji (title of respect), Sir
182.
jind to live, 164.
n as (manner), 149.
chdddn teapot, 102. p.
,Us- char four.
j t
J\JSO J.U>- chdl-dhdl man-
ners, behaviour, 44.
chdnd moon, 109.
chdhndto wish, desire,
love, 130 ; hud chdhnd to
be about to happen.
chdhie see 90.
c \ ~». chirdg lamp, 109. p.
Lsj>- charsd hide (of land),
84.
L> _>- chiriyd bird, 60.
Lx>'-;>- charhnd to ascend
^/ V >
114, 137; charh-baithndto
go up and sit, 102 ; din-
charhnd forenoon, 114 ;
sahm-charhnd (par) panic
to seize a person, 193.
LJ
L»J
chasm - numai
reprimand (prop, by the
look), 122. p.
ohalnd to move, go,
etc. ; chalie chaliegd 91 ;
chaldnd 1st cans. 198;
17*
260
EXEECISES IN HINDUSTANI.
chaltd thriving, recur- j
ring; chaltd-phirtd nazar
and to be on the move,
to be off, 193, chd-dend
to start, set off, etc., 91.
>}\ju>- chundnchi, accord-
"ingfy, 130, 187. p.
jj^ chand some, some few,
several, 44 ; chanddn
somewhat, 76. p.
a jje^ chanda'levj, subscrip-
tion, contribution, 137. p.
_ clior thief, 18; chor-
} "jehdz pirate-ship, priva-
teer, 91 ; chor-darwdza
postern, back door, 157.
^J,^>~ chori theft, 44; chori-
'hond to be stolen; chori-
karnd to steal.
cliauM chair, 34.
chokidar watch -
7
man, 84.
<\ ^-v. chunki as, since, 157.
^"7T
li'-l) t_^J^>- chaunk-parnd to
y start up from sleep, 157.
\Ju U>. chhdpnd to print ;
chhapwdnd to get printed,
182.
chhotd small, young,
60.
U4jfr>- chhutnd to be loose,
>^"V
leave, be set free, be let
go, 91, 150.
t£>~ chhornd to set free,
etc., 1st causal of above,
150, 171 ; chhor let alone,
68; chhor-dnd to leave
(and come away), 109.
chirnd to split, 130.
•x-^ cMz thing, 34. p.
->-U>~ hdjat want, need,
137, 171. a.
fidsil resultant ; hdsil
Jiond to be obtained)
176. a.
-l>. hdzir present, in wait-
ing, ready, 4, 10, 60. a.
,J\->. 7»aZ state, condition,
circumstances, present
time, 187 ; Mlat do. do.
status, 176; hdldnki al-
beit, 176. a.
hasan prop, name,
(Mahomedan), 198. a.
^s- hazrat Excellency,
religious title of saints,
etc., 187. a.
huzur presence (of a
superior), terra of obse-
quious address, 27, 34;
ap ke huzur, 70. a.
Jiukm order, command,
, 182. a.
>r«*=
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
2G1
hikmat science, 171.
hakim physician, 68,
1 " 1-22. a.
^..s*. hall solution; h. karnd
to solve, 171. a.
£\t~*. hawdla reference; ha-
wdla dend to quote, or
refer to, 193. a.
,.i^j^>- hairdn being in
^ ^ «
doubt, at a loss, perplexed,
143. a.
khdskar especially,
^ 102.
^JUi. Hafc lit. dust, used
idiomatically for kuchh,
10,68. p.
.UL>. khdtir heart; meri khd-
tir obliging me, 157 ; khd-
tir-Tihwdh suited to one's
ideas, or tastes, 198. a.
JU- khdli empty, 10;
^ sometimes 'only,' 'barely,'
198. a.
J:^<'o- khdmosh silent, 182.
P-
j^ kJmbar news, intelli-
gence,114, 187; care, 193;
khdbarddr take care ! 34.
a.
God, 84; khudd
ki qasam By heaven ! 34.
P-
L^-.<Joi. khidmat service,
102. a.
_ ^. kharch money for ex.
penses ; kharch-hond to
be expended ; kharch-
karnd to expend, 34. p.
ei-^t a^r^- khusumat enmity,
193. a.
last. fc%a^ letter, 76, 84 ; line
(geom.), 102. a.
khatd offence, sin,
crime, 91. a.
khatra danger, 164. «.
JbL khafd angry, 91. p.
jiUL khildf contrary to
60 ; khilaf-ma'mul un-
usual, 137; khildf-qiyds
inconceivable, 34, 137 ;
khildf -adab contrary to
etiquette, 76. a.
i-L*v*>- kJiamydzah retribu-
tion ; kh. khainchnd to
suffer retribution, 137. p.
±j\*£~ khwdb dream ; kh.
dekhnd to dream, 193. p.
khwdja title of re-
spect, like our Mr., 84,
198. p.
*s*- kJiwdh either . . . or,
193; khwfih ma-k)iu'<i\
262
EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
will he nill lie, 176;
khwdltdn desiring, desi-
rous of, 27 ; khwdhish
desire, inclination, 187. p.
c->p- khub well, 68, 164. p.
j»rk Jchud self (with all per-
sons), 44, 150. p.
,£•£»•. khusli pleased, 193 ;
khush-hdl well off, com-
fortable, etc., 198. p.
Jlxri- khaydl thought, ima-
gination, 198. a.
_^ khair well ! 18, 182. a.
ddkhil entering ;
ddkhil hond to enter, be
admitted, 60. a.
c \ j ddg spot, blemish, 150. a.
i\\ j c7aZ pulse, 18.
^j dam price, 4.
,*bj dabdu pressure, 157.
UuJ dabnd to be pressed
down ; dai£ zdbdn se in
subdued tones, gently,
102; dabe 'i don with
light tread, 109.
ul> J dakhl entrance, power
of interference, 109.
ci\j iJ darbdri, darbdri ka-
prd full dress, 91. ^).
/.iuo » J darpesh on the tapis;
in prospect, ready for pre-
sentation, etc., 34. p.
&>-.,* darja degree, 193. a.
lf,J durga prop. name
' (Hindu).
i-.l«,J dancdza door, 150. p.
J^J
lj j daryd river, sea, 109.
" 157. a.
Ci-ib IL> darydft finding out ;
d. karnd to find out, 76. ^.
i_j ,j dareg reluctance ; rfo-
regr fc. to grudge, 157. p.
«s ten.
t} dast-khatt signature
! hand), 109. p.
dasehrd a festival
held on the 10th Jaith, 44.
J dasu-dn tenth, 44.
J dusJiman enemy, jp.
For peculiar use, see 199
(7)-
•JjJ dusliwdr difficult;
chanddn d. nahin not so
very difficult, 76. p .
zj dw'a prayer, salutation,
114. a.
da'wat feast, enter-
tainment ; invitation, 34,
171. a.
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
263
dikhdnd (1st caus. of
delchnd) to show ; di-
khai dend to be visible,
91.
J^J dalil proof, 164. a.
^ j dam breath, time ; du>u
waft we?i a«a (breath
coming into nose), gasp-
ing for breath ; marts dam
at time of death, 114. p.
^p dm day, 44 ; din-liar
all day, 1U9 ; axe dtn
every day, 102.
\jjj dunyd world, 102. a.
. j Jo two ; donon the two,
both, 18 ; do pahar noon.
\tj dawd medicine, 18, 114.
a.
^JtO.J dudl milk, 44, 176.
,tki> dur distance, or dis-
tant, 4 ; bari dur se a
long way off, 91 ; diir-bin
telescope, 176. p.
L--.J dusrd second, other,
10, 91.
J^J.j du-latti kicking with
both heels (of a horse),
198.
, Jjs>j or ^Jj dehlioT dill!.
,!JOL) diddr sight (of per-
son), 60, 182. p.
^j J der or •Jy.J «?<?•/•* delay,
r>i. p.
t belonging to
country, 18 ; country,
bred, 87.
j dekhud to see, to look
for, 68, 182; deJ:hd-d,-Mi
imitation, following ex-
ample of, 130.
j j rfm religion, 137. jp.
IJuJ <Ze?ja to give.
^ j da/.- a dacoity, 187.
^T u-5^5 daA; ghar post-office,
4; dtt^ bangld dak-bun-
galow, 27.
UJ'5 ddlnd to throw, cast ;
ddl-dend to cast (into),
109.
Uj j dubnd sinking, descend-
ing, 114; din. dubnd af-
ternoon.
li .5 darnd to fear, 109, 143.
LAJ.J di'ibnd to sink; (7»/<-
mamd to be drowned,
157.
J.j J«/i! litter, 51.
L5^>
ylfcj d/j«n two and a half,
51 ; dhd'i sau two hun-
dred and fifty.
L^ fCuo dhang fashion, man-
ner of life, '
EXERCISES !.N HINDUSTANI.
.
dhol drum, 193' ; dh.
bajdnd to beat a drum.
j»>5 dhundhnd to seek.
search for, 68, 193.
derh one and a half.
10 ; derh baje half-past
one ; derh sau a hundred
and fifty.
J zarra just a little, 76,
91. a.
cj.J zari'a means; zari'a
se by means of, 176. a.
mention, 182. a.
zimma charge, respon-
sibility ; merd zimma ' I
warrant it,' 164. a.
CLj}. fdt night; rat ko at
night, 51.
\p>~\j rdjd Hindu title, head
of Kshatri caste, 187.
•\ , rdz secret, mystery, 76. p.
,f^\j fdzi satisfied, con-
"" tented, 97, 193. a.
J\ , rani fern, form of rand,
a Raj pat title ranking
above Raj A,, 114.
, rah road, way, 143 ; rats
chaltd Avayfarer, 97. p.
-V^ZJS- , rukhsat leave ; r.
hond to take leave, 76 ;
r. karnd to dismiss, 44;
r. lend to take leave (of
absence), 84. a.
or tS~i\ . rasta or rdsta
^/
road, way, 76. p.
^. rassi rope, 97.
\j\j <UJj , rishta-ndtd kin-
ship, 60. p.h.
. raJchnd to put, place,
hold, 102 ; raTch-lend to
keep for one's own, 187.
riwdj customary, 137. a.
li, rawdna started, de-
spatched, 18. p.
,.'•, rubaJedr proceedings
(written official), 68.
^jo i . rupaya money, 10; a
rupee.
^j. , rofi bread (leavened or
unleavened), 10.
•^ , roz day ; roz ros daily,
44,102. p.
^t rumi inhabitant of
Rum, the Sultan of Tur-
key, 193.
lj . rond to weep. 109.
, ,JU, rihai release, 187. p.
^_* j •*
. ,
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
266
\JUJ>. rahnd to remain, dwell,
stay, abide ; rah-jdnd to
be left over, or behind,
int. 51.
, ralt-numai showing
~s
the way, guidance, 84. p.
j . rais chief, 198. a.
Jb . rel railway or railway-
train, 27, 44. e.
j
+£~\ zaJihm wound, 51. p.
\ •*
^\j • zabdn language ; ba-
zabdn-i-hdl ' in such lan-
guage as an animal has,'
176; zabdni by word of
mouth, used as a prep.
or post., 34. p.
, • zar money ; zar-khartd
purchase-money, 76. p.
^jLe- zamdna time, fortune,
60. p.
,*x«j zamin earth, land, 34;
W " J
zaminddr landowner, p.
"; zanjir chain, 60. p.
Lj • zinhdr beware ! 76. p.
>t.' • zln saddle, 68. p.
jLi sdth companionship,
27 ; sdthi companion,
157 ; sdth postp. with>
60 ; sdth-dend to accom-
pany, 91.
^La sdth sixty, 143.
\ .L> sard all, the whole, 84.
^yL, sdrhe a half more, 114.
jLjSaZyear; sdlhd -ml year
after year, for years, 176.
P-
, uJLs sdis syce, groom, 34. a.
JJLs sail questioner, peti-
tioner, 182. a.
t^^j sab all, every, 18 ; sab
Tee nab the whole lot, 27 ;
sabhon pi. of totality, 176.
L^^I^ sabab cause, 68 ; as
a postp. 76. a.
saiaq lesson, 44. a.
sipdhi or s'pdhi sepoy,
soldier, policeman, 18. p.
sitdnd to worry, op-
press, bully, 198.
...U-j sattdwan fifty-seven,
68.
i^jJU-j satldis twenty -
seven, 68.
.^v^j sakht very, 122. p.
^ sir head, 193 ; sir (par)
]n i ml to annoy, 97.
^ sar head ; sanldr cliiof,
head servant or ' bearer,'
143; sarkdr governmoni ;
2G6
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
sar-guzasJtt adventures,
84, 164. p.
\^t sird end, extremity, 122.
<-$\]Mt sarae ' serai,' inn, 60.
P-
tU-1 .-j sarishta office, 27 ;
sarishta-ddr head of of-
fice (native), 34, 60. p.
t_&~s sarak road, 27, 44.
sastd cheap, 18.
j safar journey; safar k. to
journey, to travel, 157. a.
-\L-: satiqa taste, breeding,
manners, 27. a.
L«y-s samdnd to be swal-
lowed up (lit. to be con-
tained in), 171.
.xyw samajh thinking,
150 ; samajhnd, to under-
stand, think, 84, 193;
samajhlend do. ; samjhdnd,
1st caus., to explain ;
samjhdlend, do., do.
sunnd to hoar, 97;
sundi dend to be audible,
91.
sanad authority, 27. a.
or fj^i san year, 68. a.
»_j sa« hundred, 10.
\^» sawd quarter more, 114 ;
sawd-sau one hundred and
twenty-five.
or t^*— sited or siwde
% >
besides, except, 150.
fLd su'dl question,
problem, 171, 182. a.
X>-*-J sochnd to think, 187.
v V
^ ^ >i~t suraj - gaJian
eclipse of the sun, 143.
; so/asleep-
ing1, sleep, 97 ; 8one-wdld,
60.
c_ tj^ savere early, 11-i.
li'L*. ; sohdgd borax, 18.
pj^i saTim panic, 193. a.
\"tj^i mJican inadvertently,
164. a.
_,^ sahi • for the idiomatic
v^ ; \
sense of this particle, see
150 (&iV), 176, 182.
siydhi ink, 68. p.
sayyid appellative of
the Prophet's descend-
ants, 60. a.
._w ser a weight (about 2
Ibs. av.), 44.
. ti'iiLx-j saikron hundreds,
\±.^s -
122 ; P. sadhd, plural of
totality.
siTfhnd to learn, 164
to sew, sewing,
102.
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
267
U"
ii shddi marriage, wed-
ding, 31. p.
_oLi shd'ir poet, 60. a.
^Li sham evening, 114.
a Li shah king. p.
shdh-russttic Czar,
King of Russia, 193.
shay ad perhaps, 97. p.
*_£; • .LxJj shabdrozi of night
-x -^-' '
and day, 164.
.^L^yi shakhs person, fellow,
individual, 10. p.
Cl^.U-i> sliardrat wickedness,
114. a.
!?-£» shart condition, bet, 44.
a.
^^i sharm shame, 68. p.
c. Jj shuru1 beginning; shu-
rd'-hond to begin, 44 ; sh.
karnd to begin, trans, a.
j i A shaiir wicked, 122. a.
i_5o A shank sharing, part-
ner, 18. a.
_\lti shatir a beam, 130. a.
,jl>-lJLi) shifo.-khdtia dispen-
sary, 60. a. p.
,\^j^i shnkr-guzdr thank-
ful, grateful, 27. p.
w-t ^ia^r city, 114, 193. ja.
^ s^ai thing, 51. a.
_v^» *^er lion or tiger, 143. p.
lord, master,
appellative of English-
men in India, 34; sdhi-
bdn or sdltib log, pi. a.
so/ clean, 68. a.
sahn courtyard, 76. a.
sahih correct, 84. a.
sarra/money-cbanger,
198. a.
sir/ only, 164. a.
uJ^ sar/ expenditure, sarf-
i-zar do., 182. a.
c^\Ltf ^/a^ q a ality, attribute
(tech. adjective), 84. a.
_iLs saldh what is right, good
advice, counsel, etc., 187-
a.
subah province ; siibajdt
Pers. pi. 18. a.
surat, appearance,
good looks, 97. a.
siya form, tense-form,
157 ; siga-i-mdsi past
tense, a.
268
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
tbj\*a zdbita rule, regulation,
34. a.
j^ zuZcZ opposition, vexatious
conduct, 176. a.
,. -4J zarur, necessary, neces-
sarily, 34, etc. a.
e zila' district, side, 51. a.
i_ Jl^ tdlib-'ilm seeker of
knowledge, student, 34. a.
ei— ' Ijjp tibdbatilae profession
of medicine, 76. a.
Js tar ah manner, way,
etc., 76. a.
<_« U tara/ direction, side,
150 ; taraf-ddn siding
with, 157. a.
<Ujl> tariqa plan, method,
way, 44. a.
. .^ ^awr manner; bataur (ke)
in the shape of, like, 150.
AjJ? sometimes wiitten .\jj
ready, 4, 164. a.
zaZz'm tyrant, 109. a.
JLC 'dlam world, 176. a.
CU.ljLc 'eldrat style, diction,
written text, 164. a.
i _ A.IC. 'e/a& reproof, repri-
mand, 34. a.
j_ ^^c 'ajb wonder, 164; ajb
k., to wonder, a.
,.; «c 'arabi the Arabic lan-
guage, Arabic, 18. a.
jjUlc 'isza^ honour ; 'izzat-ddr
honourable, held in re-
spect, 27. a.
'j'.£. 'aziz (from same root
as above) dear, a friend
or intimate, 157; 'aziz
ra-Jchnd to hold dear, to
value, 193. a.
UiC. (atd gift ; latd Tcarnd to
bestow, 171. a.
laql common sense, in-
telligence, wisdom, 84. a.
'alts reflection (opti-
cal), 68. a.
'eldj cure, 76. a.
'aldlat indisposition,
76. a.
'aldmat mark, sign,
denotation, 157. a.
J,_c. 'Urn knowledge, 176. a.
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
269
^ '«mdaexcellent,176. a.
*£. fumr life, age, 164. a.
s. 'amal action, practice;
'(imaZ k. (par") to act upon,
104. a.
Ui-olJLe 'endyat favour .kind-
ness ; 'en. karnd or /ar-
«?ana to grant, 143, 187;
'en. Aona to be granted ;
len. ndma a letter. 51. a.
d^, «£• 'aurat woman, 76. a.
v_^\£ 'at& defect (in mind or
body), wrong, 198. a.
.^z 'ain (lit. eye) 198. a.
gdftliorgetfu.]; gdfilso-
nd to sleep sound, 109. a.
,tJ\£. gdnim name of a wor-
1 thy in the Alf Laila, 164.
iiXc gadr mutiny, 68. a.
v__^.«^ garib poor, pauper,
193; garib-khdna humble
abode (used by an infe-
rior in mentioning his
house or home), 91. a.
gussa anger : gusse an-
gry, 51. o.
.^.A gazab misfortune,
something awful or calami-
tous, 27, 130. a.
Jx ?«/ uproar, noise, 143. a.
^Lz goldm slave, used by an
inferior instead of 1st
pers., 27,44. a.
c <7aZa£ wrong, 137. a.
]ȣ gol-kamard draw-
ing-room, 102. a.
U yxi gairat sense of shame,
150. .
^j,
a?4st Persian, the
Persian language, 18. ^>.
Jjs'j/a't'Z agent (gr.), 157. a.
•J3U/0M1 extra, spare, 18.
j Ju LJ fd'ida profit,ad vantage,
27, 176. a.
i-pU>A5 fateJigarh (lit. Vic-
tory-Fort) 84.
^sji /a/r early morning, 114
a.
a devoted (par) 176. a.
«i\i fidwi (same root as
above), devoted (used by
an inferior in speaking of
self, like goldm, kamtarin
etc.), 91. a.
£j*yt\jl fardnwsli-kdi-i,
forgetf ulness, omitting to
mention, 44. p.
270
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
J:J farsh carpeting, 34,
102. a.
-i fur sat leisure, 44. a.
^ j farq difference, 34, 51 ;
dissension, 137. a.
v_^.t j /arefr deceit, 143. a.
jluJ fasdd disturbance, re-
bellion, tumult, etc., 27. a.
j-oj /'wZ season, 164. a.
JLtfJ fuzul excessive; fazul-
kharchi extravagance, 27.
a.
Jjts /e'Z deed, act (gram, a
verb), 34. a.
yjj faqir beggar, 97. a.
Lr-v-j-^j fehrist list, 198. ^.
J filfaur instantly,
o.
faisala decision,
(law) ;/. hondto be decided,
176. a.
Jjljs (^afti'Z worthy, deserv-
ing, 34, 137. a.
Jjjj qabl before, 150. a.
^jo qabr tomb, 150. a.
AJ qadr worth, quantity,
value, consideration, 27,
122, 137. a.
137.
I ^ jjj qadam step ; qadart
rakhnd to step, 193. a.
2ar*^ near, nearly,
122, 150. a.
scZ intention, 114. a.
2J ^wsitr fault, 164. a.
Lijf gaza that wliich >s al.
lotted, death ; qazd karnd
to die, 150, 187. a.
^Uis qazzdq marauder (Cos-
sack) ; qazzdqt maraud-
ing, 137. a.
Jjj qalam reed-pen, 68. a.
j qiydfa physiognomy,
143. a.
l£ Jed sign of izdfat.
Uuli kdtnd to cut ; fea£ Tidtnd
to contradict, interrupt,
187.
A;ar work ; kdri effec-
tive, fatal, 51 ; Jcdrdmad
useful, 18 ; kdr-rawai
business procedure, 34 ;
Jcdr-guzdri performance
of work or duty, 193. p.
,^ kdrtuscorr. cartridge,
iujtj ,
193. e.
.£& kdsh or Itdslike optative
particle, 164, 171. p.
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
271
Ji& kdyaz paper, 68. p.
Jl£ kdfi sufficient, 157. a.
W kdld black, 27.
^ kdm work, 27 ; use, 187.
1^6 kdn ear, 68.
C^Ujl^ kaindt possessions,
41. a.
t^i kab when, or kis-waqt ;
kub kd or kabhi kd long
ago, some time ago, 76 ;
kabhi ndhin never, 10.
\A£ kuppd leathern vessel for
holding oil, ghee, etc. 122.
y«Ui kapds cotton-plant, 10,
18.
ilxxi k'iptdn capitano, cap-
tain, 60.
£ kuttd dog, 198.
_jU£ kitdb book, 18. 84, 91;
Arab. pi. kutub. a.
kit nd how much, ho\v
many r*
kuchh anything, some-
thing; kuchh kuchh sorm-
little ; kuchh n<i kitchrt
something or otUer ; aur
kuchh or
more.
aur some
, j iwy kirdya-ddr tenant
(rent-payer), 122. p.
[j £ karnd to do, make, etc. ;
^karke (P.C.P. of karnd),
68, 198 ; kardnd (1st
cans.), 109; kar-rakhn<i
to do a thing and keep
it done, 84; apnd kar-
lettd to make one's own,
84.
JL?t £ karwat lying on one
side ; k. badalnd to
change to the other side
in lying, 114.
kasr fraction, 102 ;
chalti kasr recurrirg de-
cimal. a.
J^ kal to-morrow or yester-
day.
J^ kal machine, 10.
J^ kull all, the whole, 44,
109. a.
L^^XO kambakht wretch,
wretched (lit. little-for-
tunate), 114. p.
v JU£ kamtarm (lit. least)
tcrai used by inferiors in
speaking of self, 84. p.
<r»i A-owit reduction, 198. p.
L^OO*^ kumet bay (horse
or ^, or
or kmcdn or kii\i a well.
ko sign of object (near up
remote).
272
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
kothd house-top, 102.
_ ^ kiich march, 114. p.
(v_>
.,£ kaun who, what; Itaun-
sd what-like, what ? (asks
for a description, either
of persons or things).
*ȣ Jcoi anyone, someone ;
v«^ >
ko*i sau etc. some hun-
dred etc. ; Tcdi koi some
few; koi na hoi, some
one or other, 198.
\>£ kahd (verb, noun), order,
87,171.
,L£ kahdr appellative of the
bearer or carrier class,
18.
,Vgi Tchdr alkali, potash, 18.
iL£ kahdn where ?
khdnd food, a meal,
dinner , (as a verb), to
eat; khd-jdnd to eat up.
.J-ji khurdari rough (of
surface), 27.
ii Jchard erect, standing,
34, 68.
kahldnd to be called,
182.
kalmd to say, speak, 84;
kah-dend, intens.
j*^ khodtid to dig, exa-
mine closely, 157.
MoZntf to open, 122.
Met field, 137.
aMn somewhere ; fca-
Tiin nahin nowhere ; ka-
Mn na kahin somewhere
or other, 10.
ki or ^£ ke sign of
izdfat.
£ kai how many ?
L\£ A;?/a what; kyd...kyd
whether... or ;
kaisd what-like ? of
what sort or kind ? how
or what (with adjective
of quality) ? in what
state ?
.o A'7/zm why? kyiinkar
how ? kyunki because.
£ &flu some, several. 18.
>s,!li' ^«''1' carriage, 150.
,,»O «•• »J O
or gdnw
gdon-wdld villager, 76.
5 ,\ JkT guzdr<i living, subsis-
tence, 187. p.
\j ,^ gugarnd to pass, 109 ;
guzar-jdnii to pass away,
114.
~\< grami villager,
thatcher, 143.
VOCABDL1RY NO. 1.
273
'gird around, 182. p.
\jj.>giriftdr caught, appre-
hended, taken prisoner,
18. p.
\> £ girnd to fall ; gir-parnd
to fall down, 97.
\j[y>-'-£ gar-jdnu to be rooted,
150.
rf gaz yard measure, 97. p.
. rjJLuS' gosdin saint, holy
man, 97.
^.ULuS' gustdkh insolent, im-
pertinent, 122. p.
<\jj& guftdr speech, 182. p.
if gold neck, 122; gale
milnd to embrace.
^jj£ gumbaz dome, 150. p.
IxJo* ga)igd proper name, the
Ganges, 68.
Liuo* ginnd to count, 143,
193.
»^or r£&g° or g°hi although,
176. p.
+\ 3& goddm' godown,' ware-
house, store-room, 102.
jj* £ gosha-nishin are-
cluse, 68. p.
goyd so to say, 102, 157,
198. p.
i speech, 176. p.
ghalrdnd to be in
alarm, 91.
^ ghar home, house, 76 ;
ghar-wdle members of
family.
u$5|i gffcori a pei-iod of time
'equal to one sixty-fourth
part of natural d;iy; the
eighth part of a pahar;
a watch or clock, 114, 187
\j^u^ gTiusnd to rush in, 143
IAA^ gJiantd gong, hour, 114.
ghord horse; gliori
mare, 27.
LLcki^ ghumnd to go round,
182.
J? gM 'ghee,' clarified
butter, 18.
Id (privative) ; lu-lidsil
without success, 176; Id-
kaldm unquestionable,
157. a.
*
•\' litzim intransitive (gr.),
157. a.
W land to bring ; taslirif
land to honour with a
visit, 68.
, ij}j laiq capable, suitable,
worthy, 198. (/.
IS
274
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
lifidz modesty, con-
sideration (for others),
respect, observance, etc.
84. a.
J'-i lardi quarrel, fighting,
battle, 102, 193.
\j'$ lartd (from larnd) com-
batant, 97.
!£'•:] larJcd boy, son, child,
18 ; larl-i girl, 10 ; larak-
pan childhood, 60.
, :lil luff zest, enjoyment,
130. a.
L^_~.<«! logat vocabulary, 91. a.
lift] lafz word, 34. a.
likJina to write, to
translate, 84.
U3 lagdm bridle, 68.
3 lagnd to be set, be
fixed, fix, etc. ; burd lagnd
to come amiss, 51. p.
lalachdnd to long fur,
covet, 97.
-SjA laundl slave-girl, 109.
J lohd iron, 60.
/
] laliar idea, 143. a.
liydqat the being
qualified, suitability, capa-
bility, merit, etc. 137. a.
.,Lxl lekin but, 197. p.
UuJ lend to take, bay, 84 ;
le-jdna to take away, 68 ;
le-lend to keep in one's
o\vn hand?, 130 ; lie
postp , for sake of, on
account of.
.
ob jL« mddydn mare, 60. p.
mdrnd to strike, beat,
slay, etc. 122 ; mdrd-
phirnd to wander or
knock about, 182; ware
postp., on account of, 150.
mdl wealth, 51 ; mdl o
daulat wealth and riches,
27. a.
mdlik proprietor, 182.
a.
Ju« mall financial (relat-
ing to revenue), 109. a.
^L« man mother ; mdn-bdp
or md-ldp parents, 18,
44.
\J L« mdnd granted, 176.
Tiidnda tired, 18. p.
mdnijnd to ask for,
198 ; mdng-ldnd to ask
for and bring, 91.
mdnind, postp., like
27. p.
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
275
4 mdh month, 143; mdh-
lodri monthly, month by
month, 122. p.
j»-U.« mubdhasa discus-
sion, 114. a.
mubtald involved in,
91. a.
.»..v_<: mubram urgent, irre-
sistible, 187. a
o_^c mat prohibitive par-
ticle, 198.
\ JuuLc mtitabanna adopted
Li •
son, 130. a.
,**sJL<: mutasawiuar supposed,
imagined, 137. a.
U^LLc tnatldna or ji kd mat-
land to feel nausea, 187.
'M»JLc mutawdtir consecu-
tively, 130. a.
(Jls^ li-:»JLc mutawassit ul
hdl in middling circum-
stances, 198. a.
\i+i-o mutawafd deceased,
the deceased, 157. a.
,t^\,*mathor earthen jar, 102.
JUL« misdl proverb, apho-
rism, similitude, 164. a.
i^i^LLc musallas triangle, 51,
102.
,»jk^yc majbiir forced, 84. a
^J * •
*C:ij-« or ...^j,* mujhko or
mujhe obj. form of main.
machhli fish, 51.
mohdsara siege, 132.
a.
J^Uj^o mohdivara idiom, dia-
lect, fashion of speech ;
6a - mohdivara idiomatic,
34 ; be-mohdivara unidio-
matic. a.
^^J^sy« mahabbat affection,
176. a.
— iJUj^ mohtdj poor, 171. a
mohtamim editor,
122. a,
mahrum deprived of,
60. a.
^o mukhtasar abridged,
shortened ; m. karnd to
abridge, abbreviate, 68. a.
-?.X<5 muddat long period of
time, 156. a.
X< madad help, 171 ; ma-
dad- gar helper, a.
murabba1 squai-e, 51. a.
murtakib guilty,
sin-committing, 34. a.
^ mard man, 137. p.
marz disease, 97. a.
marzi pleasure, 60. a.
^ mama to die, 97 ; death,
157.
18*
276
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
•i.1 -c mo.nz sick man, pa-
tient, 97. a.
^\'.^c inizdj temperament,
state of health, temper,
4. a.
.iLu^e musdfir traveller, 60.
>
a.
\XJ^M^C musta'dr borrowed;
musta'dr lend to borrow,
84. a.
ijJijLw-wc mustaqim straight,
'"]02. a.
r.)lx«.Lu-<! musalmdn Moslem,
Mahomedan, 60, 193. a.
ij»*u^c mitsawwuda rotigh
draft, MS. 91. a.
•\jJL«o mushtdq desirous,
^ 34. a.
^Ju^e mushkil difficult, 182,
may be used as a noun. a.
,»j,A-<: fnaslihur known, pub-
lished, 114. a.
4_« jUs^c masdrif (pi. of tnas-
raf) expenses, 198. a.
c^sjL^j.* maslahat ex-
pedient, expediency, 51.
a.
e^ouu.2,< musibat mis-
fortune, 44. a.
^Ua^ mutdbiq according to;
mutdbiq-asl exact copy
(lit. according to origi-
nal), 34. a.
matba' press, 182. a.
/*lli< muting or mutlaqan
quite, 91. a.
wo'a/ forgiven; w.
farmdnd to forgive, 164. n.
mo'dmala affair, busi-
ness matter, 76. a.
mo'dyaita inspection ;
in. farmdnd to inspect,
171. a.
mo'allim preceptor,
teacher, 109. a.
ma'lum known, 4. a.
ma'ni meaning, 182. a.
i.^JL« muft gratis, 51. p.
aJolJLc muqdbala comparison,
opposition, 198; ba-nutqd-
bala in comparison with.
Lc muqaddama case (in
law), 84, 176. a.
,JU mvqarrar appointed,
fixed, settled, 34; mnq>:,r-
rara, fern, of above, 176. a,
^J&r* malcdn place, abode.
house (of a better sort),
4, 84. a.
Lc inagar but, 197, j..
mngrd cross, sullen,
peevish, etc. 4.
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
277
c /^''/"7mza considera-
tion of, inspection, 137. a.
Ll^'j^Lc muldqdt visit, inter-
view; »». karnd to pay
a visit, interview, etc., 34,
68. a.
i«?»JvLc tnuUi.nvi deferred,
postponed, adjourned ; m.
kar-rakhnd to adjourn,
84. a.
^^Jwo innlki (relating to
country), civil, 109. a.
\j^L<, milnd to receive, ii tr.
to meet, combine, be like,
correspond, etc. 51 ; jd-
iiiilnd to fall into (of a
river), 68; mtilear (P.C.P.
of. milnd) united, summed
up, in combination, 68.
,J»Lc malill grieved, discon-
tented, 176. «.
...C «AJ mumkin poss.ble, 143,
"" 176. a.
,Uui mandr minaret (Ar.
noun of place), 97. a.
.._ ilLe v.undsib befitting,
'187. a.
mu ut zir expecting,
143. a.
'
143.
manager,
agreealtle,
approved, 150. a.
u< or ^ui or
or munh mouth, face, 68,
187.
j»j>-4^c maujud available, in
hand, ready, in existence,
10, 198. a.
^Jj^e maulavi Moslem title
of learning, 187. a.
\^>-\.\j^c mahdrdjd chief Ra-
ja. '198.
<j \j_--x) mehrbdni kindness,
favour, 27. p.
u^L^c mohiat delay, respite,
grace, 143. a.
mehmdn guest, 51. p.
mohaiyd provided,
18. a.
mahind month.
^c miydn ji title of
teacher, 91. p.
\*o mekh tent-peg, 109. p.
Lx« mez table, 34. p.
muyassar obtained,
176, 182. a.
^JL« main I ; merd my,
mine.
.jc< men post, affix locative,
in, into, among, between,
etc.
OJ^JUL* 7tte»7iJi' henna, 102.
278
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
nd (privative) ; nd-insdfi
injustice, 27 ; nd-lamdm
unfinished, 44 ; nd-haqq
unfairly, 109 ; nd-gawdr
displeasing, disgusting,
122. p.
to measure, 97.
)\^\j ndddni ignorance,
34. p.
j\j nadir rare, 176. a.
ndld ravine, ' nullah,'
157.
ndlish complaint,
plaint ; ndlish karnd to
lodge a complaint, file a
suit, etc. 84, 157. p.
^\j ndm name; ndm lend
to mention a person's
name, 91, 198.
, -s-U nabz pulse ; nabz dekli-
nd to feel the pulse ; nabz
dikhdnd to let the pulse
be felt, 130. a.
c^UsT najdt salvation ; najdt
pdnd to escape, 157. a.
o Ju nadi river, 68.
c^-ou*J nisi at proportion,
relation, 137. a.
nut-kha MS. 84. a.
»~kJ nsicn or u
c^ s
women, female sex (Ar.
pi.) 122. a.
J^ .^2J nasrdni Nazarene,
(^* J
Christian, 193. a.
(^^u^j nasib pi., destinies,
fate, fortune, 143. a.
c^NsO^i1 nasihat advice, ad-
monition, 91, 1G4. a.
\j\ Ai) nazar and to ap-
pear, 1 64 ; nazar pdrnd to
appear casually or unex-
pectedly, 97.
_jdij nazir exemplar; be-
nazir unrivalled, 1 71. a.
nilcdlnd to turn out,
take out, drive out, etc.
1st. caus. of nil-alnd, 76,
193.
) nikalnd to issue, come
out, turn out, turn up,
etc., 51, 198.
namak salt, 18, 137. p.
J nau nine, 68.
< ?^i naicwdb (Nabob) vice-
roy (Mahomedan title),
34. a.
.£»j naukar servant, 10 nnn-
Tcari service (esp. under
Government), 176. p.
i^o Lj nelidyat very, exceed-
ingly, 198. a.
VOCABULARY NO. 1.
279
.,wJ nahin or ^ na no,
not; nahin to else, 193.
LiJ nay A new, 51, 68.
JuJ nil indigo, 18.
^jj nim tree with leaves of
*a bitter taste, 18.
father, 150. a.
waste for the sake of ,on
account of, etc. a.
>-. «7a/fc reason, cause, 34.
> ;.
wazir vizier, chief minis-
ter, 109. a.
L\+£* wusul collected
(money), 137. a.
..Ir. watan native country,
44. a.
<Ls_xl?. wazifa scholarship,
stipend, 34. a.
*.«£• wa-gnira et caetera, 18,
34, 97. a.
j ,. warq p«ge or leaf (of n
book or MS.), 1G4. a.
J .. warna else (to be trans-
lated ace. to context),
193. p.
c^o. waqt time, pi. anqdt,
10, 44, 60. a.
rco/i he, she, it, that, the
remote of two persons,
the latter as compared
with the former (pi. as
well as sing.) ; wold that
same, that very.
l&. wahdn there; wohin
just there, 150.
^la hdth hand, 51 ; Inith
lagnd to come into one's
hands, be acquired, 109.
^j\& hdthi (unimanus) ele-
L_5* ^ '
phant, 60.
Ij _£j -+ IN rtciinx o/iflt'?*7tft to
wjff vy*1
assent, 76, (10).
,\ji /tan yes, 10, 198.
.B ^ar every, 68 ; 7/a?- e/r
every one, 27. p.
Ju^s- -to harchand although,
176. p.
a ,!£_& harkdra messenger, 34.
rJ 'SJt> hargiz na never, 176.
P-
Jlfc hazdr thousand; ha;n-
ron or hazdrhd (pi. of to-
tality), thousands, 176.
^ ha*t o Hint
u • i^
yes or no, 1 b2. p.
280
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
halM liglit, 137.
^ ham we ; hamdrd our.
i
v^_^jj> liimmat spirit, pluck,
60. a.
^w«Jb hamrdh companion;
used as postp., in company
with, 44, 157. p.
jjLj**£> hamesha always, 44,
P-
• _\Ai hindil 193; hindustdn
India north of the Ker-
budda, 84.
,_$-JuJfc hindi a form of the
vernacular of Upper India
written in the Nagri
character, 18.
_xi> liunar virtue, skill, ae-
cornplisliments, etc. 27,
84. p.
lxuUJS> liansna to laugh, 102
150 ; hann ridicule, 109.
\»>. haiva wind, air, atmo-
spliere, 137. a.
to> hawwd ogre, 193.
hond to be, exist, etc. ;
hiijie Precative form,
91 ; hole hute gradually,
by degrees, 109 ; hud P.
Part, and P. Abs.
of no account,
p.
^.jj. hech
mean, 27.
haiza cholera ; haiza
karnd to be seized with
cholera, 76, 109. a.
[i yd or, instead of, whereas,
" 193.
j\j ydd remembrance ; ydd-
Tiond to be remembered ;
ydd-rakhnd to remember ;
ydd-dnd to come to recol-
lection, be remembered,
44 ; ydd-parnd to recol-
lect, be reminded of, 150 ;
ydd-farmdna to ask at'te;-,
call for, 187. p.
. jJL> yaqin certain, 157. a.
.2Jk£j yaJcdigar one another,
= ek dusrd, 198. p.
^*j yun thus, 51, 182.
__• ytih he, she, it, this, the
nearer of two persons ;
former as compared with
the latter (pi. as well as
sing.) ; yehi this same,
this very.
£>Uj yahdn here.
281
VOCABULARY No. 2.
OF WORDS CONTAINED IN THE ENGLISH
SENTENCES OP PARTS 1., II., AND IN THE
TRANSLATION EXERCISES OF PART III.
N.B. — (1) See App. C. 1 (2) above lor principle of transliteration.
(2) Exceptional genders only are marked, with reference
chiefly to Rules given in Part I., 3.
A.
Abandon chh orn a alone,
or chhor-jdnd chhir-
dend int. ; chhor-
rakhnd or ratch-
chhornd are often use-
ful ; chkor-bkdffnd
describes itself. See
b!iti<i>id.
abandoned (wicked)
sharir.
abhor nafi-al karnd (se).
ability qdbiliyat, liyd-
qat.
able, to bo saknd, as
second nn-mbiT
compound verb.
able, a Ij. y<7;/7, I,/'!,/.
about to i/ ir'ih Imi /.-/',
ijiti-tti thd ki • or the
idva may be ex
l>iv-sed by the verb
chdhnd in coinbina-
tion with perf. jiart.
nml occasionally tiy
the use of ivdtd witii
gerund.
about, adv. piis, rixpii.t ;
about fifty pachas ek
or qarib fiftc/i'ix.
abroad, to get (of secret)
absent ija
absurd behiida.
abuse mazammatjbura'i.
abuse, v. burd bhald
kahiid, ffdli dend.
accept (formally or
otticially) pazlr aur
qabiilfarmdnd; orqa-
bul farmdnd ali>ne :
(generally) lend or le-
lend.
accompany sdth-dend ;
to accompany me
me fd sdth dend, ho-
lend, sdth ho-dnd
(ke), hamrdh hond
(fee).
accordance with, in ba-
mtljib (ke), muwdjiq
(kl-).
accordingly chundncln.
account or accounts
hisdb; to check ac-
counts hisdb sentud;
accounted for man-
sub ; on account of
waste, li'e, mare (usu-
ally in connection
with an emotion),
acknowledge (fornmlh )
<-'//>"'/' X-'-
a.-ro?s /nir ; a. tho rivor
Hudi pdr.
acfc on, v. lamal k^rnd
(par) ; act towards
(treat) bartdo karnd
(sdth),pesh-dnd(sdth)
active chust o chdldk,
hoshydr.
activity, chdldki, hash-
yuri.
accrue hond, hdsil, or
•paidd hond.
actuated by elevate 1
sentiments ldli-hi»i-
mat.
addicted to, v. marnd
(par).
address ndm o mitkdn,
or simply p-itd; to
his address K.vX>
led.
adjustment taxfiya.
administration insirdin,
int>:dm; admini>t ra-
tion of law, 11
qdniln.
admit (the force of an
argument) tasllut
kin-lit, or fj'fit hond
(k'i) ; admit him tisko
dne-do.
admitted, to be ddkhil
hond.
nasi/uit detui.
282
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
adopt (a son) muta-
against me (of accusa-
prove) gaivdrd karnd;
bannd k.
tion) meri taraf.
(admit) taslim karnd ;
adoi t, cause to taslim
ge 'umr, f.
to make allowance
kardnd.
ged buddhd, sinn-ra-
for lihdz rakhnd.
advance, v. qadam bar-
sida.
Almighty, the qddir-
hand; as the morning
agent kdr-pard6», go-
i-mutlaq, khudue qd-
advanced din charhte
mdshta ; (in gram.)
dir.
charhte.
fd'il ; through the
alone tanhd, akeld.
advance-guard pesh-
agency of ma'rifat
alphabet dlif-be ; to
lashkar.
(ke).
learn the alphabet,
advantage faida, pi.
agree (to take) qabul
("lif be parhnd.
faivaid.
karnd or karlend,
already abhi ; already
advent dmad, tashrif-
'ahd karnd ; to agree
gonejd-chukd.
dwari.
(on a course of action)
although harchand, go,
ad vent ure (ambition)
saldh karnd ; agree
ffoki, agarchi, hdldn-
hausila.
(solemn^) qaul o
ki.
adventures sar-guzasht.
qasam karnd.
altogether(quite) mahz.
adverse mukhdlif; ad-
agreement qaul o qardr.
mutlaq, bilkull, pel
verse wind ulti hawd,
'ahdopaimdn, muwd-
barhkar, adj. ikat-
bdd-i-mukhdlif.
foqat.
thd.
adversity burd'i, bad-
nggression (minor)
always hamesha, har
qismafi, bad-iqbdli,
dastanddzi.
icaqt.
•idbdr.
aid (mutual) mo'dwa-
ambassador elcJii, safir.
advice saldh, mashwara,
nat.
ambitious hausila •
nasihat.
aici, v. madad dend; to
mand, garz-mand.
advisable maslahat
be a great aid bahut
ammunition (shot and
mundsib.
kdm and.
powder, gold bdrul,
advocate of, to be an
air hawd.
sdz o sdnidn-i-jang,
rawd jdnnd, rawdddr
alarming, khaitfiidk,
sdmdn - i - harb o
hond.
khauf kd.
zarb.
affair mo'dmaJa, amr
alas ! afsos.
amnesty darguzar, 'afw
bat.
nlbeit huldnki.
among men ; from
affect to be apne tail
alert hoshydr, tayydr ;
among men ye, min
zdhir karnd.
being on the alert
jumla.
afflicted (with) mttl
p?fh-qadami.
amount, to this is qadr-
told.
alike yaksdn, bardbar.
kd.
affray hangdma.
alive z nda. saidmat,
amuse dil-bahldnd.
Afghan afg&n.
sahih • saidmat, jitd
amusing maza kd,mazdq
aforesaid m<izkur, maz
jt.
kd, lutfkd.
kura bald ; persoi
all sab, sdrd, tdmdm,
ancestors bdp-ddde, bu-
aforesaid ndm-bur
kull ; all the lot sab
zurgdn.
da.
ke sab ; all (our) sub-
anchor, to langar ddlnd
after pichhe, ba'd ; af te
jects jami'-i-ra'di/d.
(to cast anchor).
some days chand ro
allegiance itd'at ; true
ancient qadini, qnd'uni.
ke ba'd ; afterward
allegiance wafdddrto
anecdote hikdi/at.
iske or uske ba'd, o
itd'at ; throw off alle-
angelic Jerishfon kd sd
pichhe ; after tha
giance itd'at se phir
or ferishton jaisd.
ba'd iske ki.
•jihid.
anger gussa.
again phir.
alliance ' ahd o paimdn.
angry gusse, khafd.
against muqdbil (ke).
allow ijdzal dend; (ap- animal jdnicai:
VOCABULARY NO.
283
nnnex milana (lit. make
unite),
anonymous gum-ndm,
/x'-ii/im.
announce and proclaim
I ildn farmdnd, ishte
-hdr dend.
answer jawdb ; to an-
swer jawdb dend ; to
answer (be useful)
pesh -jd n a . ku m - n i kul-
II it.
answering jax>£b-dih t.
anyone fco'i; infl. kiii.
anxiety andesha, tarad-
dud, khadsha.
anxious mutafakkir.
apparently zdhir men,
zdhiran, ma'luin hvti'i
hai ki.
appear nazar and or
parnu, dik.'ui'i dend,
zdhir ho.n'i.
appearance silraf.
appoint ta'liidt karnd,
muqarrar k.
appointed muqarrar.
apportionment of pe-
nalty tajwiz-i-sazd.
approach, n. tashrif-
liwdrt (ceremoni-
ous),
approve manzur karna
qabiU karnd, pazi-
ra karna.
approve of rawddur
//mi'/.
approved manzur.
Arab (horse) 'arab't.
arbitrate panchdyat k.
archer lirandiiz.
argue hujjat lundjiujjat
fcariKi,mub(t/iaxafcar-
nd.
ai-L'iiment bahs, f.
arise nt/i»(i, ttth-jdnt't
(spring from) i>uid<
hand, nikaliui.
army Inxlikur. fnuj (,
enormous army, did-
bddal lashkar ; in
arms hathydr-band.
arrangement bando-
bast, intizum, taj-
n- 1:.
arrange, add karnd to
either of the above;
to be arranged ban-
parn/i.
arrive pahunchnd, d-
jund.
artfann.
irtlul dagdbiiz.
irtifice ch&ldki, fit rat,
hikmat.
artillery top-khdna.
ascend charhnd.
ascend (throne) julus
farmdnd.
ascent charhdo.
ascertain ma'lum karnd
darydft Jr., tahqtq k.
ashamed sharminda; to
be ashamed gairat
men dnd, sharm and
(to).
ask puchhnd • ask after
hdl puchhnd, khair o
'dfiyat puchhnd ; ask
for darkhwdst k.
ass gadhd.
assassin sajfdk.
assembly jalsa, majlis
f.,mahfil f.,jami'at.
association with <"<me-
z>'sh, sohbat, sanghat,
m.
assuredly albatta, haqt-
qatan, wdqa'i.
attack, to hamla karnd,
yorish k.
attacking (party) ham-
la-dicar.
attendance, in hdzir.
attention tawajjoh, f.,
liht'tz.
attract, tojazb karnd.
attractive force qutr
wat-i-jdzilitt.
atrocity
audible, to be fund'!
dend.
aud ience hdzirin-i- ijldx.
a,u\\\ormosannif; (com-
piler) mo1 all if.
authority ikhtiydr, ta-
nad, f. ; in authority
farmdn-pazlr ; under
authority farmdn-
barddr, mdtaht.
uxiliary madadgdr,
sharik-i-imddd.
available matijud.
avert daf karnd.
awake be-ddr ; to be
awake jdgnd.
awaken, jagdnd.
aware, to be jdnnd,
dgdh hand, wdqif
hond.
B.
back pith f., pusht, f.
b&c\a,topushtparrahn<i.
b:id burd, khrdb, (bad
as first member of
compound).
baggnge a&bdb (sing.).
band guroh, dasta.
Baniya baniyd.
banker mahdjan,sarrdf.
bard bhdf.
1 areheaded and bare-
footed sar o pd ba-
rahii'i.
bargain khush-kharid.
bark bhaunknd.
barley juwdr.
bastion burj.
battalion (regiment)
pal tun, f.
battle lard^i.
bazaar bdzdr (a collec-
tion of shops) ;
through the la/.aar
Idzdr hoke.
iieiir rii-hh.
t.ear, v. barddxhi karnd.
284
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
beard dd i-Jit.
beyond par, parle par ;
beasts and birds cha-
(except) siwde.
rand o parand.
binding (of book) jild-
beahpitnd, mdrnd ; beat
bandi.
(a cover) jhdrnd.
binding, adj. ivdjib.
become ho-jdnd, ban-
bird chiryd, f.
jdnd, ho-lend, ban-
birth, pride of khun-
baithnd.
ddnifakJir.
bed palang.
bite kdtnd.
bedding bicTihond, bis-
bJame, to tolimat la-
tar.
gdnd.
befall Tio-parnd.
bless me ! khair to Jiai.
before age, pahle, qabl,
blind andhd ; blind of
qabl islce ki,pe.?h.
one eye kdnd.
before, prep, sdmtme,
blood khun.
dge, ru-ba ru, pahle.
bloodshed khun-rezi.
Begam legam (f . of beg)
blow (wind), to chain'',
a lady of rank(Mah.)
chal-rahnd ; blow up
beggar faqir.
(fort), urdnd.
begin, int. shuni' hand ;
boast, iofakhr samajh-
tr. shuru' Jcarnd.
nd, Idfzani k.
bf ginner nwbtadi, nau-
boat kishti.
dmoz. \ body badan.
beginning and end dgdz
boil, intr. khavlna,
0 anjdm.
phutnd.
behalf of, on ivdste, l*e-, bold baMdur, diler.
on our behalf hamr're bond dastawez, f.
nam se, ov hamdri ta- book Tcitdb, f.
raf se. \ booty ganimat, Jut.
behind picfihe ; behind
born, to be paidd hond ;
the back pith pichhe.
a born soldier mddar-
behoves it chdhi'e
zdd sipdJii.
(ko).
borrowed mange lea.
belief e'tiqdd.
musta'dr.
belly pet.
bosom sina.
below niche.
both donon ; both sides
belt peti.
tarafain (Ar. dual).
benefit fa-Ida, ifdda ;
bough ddl, f.
to promote the bene-
bound chJialdng, f. ;
fit of if Ada Jcarnd.
to be bound by
besides 'aldwa (ke),
(obliged) ; pdband
siwde iske.
Jiond.
besiege mohdsara karnd
boundary sarJir-dd, f.
best sab se achchM,
bows and arrows tlr o
behtar. behtarin.
Teaman.
bet short, f. ; to bet
box sanduq, diliiyd.
shart bdndhnd.
boy larkd.
better behtar.
bravery dildwari,dllert,
between me>i,darmii/dn,
bahdduri.
bich, Mch men.
bread roll.
n-eadth chaurui, (arz.
)reak, intr. tutnd, tiit-
jdnd ; tr. tornd.
Breakfast hdziri.
jreeches nefa (lit. fas-
tening of the
drawers) .
ribery risfnvat, rish-
ivat-siidni.
n-ick int, f.
)ridge pul.
bi-ie&vmtikhtasar karJce,
mukhlasar taurpar.
jring le-dnd, land, pa-
hunchdnd.
sroad chaurd.
broker dalldl.
brought up by, to be
(stopped) Tuk-jdnd.
bucket bdlti.
buffalo (she) bJiains.
building mdkdn, 'imd-
rat.
bnmjctlnd.
bush jhdri.
business kdm, kdr-o-
bdr, pesha, mo'ii-
mala.
but lekin, magar, baJki,
par, 197 ; but stay
magar hdn.
buy mol-lend, lend,
kharidnd, kharul k.
by and by thorl der
men, ba'd chande.
c.
cage p mjra.
calamity shdmat, dj\itt
musibat.
calf bachhrd.
call (summons) luldwd.
call, T. buldnd • call
upon (insist) tdkld
far man a.
calumny boJttdn.
VOCABULARY NO. 2.
235
camel U'it ; slie-camcl
untni.
camp qiydm-gtJi, f.
camping-ground JcM-
magtih, i.
canon law (Islam) shar',
ihari'at.
canvas wall qanrit, f.
capable of (qualified
to\ niujdz, qulil.
capo rax.
capital siirm-'ii/a.
captured ginftdr, md-
khilz.
carcass (of dead ani-
mal), murdajdnwar.
care khabar f., parted
i.,parwarish,khabar-
ddrt, hoshi/dri, ehti-
ydt f.
career, military shuf/l-
i-sipdhgari.
carry off or away le-
jdnd,le-cha1nd; carry
a 1'^ad bojh uthi'mn ;
to be carried on htid
karnd ; carrkd out,
to be ta'mtl hand ; to
be carried out suc-
cessfully huin-ikhli-
turn ko pahunchnu.
cart man gdrtbdn.
case (in law) mttqad-
dama ; (in gram.*
hdlat ; (condition or
circumstances) hdl,
//"'/i'/, ttjnriil SlU'dt;
in every case la-liar-
hdl, ba-har-kaif ;
grievoi'3 case isle-
• ' (lit: complaint
which calls for
redress).
cash iiaqd,naqdrupaya.
ru*k p'tpr'i.
caste zi'il,ji'if, f. ; rules
of caste, jdt -d /i a nn.
cat ii7//, ffurba.
catch, to
rattle ma
cause *f?i(/6 ; cause of
anxiety khadtha.
cause, to annoyance fz«
dend, takltfd.
cautious, to be da en
b<?en dekhnd.
cautiously dhista dhis-
ta, khabarddri se,
e^tiydtan.
cavalry soldier sowar ;
cavalry regiment ri-
sdla.
cease (of famine, etc.)
raf hand ; (leave off)
bdz and.
Central India wasat
hind.
centre maddr.
ceremony takalluf; re-
ligious ceremonies
dharm-rit, f.
certain (indef.), fuldn,
fuldna, koi sheikhs ;
(sure) yaqin; on CIT-
taiu (special) terms
ba-shard" it-i-makh-
tit,
certainly albatta, fil-
haqtqat.
chairman mtr-majlis.
chamber kothrl, ka-
mard.
change tabdil ; change
of mind kisi ki nit/at
badalni.
change, v. int. ba<l<tlin't.
chapter Idfi.
character chdl-dhdl f ,
'ddat ; good charac-
ter nekndmi ; of
loose character att-
bdxh ; character and
actions atwdr o kir-
idr.
charge zimma.
chastisement taduruk,
sazd.
cheap arzdn, sast/i.
clicck (accounts), sent-
cheer, to be of good,
khut'irjam1 rak
cherish parwarish kar-
nd.
cherisher of the poor
garib-parwar.
chest chMti.
chicken bachcha (young
of any animal),
chief sarddr, P. pi. snr-
ddrdn.
childhood backpan.
children bdbu-logjarke-
bdle, larke larkiydn,
'eydl o affdl.
chink darz, f.
chintz c/tliif.
cholera, to be attacked
with haiza karnd.
choose, to ikhtiydr
kanti't.
Christianity mazhab-i-
'ttft.
cliuck (away) phenkn ?,
phenk-ddlnd.
circuit pher, m.
circumstances ahwdl
(sing.),
citizen mahaUa-iciild,
shahr-wdld,
city shahr.
civil and financial mulkt
o malt.
civil and military kii<'<
mnlki, kyd fauji.
claim da'wd.
claim, v. da'wd karnd ;
d'awtddrhond ; claim
superiority to sab-
ifiif-lijiinil.
claims (past) hvquq pi.
of haqq.
chin qattm, f.
rla-s fltiroh, jamd'nt ;
large class jam,iat.
i-kustr.
claw panja.
clemency ri;'i»n(, rahm,
rahm-dili.
climate db o hav
28G
EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
climb cJiarlint't.
cling liptd-rahnd.
cloak lubddd.
close to pus, nazdik,
(se) muttasil ; quite
close to pels ft I.
close, v. band-karttd.
closed, to be band hond.
closely (of dress) kfiiib.
cloth kaprd ; talle-
cloth dastdr-khwdn.
club sontd.
cluck, to kukurdnd.
coast kindra ; to coast
kindre kindre jdnd.
cock murg, murgd.
coincidence ittifdq ; a
happy coincidence
husn-ittifdq.
collect, to jam1' karnd,
ikatthd k.
collected (revenue) ,
wti.sul.
collector (revenue) iah-
silddr, kalektar sahib
colonies, dbddthd, Per.
pi.
coiour rang.
comb (honey) chhattd.
combination ittifdq ;
(conspiracy) sdzish.
come and, tashrifldnd ;
come to and fro and
jdnd.
comfort chain.
command hukm, ir-
shdd.
command, v. farmdnd,
hukn dend, httkm
karnd.
commercial yenture ti-
jdrat.
commission dhartd.
commit, to murtakib
hond, karnd.
committed sarsad.
committee panchdyat,i.
common (customary)
murrawaj.
common sense 'aql, f.
Commons in Parlia- concord muwiifaqat,
ment assembled
ittifdq, ittehdd, ham-
muJchtaran-i-'aicdmm
dill.
hazirin-i-jalsa par-
condition hdl, hdlat ;
liament (lit. repre-
original condition
sentatives of the
asalthdlat ; in a ruin-
Commons, etc.).
ous condition khrab-
commotion jasdd.
khasta, tabdh-hdl.
communication laguu ;
conduct (loyal) khair-
(dealings) dud o
klncdhi.
sit ad).
confederate, adj. mitt-
compact 'and o paimdn,
tafiq hokar.
qaul o qardr.
confess, to iqrdr karnd.
companion sdthi, ham-
confidence bharosd,
rdh.
e'timdd, e'tibdr, khu-
companionship sdth,
tir-jamli.
sanghat, sohbat.
confined, miiqaii/ad.
company mahfil f ., maj-
confirm, totftd karnd,
lis f . ; in company
la-Mi farmdnd,qd'iiii
with sdth.
farmdnd.
company, in milkar,
confirmation taid.
p.c.p. of milnd.
confounded (term of
comparison muqdbala ;
abuse) kambakJd.
what comparison is
confront muqdbala kar-
there between . . . ?
nd.
kahdn. . . kaMn(\&l) .
confusion shorish.
complain shikdyat k.,
connected with muta-
shdki or mutashakki
'alliq (se), mild hud
hond.
(se) ; to be con-
complaint ndlish (logal)
nected with rnild-
cause a complaint
rahnd (se).
to be laid against
conquer fatfh karnd,
ndlinh karwd-dend
jtfnd.
(par); (general )far-
conqueror fatehmand,
ydd, f., shikdyat.
ald-i-zafar.
comply with ta'mil
conquest, fateh f., pi.
karnd.
futuJint, fatek-
compound hdtd (for
mand'i.
ehdta).
consequence (result)
comprehpnd qiyds kar-
iiiifija, anjdm-kur ;
nd, samajh-lend.
(import) parwd, init-
concealed poahlda,
zdi/aqa.
chhipd hud.
considerable number
concentration (of
bahut se.
troops) favj-kaslii,
consideration lihdz.
farahami-fiii'j.
muldhaza, gaur; full
concerned, with or in
consideration i/'iu -
tihdmil-ln'.L
i-kdmil ; highest
concluded (treaty)
consideration,
mun'aqid.
darja-i-'dlijdh o jaldl
VOCABULARY XO. 2.
287
conscientiousness run-
tl, rdnt-diii.
constantly iiui/
consultation iiinxhdu'ii-
rat, mas/nctirat.
consume sarfmen ldn-i.
contemplate, to tawaj-
joh farmdnd (par),
muldhaza k.
content, to bo iktifd
kurnd (}>ar).
contented rdzi.
contention takrdr f.,
F. II. (rare),
contentment qand'at.
contents mazmun.
contest (military ) Jang.
f.
continually mutawatir
continue hud karnd.
< i< Sim rah nd.
contrary to khitaf;
contrary to law khi-
h'tf-qdnun, nd-jfftz.
contrast between imti-
ydz,farq.
contrived, to be tajwiz
hand.
control, v. zabt karnd ;
to control the tongue
zabdn sambhd/nd •,
under control kahe
men.
converse, to bdten kar-
l>at-chlt or guft-
<ju karnd.
conviction (belief),
'aqida ; to impose
conviction on k/ui'<ih
ma khivdh taslim ka-
rdnd.
convince qd*il ma'qul
karnd.
convinced, to be yaqin
hand.
coolly baithe-bithd^e.
coolness khunttki.
copy naql, f. ; exact
copy naql muidbiq
an.
dort ; (for stran-
utt ki dort.
corn dd»a, atu!j,galla.
corpse Idsh, I'.
correction tahztb, isldh
f., larmim.
correspondence khatt-
kifdbat.
cossack inroads qnz-
na fauj-kasht.
cost qhnat.
costly besh-qtmat, be-
ba'/d.
cotton rd'f; (cotton-
plant) kapds, f . ;
cotton cloth suti
kaprd ; cot: on thread
dhdgd ; flock of cot-
ton ru*i kd gal.
council kaunsil ; in
council ba-ijldx-t-
kaunsil (lit. in ses-
sion of council) ;
members of council
memberdn-i-kaunsil.
councillor mushir.
countenance munh,
chehra.
country mulk, watan.
country-bred desi.
countryman dehdti ;
fellow - countryman
ham-watan, mulk-
ivdld.
couple do,jord.
courage shajd'at.
court (law) mahkama
kachahii ; (royal)
darbdr ; court-yard
sahn ; open court
bdr-i-'dmm, khule
kachahri.
courted, to be raftq
ho-jdnd (lit. to be-
come sought as a
friend).
cow g£e.
coward, adj. buzdil.
cow-killing gd^e-kitshi.
crawl, to rengnd.
create, to paidd k.
created, to be paidd h.
credit (praise), w&h-
wdh.
creep on chald" and.
cricket- ground gend
khelne kd maiddn.
crimrjurm (p].jurd"im).
ma'. tii/at.
criminal mujrim.
critical (of a crisis)
nuzuk.
cross par hond.
crossing 'ub4r, ghat.
cross words ukhri ukhri
bdten.
crow, to bang dend ;
(met.) azdn dend.
crowd guroh, bhlr, f.
cix»wn (power of) sal-
tanat.
cruel, be-rahm, sang-
dil, sakht-gtr.
cultivator kdshtkdr.
cultivation kdshtkr.,-1,
khett, khetiydn.
cure 'eldj ; to perform
a cure 'eldj karnd.
curiosity (rarity) tohfa.
current^'aH, miirairii-nj.
custom dastdr, riwoj.
cut kdtnd.
D.
dacoity ddkd.
daily roz-roz, roz-ro:
kd, de din kd, roz-
marra.
damage (hurt) zarar.
danger khatra ; havini;
a sense of danger
khatra-shinds.
dare yard hond (ko).
dashed in piect
be chiknd chvr hond.
date ttirikh.
duto-palin, or date
khajur.
288
EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI.
day din, roz; to-day
«/, ajM ; days of the
Mutiny ayydm-'-
gadr ; for days mud-
dat tak, muddaton ;
at daybreak fajr
hole; daylight din M
roshni • next day
agle din, ; some day
or other ek na ek din.
dead murda, mud.
deal, iopeshdnd (sdth).
dealings sar-o-kdr ;
wholesale dealings
thok-faroshi ; retail
dealings khurda-fa-
roshi.
dear mahngd • (risen in
price) girdn; pydrd,
'astz ; to hold dear
'aziz rakhnd.
d-ath maut f., ajal f. ;
put to death mdr-
ddlnd,qatl-karnd; to
suffer death apnijdn
dendt
debauchery 'ayydshi.
debtor qarzddr.
deceased mutawajfd.
deceit fareb.
deceive, to fareb dead,
wargaldnnd, ddm-i-
fareb men land.
decide, to (in law) fai-
sala karnd.
decided, to be faisala
hond.
decision faisala.
declaration mahzar, iz-
hdr.
declare bay an karnd,
zdhir k., 'elan far-
stand ; in detail
tashrih k.
decree, iofatwd dend.
deemed, to be muta-
sawwar hond.
deep f/arhd.
deer hiran.
defeat, v. shifcast dend.
defeated, to be shifcast
khdndjhdrnd, mayhlb
hond.
defendant mttdda'd-
alaihi.
defender qtVa-ivdld;
Defender of the
Faith zaMru-l-maz-
hab.
degree darja ; by de-
grees "hole hote.
delay tawaqqi'f, der, f.
deri.
deliberately dhista
dhista.
delight khusM ; in de-
light khush liokar,
khusM ki hdlat men.
demand taldb karnd,
muqfazd hond.
denied, to be inkdr
hond.
deny, to inkdr karnd.
depart chal-dend, chald
jdnd.
department mahkama.
serishta.
departure rawdnagi ;
date of departure
tarikh-i-ratvdnagi.
depend on munhasir
hond (men).
dependencies muzdfdt.
muta'alliqdt.
depression dabdo.
derived from paid a.
descend, to utarnd •
cause to descend
utdrnd; ndzil Lar-
and.
descended from auldd
men hond.
descent utdr.
describe bai/dn karnd.
batdnd.
description laydn, kai-
fiyat.
deserve Id'iq hond.
deserving sazdwdr.
I'i'tq, qdbil-i-ta'rtf i
deserving of death
u-'iiili(-!-q<'itt ; deser-
ving of punishment
sazd ke la iq.
desire manshd, itftfl-
yo.q, drzu f., Inlacli.
desire, v. cMhnd, khicd-
hdn hond.
despair nd-ummedi. md-
•yu&i, be-dili ; in de-
spair majbur hokar.
m d fius hokar, be-dil
hokar ; blank de-
spair sakht -may (mi.
despair of, to lifdli
akotid, mdyus rahnd.
desert sahrd, baydbdn,
jangal-i-ictrinia.
destroy ni.it o nn'bud
karnd, gdrat karnd.
destroyed, to be khvk
ho-jdnd, nist o ndbild
hond.
detached judd, alag.
detached, to be nikal-
nd, alag ho-jdnd, judd
hond.
detachment (mil.) d-ts-
ta.
detail, in tafstl se, taf-
silwdr.
detected, to be khul-
parnd.
determined mustaqill-
inizdj (possessed of
force of character),
zabarJast (high
handed).
devoted, tofidd (par).
devoted, to be (to)
marnd (par).
devotions (Islam) s!j-
da.
devour, to chat kar
jdnd, kh<'t-jd)id.
diamond liird.
diary rozndmcha.
die, to »iarnd,fand ho-
Jdii-.i, q<iz<< karnd, etc.
diet kh'tnd ^
VOCABULARY NO. 2.
289
different mukhtalif, i
jud'ii/dna, mutafar- \
rtq.
ditlicult mushkil, dush-
ir,'ir.
ditliculty mushkil, f.
dignity manziiut.
diminutive past-qadd.
dinner khdiid.
direct ehtimdm k. ; di-
reet route rdh-i-
7-<'.s/.
direction taraf, f. ; di-
rection of operations
(mil.) kdr-farmai.
director nttzim.
dirty, to najiskar-dend.
disciplined qaivd'id-
ddn, ta'lim-ydfta.
disclaim inkdr karnd.
discontented ndrdz, ha-
rts o mufsid.
discover, to durydft
karnd, taldxh k.
-e marz, bimdri.
disgrace bad-ndmi.
disgraceful bad-ndm.
i-;e oneself, to
apne ta"in bhes men
bandnd, bhes badal-
nd.
disguised bhes men
hand.
disgust nafrat.
i li-- usted, to be ndga-
xiimnfhnd.
disgusting nd-gawdr.
disheartened be-dil.
dishonesty bad-diyd-
natl.
dislodge, to be-dakhl
kaniii.
dismayed, to be ghab-
rdnd, <ili<iln'<i-j<'/nii.
dismiss rukhsat karnd,
mauqilf k.
dismissed, to be mau-
ij/if hond.
dismount, to zln jmr xt-
utaritii.
disobedience 'udul-huk- 1 door kiwdr, dar. dar-
mt, nd-farmdni.
disorder (plague) wa-
doubtless be-shakk.
bdl ; (gov.) bad-naz-
drain badar-rau, f.
mt.
dress libds.
displeased ndrdz, nd-
drift matlab.
khfoh.
drink pind ; drink up
disposed to md\l.
pi-jdnd.
disposition mizdj, khas-
drink shardb, f.
lat.
drinking shardb pind,
dissatisfied nd-rdz, nd-
mai-nosht.
khush, nd-razdmand,
drive in gdrnd.
kashida-khdtir.
due bdqt (lit. remain-
distance dur f., duri,
ing to be paid) .
fdsala.
dues mahsul, vjrat.
distinct mukhtalif.
dunghill ktlre kd anbdr.
distinction imtiydz.
distracted muztarr,
pareshdn,pirdganda,
.
be-tdb, be-c/tain, be-
each har ek, har ko*t;
qardr.
each other ek dusrd.
distribution of lands
eager for the fray
khet-bdnt m. ; distri-
khwdhdn-i- jang, jang-
bution (proportion)
J4.
tarttb.
ear kdn.
district zila', suba,
early munh andhere, sa-
]>1. silbajdt.
vere, bari fajr- so
ditch khandaq, f.
early (in the day)
divide, to bdntnd, bunt-
line din rahe se ; (of
lend, taqsim k., hixse
time) agld.
k.
earn, to kamdnd.
divided munqasim.
earnest ba-dil ojdn se.
division taqsim ; (of
ease dsdni, drum,
tribes) got f., got-
dsd^ish.
bandt.
easily ba-khubi, dsdni se.
do karnd ; doing good
eastern mashriq ; east-
fa' ida-rasdni ; to
ern countries bildd-
have done with fd-
i-mashriq.
rig hond.
easy dsdn, sahl ; how-
doctor hakim.
ever easy kaisd hi
document (written)
ds.ln, etc.
tahrir, qirtds (from
eat, to khdnd, khd-lcnd ;
tlie Greek).
eat up khd-j'iiid.
dodge (iron.) hikmut.
on (of teeth)
ilolV, to iittlr-phenknd.
khatld.
dog kuttd.
dolefully dard ohatrat
education tarbtyat, tu'-
Itm, 'ilmiyat.
ke siif/i.
effect asr pi.
dominion riydsat, mam-
nut (in pi. natd\j ;
lakat.
(gist) nidzmun.
19
290
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
effective kdrgar, kdri.
effusion of blood khiin-
rezi.
egg andd; to lay eggs
ande dend.
eight dfh.
eighth dthwdn.
elder bard.
elephant hulM.
else, if not, warna, na-
htn to.
embezzle, to khiydnat
k.
emeute dangd-fasdd,
fasdd, sarkashi, bal-
wd.
empire amalddri, sal-
tanat.
employ rakhnd (of a
servant) ; iste'mdl
karnd.
employe muldzim.
employed in office 'oh-
da par mdmur.
employment naukari,
muluzimat.
encounter (meet) mil-
no, ; (resistance) ta-
qdbuL
encroachment
qadamt.
end anjum, intehd, ikh-
titdm ; ia the end
anjum ko ; from be-
ginning to end awical
se dkhir talc.
ended, to b« khatm
h< inn.
endurance mehnaf, sd-
bil-qadamt.
endure sahnd.
enemy dushman.
engage in masrufhond ;
(in battle) muqdbala
karnd.
English angrez ; E.
(language) angrezi.
enjoy, tofd'ida uffidnd;
to enjoy good health
tandurust rahnd.
enjoyment (riotous)
'ayydshi.
enlightened purnur.
enmity 'addicaf.
ensue, to paidd hond.
entangled, to be phans-
nd, phans-rahnd.
enter qadam rakhnd
(men), ddkMl hond,
darj karnd ; enter on
(a career) ikhtiydrk.
enterprise mohimm, f.
enthusiasm sargarmi.
enthusiastic sargarm.
entice bahkdnd, targ'tl
dend.
entreat multamis h.,
iltimds k.
entrust, to supurd kar-
nd.
equity 'addlat.
era waqt.
escape, to bachnd.
escort, to pahunchdnd.
essentials in asal men.
establish, to sdbit kar-
nd.
eunuch khwaja-saru.
Europeans ahl-i-fa-
rang,farangi.
evasive makkdr.
evening sham, f.
everyone har ekt sab
ko'i.
every day roz-ba-roz,
roz-roz, de din.
every six months har
chhate mahlne men.
exact thik ; exact state
of case haqiqat-hdl.
examination imtehun.
example namuna, nazir
pi. nazuir.
excellence khubi, 'urn-
day t.
excellent (laudable)
hamtda.
-ive ba-darja-i-
r/''yat.
excite ubhdrnd.
excuse 'uzr, ma'zarat.
excuse oneself, to 'uzr
karnd.
excused mo' (if.
exemplar peslmihdd.
exempt, to be mo'df
rahnd.
exhibition numu^ish.
expectation intizdr,
chashm-dusht.
expecting muntazir,
mutarassid.
expense kharch, sarf.
experience tajriba, t,ij-
riba-kori. (In the
sense of fefl the verb
may generally be
translated by hon.-'..
with ko to mark the
person affected.)
expert yaktde rozgdr.
explain tashrih karnd,
bay an k.
explanai ion kaifiyat •
for explanation kai-
fiyat likhne ke l?e.
expose kholnd • expose
the head *;> nikdlnd.
exposed, to be khulnd.
extended, to be muta-
'alliq hond.
extensive bard, I trd
bard, icasi'.
extent, to some kisi
qadr.
extraordinary 'ajib, 'ajb
kd.
extremely bahut hi, tie-
haj/at. shiddat se.
eye dnkh, f. ; eve < f
needle nuke kd miuih.
F.
face mvnh, chehra.
facility suhi"dii/<it.
i'act (imr, pi. umur.
factor kothl-
VOCAWI.AKY NO. Lf.
291
faetury lio'ht.
fair meld, adj. mitnaif.
Ifse lurid mi hi it.
t'aitlil'ul n/nnnk-khwdr,
ii'fifi'iildr, in/i/nddr.
full girnd, ///V-,
parjtii.
fall into, to (of a river)
Jii-milnd.
false jhiitlii'i.
familiarity munh-lagd-
nti.
family, kunba,kh
i/fitir; the whole
family kunbe kd kun-
ba.
famine qeht-sdli, qeht.
famished kdl kd mdrd.
far, far oil' tl/'ir, uoun
and adj.; not far
thori d&r, d&r naJtin •
not very far chain/ 'hi
tlt'tr nii/iiii.
f.ishioii larah f., tar't-
qa, taur, duxf i'/,-.
fast fez, tez-rafti'ir.
last en, to liit/'iiiti.
fate qismat, taqdir ;
sad fate ~>iz 'b.
father b </>, •iriiiiil.
fatigue thakdn f., man-
dagi.
fault qusur pi.
i'lifxir pi. f<nj'i.i!r.
kkatd.
favour, to td'!d /.
favourable muneisib.
fear, fright dar, kJniiif.
feast iln'u-at.
features (of ccv.duft)
id* pi. Of It'll Z .
feed /Jii/<hi/i • iiave fed
khilwdnd.
feel sure i/<irjt>t jdnnd,
klu'ili jilii'iil ; to be
felt </// men la
!':•!•] 11 in-* of kinJiv-d
liif'idiiri'ina fin
1 Mow .V/H//.7/V ; \oll fel-
low ! «/v
xlulklix; you fello\\.> fit /'«'/7, ijf'iliil.
I it ml off: fellow coun-
fit, v. lar/nd ; adj. muna.
trymen ham-watan.
Sib ; to SfC fit to ...
fomalo infanticide
mundsib santtjhnd ki.
rasm-i-dukhtar-kuxhi.
fix laiji'i IK'I, i/i'i'mi k.
ferry >//i>if, utnr.
fix (quandiiry) pfch.
fertility sar-l'i'z'i.
fixed qaim ; fixed rules
feudal system ./''//'''
qawd'id-i-mo' ait/an.
kit id mA t lene dene ku
flutter khUshdmad k.
tarlqa.
tlesh go.iht.
fever bukhur.
float, bahnd, bah-jdnd.
few chand, ku"i ko'i,
flock re war f . ; (of
kuchh kuchh, kamtar.
cotton) fff'tl.
field maiddn, khet ; to
fly «r»« ; (flee) Ih't^na.
be master of the
follow pichhe jdnd ;
field maiddn Mth
(obey) mdmid.
ruhnd ; of battle
folly jahdlat, be-tott-
maiddn - i • kdrzur,
q,1fl.
ma iddn-i-jang.
fond of shauq hond (kd).
fifteen pandrah ; fifteen
food (diet) yizd.
hundred derh hazdr
fool ahmaq.
or pandrah sau.
foot pdnon (and by
fifty pachas.
elision of either
fifty-seven, sattdwan.
nasal pdnw or pd*on),
light lann'i ; fight one's
pair, pd, qadam
way larnd bhirnd.
(pace) ; to go on
filth (dung) bith f.
foot pd"on pa on chal-
fill bharnd, bhar-dend.
nd, paidal chain ti.
find pdnd \ find out
foot-path pagdandi.
darydft karnd.
for ki/i'tnki, kis l?e ki,
fine jarim&na ; fine
etc.
fellow (iron.) haz-
forbid man' karni.
rat.
forbidden hardm.
finger vngll.
force (of men) jnmt'at.
linish kar-chuknd, ta-
f<nij ; (strength) zor ;
mdm karnd, khatm
violent force jalr o
karnd \ finish a job
eiyt'«/iiti.
(in sense of killing)
force, to jalr karnd.
kum ta md in k.
forced majbur.
fire ay f., dtish ; to
fordable pdi/db.
catch fire tig-lag nl
fore fat hers, lniji-<:
(men) \ to burnjalnd.
f\n\'<tjanif>it.
firmness istehkinn.
forged j'''/i.
first, at the very pahle
bit Hind, bht'd-
pahal men.
11 r.- 1 jinfilii, ait'iritl ; at
forgetful //<</?/.
liivt pahle, ibfidd-
foruvtfiiliu^s, .'"ijl'i/,
m en.
fnrnmiisJi-
lir-t-rate ainnil darj i
formal (serious •
/•<;.
19*
292
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
fort qil'a.
fortitude istiqlal.
fortnight do haft a.
Fortune zamdna, iqbdl.
forty chalis.
foul makruh.
found, to be Mth ana,
hdth lagnd.
foundation bunydd f.,
bind.
four char; four times
as much chauguna.
fourth chauthd ; (part)
chautha hissa, cha-
hdrum.
fowl mvrg, murgd
(male), murc/i (fe-
male),
fowl - house darba,
murgi-khdna.
fox lomri.
framing of laws taj-
wlz-i-qdnun.
frequent (continual)
mutawdtir.
fresh tdza, tdza-dam.
friend dost, bh'Si,
rafiq, 'aziz ; friends
ahbdb (pi. of habib).
fright khauf, sahm.
frightened, to be darnd
(M), khauf khdnd.
front, in age.
frontier sarhadd f.
frozen jamd hud.
fulfil, to purd karnd,
wafd karnd.
full, purd, kull, bhard
hit 'L
furniture asbdb.
furtively chart se.
future difanda, (gram/
mustaqbil.
G.
gallant Lnhudur.
gallantry bahdduri, jut
fishdtii.
gambling q-mdr-bdzi.
game, bdzt, shikar.
arden, bug.
asp for breath, to dam
ndk men ana.
rate phdtak.
raze dehhnd, taknu ;
gazing dekhte ke
dekhte.
generally aksar, 'umu-
man, bil-'umum.
gently dhistagi se.
gesture ishdra.
et pdnd, hdsil karnd,
milnd, int. ; get off
utarnd, utar-parnd ;
get up uthnd.
haut ghat.
>ive, to dend, de-dend ;
cause to give diland ;
give up chhornd,
chhor dend, hawdla
karnd ; (an inten-
tion) faskh karnd.
girl larki.
lory, for barde nang o
num.
glory in apnd fakhr
jdnnd.
gojdnd, ta&hrif lejdnd,
chalnd ; to have to
go jdnd parnd ; go
away chald jdnd ; go
back phir jdnd, wd-
pas chalnd ; go about
your business chaltd
phirtd nazar and.
goat (she) bakri.
God khudd ; by God !
khudd kl qaiam ;
God knows khudd
June, khudd 'allm
hai ; for God's sake
khudd ke waste ;
praised be God
subhdn-alldh.
gold mohur ashrafl.
good achchhd, 'umda
nek, durunt, nek-
bakht, nek - mizdj ;
good got eminent
husn - intizdm ; good
fortune iqbil.
overnment sa-rJcdr f.
riydsat, hvfan-rdnt,
'amalddri, adj. sar-
kdri.
grace fazl, taufiq.
graceless be-adab.
grade darjd.
gradually ba - tadrlj,
hote hote, rafta rajta.
grain ddna, galla.
grammar sarf-nahio f.
granary aalla-khdna.
grand 'dli-shdn.
grandson potd.
grant qabtl or manzur
k.
grant 'endyat karnd ;
granted that •»>'"< nd
ki, sahi (at the end
of sentence).
gra-p^a£ar»«.
grass ffhds f .
gratitude shttkr-guzn-i.
graze, to charnd ; make
graze chard nd.
grease the palm, to
(i.e. bribe) munh
mithd karnd (lit. to
sweeten the mouth) .
great bard ; great man
amir-kabir.
grief qalaq, ranj, has-
rat, gam.
ground za/iiin f.
grow barhnd, hotd
paidd hond ; grow
up bard hond,jau;dn
hond.
guard, on one's kha-
barddr, chaiikas.
guide rahnumd, rah-
d.ir.
gulf khalij.
gun banduq f., top (c-:ui-
non) f . ; (heavy gun)
zarb-top f.
VOCABULARY NO. 2.
n.
habit 'ddat.
habits (of body or
mind) wax' i. ; (of
life) tarz-i-zindagt.
' habitation of war '
ili'iru 'l-harb.
hair bdl.
liair to stand on end
rongte khare hone.
hair- splitting, mii-shi-
ijdfi.
lialf ddhd.
lialf kill, to ddh mud
karnd.
half-way ddhi dur.
half-yearly shashmdhl.
liainlet kherd.
liand hdth ; to take into
one's own hands
apne ehtimdm men
lend.
handcuff, to mushken
bdndhnd.
handful muthi.
hang clown, tr. lat-
kdnd.
hang it ! bald se.
happen hond, icuqu'
men and ; as it hap-
pened ittifdqan.
hard (difficult) mush-
kil, ilux/np'ir ; (ma-
terial) sakht; (wind)
/< > ; to do hard
work tnkUf utln'ind,
mehnat karnd.
hardship sakhtt.
Hardwar, hardwdr
(place where t he
(ianges enters the
plains).
hare khargosh.
harm nabdh'it.
liurvest (s]iring) raid' ;
(autumn) kharif;
harvest to be got in
lira pnr hond (lit.
the crossing of the
raft),
hatch, to bachche nikal-
wdnd (spoken of
breeder),
have, use subst. verb
with postp. pds or
affix ko for the po<-
sessor ; occasionally
rakhnd may be used,
head sir II tar P.;
(chief) ra'is, sarddr,
peshwd ; head over
heels aundhd.
health tandurusti, tdfi-
yat ; state of health
mizdj, labi'at.
he.ir, to sunnd, nun.
lend,sun-pdnd; hear-
ing of istimd1.
heard, to be kdn parnd,
sund'i dend.
heart dil ; out of heart
be-dil, dzurda • dil ;
heart's content,
Mtiisht M hdlat.
hearty dill.
heat garmi, dhup f.,
taish, tezt.
heir wdris.
held, about to be dar-
pesh.
hell dozakh.
help sahdrd, madad f.,
madad-gdri, imddd.
help, to madad dend or
karnd ; help oneself
apnd kdm nikdl-lend.
helpless nd-kdr. maj-
b-Ar, be-ikhtlydr.
here yahdn, yahtn, i-i
jagah (men) ; here
and there jd-ba-jd.
hi.;h 'did, dnchd, bu-
land.
higher class 'did darja.
liill puhdr \ 'on the
hills ' pahdr par.
Hindooism hindii-miif.
hindrance ta'arru:
hint tmd, isMra.
hold, rakhnd, taxaw-
tour k ; to be held
mutasawwar hond,
jdrt hond ; hold out,
to (in opposition)
ztdd kfe jdnd, to
hold oneself bound
apnd zimma Idzim
jannd.
home, at ghar par ; to
go home, ghar jnn i.
honest diydnatddr.
iioney shahd.
honour 'izzat, hurmat.
hope, ummed f.
hope, to vmmed rakhn-'i.
horde qaum f.
horrible khauf - nak,
bald kd, gazab kd.
horror (aversion) dili
nafr at.
horse (/hard.
hot garm ; the hot
weather garmi kd
mausim, garmiydn
pi.
h iund, thikdri kuttd.
\\o\n ghantd.
house (general) ghar •
(better class) muki'in,
kothl, hurcll.
housekeeping khdna-
dnrl.
however, ba-har Ml,
phir bht, to bht.
human being ddml,
diiamzdd, insdn.
humsmity marJ-ddtnl-
yat, instinti/at.
humble frame of mind
'itjizi ki hdlat.
humility inkisdr.
hundreil, suu ; hun-
dreds sa'kron, sadhd.
hunger Ihuk f., pur-
xinagl ; sore hunger
zor kt bhnk.
huiiiiry, to be bhuk
lajnd,lhukhd hond.
204
IN HINDUSTANI.
hunt, to shikar karnd.
hurry jaldi ; in a hurry
jald.
hurry, to jaldi karnd.
hurt, to be chot lagnd.
husband khdwind.
s'iauhar.
iced water barf kd
pant.
idea lahar f., khaydl,
irdda,fkr ni. & f.
idiom mohdwara.
idiomatic bd-mohdwara.
idiot ahmaq.
idle be-kdr, sust.
idle kdhil, be-kdr ; idle-
ness kahili.
ignorant jdhil, ndddn,
be-ivuquf.
ill It mar, 'altl; to be
ill.// burd Tear nit.
ill-luck bad-qismati,
bad-iqbdli.
ill-treat bura'i karnd
opp. to neki k.
ill-use sitdnd.
illegal, nd-jaiz.
illiterate nd-khwdnda.
illustration (verbal)
tamsil.
imaginary Jchayali.
iniiuin?, to tasawwur
karnd, khaydl k.
imitation of, in dekhd-
dek''L
immediately ba-mujar-
rad,fauran,filfaur.
impartial baya>r taraf-
ddri ke.
impeding, mu:dhim.
impertinent nd-ham-
!'•>//•, tfustdkh.
implicitly bn-chtin o
i-hird (lit. without
when and why).
implore, to multaji
hand.
impossible nd-mumkin,
muhdl, nahin ho-
saknd.
inasmuch as, az bas ki.
inaudible, to be sunui
na dend.
incompatible nd ham-
sdz.
inconceirable be-qiyds,
khil'if-qiyds.
increase, to, int. barh-
nd, tr. barhdnd.
independent dzdd; in-
dependent action,
dzuddna kar-rawui.
India hintlustdn, hind.
indiscreet be-tamiz.
indiscriminately, be-
tashkhis-i-ashkTids.
indi?pt-nsable Id-budd.
indisposed 'alii.
indisposition 'aldlat.
indolence kahili.
indulge in to excess
nehdyat be-buk hond
(men) .
indulgence in strong li-
quors sharub-khwdrl,
mai-noshi.
Indus sindh.
industrious jafd-kash,
mclinati.
inexpedient ma^lahat
nahin.
infantry paidal ; foot-
soldier piydda.
inferior Team • ratbd,
a ind.
inlernal deity putdl-
l-'t deotd.
inflame, to ishte'dl
dend.
inflict dend (of punish-
ment).
influence dakhl, ro'b.
influential rn'ti-ilr'/r.
inform dijdh kiirna • to
be informed
hond • to gain infor-
mation who a person
really is asaJi haql-
qat dirydft kar '/><>.
information ittiU'i' £.,
khabar f.
informer mukhabbir.
ingrate kijfir-ni'amat.
\ inhabit rahnci, basnd,
bud o bd&h k.
inhabitant bdskinda,
pi. bdshindagdn,
rahne-wdld.
inheritance tarkd ; by
inheritance tarke
iii en.
inquiry bdz-purs f. ;
(in sickness) 'eyd-
dat.
inside andar, bhitar.
insinuate oneself dakhl
pdnd.
inspect mo'dyana k.
inspection nig rant.
instability nd-pdedCn I.
instance misdl f.
instead, adv. yd.
instead of, post. 'ewaz.
instigate, to tarylh
dend.
institutions rah o
f., rasm o rin'dj.
instruction ta'llm ; in-
structions Uddifit,
hukm, kahd.
insult tauhin.
insurrection sar-k ix/i! ;
(minor) bahrd.
integrity diy<'.nat.
intelligent zehin, 'aq}-
mand, te:-ftlm.
intent m»i-<'nl f., n!i/'if.
intention qasd, irt'nl<i ;
to give up intention
faskh karn/'i.
intercourse dmad o
raft f. ; want, of
intercourse
VOCABULARY NO. 'J
295
interest S(i't O sifi'u'ixh ;
in your interest turn-
hdrehaqq men.
interesting ililcha.tp,
uni~a kit, mazdq kd.
interfere, to dasta>uluzt
karnd, ta'arruz k.
interference dastan-
ddtt.
intermarry, to dpai
men shddt bydh
karnd.
internal andarunt ; in-
ternal tranquillity
amn o chain.
intoxicated shardb ke
nanhd men.
ratxigoB fitrat, sdzish.
intriguer mufsid.
intuition tafnrrus, fira-
sat.
imade, to charhdi
ka'-n i.
invasion charhd"o.
invent tjdd karnd ; to
be invented ijdd
hand.
inveigled, to be dhokd
khdnd.
invite to a feast ziyd-
fat karnd.
iron Mid.
irregularity (of con-
duct), irregular
courses be-lagdmi.
island _/a.:7r«.
isolated judajdna, judd
. to (order) sddir
k., int., nik'i/ni'i • to
l)i- issued nrijl: hond.
raqam f.
J.
J:ir ,'/':'
jeweller jitit/iurt.
v\s juicdhir.
join, to jornd, mildnd •
join in shdmil hond,
xharlk hond.
journey safar.
judgment fahm o firu-
sat, tamiz ; day of
judgment qiydmat.
junction, to form with
mil-jitnd.
justice insdf.
just like bi'ainihi.
just now abhi to. The
idiom of 'just* in
such phrases as
' just wait/ etc. may
generally be trans-
lated by zarra to.
K.
keep rakhnd ; keep
watch dekhtd rahnd ;
to be kept up hud
karnd.
key kunji, chdbt, t<.
kill, to mdrnd, m/tr-
ddlnd, haldk k., qatl
k. ; to be killed (in
battle) kdm dnd, khet
rahnd, mdrdjdnd.
kind qi'sm f., rang,
tar ah f.
kindled, to be bharak-
rahnd.
kindness suluk, mehr-
b<"tiii.
king bddshdh.
kiss, to bosa dend.
knock at (door) dastak
dend.
know, to kisi ko kha-
bar hond, or 'tint
hona, or ma'lilin hond,
j'iiini'i. pahchdiin !.
knowingly, jdn-bujh-
tor.
known ma'liim ; made
known i
L.
labour mi-hinit.
ladder slrhi.
lady blli.
lamp chirdy ; (collec-
tively) batli ckirdg.
land samin f.
landholder zaminddr.
lands an'izi.
language zabdn f., bolt.
lasli out, to ilti/at/i
chaldnd.
last, at dkhir, dkhir
kdr; last year par-
sal.
late, to be der karnd •
BO late in the day
itne din charhe ; so
late at night itni rdt
gae.
laud, to fa'Hf k.
laugh, to hansnd • to
get oneself laughed
at apni hanst kardnd.
laughing, laughter
hansi ; laughing, adj.
hanst kd.
law qdni'tn, pi. qaicd-
ntn ; laws and regu-
lations d'tn o qdnun.
lazy suit.
iead away (detvivi-)
bahkdnd,bahkd-de»d •
taking the lead, pesh-
rawi.
leader sarguroh, sar-
tdir ; licnditary
lea ler ?i'!]>i>f!-r,t'!.t.
lea lnii,r-rein bdg-dort.
leap, to kuihi'i.
I'-ani, xikhtid, />ii
leave ruk/isat, ijdzat.
chhuthi ; take leave
ruk/ix'if honi< oi
give leave (di-siuis?
in ititervit \
rukhs't! kin-ii'i.
296
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
leave, to (start) chhut-
nd ; trans, chhornd,
chhor-dend ; leave off
buz and, chhornd.
leave off following
pind chhornd.
left bdqi; to be left
rah-jdnd, parnd; to
be left on the field
khet rahnd.
length tul, lambai.
lengthen barhdnd.
leopard, chitd.
lest aisd na ho lei, lei
mabddd.
letter khatt, chitthi,
ruq'a, ndma.
library kutub-khdna
(Ar. pi. of kiidb).
lie parnd.
life jdn f., zindagi ;
whole life 'umr bhar \
to pass life zist karna,
basar auqdt karnd.
lift uthdnd ; to lift off
the feet le-urnd.
light roshni, nur.
light halkd, khafif,
narm.
lightning, bijli.
like, alike
bardbar • prep, misl ;
have a liking for shauq
hond (kd), chdhnd.
limb 'azw, pi. a'zd,
hath-paon.
limit thikdnd, hadd f . ;
to be limited to
khaim hond (men).
lion sher.
listen sunnd.
literal lugawi.
little chhotii, thord ; n
little zarra, thord sd,
thorn thord, kuchh
kuchh.
lire, to basar auqdt
karna, zist karnd,
rahnd; as long as 1
liver jigar, kalejd.
load bojh.
load Iddnd; to be
loaded ladnd, lad-
lend.
loadstone sana-i-miq-
ndtis.
local is jagah kd,
yahdn ke logon kd.
lock, qufl.
long dardz, lambd ;
very long tul-tawil ;
long ago kabhi kd,
kab kd, muddat
Mi.
long for mushtdq hond,
ishtiydq rakhnd.
look, look for dekhnd ;
look blankly at
munh dekhnd ; look-
I ing for service muta-
ldshi-i-rozgdr .
looks, good surat.
loose kholnd, chhornd.
lord khuddwand ; lords
spiritual and tem-
poral umrde millati
o mulki.
lose (game or battle)
hdrnd.
loss khasdrd, nuqsdn,
ziyun ; a losing con-
cern/;* men khaadrd
hotd ; at a loss,
hairan.
lost, to bejdtd rahnd.
louse jun f.
love 'aztz rakhnd, pyar
karnd, chdhnd ; for
love barde ishq o
mahabbat.
loyalty wafdddri,khair-
khwdhi.
luckily khush-qismati
se, husn-ittifdq se ;
bad luck bad-iqbdU,
bad-qismatt.
lull, to phusldnd.
lying and deceit darog
o dagd.
M.
made up bandyd hud.
magnanimity 'dii-him-
mati.
Mahomedan, Moslem,
or Muslim, m vsal-
man, ahl-i-isldm.
maintenance (of treaty)
tfd.
majesty, his or her
huzur.
make banana, karnd ;
make peace suh I
kar-lend ; make a
noise aid machtina ;
make both ends
meet kifdyat kurnd ;
make a cleaa sweep
safd chat karna,
bardbar karnd; make
good a deficiency
kasr nikdlnd.
man admi, ddam-zdd,
rnard, insdn ; dead
man murda; holy
man buzura, kdmil,
jogi, amd^in ; old
man pir-mard, bud-
dhd.
managed, to be bannd,
ban-parnd ; if I can
manage it, merd bas
chale, ho-sake, bane
to.
management intizam,
tadbir, bandobast.
manager, munsarim,
mohtamim.
manifest, roshan, ash-
Tear.
mankind insdn.
manliness shujd'at,
mard-ddmiyat.jawi'm-
mardi, marddnagt.
many bahut, bahut se,
bahuterd, aksar ;
many times bdrhd.
VOCABULARY NO. 2.
march raw Ana hond.
kuch karnd.
mare ghorl, mddydn.
mariner jahdzt, jahdz-
wdld, ahl-i-jahdz.
market bazar, ffanj.
marmu'e xhd<H.
marry shtidl k., bydh
k.,shddi-bii<"h karnd,
martyr shufi!"'.
ma-ter mdlik, sahib;
master of the house
sdhib-khdna.
matcli, tomflnri (int.).
mute (chess) mat dend.
materials of war sd-
mdn-i-harb o zarb.
mathematics riydzi.
matter amr, bat; (sub-
ject) bub, bdra.
Maulavi maulavi (Ma.-
homedau religious
title).
mean past-himmat.
means (of) wastla, pi.
icaatfil ; by means
of ba-zari'a ; in ace.
with means haix'tiiut
se.
meaning mallab, man-
shci, ma'ni.
meanwhile itm men,
is asnd men.
mechanical, kal kd.
meet milnd (se), do
char hond (se).
meeting jalta.
melt, to pighrt/H -/'.
mend, to marummal
karnd ; wanting
mending marammat-
talab.
mention tazklra, zikr.
mentioned mazl,
merchant sauddgar,
li'ijir.
mercy raftm, tarahhitm.
mere nird.
phdnda, pech,
hais-bais f.
messenger, qdsid.
method tartan.
middle, midst darmi-
ydn, bich, btch kd.
migration naql-i-ma-
kdn.
\t\\\\\urvf aitjil'lr^jfinfft,
fiiiiji; militjiry class
faujt jamd'at ; mili-
tary devotion jangi
fiiltviyat.
milk d udh ; to be in
milk dudh dend.
mill, chakkt.
mind 1 khabarddr, :/ii-
hdr, dekho, dckh-
raho ; to coine to a
right state of mind
rdh-i-rdst par dnd.
mind (what is in the)
ni'i-Ji-zamir.
mingling dmezish.
minor adnd.
minute information
mufa-isal hdl.
miracle, a kamdl.
misapprehension aalat-
fvfnni.
miserably burt tarah xe.
misfortune khrdbl,
sakhfi, mustbaf, tanq-
hdU.
misled, to be dhokd
khdnd.
mistake galatt, tahr
f., khatd ; even by
mistake bhulkar bh!.
mistaken galat.
mix, to, tr. mild-dend
or.mildnr'i.
modesty 'iff"at, hayd,
parda.
molestation taklif.
1110 nent dam, lamha ;
in another moment
kol dam ji'idi hai ki.
Monday pir.
money riij>ni/a, riipaya-
paind ; ready innnry
naqd.
monkey bandar ; she
monkey bandrt.
month mihind, mdh.
monthly muhwdrl.
moon chdnd m.
morning subh or xiibuh
f. ; in the n or.iing
savere; cool of morn-
ing khunnkf.
morrow kal, fardd.
morsel (of food) laqma,
nivdla.
mortgage, to girwl
rakhnd.
mother mdn ; mother-
in-law sds ; beiUL'
motherless be • md •
dan.
motive nit/at, bd'is.
mount, to, sawdr hond,
charh-baithnd, tr. sa-
wdr kardnd.
mountain pahdr, koh.
mountainous region
kohistdn.
mouth munh ; by word
of mouth sabdni.
move chalnd, hilnd, tr.
chaldnd, hildnd.
movement haraknt.
much bisydr, balntt.
Munshi munsht (pro-
fessional writer).
murderer qdlil, khiinl-.
(Thug) phansigar.
murrain tcabd.
mutineer bdgi.
mutiny gadr, bagdwat.
mutual hamdigar, ek
d lit re kd.
N.
name ndm. ism ; in our
. name h r.ii'ir.i ndm
Itke, hamdri taraf «•.
luime, to ktihnd ; to be
named kahldnd.
298
EXt, KCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
nation qaum f., foreign (nonsense puchbdfi.
nation gair qaum.
noon do pabar f.
national qaumi, ek
noose phdnd; with a
qaum kd.
noose (rope) phdnd-
native rahnewdld ; na-
wdld.
tives of India ahl-i-
north uttar, sbrmdl; to
hind ; native coun-
the north uttar men.
try witiin.
northern shimdli; n.-
nature tabi'at.
western magrabi o
near nazdik, qarib,
shimdli.
muttasil.
nose ndk f.
nearly qarib qarib.
nothing kuchh nahin.
qarib tbd ki.
notify, to itttld' dend,
necessary zarur, Idz'm ;
muttali' karnd.
necessaries zaruriat.
notwithstanding that
neck gardan f.
bd-wujudeki.
need zartirat, hdjat.
number ta'ddd. F. n.
needy mohtdj, hdjat-
like takrdr.
mand.
numbness sansani.
neglect gaflat, be-par-
numerous kasi>-u t-
iva'l, be-ehtiydti.
ta'ddd.
neglect, to be-khabar
nylghau nilgdo.
bond, gdfil bond,
kbabar na lend.
neighbour hamsdya.
o
neighbourhood (envi-
\j*
rons) gird-nawdb f .,
qurb-jawdr.
object chiz f., matlab,
nepliew bhatijd, bhdnjd.
garz f., murdd f ,
never kabhi nabi/i, Imr-
object v. e'tirciz k.
giznahin; nevermind
objection elttrdz f.
kvchh parwd nahin.
obligations of duty la-
new jadid, nayd ;
wdzim.
(rare) aiiokhd.
oblivion fa rdmosb i.
next agld, ab kd.
observance ta'n.ll.
nice 'umrta, dil-pasand,
observe dekhnd, mu'd-
dil-kusbd, pasan-
haza karnd, ta'm'J
illda ; how nice ! kyd
kania.
/chub.
obstacle muzdhim ; ob-
nicely maza men.
sincle to progress
night rdt f. ; night and
mdni'u 'l-mohimm.
day rdt din • so late
obtain pdnd, basil k.
at nislit, itni rdt gae ;
obtainable dastydb,
to-night dj rdt. *
mut/assar.
nine iniu.
oci'asion martaba ; qdb.i
nineteen uni*
in., inauqa1.
no, not nab, nahin ; do
occupation mashgala.
not mat; no one ko"i
occupy, to jd-basnu ;
nnblii -. no matter
occupied in masruf,
how. etc., see 175.
maxhjAl.
occur 7iond, wdqi1 bond,
ii-uqi.r men ria-i, kis!
ke khatfdl men and,
sujhnd.
ocean samundar, bahr.
offence qusur.
offend (to be unplea-
sant to) pasand na
and.
offer, to dene, lar/n ',
dend.
oB'-hand sar-i-dast ; in
off-hand manner le-
takalluf hokar.
office serisbta, 'obda ;
(place) daftar ;
(duty) mansab.
office-people daftar-
loa, 'omald, or lamla.
officer of government
mansabddr, 'ohda-
ddr; superior officers
hukkdm-i-bdld-dast.
oftentimes aksar aitqdt.
old purdna, sdbiq, qa-
<i!/n ; old age liir-
MpA.
ominous (in sen*e of
outward indication)
vpa rl.
omit (ip .vriting) qa-
lam-anddz karnd.
once ek da fa, ek mar.
taba ; at once J'<I>1,
faurdn, jkat,jhatpat,
dafatan, bat ki b it
men, yakdyak.
one ek ; one or other
ek na ek ; one by
one ek ek karkf ; one
another tk da.--
only sirf,faqat, kbdli.
ooze nikld and.
open, to, int. khulnd.
operation ktir-ra.
opinion ddnist t
f. ; in my opinion
mere nazdlk.
opponent mukhdlif.
opportunity maiiqa1 ;
VOCABULARY KO. -.
299
to think it a pood pair (of horses) jord. 1 pass to (of time), kaind
opportunity yimiiimt pale of forgiveness
intr. kill nd tr.
•ill ini ; as oppor-
ehdtd-i-tarah/i'
passage //"
tunity offers waqt
Pandit pandit (Hindu
passport ch'll in.
pare par.
religious title).
past tense tiga-i-mdzi,
oppo.-P, tO mtiqribilfil
panegyrist madh-
illi'izi.
/,;n- ml, khildf karnd,
khwdn ; warmest
path (track) P<*g-
mukhdlif hand.
] panegyrist khdss
dandt.
opposi! ion iiiukhdlnfut.
madh-khirti n.
pathless be-rdh.
oppros, to zulm karnd,
panic sahm ; panic-
patience sabr, taham-
riidnd.
stricken chhakke-
mul.
oppressed mazldm,
chhut (metaphor
patient burdbdrdna.
rlabd It 'iii.
from dice).
patient (uoun) marlz,
or i/ii, >'it//!ii to.
Panjab panjdb (five
bimdr.
order hit/on, tartib; in
waters).
patrol, or parade,
order tartib se ; in
pnper kdgaz.
yasht karnd.
order to tit, tdkl, ki
Paradise jannat.
pauper khult hdth, mitf-
f>r, is garz se .... ki.
\ aralysed, to be hdth
lis.
etc. ; under the
pd*on phtil-jdnd.
pavilion bdrahdart.
orders of zer hukm
(ke), ma teht', good
parda parda (custom
of veiling and se-
pay tankhtodh f.
pay, v. add karnd • piv
order kh li.th -ii'iz/ti!,
cluding women).
up chukdnd, chukd-
huxn-iiifizi'im ; lower
order adnd darja.
orderly ardalt.
organization bando-
bast, intizdm.
pardon 'a/to, dargnzar,
bakhshish, magjirat.
pardon, v. darguzar
karnd or Jarm<\n<'i.
dend.
peace and harmony
amn-i-hiu'ii.
peaceful industry sa-
nd^e'-i-sulh (lit. arts
ornaments zeioar.
orphanage (state of)
bakhshnd ; to get
pardoned mo'df kar-
of peace) .
peacefully sulh <>
yattaSt,
On. l!i unidh.
parents mdbdp.
men (lit. in pear,'
and rectitude).
outbreak f<'X'H, dang A
part hissa ; act a pro-
pearl moti in.
fasi'd, but ir it.
minent ]>art j>Kxh-
peep uijkantmd.
over Hjiitr, Ix'il'i .
t/'txf! k<t,- n >.
pe^ (of tent) mekh f.,
averl&ndkkutkktktrdh
partaker shnrlk ; par-
Monti.
overlook, to darguzar
kani'i.
takers in murder
shurakd-e-qatl.
people lofj, ra '/ //
li/ixlu inl.t , ill. lidshin-
o-.vinij to ba-aabab.
particularly khaxits><m.
(liii/.hi, k fin Id' iii.
ox r/'io : slaughter of
khdikar.
perch, to bait hud.
oxen gdo-fauM,
partncrshij) shirkat.
perform, to <mjii.:i
parly farq, fa~!q ; op-
dend, add k<irmi.
posite ]iarty J\tr!q-i-
perhaps xlniiind.
P.
mnk/iiilif •, make a
pc>nl (critical eircuiu-
party among
* stances) ftndi.\<i.
pace fJn'il f.
shen knr
period '«r.v<;, ^ •
pueiflcationamn oamdn.
(larice) dttra ;
waqt.
pain il-inl ; ' on ]>ain
permission futri-
of may lie occasi >i;-
\>:\~^, \ . ,/iiziiniii : ]iass
i/'iznt.
ally rendered by the
(a law) jiiri k'H-ii i,
permit gaip-'ird knni'i,
(/•</;' k'<r,id. ijdzni
300
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
perpenclieuiai
perplexed to be hairdn
hand, hairat men
bond, hais-bais men
hond.
person ddmt, shaikhs ; in
person bi-zdt-i-khdss,
bi-zdtihi, bi-zdt-i-
khud ; some persons
ba'z, ba'z log.
petition 'arzi, 'arz-
ddsht f. du'd, istid'd.
picked chund hud.
piece tukrd ; piece of
cruelty zulm ; in
pieces purze purze •
to be dashed in
pieces ckiknd chur
ho-jdna.
pig su'ar.
pitch (tent) khard
Jcarnd ; to be pitched
nasab hond.
pity tars.
philosophy 'ilm-i-hik-
mat, hikmat.
physiognomist qiydfa-
xhinds.
physiognomy qiydfa.
place jagah f., mnkdn
jd f.; (halting place)
maqdm, manzil f.
place, v. rakhna, rakh-
dend ; take place
icuqu' men and.
plain maiddn.
ulain zdhir, dshkdr •
(simple) be-sdkhta ;
plain fact sdf bat.
olaintiff mudda'i.
plan tajwiz, tadb'tr.
plant, to nasab karnd.
plates and dishes
(crockery) bariun.
please pasand and (ko),
kh&sh karnd.
pleased khttsh.
pleasant patandida,
pleasure (will) mar:!
plight ht'idixa \ in this i
plight yeh hdl dekh-
kar.
plod wearily behind
pdon pdon ghasittd
hud chalnd.
pluck, to (fruit) tornd.
plunder, to hit-lend.
plundering luteru adj.
and n.
poisonous zahr-dluda.
pole (of a tent)
chobd.
police polis, ahdli'dn-i-
polis.
policeman thdna-wdld.
police-officer thdnaddr.
pomp and luxury karr
o farr.
pony taltu.
poor garib, be-chdra,
muflis, mohtdj.
popular (customary)
ma'miili.
population, dbddi.
porridge gJiunghniydn
pi.
portion hissu.
possession qabza.
possible mumkin ; if
possible hosake, bane
to.
pot lota.
power iqtiddr, ikhti-
ydr, qdbu, qabzd,
bas ; to have power
bus chalnd.
practice (as opposed
to theory) Carnal ;
(liabit) (ddat,
daalur.
practised, to be hud
karnd.
pray, to du'd mdnijnd.
prnyer du'd, namdz {.
prayer-mat (or carpet)
jde-namdz f.
precincts of village
bastion H dbad't.
preconcerted bu-itti-
fdq- i-hamdigar.
precursor agio An, pesh-
rau.
prefer, to muqaddam
samajhnd.
pregnant gdbh in.
prejudice ta'assub.
1 1 reparation tai/ydri.
prepare to be off, to
chalne lagnd.
p-esent, hdl, hdzir,
maujud ; of the
present day hdl
kd ; at present filhul,
bilfe'l.
present, to pesh karnd,
nazr guzrdnnd- pre-
sent oneself hdzir
hond.
presents tohfa-tahd^if;
' by these presents '
is qirtdx ke ru se.
preserve, to mahfiiz
rakhna.
preserved mahfiiz.
presidency hdtd (ehdtd)
pressed hard (driven
to bay) hdrnd.
pressure (external)
bdhar kd dabdo.
pretext bahdna.
prevail, to riwdj hono,
murawwaj hond.
prevent, to rok-rakhnd.
prevention insiddd.
prey shikar.
price qtmat, mol, (I'm.
pride nakhwcit.
prince wdli, ra^ts,
sh'ihzdda.
principal party a-ial
jamd'at.
printing (type) chhapd ;
(press) chhdpd-
khdnd, nialha'.
prisoner qaidt ; to be
taken prisoner qaid
ho'jdnd.
privilege (leave) rukh-
tat-ri'AycM,
prize, to qadr karnd.
VOCABULARY NO. 2.
301
proem! cfiafnd ; 'pro-
ceed through :i
place' may often be
~lated by hond.
proceedings ' amal-dar-
dmad, fair-rated* i.
proclamation nxnidi/i
(by voice), ishtehdr
(by •writiim).
profess, to ithdr karnd.
profession pesha.
proficiency mahurat,
iste''
proficient, to be mahu-
rat rakhnd.
profit ««/', fuida.
manfa'at.
prohibition mitmdna'at.
promise wa'da.
promise, to wa'da kar-
nd.
promotion taraqqt.
prompt ta'l'un dend,
batdnd, batldnd.
property nidi ; (spe-
cial) khdsxii/tll ;
having property
indlddr ; landed pro-
perty ziiiiiinddit.
propitiatory offerings
and s:ifrilici'3 ni-
chhuwar atirbaliddn.
proprietor -mdlik.
prospect, to be in dar-
pesh hand.
prospectus ishtehdr.
prosper, to kist bdt
men nafa' hand (ko)
prosperity be'itarl,
iqbdf, i'j'i'iimandt.
sa'ddat, fan'abdli.
protection hintiitiat,
muhdfazat, ftifdzat.
proud indf/rur.
]I1M\ !'',! X.i/lit.
jiroviili- moli'iiiit't karnd.
provinces inn mill ik pi.
of mamlakat, xit/Kijdf
]>i. of silba ; Niiriii
\Vf>t lYo\ inc. s ma-
mdlik magrabi o shi-
queen miUkn, malika
l)li</i.
mo'azzuiiiii.
provision ba-ham rast.
queen (chess) farzin •
prudence peshlint, pesh-
question su'dl.
btutdt.
quick of resource phur-
public, the khdss o
tild, tez, tez-fehm,
'dmm,jiimtn'ir-i-andm.
zaliln, tud-fehm,
publish, to jdri kar-
hoshydr.
dend.
quiet garlb.
published, to be mtixh-
quieting, n. taskin.
tahar hond or kiyd
quietly chvpke, uhista.
jdnd.
quite bilkull, mutlaqan,
punishment sazd, sazd-
mutlaq, muhz
ydbl, siydsat, sarkobi.
quote ka/md, baydn k.
purpose irdda, nii/af,
qasd ; to no purpose
nd-haqq ; answer the
purpose kdfi hond.
pursue, to ta'aqqub or
ta'asjiib karnd.
race, qavm f.
put rakhnd ; put the
race along, to daurd
hand to hath ddlnd •
and.
to put a spoke in
rage, to lezt karnd.
wheel of harj ddlnd,
rail rzl, rel-gdri.
khahil ddlnd, pahve
railway travelling rel
men ot ard-d nd.
par sowar hond, rel
put down dabdnd, faro
kd safar.
karnd band kar-dend;
rain pdni m., menh, bd-
to be put down,
rish.
mauqilf hond, »ist o vain, to barasnd.
nd-bitd ho-jdnd.
rainy season barsdt f.
put off mauqiif rakhnd.
range (of hills) silsila,
put up qiydiu karnd.
rank rutba, darja ;
rank of a common
soldier rutba-i-piyd-
daai.
Q.
rare kamydb, nadir,
r.\<'.-.\\ intikkdr, bad-zdtt
quality sifat, khdssi-
li'id-imrdxh.
yat ; qualities ausdj'
ration rdtib.
pi. of tcasf; noble
ravine ndld.
qualities shardfat.
reach pahunclind.
quarrel or quarrelling
reail ptirhud ; read
jfi/iifrd, I'li-n'i.
aloud pukdrke />arh-
quarrel, t<> l<irnd.
nd.
quarter pdo, chahdrutn,
le.uly tat/ydr, hdzir,
(of town) mahalld.
mohat/yd, mfinjt'iii,
quarterly seh-mi'ihurdr
diiiiiild ; ready at «n-
(lit. three monthly).
swering hdzir-jau-db.
302
EXKKCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
real a-sli
realised, to be 'amal
men and, hand, ho-
jdnd.
really haqiqat men.
rear pdlnd.
reason sabab, wajh f.,
bu(i.i ; without reason
nd haqq ; for divers
weighty reasons ba-
wujuh-i-kdmila.
reason, to hujjat karnd.
rebel bdgt, mufsid.
rebellion, open baga-
wat-i-fdsh.
rebuff, decided sdf ja-
wdb.
receive lend, qabul k.,
milnd (ho).
reception isllqbdl.
reckon ginnd, hi sab If.
recognise, to pahchdn-
nd, pahchdn-lend.
reconciliation safd'i.
recourse to arms haih-
ydr uthdnd.
recovery ifdqa.
recruit drum pdnd.
recruit, to (military)
bharti Jcar-lend.
reduction (conquest)
taskMr.
refer, to mnnsuba kar-
nd, Jiaicala dend.
reflect, to sochnd, gaur
karnd.
v -form, isldh f., tahzib.
refuge, to take pani'h
lend, pandhgir hand.
refund (cost of outlay)
qimat.
irt'u>nl (flat) sdf ja-
wub.
refuse inkdr Jcarnd.
refute tardld karnd.
regard with attach-
ment 'aziz rakhnu •
in regard to ba-nis-
bat, nazar bar an.
regent khadlv.
regiment (of foot) pal-
tan f. ; (of cavalry)
risdla.
regret, to pachhtdnd.
regular bd-zdbifa.
rein bug, f. ; leading-
rein bug-dori.
reject, to nafrat karnd.
rejoicing, matter of
khitshi ki but.
rejoicings jashn.
relation rishtaddr.
relation, relationship
nisbat, ri&hta - ndtd,
ta'allvq.
relations aqdrib.
reliance 'etibdr ; firm
reliance yaqin-i-
kulli.
religion mazhab.
religious mazhabi ; re-
ligious mendicant
faqir, jogi.
remain rahna ; to re-
main the same ba-
dastur band-rahnu ;
remain at post ta't-
ndt rdhna ; remain
subject to mull" rah-
na.
remedy tadbir.
remember, to yud rakh-
nd or karnd • to be
remembered yad-
hond. or ydd-dnd,ydd
ptrnd.
remembrance yddgdrl.
remove, to hatdnd, le-
jdnd.
removed, to be daf
hand.
rent klraya ; to pay no
rent at all Jcirdya ki
ek kauri r.a dend.
rep liv, to put in ma-
rammai kar-rakJind.
repent, to tauba karn-1.
report kaif it/at • wi-itten
report tahrtri kaif'i-
i ut ; verbal report
Zflbuhl Jftlif it/at !
(rumour) afti'uh, I. ;
false reports jhiith
miith afwdhen.
represent, to 'arz karnd.
repression sarkobi.
reprimand cJiasltm-
nmnul.
reputed mashTiur.
request darkhwdst f.,
ill i mas.
rescinded, to be man
sukh hand.
rescue, to chTiurdndt
chhurd-denu.
reside rahna,
rakhnd.
residence bud o bash, f. ;
lenth of residence
resolve (forcibly) irn-
da-l-musammam kar-
lend.
resource siirat, tadl/tr.
respect lizzat, adub,
lihdz ; with respect
bd-adab ; with re-
spect to ba-nisbat ;
in all respects ba-
ha, na-wi'jilh.
respectfully adab se.
restore, to wdpas kaniu.
result nat'ija.
i*etail dealing khnrda-
faroshi.
retainer muTdzim.
retire hatnu.
retrace one's steps, to
idte pa' on ph ir nd.
rjtreafc bh'ignd, haina.
retribution taddritk.
return phirnd,phir dnd,
laulni'i, tctip'is jdnd ;
return to the path of
duty riVi-t)'<ih hojdnu.
return-hire phi'ia.
revenue m('</\
Jinsil pi. of malisid;
revenue settleiuent
bandobyst.
VOCABULARY NO. 2.
803
rereronre, to mtinix':.
1 1 ions ,-n,:Unbi'it.
reward si In ; best re-
ward pilrii sila ; re-
ward (in hea\e;ii
XII
rich dautatmand, mdt-
ddr.
ride, to saw'tr hond.
riding sawdr!.
right kaqq pi. ////>/ ?''•/.
-sv/4 ; (in u" "1
order) <//?/•, duruat,
la-h<tl • (proper)
rawd, iltik, rust; by
right oi ba-mujib.
righteousness bhalui,
rdsti.
ring angdthi.
ripe pukka, Idl ft'l.
rise uthnd ; (moon)
&Ae£ karnd, itiknlnd.
ri-c up, to «<A khard
ri^k, or risky affair
'okhim f., jokhon f. •
(responsibility) zim-
madnri.
river daryA m.,
river-iniirches duryu ki
tar
IMM! sarak f., rdsta.
run- or squeak out cA*«
lidtud.
r (highwayman)
roll down, to dhalkd-
dend, lurhkdnn.
romantic Jasdna-dmez.
root ^W t.
rope, skein or ring of
<i,l/i, ,-ilxx! k I rillti.
rough-ruler chdlmk-
Miwdr (lit. wliip-
Jiorsfniun).
roxind (circuit) pher.
round golt ba-shakl-i-
kitrti ( Lrl»lh'.>ha]>('ih.
ro'.ijsd, adv. yifit •, lu
turn round ghumnd, salnfntion talnm, sahib-
mur-dnd.
saldmat.
route rdsta • maritime
salute, to tuhib'talt'mat
route siiHiundar ku
karnd.
rdita ; direct route
sanctioned manzur.
''at ri'stu.
sand rtt, f.
routed, to be slukunt
sandy, regi.-
khdnd.
Sdtan shaitdn.
rub main A ; to have
action itmlndn.
rubbed down (of a
satisfied rdzi, ser, ser*
horse) malu-iiini.
chasm, khuxh.
rubbish (trnsh) khurd-
Saturday sanichar.
futf., radii.
saucy shokh.
rude jaug all.
save, to bachdnd, najdt
rule qd'ida pi. qain't'id;
df-nd.
rules 'aqd'id pi. of
say, to kahnd, kah-de-
'aqida ; rules of ho-
nd ; so to say goyd ;
nour qaicd'id-i-izznf-
that is to say ya'ni.
partoarl ; (govern-
scarcity of supplies
ment) huk&mat.
qillat-i-rasad.
ruler hdkim.
scare away hushkdrnd ;
ru\\ngfarmdn-r<i
scared, to be ghabrdnd ;
rumour afiodh f. (Ar.
to be scared at pa-
pi. offiih 'mouth').
nuh mungna (lit. usk
run daurnd.
refuge from).
rnsli lunaknd ; ru.-h in.
se.iltered chian bhinn
to ghnsnd.
hokar.
school maktab,madrasa.
scorch, tojkulas-dend.
C
score kort ; 'a good
o*
score,' pfire
the full twenty-two,
sacred mtiqadilai.
ref. to number of
sacrifice, to haliil kar-
Imperial provinces —
iui, zabh k., qdrbdn
(proverbial).
k., khudn ki n'th men
scratch at kurednd.
dind ; to be sacri- scream out, to chilidnd.
ficed, haldl hand, screech, to chikhn •'-.
etc.
scrupulously bti-kamdl
safe and sound tahih-
ehtiyiit.
saldmat.
searcli juxt-jii, faldsht ;
safety hifazat.
to search taldsh kar-
sagacity firdsat.
nd, dhun-ihnd.
said (aforesaid) maz-
second dusrd.
kur, mausiif.
seer, t chhipd hud, po-
sail ,,
thida.
sail, to jahAz ehati'n i
secured, to be (attained)
(navigate).
paidd hond.
s:iilor jnh'izi.
security hifdzat, it-
saint kdmil.
kha
304
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
security (bail) amdnat.
shade sdi/a.
seduce, to voargaldnnA.
shake, to hildnd.
seem to be ma'lum ha-
shame (sense of) gai-
nd.
rat, sharm.
seize, to gait kar-lend,
shameless be-hai/d.
clihin-lend ; seize
shape shakl f., surat.
upon lipat-jdnu.
share hissa ; to give
select chilnnd, mutita-
a share in (work)
khab karnd, intikhdb
dakJil dend.
karnd.
shareholder Mssaddr.
selected inuntakhab.
sheep bheri.
sell farokht k., bechnd,
shine chhitaknd, tabdn
bech-ddlnd, bai" k.
rahnd.
send bhejnd • send for
shining tdbdn.
manga - bhejnd • send
ship j aha z.
word kahld-bhejnd.
shoe juti.
sentence faisala.
shoe, to (a horse) na'l-
separate alag, alnn
bandi karnd ; to have
alug, judd,juddjudd,
shod na'lbandi kar-
alag thalag.
wdnd.
ser of 2 Ibs. ser.
shoe-maker mochi.
servant naukar ; ser-
shoot bandvq mdrnd.
vants (collectively)
shooting, to go shikar
naukar chdkar, khd-
khelnd.
dim, muldztm.
shop dukdn f.
service khidmat, nvii-
shore kindra.
kari, mulct zimat •
shoreless be-kindr.
take sevvice naukd'i
short, in garz, afq;ssfi ;
kit ma ; with inten-
q issa mukhtasar,
tion to take service
qissa kotdh, bas.
ba-jihat-i-muld zimat.
shout chilldna, pukdr-
service (good) hhair-
nd, dwdz dend.
hhwdhi.
show, to batdnd, batd-
set free, to chTiutTcu.ru
dend.
dend.
show, to keep for ko-
set ou foot, to bar-pd
tal rakhnd.
kar-dend.
shrine tnazdr.
set upon, to bithund
shudder, to phuraJirt
(make sit).
lend.
settle (on course of
shut up, to band kar-
action) saldh karnd ;
d-nd.
(colonise) dbdd
sick man bimdr, mart:.
karnd.
side taraf f , id nib f.,
seventieth sattarwctn. on all sides chdron
several Mi ek, kitne taraf ; both sides
ek, chand. (Ar. dual) tara-
severe balu kd. fatn.
severity (e.g. of heat) sigh, to dh karnd.
shidd/if. M_'ht, to come in naztv
se\jinsiyat dud, natar parnd,
dikhd^l dend ; out of
sight nazar se gaib.
sign (gram.) 'alchna-.
sign, to dastkhatt kar-
nd ; signed, to be
dasikhatt hond.
signal ishdra.
signature dast-khatt.
silence khdmoshi.
silence, T. chup kard-
nd.
silent cliup-chdp, khd*
mosh.
silken resJiam kd.
silver chdndi.
simoon bad-i-samiim.
simple be-sdkhta.
simplicity sddagi, sdda
diU, be-sdkhta</i.
simultaneously ma' an.
sin gund h.
sine qua non shart f.
single ek.
singular nirdld.
sink, to dubond j int.
dubnd.
sinner gttnahgdr.
sire bdp.
sit baithnd ; (of acour?-
cil) ijlds farmdnd.
situated ivdqi'.
skill hunar • military
skill jang-dicari.
slavery golilmt.
sleep khvidb, sotd.
sleep, to sond ; to go
to sleep so-raJinii.
slide, to khisalnd.
slight (simple) qalil.
slightest, in such
phrases as the
slightest cause, mis-
take, etc. khdk bhi,
zarra blii, kuchh
bhi.
slink off, to dab'ikii'i.
slip, to lagzish khi'ind,
khisaliui.
sloth suf--/t.
slowly qadam qadam.
VOCABULARY NO. 2.
305
Slow-pace, Mr. miyun
sust-<i<tdain.
small chhotd, khurda ;
; \ 1 and great
chhote bare.
rmall-poi chichak f.
snake sinp.
.- -rial advancement
husn-akhldq kl ta-
raqqi.
*" ,-ic-ty sohbat ; affairs
of society qaumt-
sulnce. tashajfi, txsalli-
i-khiltir.
«oldier sipuht.
soldiery sipdh.
soliloquise dil men bi-
(en kariid.
- • ne ipl.) ba'z.
someone ko't.
something kuchh.
somewhere kufun ;
somewhere or other
kahin na kahin.
f in beta, auldd, far-
zand.
* ings git bhajan.
»uonja/(l, iliorl der men.
soporific khwubdwar.
surdiil khasls.
soul rnh f., nnfs;
(human being) ddam-
Zi'lll.
south janiib.
#outlu-rii januli.
span balisht £.
sp.'ak lolnu ; to speak
of tithn lend, zikr
knrna ; so to speak
goyA,
spirit jl m., himmal ;
liiu'h spirit 'dli him- '
spectacle liimtishd.
.-I'ccd raft iir f.
spend aiirf k.t kliarclt
k. • to spend time at
a place jd-baithnd.
split, to chirnd.
spoil, to Hydrnd ; de-
spoil liltii'i.
spot ddg ; central spot
sadr maqdm.
spread, intr. phailnd ;
tr. bichhdnd, phail-
dnd ; (reports) urdnd ;
to be spread (of
news) zabdnzadhond.
spring, to lapaknd.
I spring bahdr f., mau-
sim-i-bahdr.
spring harvest rait' f.
tpjjMt.
squandered barbdd.
stability istehkdm.
stable ixtabal.
stage (halt) manzil f.
stain dug.
standard jhandd, ni-
shdn.
standing khard.
star sitdrd.
stare takin'i.
start, to ratodna Jiond,
chald-jdnd, chat de-
nd ; to be started
(set on foot) jdri
hond, barpd hand ; at
starting chalte waqt.
starving bhukhd, Ihuk
se be-tdb hokar,
bhukon mdrd, kdl kd
mdrd.
-lute riydsat ; (condi-
tion) Ml, hdlat, ah-
,'••//.
station, to ta'indt kar-
. liti/dmi.
>:atemeut baydn, kai-
fu/at.
launched, to be tas-
f;',u hond.
steal, to chart karnd •
steamboat d.'iuwdn-
kash.
stem (tree) darakht.
stench gandagt.
step qnd'iiH.
stimulate, to taraqqi
ka,
stir, to, intr. Jiilnd.
stone, rock patthar.
stoop, to sir jh iiknd.
stop, to, tr. band kar-
nd, mauquf k., zabt
k., roknd.
story qissa, kahdni,
dust an f.
straight mustaqttn; (in
a direct line) tidhd.
strangle, to phdnsi
stratagem dhab.
straw bichhdll.
stream nadt, daryd.
street gall, ki'u-ha.
strength mazbutf, zor-
istehkdm ; (of go,
vernment) iqtiddr ;
attain strength afs&n
hond.
strengthening mazbuti
(fortifying).
stretch out dardz
karnd.
strike mdrnd ; int.
(clock) bajnd, causal
bajdnd.
striking mark, 'aldmat-
i-'atdnit/a ; to be on
the stroke of (clock),
btijd ch-Mind.
stroll, to chihal qadamt
kdniii.
strong zabardast, zor-
dwar ; very strong,
or so strong as to be
unlimited be-hadd ;
to be too strong for
fldlib hond (par).
stulV in, to thontjnd.
to bo stolen churl .-tulTed. to be bfiarnd.
hond. i sturdy hattd-bakkd.
20
306
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
style 'ebdrat.
subject matlab, pi.
matdlib ; ra'tyat, pi.
ra'dt/d f.
subject to ba-ri'dyat
(ke)ttaht-i-hukumat ;
subject to the equi-
table demands of the
state ba-shart add
Jcarne mutdlaba-i-sar-
kdri ke.
submit sir dharnd, sir
jhukdnd ; submit to
authority farmdn-
barddri karnd.
subsist, to jdri rahnd.
success kdrbardri,
kdmydbi, iqbdl.
succession, in quick
upar tale.
successor jd-nisMn.
such, aisd.
suddenly nag ah, ekdek
daf'atan, but Tel bdf
men; (comparatively)
thore dinon men.
suHer inconvenience, to
taklif uthdnd.
sufferer multalde-musi
bat.
suggest, to saldJi dend.
suitor mustagis, sd^il.
summon, totalab karnd,
buldnd.
summoned buldyd Tiud.
summons talabi, buh'i-
wd ; I was not sum-
moned merl talabi
11 (ill in hiii.
sun (if tab, dhiij), f,
superintendence, gene-
ral bdld^i intizdm.
superstitious puch-pa-
rasf.
supplied, to be (of
wants) raf hand.
supplies rasad f., rasad
kd sdmdii. • control
over supplies, rasad-
raadni.
support, to saniuhdl-
lend.
suppose, (assume)
j'dnnd, mdnnd, farz
karnd.
supposition farz.
surplus revenue ba-
chat, f.
surprising ta'ajjub ki
but.
surrender oneself, to
apne tain hawdla
karnd.
surround, to ghernd ;
to be surrounded
ghirnd, ghir-jdnd.
survey paimdish.
suspected of muttahim.
suspend, to mauqrif k.
band karnd, mu'attal
rakhnd.
suspicion gumdn; strong
suspicion gumdn-i-
ffdlib.
swear, to qasam khdnd.
swell, to phiilnd,
jdnd.
swerve from allegiance
munharif hond.
syce sd'is.
sympathise, to ham-
dardi karnd.
T.
table mez f.
Taj (Agra), tdj maJiall.
take lend ; take air
hatvd khdnd ; to take
warning 'ibrat pa-
karnd ; to take up in
arms god men uthu-
lend ; to cause to
take off ittrwund.
talent liydqat.
talk bo'lnd, bd/en k.,
bdi-cMt k.t gvftyii k. ;
to talk as much as a
man pleases Idkh
kahnd.
tear, to phdrnd ; tear in
pieces phdr ddlnd ;
tear up ukhdrnd ;
tear off bhagnd; tear
about bhdgd bhdgd
phirnd.
tears dnsu ; to shed
copious tears dth uth
dnsu rond, be-tahdshd
rond.
telegraph office, tar-
ffhar.
tell kahnd, 'arz-karnd.
temper mizdj ; bad-
tempered bad-mizdj.
temperament tabi'at •
natural temperament
zdti tabl'at.
tempest tufdn.
ten das ; ten miles tff
das mil kejdsila par.
tenant kirdya-ddr.
tender-hearted, narm*
dil.
tent kfthna, dehra.
tenth daswdn.
terms, on the old la-
dastur-i-sdbiq.
terrible khilnkhwur, ga-
zab kd.
territory 'dldqa, qahim-
rau, mamdlik.
test shart f .
thanks shukr, shukrgu-
zdri; special thanks
khdss shukariya.
thief ehor, khd'in ; pro-
fessional thief chori-
pesha.
thing (general sense)
bat f., a:nr, cltlz f.,
shai f.
think socZnd, samajh-
nd, jdnnd ; to think
dear girdn unl -ad.
third Hard.
\ thii'st tishnagi, pyds f.
VOCALULiRY NO. 2.
307
thirsty pydsd ; to be
thirsty pi/ds laynd,
pyds ma'lum hand.
thirty its, si (Pcrs.) ;
for thirty years, si-
sdla.
then pfiir, tab, us waqt.
thence udhar se, wahdn
se.
theory (as opposed to
practice) 'ilm.
there trahdn, us jay ah.
therefore is lfe,iswdste,
is sabab se, lihazd.
thought khaydl, fikr ;
thought of self apnu
matlab, khud-garzi ;
thoughts of tlie
heart ma-ft-zamtr.
thousand hazdr ; thou-
sands hazdrhd, ha-
ztiron.
threaded, to be piroyd
jdnd.
threatening dhamki.
tliree tin; all three it-
non.
thrive cJiahid.
thriving trade chaltt
dukdn.
throat halq.
throne takht ; dethrone
takht se uftirn/i.
throw, to phenknd.
tie, heing bound by tics
vd-battagi,
tiijer flier.
tillage khett-kiydri.
time waqt, zamdna,
marlaba, dafa ; (oc-
casion) jnaM^a'jonce
on ;\ time ek mart aba;
in due time bu-waqt,
ma'tnult waqt par;
from time to time
u-aqt ba-waqt ; in
old times zaindna
sdbiq men; after a
time, chand muddat
ke ba'd.
tired, to bo thakn<i,
thak-jdnd, mdnda
hond.
title laqab, khifnb.
tobacco tambdkA.
to-day, dj, dj ke din.
togetheri«Art ;», ikatthd,
mi/kar, sdth, .tamet.
toiljdn-kdh!, mehnat.
toll (tax) mahsul,
tomb turbat, maqbara,
qabr f.
to-morrow, Teal.
tongue zabun f. ; oily-
tongued charb-zabdn.
tons of ice Idkhon man
baraf.
tooth ddnt.
top choti.
tope (of trees) bag.
torment, tease sitdnd.
tortoise kachhu-u.
toss away, to phenk-
ddlnd, phenk-dend.
tour daura.
town shahr, qasba.
trace patd, surdg,
nishdn.
trackless be-lik.
trade len-den.
trader beopdrt.
tradesmen ahl-i-hirfa.
train rel.
trairod ta'Hm-ydfla.
transitive wutcfaddi.
traps asbdb, siinnin.
orhnd bichhond (dress
and bedding).
traveller m ust'ifir.
traverse, to tai kann'i.
treasure, hidden d/ijina.
treasurer khazdncht.
treat (kindly) suluk
karnd, suluk se pesJt
and (sdth) ; treat
harshly ziiiddatl ktir-
HII, xii kh t ! se pesh - ilntl ;
treat with considera-
tion qitdr-ddni far-
iid.
treatment (medical)
mo'dlaja.
treaty 'ahd o paimdn,
qaul o qnrdr, sanad
f., 'ahd-ndma.
tree, darakht.
trembling ra'cha.
tremendous bald kd,
gazab kd.
tribe got f. ; member*
of tribe goti,got-wdle.
tribute khir/ij.
trouble taklif.
true sack, sahih.
trust, to itmindn karnd ;
placed in trust amdn-
ata» mufawwaz.
truth sidq ; in truth
fil-wdq t', sach p ih-hho
to.
try, to koshish karnd,
dziti
tuck iii the tail, to
diim dabdnd.
tumult fasdd.
turban pagri.
turn burl ; in turn burl
bdri men.
turn phirnd, pJiernd
ghtimnd, murnd ; (of
milk) bigarnd ; turn
up or out nikal-
nd ; to turn round
pher-dend ; turn into,
tr. band-rakhi
be turned off wi'-
kdld jdr.d, mauqtij
hond, bar-taraf hond.
turn, at every har phir-
kur.
turning, gardish.
tutor ustdd, mo'allim.
twenty bis.
twenty-fifth pachiswin
tdrikh.
twenty-nine vntls.
twinkle, to chhilaknd.
tyranny znlardnst'^
ztilm, ziyddati.
303
EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI.
u.
ultimately dkhir.
unchanged yaksdn.
unclean nd-pdk.
unconditional Mid shart.
under tale, niche.
undertake vthdnd.
understand samajhnd ;
make to understand
samjhdnd.
understanding samajh
f. ; (condition) shart.
undoubtedly be-shakk.
unfortunate kam-nasib.
ungrateful na-shukr.
unhappy dil-shikasta,
dil-tang, be-dil, pare-
shdn-khdtir, ranjida,
afsurda.
uninstructed gair-
ta'lim-ydfta,
unintelligible, to be
samjhai na dend.
united munsalik.
unkindness nd-ehsdn-
mandi, be-rahmi.
unmanageable na-
hamwdr.
unpleasant nd-pasand.
unprotected be-naiod.
unscrupulously, unre-
strainedly, be-tahd-
shd.
unseen dnkh bacM.
unwieldy phappas.
unworthy qdbil nahin,
nd-qdbil, nd-laiq.
upbraid, to sharminda
karnd.
uproar yorish, khal-
lall, sharr o fasdd.
usages and customs,
rasrh, o riwuj.
use, to iste'mdl karnd ;
to be used up
(spent) nibar-jdnd.
useful /cam kd,faida-
mand, miifld.
useless be-fd^ida, ni-
kammd.
usual ma'muli ; as
u?ual, ba-dastur,
hasb-i-ma'mul.
usually aksar.
V.
vacancy khiili jugah.
valley dara.
valour baMdurt.
value qimat.
various mutqfarriq.
vaunting shekM.
vehemence shiddat.
venturesomeness him-
mat.
venture outside, to
qadam bdhar dharnd.
verb fe'l.
verily wdqi' men, haqt-
qat m"n, sack hai ki.
verse (of. Qoran) dyat.
very sakht, khub, la-
hut, bard.
vex diqq karnd.
vexation diqq at.
vexed malul ; to be
vexed maldl hand (ko)
viceroy qaim-maqdm.
vicious bad-mizdj, sha-
rir.
victorious fatehyab,
fatehmand.
victory fateh f., fateh-
jang f.
victuals and drink,
khdneptnekd sdmdn.
\ vigour zor ; to lose
vigour, kamzor ho-
jdnd.
village ffdnon, also
gdmo and ffd'on by
elision of either ria-
sal, basil ; villages
dihdt.
villain bad-zdf, sharir.
villainy shardrat.
vindicate, to kist ki
in Id karnd.
violate (law), to khildj
karnd.
visible, to be dikhd'i
den't, nazar and or
parnd, zdhir bond,
dshkdr hand, namu-
ddr hand.
vision, range of madd-
i-nazar.
voice dicaz.
vote, to rde dend.
vow, to mannat manna ;
to break a vow bad-
'ahdi karnd ; to pay
a vow mannat add k.
w.
wage tankJiivdh.
wager, to shart bdndhnd.
waggon chakrd.
waist kamari.
wait, to muntazir rah-
nd, baithnd, ihairnu •
lie in wait for ghat
men baithnd.
wake,or be awake,/«t<7»«.
wake up, to, dnkh khulni.
walk, to chalnd, pd'on
pa on chalnd.
wall dtwdr f . ; (of tent)
qandt f. ; outer wall of
town shahr-pandh f.
wander, to phirnd.
want hdjat ; want of
money, inr.pecunious-
ness tihidastt ; want
of sanitation nd-sdfl.
want, to mdngnd ; I
want mujhe darkdr
hai, mujhko chdhie,
etc., hdjat hai, <
wanted darkdr, matliib,
war larai.
warfare jang-dwari ;
species of warfare
tar z-i- jang f.
VOCABCLAItY NO. 2.
w&rUVejang-jo.
warning 'tbrat ; take
warning 'ibrat pa-
learnt.
warrior yoddhd.
wash, to dhimi't.
waste nuqsun.
waste, to zd'i1 karnd.
'waste-paper h;i>ket '
raddl (lit. what is
reject i-d).
watchman choktddr,
wntcliman's work
choMddrl kd p ska.
water pdni, m.
wuter-pot stand gha-
ronc/ti.
watered, to have pdni
chhirakivt'niti.
way dhab, dli'ing, tarah
f., taur; by way of
ba-taur; a short wny
thorl diir.
weak knmzor, 'a!!/.
wealth daulat, mat.
wear orhnd, pahnnd.
wearied thukd mdnda.
weaver jnltihd.
week hafta.
«("•]), to romi.
well ! b/ia/ti, khair.
well (restored to health)
bfiald-chanad.
well kunwdtt, ki'td.
well-known mashliur <>
ma'ntf.
wotern tn
what kii !,k(i :'.ttl -, what's
o'clock ? kai baje.
where ? kahdn.
whereas yd, bar-khildf
iske.
whether . . . or ? dyd
. . . t/rf, kyd . . tyd,
while, long bart der,
huh n f ili-f.
white ^t'nir), flord.
who ? kaun \ wlio or
which, 'lorrcl.jo.
whose ? kiskd,
whole tamiim, kull \
whole family kunb?
kd kunbd, tamdm
gharwdle, kull khan-
dan.
why ? kif&n.
wicked sharir, burd.
wife blbi.
wild with anger, khun
josh men and.
wiles dagd-bdzt.
will marzt.
\vinjitnd (intr.) ; (earn)
kamdnd \ to win a
person's goodwill kisi
ko apne se rtizi karnd.
wind hawd, bdd f.
wine shardb f.
wire, to tdr ki khabar
bhfjnd, tar ke zari'a
se khabar bhejnd.
wisdnni iliniishmandi,
hikmat, 'aql f., 'aql
kd zor ; practical wis-
dom hikmal-i-'amali.
wise ddnishmand, 'aql-
mand, khiradmand.
wish murdd f., khwd-
hish, irshdd.
with sdth, se, etc.
withdraw dastkash
hotid, hatnd.
•.vithout be, bagair, bild.
with>tand muytil/ala k.,
dye thairnd.
witness ijuwdh.
wires and children ah I
wolf
womiin 'durtit.
\\mi.en 'aural-lop, 'au-
rat-ziif, ni.tii'dn ; wo-
men's quarters ze-
ndna.
wonder 'ajb, ta'ajjub.
wondrous 'ajib, 'fi/6 or
ta'ajjub kd.
wood lakri.
word lafz bdt f • send
word kahld bhejnd.
work kdm.
work, to kdm karnd,
mrhiKit Aurin'i.
workmanship kdrtgart
world duni/d f., jehdn.
worldly duties or af-
fairs dvnyd kd kdr-o-
bar.
worn out, to be 'djiz d-
j it nil.
fforried to denth, to bo
dam nuk men and.
worse bidtar.
worship pujd f., 'ebd'
dat, sijda.
wor-ted, to be hdrnd.
•.vor th less nd-bakdr.
wortliy of WV'y.
would that 1 kdsh.
wounded zakfnni.
wrap round, to lapet-
lend.
wret ch ka m bakltt.
wretched-looking pdjt.
sit rat.
write word likh-bhejm't ;
write down tah >•«>•
farmdnd.
writer (clerk) muta-
snddi ; (culligraphist)
khush-navtt.
wrong ittik mi/iin, bur<i,
nd-shdyastd, nd-jalz,
galat.
Y.
year sal, baras, son ;
full year baras roz ;
this year imsnl ; for
years, bar anon (se).
>arly s<il<!/i'i, sdl-ba-
_ ." I L ' I
•T
yearly oic..</i..
sdl, har-sdl.
yes hi'tn.
yet abtak, hano:,tilham.
\ou turn.
your titmhdrd.
Kempson, Simon Matthews Edwin
1983 The syntax and idioms of
U Hindustani
1912
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11